Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā (paṭhamo bhāgo)
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · 礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
Vinayapiṭake · 律藏中
Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā (paṭhamo bhāgo) · 义明灯复注(第一分)
Ganthārambhakathā
开卷启端的说法
Mahākāruṇikaṃ buddhaṃ, dhammañca vimalaṃ varaṃ;
我顶礼那位大慈悲的佛陀,以及那清净无瑕的上乘法
Vande ariyasaṅghañca, dakkhiṇeyyaṃ niraṅgaṇaṃ.
并敬礼圣众,最应供养且无有瑕疵者
Uḷārapuññatejena, katvā sattuvimaddanaṃ;
依仗广大功德之光,奋力消灭众生的愚痴迷惑
Pattarajjābhisekena, sāsanujjotanatthinā.
以盖袈裟、洒甘露浴净,彰显教法之光明
Nissāya sīhaḷindena, yaṃ parakkamabāhunā;
依凭那位斯里兰卡人,凭借他坚强的勇猛力量
Katvā nikāyasāmaggiṃ, sāsanaṃ suvisodhitaṃ.
成就教法和部派融合之时,使教法得以清净明晰。
Kassapaṃ taṃ mahātheraṃ, saṅghassa pariṇāyakaṃ;
敬礼那位大长老咖萨巴,他是僧团的引导者;
Dīpasmiṃ tambapaṇṇimhi, sāsanodayakārakaṃ.
在此大陆的铜叶之地,成为教法兴盛之因。
Paṭipattiparādhīnaṃ, sadāraññanivāsinaṃ;
身陷修行过失者,常居寂静林中;
Pākaṭaṃ gagane canda-maṇḍalaṃ viya sāsane.
如明月光辉普照苍天,教法亦然明显广大。
Saṅghassa pitaraṃ vande, vinaye suvisāradaṃ;
敬奉僧团之父,律藏圆融坚明。
Yaṃ nissāya vasantohaṃ, vuddhippattosmi sāsane.
我依止之所,乃此教法中,得以增长成就。
Anutheraṃ mahāpuññaṃ, sumedhaṃ sutivissutaṃ;
复次,此为大功德,智慧圆满,闻思流布广传已久者;
Avikhaṇḍitasīlādi-parisuddhaguṇodayaṃ.
其具清净品行,无染无损,善法之生起。
Bahussutaṃ satimantaṃ, dantaṃ santaṃ samāhitaṃ;
闻闻多次,具足念觉,调伏本心,安住定中;
Namāmi sirasā dhīraṃ, garuṃ me gaṇavācakaṃ.
谨以首领敬礼此智慧者,吾心恭敬,视其为数众之所代表。
Āgatāgamatakkesu , saddasatthanayaññusu;
于来往诸声闻中,于听法教导者众中,
Yassantevāsibhikkhūsu, sāsanaṃ suppatiṭṭhitaṃ.
在比库们安住的时候,教法得以稳固。
Vinayaṭṭhakathāyāhaṃ, līnasāratthadīpaniṃ;
我将著述律藏注疏,以流通而深入的释义为灯。
Karissāmi suviññeyyaṃ, paripuṇṇamanākulaṃ.
我将撰写清晰明了、圆满且不纷乱的注疏。
Porāṇehi kataṃ yaṃ tu, līnatthassa pakāsanaṃ;
先前所作、为理解含糊处而作的解释,
Na taṃ sabbattha bhikkhūnaṃ, atthaṃ sādheti sabbaso.
并不能使所有比库无例外地完全领悟其义。
Duviññeyyasabhāvāya, sīhaḷāya niruttiyā;
由于该义含有二重难解的本性,乃以锡兰方言表述。
Gaṇṭhipadesvanekesu, likhitaṃ kiñci katthaci.
在众多书简文中,无论何处所写,
Māgadhikāya bhāsāya, ārabhitvāpi kenaci;
以摩揭陀国语开始,凭借何人讲说,
Bhāsantarehi sammissaṃ, likhitaṃ kiñcideva ca.
在不同语言之间,相通者亦写有所见;
Asāraganthabhāropi, tattheva bahu dissati;
即使无章结书简形式,也在此处显现繁多;
Ākulañca kataṃ yattha, suviññeyyampi atthato.
纷乱而成之处,亦当善识其义。
Tato aparipuṇṇena, tādisenettha sabbaso;
不过,由于不完整,这样之文在此处皆为。
Kathamatthaṃ vijānanti, nānādesanivāsino.
众多说法居住者如何了知其理?
Bhāsantaraṃ tato hitvā, sāramādāya sabbaso;
舍弃他方语言,悉心取其要义;
Anākulaṃ karissāmi, paripuṇṇavinicchayanti.
我将使其清晰不乱,完整细审详审。
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā论典开端语释
Vinayasaṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayaṃ namassitukāmo tassa visiṭṭhaguṇayogasandassanatthaṃ ‘‘yo kappakoṭīhipī’’tiādimāha. Visiṭṭhaguṇayogena hi vandanārahabhāvo, vandanārahe ca katā vandanā yathādhippetamatthaṃ sādheti. Ettha ca saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇappayojanaṃ tattha tattha bahudhā papañcenti ācariyā. Tathā hi vaṇṇayanti –
在律藏解说开端,欲敬礼三宝者,为显其卓越品质说『孰为百万劫中珍宝』等语。因为以卓越品质之故,敬礼方显其应受敬,敬礼之举亦依照所定义理而行。此处于解说开端,三宝敬礼事因多被师长们反复详说。故有言曰——
‘‘Saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayavandanā saṃvaṇṇetabbassa dhammassa pabhavanissayavisuddhipaṭivedanatthaṃ, taṃ pana dhammasaṃvaṇṇanāsu viññūnaṃ bahumānuppādanatthaṃ, taṃ sammadeva tesaṃ uggahaṇadhāraṇādikkamaladdhabbāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sabbahitasukhanipphādanatthaṃ. Atha vā maṅgalabhāvato , sabbakiriyāsu pubbakiccabhāvato, paṇḍitehi samācaritabhāvato, āyatiṃ paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanato ca saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmakiriyā’’ti.
「在理义解说之始,三宝敬礼应为理法之本源纯净之现证;于法义解说者众,归敬应能生多重敬重;真正以恭敬者,依照正行,能达圆满,广集共利与安乐之果。依此亦为吉祥之行、诸善事之前行、贤者所行,长远利益他人、带领觉知正途者,三宝敬礼行为即具如是之殊胜意趣。」
Mayaṃ pana idhādhippetameva payojanaṃ dassayissāma. Tasmā saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Idameva hi payojanaṃ ācariyena idhādhippetaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati –
我今仅当示现此处所定唯一用意。因此,解说开端三宝敬礼事,应明确知其目的,在不妨碍正说下而圆满进行。此便是老师于此处所定之用意。故如此说——
‘‘Iccevamaccantanamassaneyyaṃ ,
『如是欲净除心』,
Namassamāno ratanattayaṃ yaṃ;
『恭敬供养三宝』,
Puññābhisandaṃ vipulaṃ alatthaṃ,
『广集福德资粮』,
Tassānubhāvena hatantarāyo’’ti.
『由其感应消除障碍』。」
Ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇena cettha yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ ratanattayapūjāya paññāpāṭavabhāvato, tāya paññāpāṭavañca rāgādimalavidhamanato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
此处谓对三宝敬礼,正如前文所明示,即时消除障碍,完成敬礼。因敬礼纯熟,故亦除去贪瞋痴之污秽。经中说:「世尊,诸有大名弟子忆念如来时,心无贪染,无嗔染,无痴染,当时心纯正纯一。」等等(《增支部》11.11)。
‘‘Yasmiṃ, mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 11.11).
借此经文说明:大名弟子念佛此时,心中无一切贪欲污染,无任何嗔恨及愚痴之扰,心境亦因此纯正恒净。
Tasmā ratanattayapūjanena vikkhālitamalāya paññāya pāṭavasiddhi.
故应以三宝敬礼,具足精进清净智慧,达成熟练圆满。
Atha vā ratanattayapūjanassa paññāpadaṭṭhānasamādhihetuttā paññāpāṭavaṃ. Vuttañhi tassa samādhihetuttaṃ –
或者说因三宝供养而生智慧之处,当自精进心与正定合成智慧成熟。其因定故智慧之熟练,正如所说——
‘‘Evaṃ ujugatacitto kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vediyati, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (a. ni. 11.11.).
「如此坚定如实之心,尊者大名,圣门弟子得此义知,得法知,得法聚会之欢喜,喜乐生起,喜悦之身得宁静,宁静之身感受安乐,安乐者心入定。」(阿含·杂念11.11)
Samādhissa ca paññāya padaṭṭhānabhāvo vuttoyeva ‘‘samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.99; mi. pa. 2.1.14). Tato evaṃ paṭubhūtāya paññāya paṭiññāmahattakataṃ khedamabhibhuyya anantarāyena saṃvaṇṇanaṃ samāpayissati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anantarāyena parisamāpanattha’’nti.
又于定中无智慧之处,云『入定者如实了知』(增支尼篇4.99,法句比库传2.1.14)。于是依此亲证智慧,超越自我者,用智慧断疑除碍,得即时圆满。故曰『为即时圆满』。
Atha vā ratanattayapūjāya āyuvaṇṇasukhabalavaḍḍhanato anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ratanattayapaṇāmena hi āyuvaṇṇasukhabalāni vaḍḍhanti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
又因三宝供养,寿命、色身、安乐、力迅速增长,即可知定之即时圆满。三宝持戒,寿命、色身、安乐、力皆增长。正如所说——
‘‘Abhivādanasīlissa , niccaṃ vuḍḍhāpacāyino;
「恭敬持戒之人,恒常增长长养,」
Cattāro dhammā vaḍḍhanti, āyu vaṇṇo sukhaṃ bala’’nti. (dha. pa. 109);
四种法增长,即寿命、光泽、快乐与力量。
Tato āyuvaṇṇasukhabalavuḍḍhiyā hoteva kāriyaniṭṭhānamiti vuttaṃ ‘‘anantarāyena parisamāpanattha’’nti.
于是因寿命、光泽、快乐与力量的增长,必成就事业的究竟,谓之『为无障碍之完成』。
Atha vā ratanattayagāravassa paṭibhānāparihānāvahattā. Aparihānāvahañhi tīsupi ratanesu gāravaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
或者因三宝尊敬的减少,明智的损害。此种损害,乃对三宝皆有尊敬的损坏。其文言说:
‘‘Sattime, bhikkhave, aparihāniyā dhammā. Katame satta? Satthugāravatā dhammagāravatā saṅghagāravatā sikkhāgāravatā samādhigāravatā kalyāṇamittatā sovacassatā’’ti (a. ni. 7.34).
『长老们,具七种无损害的法,何谓七者?师长尊敬、法尊敬、僧团尊敬、教戒尊敬、定的尊敬、善友、正语。』
Hoteva ca tato paṭibhānāparihānena yathāpaṭiññātaparisamāpanaṃ.
此后,因明智的无损害,而具足如所应知之完成。
Atha vā pasādavatthūsu pūjāya puññātisayabhāvato. Vuttañhi tassa puññātisayattaṃ –
或者因信心等基础,对供养与功德增长之敬重。其文言说其功德增长者为——
‘‘Pūjārahe pūjayato, buddhe yadiva sāvake;
『供养者正在供养时,如同对佛陀及其弟子一样;
Papañcasamatikkante, tiṇṇasokapariddave.
越过繁复分别,超越忧愁惶恐,寂灭于苦恼。』
‘‘Te tādise pūjayato, nibbute akutobhaye;
『他们若如此供养已灭无怖者,不可称量其功德;
Na sakkā puññaṃ saṅkhātuṃ, imettamapi kenacī’’ti. (dha. pa. 195-196; apa. thera 1.10.1-2);
『功德无法被任何人计量,乃至如此之多』。(法句经195-196偈;长老譬喻1.10.1-2)
Puññātisayo ca yathādhippetaparisamāpanupāyo. Yathāha –
功德之广博,亦如前述聚集与完成之法门。如是说:
‘‘Esa devamanussānaṃ, sabbakāmadado nidhi;
『此乃天人及人间,满足一切欲望的宝藏;
Yaṃ yadevābhipatthenti, sabbametena labbhatī’’ti. (khu. pā. 8.10);
『凡所依止者,皆由此得。』
Upāyesu ca paṭipannassa hoteva kāriyaniṭṭhānaṃ. Ratanattayapūjā hi niratisayapuññakkhettasaṃbuddhiyā aparimeyyappabhavo puññātisayoti bahuvidhantarāyepi lokasannivāse antarāyanibandhanasakalasaṃkilesaviddhaṃsanāya pahoti, bhayādiupaddavañca nivāreti. Tasmā suvuttaṃ ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthanti veditabba’’nti.
依正行法修习者,其所成就者必然完备无缺。供奉三宝,如宝等,因无厌足之善德之地而生无量功德,故具足功德。如是善德障碍离散、世间安住中所障碍及缠结诸恶净除,辛厉怖惧等障亦得消灭。因此经中多次明说:『从诵述三宝悉行礼拜开始,知晓三宝功德之称颂,及无障碍完成,皆应如是了知。』
Evaṃ pana sappayojanaṃ ratanattayavandanaṃ kattukāmo paṭhamaṃ tāva bhagavato vandanaṃ kātuṃ tammūlakattā sesaratanānaṃ ‘‘yo kappa…pe… mahākāruṇikassa tassā’’ti āha. Ettha pana yassā desanāya saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo, sā yasmā karuṇāppadhānā, na suttantadesanā viya karuṇāpaññāppadhānā, nāpi abhidhammadesanā viya paññāppadhānā, tasmā karuṇāppadhānameva bhagavato thomanaṃ āraddhaṃ. Esā hi ācariyassa pakati, yadidaṃ ārambhānurūpathomanā. Teneva suttantadesanāya saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadayaṃ, paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti karuṇāpaññāppadhānaṃ, abhidhammadesanāya saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ‘‘karuṇā viya sattesu, paññā yassa mahesino’’ti paññāppadhānañca thomanaṃ āraddhaṃ. Karuṇāpaññāppadhānā hi suttantadesanā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayānusayādhimutticariyādibhedaparicchindanasamatthāya paññāya sattesu ca mahākaruṇāya tattha sātisayappavattito. Suttantadesanāya hi mahākaruṇāsamāpattibahulo veneyyasantānesu tadajjhāsayānulomena gambhīramatthapadaṃ patiṭṭhāpesi. Abhidhammadesanā ca kevalaṃ paññāppadhānā paramatthadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhasamatthāya paññāya tattha sātisayappavattito.
由此欲修持善法与三宝礼敬者,须先行世尊礼敬。世尊礼敬者乃以其所余诸宝中之“彼世尊是常作大慈悲者”作为开端。此处所说礼敬讴歌,因其基于慈悲专注,而非仅同佛经语句般之慈慧事理,亦非唯阿毗达摩般之慧理,故慈悲为礼敬之根本。此即师教中,礼敬开端所须之底本。如佛经礼敬开头云:“慈心清净无染,慧灯灭除烦恼”,是慈慧之注释;阿毗达摩中讴歌开头云:“如众生慈,智慧为众之尊”,亦是慧理注释。慈慧之注释即佛经中各众生内心执著我见等不同陷缚,当以慧智破除生灭分裂,起大慈悲故,众生随之生喜悦。佛经常著重于成就大慈悲,灭烦恼转向乐与法理深义之根基;而阿毗达摩仍止于慧理究境。
Vinayadesanā pana āsayādinirapekkhaṃ kevalaṃ karuṇāya pākatikasattenapi asotabbārahaṃ suṇanto apucchitabbārahaṃ pucchanto avattabbārahañca vadanto bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesīti karuṇāppadhānā. Tathā hi ukkaṃsapariyantagatahirottappopi bhagavā lokiyasādhujanehipi pariharitabbāni ‘‘sikharaṇīsī’’tiādīni vacanāni yathāparādhañca garahavacanāni vinayapiṭakadesanāya mahākaruṇāsañcoditamānaso mahāparisamajjhe abhāsi, taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññattikāraṇāpekkhāya verañjādīsu sārīrikañca khedamanubhosi. Tasmā kiñcāpi bhūmantarapaccayākārasamayantarakathānaṃ viya vinayapaññattiyāpi samuṭṭhāpikā paññā anaññasādhāraṇatāya atisayakiccavatī, karuṇāya kiccaṃ pana tatopi adhikanti karuṇāppadhānā vinayadesanā. Karuṇābyāpārādhikatāya hi desanāya karuṇāppadhānatā. Tasmā ārambhānurūpaṃ karuṇāppadhānameva ettha thomanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ.
就僧律教义而言,离诸执著但唯行慈悲者也不应忽视。有时佛陀虽痛恨世间恶行,然因大慈悲心,仍教导戒律。譬如上师于众法中,如修除罪恶、戒法误犯之语等,皆以严厉言辞示众,因戒律之教导为大慈悲心所感召,故佛陀在众大集会中为训诂戒律戒条。即便极端灼痛火刑般,如此世尊亦为大众利益适时加以规戒、训导。故中间之戒虽有痛苦经过,但其背后皆因大慈悲心。又依缘起中段法因缘所成,律戒智慧亦非凡俗,而具超常智慧,故律中亦含大慈悲心与智慧之教义。因而慈悲之注释乃律藏教义核心。
Karuṇāggahaṇena ca aparimeyyappabhāvā sabbepi buddhaguṇā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā taṃmūlakattā sesabuddhaguṇānaṃ. Mahākaruṇāya vā chasu asādhāraṇañāṇesu aññatarattā taṃsahacaritasesāsādhāraṇañāṇānampi gahaṇasabbhāvato sabbepi buddhaguṇā nayato dassitāva honti. Esoyeva hi niravasesato buddhaguṇānaṃ dassanupāyo yadidaṃ nayaggāho. Aññathā ko nāma samattho bhagavato guṇe anupadaṃ niravasesato dassetuṃ. Tenevāha –
由慈悲之涵摄,阿耨多罗三藐三菩提根本无量法门之诸佛德得以悉现,佛余德由此涵摄得以表现。大慈悲依六种超常智慧特别于诸异智慧相随涵摄者,由此显示众佛诸德全备不缺。此无漏无间断佛德之示现法门,即是摄持之便路。否则谁能示现世尊之德法而无间断?故有云——
‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ,
『佛亦当以佛言说其品性,』
Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno;
即使世尊的寿命比别人普通短暂,
Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare,
他的寿命在长久的时间中也会消逝,
Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.304; 3.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.425);
但世尊的光辉不因此消失,(引自《中部释义》一卷304页;三卷141页;《大部释义》二卷425页)。
Teneva ca āyasmatā sāriputtattherenapi buddhaguṇaparicchedanaṃ patianuyuttena ‘‘no hetaṃ, bhante’’ti paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘apica me, bhante, dhammanvayo vidito’’ti (dī. ni. 2.146) vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘yo kappakoṭīhipī’’tiādinā karuṇāmukhena saṅkhepato sakalasabbaññuguṇehi bhagavantaṃ abhitthavīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayamettha samudāyattho.
由此又据长老沙利佛尊者以善巧方便、详尽阐释佛陀德行教义的说法中,曾有一说:“非是如此,尊者”,否定此义,进而说:“尊者,我已明了法的相续”(《中部释义》二卷146页)。因此,称呼世尊为“寿命如千万亿劫”者,乃是由悲悯之心简要而全面以诸种全知功德涵盖诸佛而作出的称赞,是此缘起本义。
Ayaṃ pana avayavattho – yoti aniyamavacanaṃ. Tassa ‘‘nātho’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Kappakoṭīhipī’’tiādinā pana yāya karuṇāya so ‘‘mahākāruṇiko’’ti vuccati, tassā vasena kappakoṭigaṇanāyapi appameyyaṃ kālaṃ lokahitatthāya atidukkaraṃ karontassa bhagavato dukkhānubhavanaṃ dasseti. Karuṇāya baleneva hi so bhagavā hatthagatampi nibbānaṃ pahāya saṃsārapaṅke nimuggaṃ sattanikāyaṃ tato samuddharaṇatthaṃ cintetumpi asakkuṇeyyaṃ nayanajīvitaputtabhariyadānādikaṃ atidukkaramakāsi. Kappakoṭīhipi appameyyaṃ kālanti kappakoṭigaṇanāyapi ‘‘ettakā kappakoṭiyo’’ti pametuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ kālaṃ, kappakoṭigaṇanavasenapi paricchinditumasakkuṇeyyattā aparicchinnāni kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kappakoṭivaseneva hi so kālo appameyyo, asaṅkhyeyyavasena pana paricchinnoyeva. ‘‘Kappakoṭīhipī’’ti apisaddo kappakoṭivasenapi tāva pametuṃ na sakkā, pageva vassagaṇanāyāti dasseti. ‘‘Appameyyaṃ kāla’’nti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ ‘‘māsamadhīte, divasaṃ caratī’’tiādīsu viya. Karonto atidukkarānīti pañcamahāpariccāgādīni atidukkarāni karonto. Evamatidukkarāni karonto kiṃ vindīti ce? Khedaṃ gato, kāyikaṃ khedamupagato, parissamaṃ pattoti attho, dukkhamanubhavīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dukkhañhi khijjati sahitumasakkuṇeyyanti ‘‘khedo’’ti vuccati. Lokahitāyāti ‘‘anamatagge saṃsāre vaṭṭadukkhena accantapīḷitaṃ sattalokaṃ tamhā dukkhato mocetvā nibbānasukhabhāgiyaṃ karissāmī’’ti evaṃ sattalokassa hitakaraṇatthāyāti attho. Assa ca ‘‘atidukkarāni karonto’’ti iminā sambandho. Lokahitāya khedaṃ gatoti yojanāyapi natthi doso. Mahāgaṇṭhipadepi hi ‘‘atidukkarāni karonto khedaṃ gato, kimatthanti ce? Lokahitāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
此乃分段注释——“炬”者,为不失准的说法。由此与“护持”的关系明晰。称谓“寿命如千万亿劫”等,是基于慈悲而称,因世尊以无量悲力,即使寿命如千万亿劫之遥远,对于世间利益的所为极其辛苦,显显现世尊实感受的苦难。正是因为悲悯的力量,世尊甚至放弃手中涅槃(安住),陷入轮回泥沼、为众生作救拔而无法承担杀生、谋生、亲属之类等极其痛苦之事。所谓“寿命如千万亿劫”,虽以数字标示众多寿劫,然无法以数字具体表达其数量,因以寿命数字计量说,即使千劫万劫,也不过是部分,并非全部所藏。以此故所谓“寿命如千万亿劫”等称号,乃是借助数量化标识表达其不可思议的时长,如单纯以年数计,则无法穷尽。所谓“无量时”是特指非常极广大,而以不定量描述。此“寿命如千万亿劫”之不信则不能以寿命数字来表达,仅限于雨季数以表明。所谓“无量时”,意指以极其紧密连续的时间段累积,就像以月中、日常行走等表示。世尊所为之事极其艰难辛苦,等同五大无上牺牲。既作这些极难忍之事,为利益众生承受痛苦,若问缘由为何?其意蕴是随离苦已,身心随之解脱,得出安乐,故谓“苦者”。苦实在于难忍伴随,是“苦”之所摄。所谓“利益世间”者,是指“将灭除无数烦苦束缚,令被极苦逼迫的众生解脱,成为涅槃之乐的共有者”,其意即为利益世间而作。此与“作极难事”有密切联系。利益世间故承受苦难,并无过失。即便再大罪障,也是基于利益众生之故而为。故称“作极难事,历苦而去,其意为何?即为利益世间”之义,正如大绳紧束的喻同。
Yaṃ pana evaṃ yojanaṃ asambhāventena kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘na hi bhagavā lokahitāya saṃsāradukkhamanubhavati. Na hi kassaci dukkhānubhavanaṃ lokassa upakāraṃ āvahatī’’ti, taṃ tassa matimattaṃ. Evaṃ yojanāyapi atidukkarāni karontassa bhagavato dukkhānubhavanaṃ lokahitakaraṇatthāyāti ayamattho viññāyati, na tu dukkhānubhavaneneva lokahitasiddhīti. Paṭhamaṃ vuttayojanāyapi hi na dukkarakaraṇamattena lokahitasiddhi. Na hi dukkaraṃ karonto kañci sattaṃ maggaphalādīsu patiṭṭhāpeti, atha kho tādisaṃ atidukkaraṃ katvā sabbaññubhāvaṃ sacchikatvā niyyānikadhammadesanāya maggaphalādīsu satte patiṭṭhāpento lokassa hitaṃ sādheti.
若有他人辩论说“世尊绝不为利益世间而忍受轮回之苦,且未尝承受苦报能带来世间利益”,此乃仅凭主观想法。基于此辩解,世尊为利益世间甘受痛苦之义理可知,并非以承受痛苦本身即成就世间利益。依第一种辩说虽不以痛苦成世间利益,而世尊所为极难之事,最终确证以圆满殊胜诸觉得之道果,为众生利益建立坚固的大道。因此,世尊为利益世间而作之极难巨大功德,不是简单以苦为手段,而是已证悟舍离一切觉悟法,宣说圆满之道果方能真正将世间利益达成。
Kāmañcettha sattasaṅkhārabhājanavasena tividho loko, hitakaraṇassa pana adhippetattā taṃvisayasseva sattalokassa vasena attho gahetabbo. So hi lokīyanti ettha puññapāpāni taṃvipāko cāti ‘‘loko’’ti vuccati. Katthaci pana ‘‘sanarāmaralokagaru’’ntiādīsu samūhatthopi lokasaddo samudāyavasena lokīyati paññāpīyatīti. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘iminā sattalokañca jātilokañca saṅgaṇhāti, tasmā tassa sattalokassa idhalokaparalokahitaṃ, atikkantaparalokānaṃ vā ucchinnalokasamudayānaṃ idha jātiloke okāsaloke vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasaṅkhātañca hitaṃ sampiṇḍetvā lokassa, lokānaṃ, loke vā hitanti sarūpekasesaṃ katvā lokahitamiccevāhā’’ti, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasaṅkhaātahitassapi sattalokavisayattā, sattalokaggahaṇeneva ucchinnamūlānaṃ khīṇāsavānampi saṅgahitattā.
这里所说的『欲界』是指以诸有为组成部分的三界世界,但其意义在于承载利益护持的众生境界,应当限定于这有情世界。因为世间现象就是善恶业力的果报,因此称为“世界”。有时“世间”也指称如“色欲天人界”、“梵天界”等整体或集体意义,且应以集合体的意思来理解。若有人说“以此三界及六道众生为一体”,故此三界即集聚了此间与他间以及超越他时他界及断除生死轮回的现象,或生于此处与他处的种种现象相聚合,并利益着世间众生和世人,称作为“世间”,指的就是这全体。因此即使是对具闻见真实现象安乐而利于众生的境界,也不能超越此处有情世界的范围。即便是断尽烦恼涅槃者,其境界也当以有情所居此世为界,其断除的根本也是出于对此世间的执持。
Sabbattha ‘‘kenacī’’ti vutte ‘‘vajirabuddhiṭīkākārenā’’ti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Mahāgaṇṭhipade’’ti vā ‘‘majjhimagaṇṭhipade’’ti vā ‘‘cūḷagaṇṭhipade’’ti vā vutte ‘‘sīhaḷagaṇṭhipadesū’’ti gahetabbaṃ. Kevalaṃ ‘‘gaṇṭhipade’’ti vutte ‘‘māgadhabhāsāya likhite gaṇṭhipade’’ti gahetabbaṃ.
凡处处说“某处”时,应依《金刚智慧注释》的注释来理解。若说“大圈境”、“中圈境”或“小圈境”,应理解为是指“锡兰圈境”。单称“圈境”时,应理解为“以摩揭陀语书写的圈境”之意。
Nāthoti lokapaṭisaraṇo, lokasāmī lokanāyakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi sabbānatthapaahārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya aparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya ca sabbasattuttamo bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ ekapaṭisaraṇo patiṭṭhā. Atha vā nāthatīti nātho, veneyyānaṃ hitasukhaṃ mettāyanavasena āsīsati patthetīti attho. Atha vā nāthati veneyyagate kilese upatāpetīti attho, nāthatīti vā yācatīti attho. Bhagavā hi ‘‘sādhu, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kālena kālaṃ attasampattiṃ paccavekkheyyā’’tiādinā (a. ni. 8.7) sattānaṃ taṃ taṃ hitapaṭipattiṃ yācitvāpi karuṇāya samussāhito te tattha niyojeti. Paramena vā cittissariyena samannāgato sabbasatte īsati abhibhavatīti paramissaro bhagavā ‘‘nātho’’ti vuccati. Sabbopi cāyamattho saddasatthānusārato veditabbo.
“护持”者,是指护佑世间、为世间之主、为世间领袖者。确实,世尊被称为诸法无碍之先驱,圆满断绝一切烦恼得无量功德,降伏贪瞋痴等烦恼,终成无量众生中至善至美者,且安住于无限无边的诸世间界。故世尊是无量有情的一切护持者与根本。若说“护持”者,是指生起慈爱心,为众生求得安乐福祉者。也可理解为:护持者是使他所护者远离烦恼、增益安乐,有的亦解释为乞求之意。世尊曾言:“善哉,比库们,应当时时反观自己所得!”即于众生利益事宜上,虽祈求亦多加慈悲体恤,令其顺从。作为至高者备有极致的法喜与慈悲,故被称为“护持者”。言辞含义应据上下文详察。
Mahākāruṇikassāti yo karuṇāya kampitahadayattā lokahitatthaṃ atidukkarakiriyāya anekappakāraṃ tādisaṃ saṃsāradukkhamanubhavitvā āgato, tassa mahākāruṇikassāti attho. Tattha kiratīti karuṇā, paradukkhaṃ vikkhipati apanetīti attho. Dukkhitesu vā kirīyati pasārīyatīti karuṇā. Atha vā kiṇātīti karuṇā, paradukkhe sati kāruṇikaṃ hiṃsati vibādheti, vināseti vā parassa dukkhanti attho. Paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ kampanaṃ hadayakhedaṃ karotīti vā karuṇā. Atha vā kamiti sukhaṃ, taṃ rundhatīti karuṇā. Esā hi paradukkhāpanayanakāmatālakkhaṇā attasukhanirapekkhatāya kāruṇikānaṃ sukhaṃ rundhati vibādhetīti. Karuṇāya niyuttoti kāruṇiko yathā ‘‘dovāriko’’ti. Yathā hi dvāraṭṭhānato aññattha vattamānopi dvārapaṭibaddhajīviko puriso dvārānativattavuttitāya dvāre niyuttoti ‘‘dovāriko’’ti vuccati, evaṃ bhagavā mettādivasena karuṇāvihārato aññattha vattamānopi karuṇānativattavuttitāya karuṇāya niyuttoti ‘‘kāruṇiko’’ti vuccati. Mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya hi yāva mahāparinibbānā lokahitatthameva lokanāthā tiṭṭhanti. Mahanto kāruṇikoti mahākāruṇiko. Satipi bhagavato tadaññaguṇānampi vasena mahantabhāve kāruṇikasaddasannidhānena vuttattā karuṇāvasenettha mahantabhāvo veditabbo yathā ‘‘mahāveyyākaraṇo’’ti. Evañca katvā ‘‘mahākāruṇikassā’’ti iminā padena puggalādhiṭṭhānena satthu mahākaruṇā vuttā hoti.
所谓“大慈者”,是指因大悲心而生恻隐心,反复为利益众生而行极难行之大事,并感受生死轮回中种种痛苦苦难者,故称“大慈者”。“行”是指悲心动,唤起他人痛苦;或有悲于苦者广布悲心;“阻止”是指内心生悲而不忍伤害苦者,反致纷争、毁坏众生之苦痛;或悲苦之时,致善人心震颤、心碎。又“苦”是痛苦,悲心引起痛苦之流泪。此乃悲心带有苦难而不染乐之特性,因而悲者将苦痛之苦与乐分明,故悲中含苦,苦中流泪。谓悲心强烈时,如同“门户看守”依门岗而受限,虽身处门内,然仍受门制约,故称“悲心所缚”。世尊以慈悲遍行,一切时一切处皆现大慈之相,无他言其超越一切。尽管有极大愤怒,但仍持悲心利益众生,故称“大慈者”。因世尊当时无上智慧加被,故慈悲无量,堪称大慈之限。
Atha vā karuṇā karuṇāyanaṃ sīlaṃ pakati etassāti kāruṇiko, pathavīphassādayo viya kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāvā karuṇāyanasabhāvo sabhāvabhūtakaruṇoti attho. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Atha vā mahāvisayatāya mahānubhāvatāya mahābalatāya ca mahatī karuṇāti mahākaruṇā. Bhagavato hi karuṇā niravasesesu sattesu pavattati, pavattamānā ca anaññasādhāraṇā pavattati, diṭṭhadhammikādibhedañca mahantameva sattānaṃ hitasukhaṃ ekantato nipphādeti, mahākaruṇāya niyuttoti mahākāruṇikoti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Atha vā mahatī pasatthā karuṇā assa atthīti mahākāruṇiko. Pūjāvacano hettha mahantasaddo ‘‘mahāpuriso’’tiādīsu viya. Pasatthā ca bhagavato karuṇā mahākaruṇāsamāpattivasenapi pavattito anaññasādhāraṇattāti.
抑或说“忧心、悲苦心本性”,如地、水、火、风等多种坚硬刺痛之类的自然特性,即为“悲苦心之本性”,与前所述相同。抑或说因其宏大范围、具有广大德行、广大力量,故称“大悲心”。世尊的悲心无碍于一切现象,于一切有情所处之境界无不遍及,且具有无与伦比之力量,消除一切众生苦乐差别。故“大慈”即“大悲”,无需多言,至此足见其广大。若论其巨大纯净,则“大慈”亦称“大人”。这是敬称,犹如称世尊为“大人”。在此亦谓世尊所证大慈及其广大成就,乃前所未有、无与伦比之大慈悲境界。
Evaṃ karuṇāmukhena saṅkhepato sakalasabbaññuguṇehi bhagavantaṃ thometvā idāni saddhammaṃ thometuṃ ‘‘asambudha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha asambudhanti pubbakālakiriyāniddeso, tassa asambujjhanto appaṭivijjhantoti attho, yathāsabhāvaṃ appaṭivijjhanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Hetuattho hettha antasaddo ‘‘paṭhanto nisīdatī’’tiādīsu viya. Yanti pubbakālakiriyāya aniyamato kammaniddeso. Buddhanisevitanti tassa visesanaṃ. Tattha buddhasaddassa tāva ‘‘bujjhitā saccānīti buddho, bodhetā pajāyāti buddho’’tiādinā (mahāni. 192) niddesanayena attho veditabbo. Atha vā savāsanāya aññāṇaniddāya accantavigamato, buddhiyā vā vikasitabhāvato buddhavāti buddho jāgaraṇavikasanatthavasena. Atha vā kassacipi ñeyyadhammassa anavabuddhassa abhāvena ñeyyavisesassa kammabhāvena aggahaṇato kammavacanicchāya abhāvena avagamanatthavaseneva kattuniddeso labbhatīti buddhavāti buddho. Atthato pana pāramitāparibhāvito sayambhūñāṇena saha vāsanāya vihataviddhaṃsitaniravasesakileso mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimeyyaguṇagaṇādhāro khandhasantāno buddho. Yathāha ‘‘buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṃ saccāni abhisambujjhi, tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ patto balesu ca vasībhāva’’nti (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 97; paṭi. ma. 1.161). Tena evaṃ nirupamappabhāvena buddhena nisevitaṃ gocarāsevanābhāvanāsevanāhi yathārahaṃ nisevitaṃ anubhūtanti attho.
从此以大悲之心,略述并赞叹具足所有智慧和德行之世尊,然有人诋毁称“未觉悟者”。这里“未觉悟者”指的是以前行为未圆满致使未能彻底通达,故称为“未能觉知”。原因在于其过去行为未受约束。谓之佛所出世时,具足觉悟之意。且“佛”一词应从多方面理解:有人解作为觉知世间真理者,有人解为彻悟真理而觉醒者,亦有人解为因识机而觉醒者。或解释为因其于所应记法无所疏漏,智慧显赫故称“佛”。又或以世尊圆满智慧与清净之知识为依托,称其为“佛”。如《大念处经》云:“佛者,即为现前觉悟,以明正义,令一切众生解脱者”。因此佛为具诸不可思议殊胜功德及智慧者。并据此,世尊严正威严,故具足不可胜量的大悲及广大智慧,深受世间敬仰供养。
Tattha nibbānaṃ gocarāsevanāvaseneva nisevitaṃ, maggo pana attanā bhāvito ca bhāvanāsevanāvasena sevito, parehi uppāditāni pana maggaphalāni cetopariyañāṇādinā yadā parijānāti, attanā uppāditāni vā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena paricchindati, tadā gocarāsevanāvasenapi sevitāni hontiyeva. Ettha ca pariyattidhammassapi pariyāyato dhammaggahaṇena gahaṇe sati sopi desanāsammasanañāṇagocaratāya gocarāsevanāya sevitoti sakkā gahetuṃ. ‘‘Abhidhammanayasamuddaṃ adhigacchati, tīṇi piṭakāni sammasī’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā pariyattidhammassapi sacchikiriyāya sammasanapariyāyo labbhatīti yaṃ asambudhaṃ asambujjhanto asacchikarontoti atthasambhavato sopi idha vutto evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tampi ca appaṭivijjhanto bhavābhavaṃ gacchati, pariññātadhammavinayo pana tadatthapaṭipattiyā sammāpaṭipanno na cirasseva dukkhassantaṃ karissati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
这里如涅槃的境域与道途的修习分别对待,道是由自己亲自修习而得,以修习为依止;而道果则由他人所成就,即由内心分别知识等觉知而了解。当自己用分别回顾的智慧去分析所生起的道果时,那时即便作为境域的修习亦同样成为所依的对象。此处对经文内容的反复阐述,借助文字的把持,因能收摄道义,遂使正知等觉知于说法所缘的境界而得修习,故可如此理解。正法注疏中言云:“能够通达阿毗达摩三藏”,且“对所载法也能如实了达”,由此可知,谓不觉悟、不证知者因义理上不可得,故此亦如其所说。对此若不正知,则身陷生死流转;而能悉知法律的修行体系者,因依正当行持,必能不久断除苦恼。有文献记载曰:
‘‘Yo imasmiṃ dhammavinaye, appamatto vihassati;
“于此法律戒律中勤奋认真修行者,
Pahāya jātisaṃsāraṃ, dukkhassantaṃ karissatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.185; saṃ. ni. 1.185);
断弃生死轮回之苦,将断苦恼。”(《大毗奈耶经》第二卷第185节;《杂藏毗奈耶》第一卷第185节)
Ettha ca kiñcāpi maggaphalanibbānāni paccekabuddhabuddhasāvakehipi gocarāsevanādinā sevitāni honti, tathāpi ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena ‘‘buddhanisevita’’nti vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana buddhasaddassa sāmaññato buddhānubuddhapaccekabuddhānampi ettheva saṅgaho vutto.
此外,有关某些涅槃果的修证,无论是独觉佛弟子还是佛陀弟子皆能对此有所修习,但其毕竟如断裂割断之别,故称为“佛所修习”。某种意义上关于佛号,常通用于佛、独觉佛及诸佛弟子,此处即是此义的总说。
Bhavābhavanti aparakālakiriyāya kammaniddeso, bhavato bhavanti attho. Atha vā bhavābhavanti sugatiduggativasena hīnapaṇītavasena ca khuddakaṃ mahantañca bhavanti attho. Vuddhatthopi hi a-kāro dissati ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’tiādīsu viya. Tasmā abhavoti mahābhavo vuccati. Atha vā bhavoti vuddhi, abhavoti hāni. Bhavoti vā sassatadiṭṭhi, abhavoti ucchedadiṭṭhi. Vuttappakāro bhavo ca abhavo ca bhavābhavo. Taṃ bhavābhavaṃ. Gacchatīti aparakālakiriyāniddeso. Jīvalokoti sattaloko. Jīvaggahaṇena hi saṅkhārabhājanalokaṃ nivatteti tassa bhavābhavagamanāsambhavato. Namo atthūti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo.
所谓生死,乃指非当世之业因果;亦或以善趣与恶趣流转之别为义,小与大皆包涵于其中。如佛法中所说的“无行为”亦有其所依,所以称之为无为法。由此,生即增加,死即减少。生即常见,死即断灭见。生与死,两见皆是分别理论。由此所说之生死即是此别世行为的指称。此生死即指众生之生死界。因缘中形成的诸蕴分解而使世界循环,其生死流转亦由此而生。因此文义理义均当如此理解。
Avijjādikilesajālaviddhaṃsinoti dhammavisesanaṃ. Tattha avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Pūretuṃ ayuttaṭṭhena kāyaduccaritādi avindiyaṃ nāma, aladdhabbanti attho. Tabbiparītato kāyasucaritādi vindiyaṃ nāma, taṃ vindiyaṃ na vindatīti vā avijjā, khandhānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ suññataṭṭhaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatiyaṭṭhaṃ, saccānaṃ tathaṭṭhaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti vā avijjā, dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādivasena vuttaṃ catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre sabbayonigatibhavaviññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu satte javāpetīti vā avijjā, paramatthato avijjamānesupi itthipurisādīsu javati, vijjamānesupi khandhādīsu na javatīti vā avijjā. Sā ādi yesaṃ taṇhādīnaṃ te avijjādayo, teyeva kilissanti etehi sattāti kilesā, teyeva ca sattānaṃ bandhanaṭṭhena jālasadisāti jālaṃ, taṃ viddhaṃseti sabbaso vināseti sīlenāti avijjādikilesajālaviddhaṃsī. Nanu cettha sapariyattiko navalokuttaradhammo adhippeto, tattha ca maggoyeva kilese viddhaṃseti, netareti ce? Vuccate. Maggassapi nibbānamāgamma kilesaviddhaṃsanato nibbānampi kilese viddhaṃseti nāma, maggassa kilesaviddhaṃsanakiccaṃ phalena nipphannanti phalampi ‘‘kilesaviddhaṃsī’’ti vuccati. Pariyattidhammopi kilesaviddhaṃsanassa paccayattā ‘‘kilesaviddhaṃsī’’ti vattumarahatīti na koci doso.
愚痴及烦恼如污泥侵染,故称法之特性为“烦恼浊乱”。愚痴即是不明了。广义中,指未得之身体恶业等不明了,谓之无明。反之,身善行等正见虽有所知,不明白即是不明。五蕴如泥土厚积,六处之相、元素之性空、根藏之主宰、真理之未识,苦等之烦恼以四种含义被不明白,这皆属无明。轮回中众生因无明处于有漏生命之处,因而连转不断。即使凡夫中如男性、女性なお有此无明,觉者反之六蕴中已无此无明。此即无明之本起。贪欲等烦恼皆由此无明而起,束缚众生如网。此网一旦断除,戒律随即清净无染。如对此文言易于理解,则如九界天上诸法优胜,唯有道中烦恼受破除,方得名“烦恼破除者”,无有异议。即使到达涅槃,若未除烦恼,依然有烦恼。但修道之因缘既除烦恼,则其果皆由此实现妥达,名为“烦恼破除”。对此反复讲述,丝毫无过失。
Dhammavarassa tassāti pubbe aniyamitassa niyamavacanaṃ. Tattha yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne catūsu apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo.
所谓法雨之前,是指不定时的规律令成定时的诠释。这里所说的法,是在依教奉行时,能护持于四种恶趣中未堕入者。
‘‘Ye keci dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ;
『一切归依法者,必不堕入恶趣;
Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37) –
舍弃人身,将得天身为满』。——此语出自《长部·念处经》及《集论·一章》——
Hi vuttaṃ. Saṃsāradukkhe vā apatamāne katvā dhāretīti dhammo maggaphaluppattiyā sattakkhattuparamatādivasena saṃsārassa paricchinnattā. Apāyādinibbattakakilesaviddhaṃsanañcettha dhāraṇaṃ. Evañca katvā ariyamaggo tassa tadatthasiddhihetutāya nibbānañcāti ubhayameva nippariyāyato dhāreti, ariyaphalaṃ pana taṃsamucchinnakilesapaṭippassambhanena tadanuguṇatāya, pariyattidhammo tadadhigamahetutāyāti ubhayaṃ pariyāyato dhāretīti veditabbaṃ. Vuttappakāro dhammoyeva attano uttaritarābhāvena varo pavaro anuttaroti dhammavaro, tassa dhammavarassa namo atthūti sambandho. Ettāvatā cettha amhehi sārattho pakāsito. Yaṃ panettha kenaci papañcitaṃ, amhehi ca idha na dassitaṃ, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ. Ito paresupi evameva daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tasmā ito paṭṭhāya ettakampi avatvā sāratthameva dassayissāma. Yattha pana kenaci accantaviruddhaṃ likhitaṃ, tampi katthaci dassayissāma. Ettha ca ‘‘avijjādikilesajālaviddhaṃsino’’ti etena svākkhātatādīhi dhammaṃ thometi, ‘‘dhammavarassā’’ti etena aññassa visiṭṭhassa abhāvadīpanato paripuṇṇatāya. Paṭhamena vā pahānasampadaṃ dhammassa dasseti, dutiyena pabhāvasampadaṃ.
这就是说,受生死苦者,若能依止法修行,终断轮回,得脱世苦。所谓恶趣者,因烦恼染污所生也,若依止法,则能断除烦恼。如此修行圣道,便令理义成立,涅槃因此成就,二者互相贯通而相依止。圣果因断净烦恼而安然寂灭,与道理相应相依,是涅槃之因。二者皆因循此理而坚持而成就,故须知二者皆自此理相辅相成。对所传法义的释义,是法冷热俱全,上下之分,乃法中之尊最尊故称之法雨,故致敬法雨。至此,我们仅发其要旨,若此处有展卷冗杂,或我们未见者,不必返溯。以后亦当依此,简明表示要义。若有截然相反之文,届时同样说明。此处「无明等烦恼所染之罪恼」言,称扬已显教法,称叫“法雨”,此亦是称示他人极妙之所在。此法雨第一次指法的舍弃具足成就,第二次指其光明具足成就。
Evaṃ saṅkhepeneva sabbadhammaguṇehi saddhammaṃ thometvā idāni ariyasaṅghaṃ thometuṃ ‘‘guṇehī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Guṇehī’’ti padassa ‘‘yutto’’ti iminā sambandho. Idāni yehi guṇehi yutto, te dassento ‘‘sīlasamādhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha catupārisuddhisīlādi ‘‘sīla’’nti vuccati. Samādhīti paṭhamajjhānādi. Samādhisīsena hi paṭhamajjhānādayo vuttā. Paññāti maggapaññā. Vimutti ca vimuttiñāṇañca vimuttivimuttiñāṇanti vattabbe ekadesasarūpekasesanayena ‘‘vimuttiñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddapariyāyena pabhutisaddena vā vimuttiggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha vimuttīti phalaṃ. Vimuttiñāṇanti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Pabhuti-saddena chaḷabhiññācatupaṭisambhidādayo guṇā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca sīlādayo guṇā lokiyā lokuttarā ca yathāsambhavaṃ niddiṭṭhāti veditabbā. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlādayo kiñcāpi lokiyalokuttarā yathāsambhavaṃ labbhanti, tathāpi ante ‘ariyasaṅgha’nti vacanato sīlādayo cattāro dhammakkhandhā lokuttarāvā’’ti, taṃ tassa matimattaṃ. Na hi ariyasaṅghassa lokiyaguṇehipi thomanāya koci doso dissati, sabbaññubuddhassapi tāva lokiyalokuttaraguṇehi thomanā hoti, kimaṅgaṃ pana ariyasaṅghassāti.
如此简介称赞正法具足种种法性,现今欲称赞圣僧团,故用「具法性」语,意含联合之义。现已荣具之法性,即是被称为戒禅智慧等诸法性。戒者,即四净戒等戒法;禅者,是指初禅等禅定;慧者,是指法慧之觉知;解脱,则含解脱智与解脱智识;解脱智识乃更细之观察智。正觉者具慧六通等多种妙慧,令法性相聚。戒禅等诸法性可分为世间与出世间,两者皆真可见。有人说戒等具世间与出世间两法皆可得,然而最终却以“圣僧”一词指四大圣谛之戒法,或疑见之说,此乃偏颇。圣僧对于世间具足法,自无嗔意,因完全知悉佛陀以众多世间外内法而称扬,何况圣僧团哉?
Kusalatthikānaṃ janānaṃ puññassa vuddhiyā khettasadisattā khettanti āha ‘‘khettaṃ janānaṃ kusalatthikāna’’nti. Khittaṃ bījaṃ mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena tāyatīti hi khettaṃ, pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇaviruhanabhūmi, taṃsadisattā ariyasaṅghopi ‘‘khetta’’nti vuccati. Iminā ariyasaṅghassa anuttarapuññakkhettabhāvaṃ dīpeti. ‘‘Anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Tanti pubbe ‘‘yo’’ti aniyamena vuttassa niyamavacanaṃ. Ariyasaṅghanti ettha ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye ca iriyanato ariyā niruttinayena. Atha vā sadevakena lokena saraṇanti araṇīyato upagantabbato upagatānañca tadatthasiddhito ariyā. Ariyānaṃ saṅgho samūhoti ariyasaṅgho. Atha vā ariyo ca so yathāvuttanayena saṅgho ca diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvatoti ariyasaṅgho, aṭṭha ariyapuggalā. Taṃ ariyasaṅghaṃ. Bhagavato aparabhāge buddhadhammaratanānampi samadhigamo saṅgharatanādhīnoti ariyasaṅghassa bahūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ idheva ‘‘sirasā namāmī’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
善根增长之人们,冠以丰饶的良田比喻福田,谓之『人们的田野』。田指土地,是由良种子养大丰收之所,即前后两季不停之地,类似有茂盛植被之地,圣僧团亦称为『田野』。由此表示圣僧团是无上福田。经中说『无上福田于世间』。前面说“不定之法终成定法”者,律令所指。圣僧团此处为护持之义,是指断除烦恼者,非斜向执著奴役也。然依尊贵之众称为圣僧团。或谓与天人世界为他乡庇护,尊贵之人憑此归依故。圣僧群体即是圣僧团。或谓圣义所说,圣僧团即依正见戒律和善见而集合之人共称八圣人。此即圣僧团。佛陀劈开诸宝之中期后,证得法宝并承先启后,显示圣僧团众之所助益,故当称颂曰『顶礼圣僧』以示敬意。
Evaṃ gāthāttayena saṅkhepato sakalaguṇasaṃkittanamukhena ratanattayassa paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni taṃ nipaccakāraṃ yathādhippete payojane pariṇāmento āha ‘‘icceva’’miccādi. Iccevaṃ yathāvuttanayena accantaṃ ekantena namassaneyyaṃ namassitabbaṃ ratanattayaṃ namassamāno kāyavācācittehi vandamāno ahaṃ vipulaṃ yaṃ puññābhisandaṃ alatthanti sambandho. Tattha buddhādayo ratijananaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Tesañhi ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā yathābhūtaguṇe āvajjentassa amatādhigamahetubhūtaṃ anappakaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Yathāha –
以两句颂诗简要概括,全面标示诸宝之性后,礼敬此三宝,今就此契机展开浅释称:『如是、非真』二字,以如前所说之理,完全专一,应当礼敬,应当顶礼此三宝。礼敬之时,身口意皆敬礼,欢喜敬仰。我感得广大的利益福分,因缘接连不断。此处所指宝者,即佛及诸宝种类。对彼,『世尊正是如此』等语,须应如实说明,如法欢喜而生不可毁灭的至乐至喜。如经中所说——
‘‘Yasmiṃ, mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti, ujugatacitto kho pana, mahānāma, ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 11.11).
『于此时,尊者大名,当忆如来,彼时无贪恋染污心,无瞋恨染污心,无愚痴染污心,其心纯净澄明。由如是纯净心,尊者获得究竟利益,获得法智,获得法趣向的欢喜,生起喜乐。』(阿毗尼柯经 11.11)
Cittīkatādibhāvo vā ratanaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ –
此处所说的「心所缘」等种种表现,乃三宝的象征和依托。经中称——
‘‘Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ;
『以心所缘为巨海,难遇无比胜视,纯净无染净水体,此宝号为宝。』(大部尼柯经 8.33)
Anomasattaparibhogaṃ, ratanaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33);
心所缘等状态诸如清净纯净之义,正是一切佛宝共同的殊胜特质,唯有诸佛及彼等所获之法,方得如此殊胜而难得。
Cittīkatabhāvādayo ca anaññasādhāraṇā buddhādīsuyeva labbhantīti.
被尊崇等诸特质,乃唯诸佛等所独有,而非他者所共享。
‘‘Puññābhisandanti puññarāsiṃ puññappavattaṃ vā’’ti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Majjhimagaṇṭhipade pana cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca ‘‘puññābhisandanti puññābhinisaṃsa’’ntipi attho vutto. Puññābhisandanti puññanadiṃ, puññappavāhanti evaṃ panettha attho veditabbo. Avicchedena pavattiyamānañhi puññaṃ abhisandanaṭṭhena ‘‘puññābhisando’’ti vuccati. Teneva sāratthapakāsiniyā saṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathāya (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1027) –
“善业堆积累聚于善业之藏或善业之流转”是大集经中所说。中集经和小集经中则说“善业堆积与善业增长”之意。此中应解作善业如流水般汇聚流转。因未经切断而不断行故,这善业称为堆积。当以此义理解《相应部注释》的记载:“善业汇聚者”,即是此意。
‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, puññābhisandā kusalābhisandā sukhassāhārā. Katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti ‘itipi so bhagavā…pe… buddho bhagavā’ti, ayaṃ paṭhamo puññābhisando kusalābhisando sukhassāhāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1027) –
佛告比库们:善业的堆积有四种,是善业的集聚,是善业的增长,是善业的利益之所依。何为这四者?佛告比库们,圣弟子得佛无疑之信,称颂是世尊─正觉者,此为第一种善业堆积,是善业的集聚,也是善业的利益所依。
Evamādikāya pāḷiyā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘puññābhisandā kusalābhisandāti puññanadiyo kusalanadiyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ ‘‘puññābhisandanti puññaphala’’nti, taṃ na sundaraṃ . Na hi ratanattayaṃ namassamāno tasmiṃ khaṇe puññaphalaṃ alattha, kintu anappakaṃ puññarāsiṃ tadā alabhi, tassa ca phalaṃ paralokabhāgī, diṭṭhadhamme tu antarāyavighāto tassa ca puññassa ānisaṃsamattakaṃ, ‘‘tassānubhāvena hatantarāyo’’ti ca vuttaṃ, na ca puññaphale anuppanne tassānubhāvena hatantarāyabhāvo na sijjhati, na cetaṃ tasmiṃyeva khaṇe diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ ahosi. Tasmā tassa mahato puññappavāhassa ānubhāvena hatantarāyoti ayameva attho yujjati. Athāpi paṇāmakiriyāya janitattā puññameva puññaphalanti tassādhippāyo siyā, evaṃ sati yujjeyya. So ca puññappavāho na appamattako, atha kho mahantoyevāti dassento āha ‘‘vipula’’nti, mahantaṃ anappakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Alatthanti alabhiṃ, pāpuṇinti attho.
由此根本含义说,善业堆积即是善业之流,善行之源。如“堆积”一词,若解为“善业果报”,则不宜。因为三宝不是仅在一时恭敬而得善果,乃是修得纯净之善业之集,故得其果。且善业果报属于他处,现世有诸障碍随之,如经中所说“因其果报障碍故,因无果报障碍故不熄灭”,亦无一时可见现象。故该“善业增长”应解释为因善业广泛运作而生障碍之意。若因供养而生善业,即应说是善业果报的生起,然而此中重点是善业的增广,故用“广泛”以示之。此义如《相应部注释》所说“宽广”等同于“广大”,即是大之纯净无染。
Tassānubhāvenāti tassa yathāvuttassa puññappavāhassa ānubhāvena balena. Hatantarāyoti taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho. Paṇāmapayojane vuttavidhinā hato viddhasto antarāyo upaddavo assāti hatantarāyo. Assa ‘‘vaṇṇayissaṃ vinaya’’nti iminā sambandho, hatantarāyo hutvā vinayaṃ vaṇṇayissanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena tassa puññappavāhassa attano pasādasampattiyā ratanattayassa ca khettabhāvasampattiyā atthasaṃvaṇṇanāya upaghātakaupaddavānaṃ hanane samatthataṃ dīpeti.
“因其感用”者,指此种善业增长的内在力。所谓“果报障碍”,是指毁坏世间众生之相续流转的障碍,为现象的相违。供养之用法中,损坏与刺破等皆属障碍。因此称之为果报之障碍。该障碍的毁灭后,戒律则能完善,再由此释守戒律。由此说明善业增长和自身安乐、三宝具足发展有关,亦破坏障碍其为祥和。
Evaṃ ratanattayassa nipaccakārakaraṇe payojanaṃ dassetvā idāni yassa vinayapiṭakassa atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇetukāmo, tassa tāva bhagavato sāsanassa mūlapatiṭṭhānabhāvaṃ dassetvā tampi thomento āha ‘‘yasmiṃ ṭhite’’tiādi. Aṭṭhitassa susaṇṭhitassa bhagavato sāsanaṃ yasmiṃ ṭhite patiṭṭhitaṃ hotīti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha yasminti yasmiṃ vinayapiṭake. Ṭhiteti pāḷito ca atthato ca anūnaṃ hutvā lajjīpuggalesu pavattanaṭṭhena ṭhiteti attho. Sāsananti adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāsaṅkhātasikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sāsanaṃ. Aṭṭhitassāti kāmasukhallikattakilamathānuyogasaṅkhāte antadvaye aṭṭhitassāti attho. ‘‘Appatiṭṭhaṃ khvāhaṃ, āvuso, anāyūhaṃ oghamatari’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.1) hi vuttaṃ. Ayañcattho tīsupi sīhaḷagaṇṭhipadesu vuttoyeva. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘aṭṭhitassāti parinibbutassapi bhagavato’’ti vuttaṃ.
如此论述三宝安乐之因果,此时欲述律藏之义,因其亦显示如来教法之根基,故引言曰“安住者”。即安住圆满的如来教法。此处“安住”意指至少能对羞耻具足之人持续教化而不失效。教法即具戒、定、慧三学之教法。所谓“安住”,意指临近苦乐等二相之间而坚立不动。如经言“不稳如水势汹涌”。此义由斯里兰卡三部集之长集经中见,也有例证称“安住即是如来涅槃后教法安立”。
Patiṭṭhitaṃ hotīti tesuyeva lajjīpuggalesu pavattanaṭṭhena patiṭṭhitaṃ hoti. Susaṇṭhitassāti ettha tāva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanehi samannāgamanavasena susaṇṭhānassāti attho. Anena assa rūpakāyasampattiṃ nidassetī’’ti. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘yathāṭhāne patiṭṭhitehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgatattā rūpakāyena susaṇṭhito, kāyavaṅkādirahitattā tādilakkhaṇasamannāgatattā ca nāmakāyenapī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘catubrahmavihāravasena sattesu suṭṭhu sammā ca ṭhitassāti atthavasena vā susaṇṭhitassa. Susaṇṭhitattā hesa kevalaṃ sattānaṃ dukkhaṃ apanetukāmo hitaṃ upasaṃharitukāmo sampattiyā ca pamudito apakkhapatito ca hutvā vinayaṃ deseti. Tasmā imasmiṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanādhikāre sāruppāya thutiyā thomento āha ‘susaṇṭhitassā’’’ti vatvā ‘‘gaṇṭhipadesu vuttattho adhippetādhikārānurūpo na hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti – yathāvuttakāmasukhallikādiantadvaye aṭṭhitattāyeva majjhimāya paṭipadāya sammā ṭhitattā susaṇṭhitassāti evamattho gahetabboti. Evañhi sati ārambhānurūpathomanā katā hoti yathāvuttaantadvayaṃ vivajjetvā majjhimāya paṭipadāya vinayapaññattiyāyeva yebhuyyena pakāsanato.
“安立”意谓此处所言之羞耻具足之人中,教法能够生起巩固。“圆满保持”此处所谓“圆满保持”,于此三部集的三经中解释为“基于二十二大丈夫之相成熟而保持”。此示佛身之相完备而寿命长久。中集经云:“安立的即是诸处所应依相完全,身体保全无倒曲之相,名色身亦然。”此外,有言“四梵行能正住诸有”为正确意义的安立。圆满保持者非独生苦,而是善欲生利乐,得欢喜,乐意开示戒律。因此论律藏安住时,初兴论者近义时赞曰“圆满保持”,又言在集经中此义不适用于三部集。此乃本大师们对《律藏》二相之间之中道修习以达圆满保持的宽容见解。如此心念时,依教法正行、破二相而行中道,显示出对律法规约最为清晰的弘扬。
Tanti pubbe ‘‘yasmi’’nti aniyametvā vuttassa niyamavacanaṃ, tassa ‘‘vinaya’’nti iminā sambandho. Asammissanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, nikāyantaraladdhīhi asammissaṃ katvā anākulaṃ katvā vaṇṇayissanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sikkhāpadapaññattiyā anurūpassa kālamattassapi dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherasadisenapi duviññeyyabhāvato kevalaṃ buddhavisayaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ attano balena vaṇṇayissāmīti vacanamattampi aññehi vattumasakkuṇeyyattā ‘‘nissāya pubbācariyānubhāva’’nti āha. Pubbācariyānubhāvo nāma atthato pubbācariyehi saṃvaṇṇitā aṭṭhakathā, tatoyeva ca ‘‘pubbācariyānubhāvo aṭṭhakathā’’ti sabbattha gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Tasmā pubbācariyehi saṃvaṇṇitaṃ aṭṭhakathaṃ nissāya vaṇṇayissaṃ, na attanoyeva balaṃ nissāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
此前,对于“yasmi”(……之中)一词不加限制地使用,并称之为规律语句,其与“律藏”具有联系。修行人经文的解释,因各部经集之间的传承不同,文义不相一致,故以不含混乱的方式分类、叙述,谓之“所说的”。依照戒律规条的约定和时机,法军统帅沙利佛长老引用此处的说法称:法理双重难解,唯有律藏是纯粹围绕佛境界阐述,由其自身力量可独立宣说。稍微言语增减仍可被接受,其他人则难以承受,因故称之为“依赖前师之述”。所谓前师之述,实际上是指先师所论述的阿含注释,即“前师之述注”一词普遍用于各处经文段落。因此,今后将依赖前师所述的讲解,而非依靠自身力量来阐述,此即所说。
Atha ‘‘porāṇaṭṭhakathāsu vijjamānāsu puna vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya kiṃ payojana’’nti yo vadeyya, tassa porāṇaṭṭhakathāya anūnabhāvaṃ attano ca saṃvaṇṇanāya payojanaṃ dassento ‘‘kāmañcā’’tiādimāha. Kāmanti ekantena, yathicchakaṃ vā, sabbasoti vuttaṃ hoti, tassa ‘‘saṃvaṇṇito’’ti iminā sambandho. Kāmaṃ saṃvaṇṇitoyeva, no na saṃvaṇṇitoti attho. Kehi pana so vinayo saṃvaṇṇitoti āha ‘‘pubbācariyāsabhehī’’ti. Mahākassapattherādayo pubbācariyā eva akampiyaṭṭhena uttamaṭṭhena ca āsabhā, tehi pubbācariyāsabhehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kīdisā panete pubbācariyāti āha ‘‘ñāṇambū’’tiādi. Aggamaggañāṇasaṅkhātena ambunā salilena niddhotāni nissesato āyatiṃ anuppattidhammatāpādanena dhotāni vikkhālitāni visodhitāni rāgādīni tīṇi malāni kāmāsavādayo ca cattāro āsavā yehi te ñāṇambuniddhātamalāsavā, tehīti attho. Iminā ca na kevalaṃ etesu ācariyabhāvoyeva, atha kho rāgādimalarahitā khīṇāsavā visuddhasattā eteti dasseti.
接着,若有人问:“既然已有古注,那为何还要重新叙述律藏呢?”对此就古注产生的问答及自身叙述的意义,作答说“为欲”。“欲”即全然随意、自由,是古注与此重新叙述的联系。此处的“叙述”为“欲”的体现,而非未叙述之意。有些律藏说“前师之友”,指的是大咖萨巴长老等前师以坚定不移的精神与至上的美德树立了楷模,大众因此称之为“前师之友”。“何谓前师之友”则释为“智慧之水”等。根据根本经论之慧泉、水波所浸润,以未来不生法之热断,洗清与散除烦恼染污,这四种烦恼和欲贪分别代表了色欲等三痴污垢,称为“智慧之水浸泡之泥污”。由此可见,此义不仅仅是说明他们作为老师的身份,还标示了他们已断贪染,具足清净的圣者境界。
Khīṇāsavabhāvepi na ete sukkhavipassakā, atha kho evarūpehipi ānubhāvehi samannāgatāti dassento āha ‘‘visuddhavijjāpaṭisambhidehī’’ti. Visuddhā accantaparisuddhā vijjā catasso ca paṭisambhidā yesaṃ te visuddhavijjāpaṭisambhidā, tehi. Ekadesena paṭisambhidaṃ appattānaṃ ariyānameva abhāvato etehi adhigatapaṭisambhidā paṭutaraladdhappabhedāti dassetuṃ visuddhaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Vijjāti tisso vijjā, aṭṭha vijjā vā. Tattha dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇañcāti imā tisso vijjā. Aṭṭha vijjā pana –
即便在断尽烦恼的状态中,这些圣者并非都是禅定中安乐智慧的修行者。由此引入“清净智慧般达妙”的说法,意在指出这些圣者具备清净、极致清净的智慧,并拥有四种般达智慧中的专门智慧。这四种清净智慧具名为“般达妙清净智慧”,其中有些特殊般达智慧因圣典中未出现和境界差异而作了详细汇集。所谓智慧,就是三种智慧,亦即八种智慧。其中特殊的三种智慧是:天眼知识、宿命知识及断除烦恼的知识。八种智慧则是——
‘‘Vipassanāñāṇamanomayiddhi ,
“观智、心随成就智,
Iddhippabhedopi ca dibbasotaṃ;
神通之力与神通耳,
Parassa cetopariyāyañāṇaṃ,
他心知识与心念通知。”
Pubbenivāsānugatañca ñāṇaṃ;
前生所随之智识;
Dibbañca cakkhāsavasaṅkhayo ca,
天眼与烦恼断灭;
Etāni ñāṇāni idhaṭṭha vijjā’’ti. –
此等诸智乃此处所说之智慧。”——
Evaṃ vipassanāñāṇamanomayiddhīhi saddhiṃ pariggahitā cha abhiññāyeva. Atthapaṭisambhidā dhammapaṭisambhidā niruttipaṭisambhidā paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāti catasso paṭisambhidā. Tattha saṅkhepato hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā, hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā, hetuhetuphalānurūpaṃ vohāresu ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā, idaṃ ñāṇaṃ imamatthaṃ jotayatīti iminā ākārena heṭṭhā vuttesu tīsu ñāṇesu pavattañāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidā. Etāsaṃ pana vitthārakathā atipapañcabhāvato idha na vuccati. Paṭisambhidāppattānaṃ saddhammesu chekabhāvato āha ‘‘saddhammasaṃvaṇṇanakovidehī’’ti. ‘‘Paṭisambhidāppattānampi dhammesu abhiyogavasena viseso hotīti laddhapaṭisambhidāsu sātisayataṃ dassetuṃ āhā’’tipi vadanti. Saddhammasaṃvaṇṇanakovidehīti piṭakattayasaṅkhātassa saddhammassa saṃvaṇṇane sabbaso atthappakāsane kovidehi chekehi, kusalehīti attho.
如是,内观三昧所成之慧与心力合一,遂得六神通,且集聚四种分解智慧:即义理分解、断义分解、语言义分解及即时应对分解。略说之中,依因果说之慧为义理分解,依因说之慧为断义分解,依因果相称之语为语言义分解,而依此三慧于下三者所转之随顺慧即为即时应对分解。这些者之详细说未于此处多加展开。对于分解智慧,于佛法正理验具者,称之为‘善于正理阐明者’。亦有言‘分解智慧亦为法之指控,故于得法上当以七十六种显显其妙’,此乃言其为得到分解智慧者。所谓善于正理阐明者,即三藏所述之正法于全体义理表达中,善于精明阐述,具足善巧之意也。
Kilesajālaṃ parikkhārabāhullaṃ vā saṃlikhati tanuṃ karotīti sallekho. Idha pana khīṇāsavādhikārattā parikkhārabāhullassa sallikhanavaseneva attho gahetabbo, tatoyeva ca gaṇṭhipade ‘‘sallekhiye parimitaparikkhāravuttiyā’’ti attho vutto. Sallekhassa bhāvo sallekhiyaṃ, tasmiṃ sallekhiye, sallekhapaṭipattiyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Nosulabhūpamehīti asulabhūpamehi sallekhapaṭipattiyā asukasadisāti tesaṃ upamāya anucchavikapuggalānaṃ dullabhattā natthi sulabhā upamā etesanti nosulabhūpamā. Mahāvihārassāti cittalapabbataabhayagirisesanikāyadvayaṃ paṭikkhipati. Dhajūpamehīti rathassa sañjānanahetukaṃ rathe baddhadhajaṃ viya ajānantānaṃ ‘‘asukehi ca asukehi ca therehi nivāsito mahāvihāro nāmā’’ti evaṃ mahāvihārassa sañjānanahetuttā mahāvihārassa dhajūpamehi. Saṃvaṇṇitoti sammā anūnaṃ katvā vaṇṇito. Saṃvaṇṇito ayaṃ vinayoti padacchedo kātabbo. Cittehi nayehīti anekappabhedanayattā vicittehi nayehi. Sambuddhavaranvayehīti sabbaññubuddhavaraṃ anugatehi, bhagavato adhippāyānugatehi nayehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā buddhavaraṃ anugatehi pubbācariyāsabhehīti sambandho kātabbo.
染污之网、烦恼之事,或包围漫延皆称执著写题。今此处指染污已灭更胜执著写之权能,故总取此义,谓執取曰题目。于此处曰‘以狭围执著所书写’,故‘题写’之义应当如此理解。题写即题目之状态称为题写;成题写为题写之行为。以极难得之喻言极难得,故题写为不易得。大寺即称心山与虎印山两峰断称。以旗喻言:车上所系旗帜似无知者束缚,如此大寺之名由此认知因缘。阐述即是适当完成至少之描写,乃是理法描述者所为。需断章取义,因多种分别之理,以多分别理引导。于智者导师慧业相关,即诸多智者之配合引导,如来之契合于诸尊师大德,称为顺导师。若与佛前行契合者,谓之诸佛前行诠释与相关。
Evaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathāya anūnabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni attano saṃvaṇṇanāya payojanavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanā’’tiādimāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kiñcāpi pubbācariyāsabhehi yathāvuttaguṇavisiṭṭhehi ayaṃ vinayo sabbaso vaṇṇito, tathāpi tesaṃ esā saṃvaṇṇanā sīhaḷadīpavāsīnaṃ bhāsāya saṅkhatattā racitattā dīpantare bhikkhujanassa sīhaḷadīpato aññadīpavāsino bhikkhugaṇassa kiñci atthaṃ payojanaṃ yasmā nābhisambhuṇāti na sampādeti na sādheti, tasmā imaṃ saṃvaṇṇanaṃ pāḷinayānurūpaṃ katvā buddhasirittherena ajjhiṭṭho idāni samārabhissanti. Tattha saṃvaṇṇiyati attho etāyāti saṃvaṇṇanā, aṭṭhakathā. Sā pana dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi paṭhamaṃ tīṇi piṭakāni saṅgāyitvā tassa atthavaṇṇanānurūpeneva vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhoyeva buddhavacanassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūto kathāmaggo. Soyeva ca mahāmahindattherena tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ ābhato, pacchā tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi nikāyantaraladdhīhi saṅkarapariharaṇatthaṃ sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapito. Tenāha ‘‘sīhaḷadīpakenā’’tiādi. Sīhassa lānato gahaṇato sīhaḷo, sīhakumāro. Taṃvaṃsajātatāya tambapaṇṇidīpe khattiyānaṃ tesaṃ nivāsatāya tambapaṇṇidīpassapi sīhaḷabhāvo veditabbo, tasmiṃ sīhaḷadīpe bhūtattā sīhaḷadīpakena vākyena vacanena, sīhaḷabhāsāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
如是由古老注疏显示其最低限之义味,而今为自己阐述特定用途之描述,名曰“描述”等。此则谓——即便由诸佛先行者等,具足如所说之卓越功德,此律藏皆称为描述,唯独此描述乃为锡兰岛僧众所集成,于锡兰语境中所撰,故对其他地域僧众并无若干用途,不能普遍得利,故由佛名长老依据律藏而重新修订,现今再出,称之。所谓描述即此,释义为注疏。首为律藏集成长老将三藏集成,依其义解而加以编纂,即三十二藏。如同魔南长老于锡兰岛所著,后来于锡兰之大师为避免误混,乃以锡兰语重立。此称“依锡兰岛者”。锡兰者,以狮子耳之意,狮子子嗣也。因锡兰为刹帝利众多所居,故锡兰存于锡兰岛,故名锡兰语者,即此是也。
Pāḷinayānurūpanti pāḷinayassa anurūpaṃ katvā, māgadhabhāsāya parivattitvāti vuttaṃ hoti . Ajjhesananti garuṭṭhāniyaṃ payirupāsitvā garutaraṃ payojanaṃ uddissa abhipatthanā ajjhesanā, taṃ ajjhesanaṃ, āyācananti attho. Tassa ‘‘samanussaranto’’ti iminā sambandho. Kassa ajjhesananti āha ‘‘buddhasirivhayassa therassā’’ti. Buddhasirīti avhayo nāmaṃ yassa soyaṃ buddhasirivhayo, tassa, itthannāmassa therassa ajjhesanaṃ sammā ādarena samanussaranto hadaye ṭhapentoti attho.
与巴利文相应者,谓如法于巴利文中加以符合。又说因转为摩揭陀语而成。Ajjhesana者,意指奉敬、恭敬,入于上意之意,乃是便利有益之所为,故称为“ajjhesana”,又言为请求。此中“samanussaranto”者指依此相关。至于谁是ajjhesan者,则说是“佛陀尊者之大德”。“Buddhasiri”意指佛陀大德的称号。对某女性名长老,正以恭敬与追忆之心,存此敬意于心中,即是此意。
Idāni attano saṃvaṇṇanāya karaṇappakāraṃ dassento ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanaṃ tañcā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tañca idāni vuccamānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanaṃ samārabhanto sakalāyapi mahāaṭṭhakathāya idha gahetabbato mahāaṭṭhakathaṃ tassā idāni vuccamānāya saṃvaṇṇanāya sarīraṃ katvā mahāpaccariyaṃ yo vinicchayo vutto, tatheva kurundīnāmādīsu vissutāsu aṭṭhakathāsu yo vinicchayo vutto, tatopi vinicchayato yuttamatthaṃ apariccajanto antogadhattheravādaṃ katvā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ samārabhissanti padatthasambandho veditabbo. Ettha ca attho kathiyati etāyāti atthakathā, sāyeva aṭṭhakathā tthakārassa ṭṭhakāraṃ katvā ‘‘dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.17; 2.8) viya. Mahāpaccariyanti ettha paccarīti uḷumpaṃ vuccati, tasmiṃ nisīditvā katattā tameva nāmaṃ jātaṃ. Kurundivallivihāro nāma atthi, tattha katattā kurundīti nāmaṃ jātanti vadanti. Ādisaddena andhakaṭṭhakathaṃ saṅkhepaṭṭhakathañca saṅgaṇhāti. Vissutāsūti sabbattha patthaṭāsu, pākaṭāsūti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,将自述方式之方法示现,称为“自述”等言。此处所说之“自述”,起于大注疏中,今当取用大注疏正在诠释之时所启用的“自述”。其旨则是分别身体,称为大综述,如所宣说之鉴别判决。又如在“苦之痛苦”等词句,例如大注疏的作者所作,视为注疏之正体。所谓大综述,即称为“paccari”,其名号由其作此处而生。据说有称为“库伦迪”者之别住处,注疏即作于此,故称“库伦迪”。其初言带有“盲黑的注释”和“略解注释”之名,领受涵盖。所称之“清晰”,即指普遍之明显,亦即公开据说。
Yuttamatthanti ettha tāva majjhimagaṇṭhipade cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yuttamatthanti saṃvaṇṇetabbaṭṭhānassa yuttamatthaṃ, na pana tattha ayuttampi atthīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Mahāgaṇṭhipade panettha na kiñci vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathānayena vinayayuttiyā vā yuttamattha’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati mahāpaccariādīsupi katthaci ayuttassāpi atthassa upari vibhāvanato. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathaṃyeva gahetvā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karissāmī’’ti vutte aṭṭhakathāsu vuttattheravādānaṃ bāhirabhāvo siyāti tepi antokattukāmo ‘‘antogadhatheravāda’’nti āha, theravādepi antokatvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṃvaṇṇananti aparakālakiriyāya kammaniddeso. Pubbe vuttaṃ tu ‘‘saṃvaṇṇana’’nti vacanaṃ tattheva ‘‘samārabhanto’’ti pubbakālakiriyāya kammabhāvena yojetabbaṃ. Sammāti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena rassabhāvo katoti veditabbo.
至于“正理义”,此在中级藏和小级藏皆有言“正理义者,即应述说所在之正理义,并非无理亦无义”。于大藏中无此语。另有言“由大注疏家或律相合者而言正理义”,此义似现于大综述类著作之上,亦于某处有对无义之析别。言“只采注疏施行自述”,据此可知注疏中有提出反对外部论述者,称之为「内资派」。即内资说谓具有内在正统论证之意。“自述”,即他时行为之所在指示。曾言“自述”字眼正当生成,随前因业相连而起。此“samma”于缴纳诗缓相同时应视为声音的美妙韵律。
Evaṃ karaṇappakāraṃ dassetvā idāni sotūhi paṭipajjitabbavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘taṃ me’’tiādimāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – idāni vuccamānaṃ taṃ mama saṃvaṇṇanaṃ dhammapadīpassa tathāgatassa dhammaṃ sāsanadhammaṃ pāḷidhammaṃ vā sakkaccaṃ paṭimānayantā pūjentā thirehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattā therā, acirapabbajitattā navā, tesaṃ majjhe bhavattā majjhimā ca bhikkhū pasannacittā yathāvuttanayena sappayojanattā upari vakkhamānavidhinā pamāṇattā ca saddahitvā pītisomanassayuttacittā issāpakatā ahutvā nisāmentu suṇantūti. Tattha dhammappadīpassāti dhammoyeva sattasantānesu mohandhakāravidhamanato padīpasadisattā padīpo assāti dhammapadīpo, bhagavā. Tassa dhammapadīpassa.
示现此说明法之方式后,现今为听众说明应循行之法,则言“taṃ me”等等。此乃谓目前所称之“我自述”为正法明灯,乃如来的法教诸法教法、巴利文法之正统,秉持节制为根本、已具其固有之长老及新入僧众,其中间之僧众皆心净洒脱,无邪念,心生喜悦,同时证实如实如量,具信心安心专心而悦受听闻。此处所称“法明灯”,意谓法乃灭除众生中无明及其所致之蔽障的光明火把,是佛陀所示之法灯。
Idāni attano saṃvaṇṇanāya āgamavisuddhiṃ dassetvā pamāṇabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘buddhenā’’tiādimāha. Yatheva buddhena yo dhammo ca vinayo ca vutto, so tassa buddhassa yehi puttehi dhammasenāpatiādīhi tatheva ñāto, tesaṃ buddhaputtānaṃ matimaccajantā sīhaḷaṭṭhakathācariyā yasmā pure aṭṭhakathā akaṃsūti ayamettha sambandho. Tattha dhammoti suttābhidhamme saṅgaṇhāti, vinayoti sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ. Ettāvatā ca sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ hoti. Sakalañhi buddhavacanaṃ dhammavinayavasena duvidhaṃ hoti. Vuttoti pāḷito ca atthato ca buddhena bhagavatā vutto. Na hi bhagavatā abyākataṃ nāma tantipadaṃ atthi, sabbesaṃyeva attho kathito, tasmā sammāsambuddheneva tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ atthavaṇṇanākkamopi bhāsitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha tattha bhagavatā pavattitā pakiṇṇakadesanāyeva hi aṭṭhakathā. Tatheva ñātoti yatheva buddhena vutto, tatheva ekapadampi ekakkharampi avināsetvā adhippāyañca avikopetvā ñāto viditoti attho. Tesaṃ matimaccajantāti tesaṃ buddhaputtānaṃ adhippāyaṃ apariccajantā. Aṭṭhakathā akaṃsūti aṭṭhakathāyo akaṃsu. Katthaci ‘‘aṭṭhakathāmakaṃsū’’ti pāṭho dissati, tatthāpi soyevattho, ma-kāro pana padasandhivasena āgatoti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathā’’ti bahuvacananiddesena mahāpaccariyādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
今就自述说明所具之来清净与标准意义,说“由佛”者。即如所说佛之法与律,及其子弟诸法师,亦如斯里兰卡注疏大师之意,由于前人无所注疏,此为相关。此处“法”泛指经说,律指律藏全体。一切皆佛陀所转教说之法故有义。佛陀绝无含糊模棱之语,众义皆由佛及其代代弟子表述,故所说三藏教义及注疏必由正觉佛陀示现。注疏即为佛陀示现之散布诸法之讲说。佛陀所教,依其语义不失真,即使单音节亦无缺漏,由此能明智认识。“其子弟善摄诸法,意为不舍特指佛子弟。注疏即为祖师门徒所作,名为注疏者众,亦或称为大综述等。若见“注疏者众”的文句,其实为合并语,须知如此。
Tasmāti yasmā tesaṃ buddhaputtānaṃ adhippāyaṃ avikopetvā pure aṭṭhakathā akaṃsu, tasmāti attho. Hīti nipātamattaṃ hetuatthassa ‘‘tasmā’’ti imināyeva pakāsitattā. Yadi aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ sabbampi pamāṇaṃ, evaṃ sati tattha pamādalekhāpi pamāṇaṃ siyāti āha ‘‘vajjayitvāna pamādalekha’’nti. Tattha pamādalekhanti aparabhāge potthakāruḷhakāle pamajjitvā likhanavasena pavattaṃ pamādapāṭhaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pamādena satiṃ apaccupaṭṭhapetvā adinnādānassa pubbapayoge ‘‘saccepi alikepi dukkaṭa’’nti vuttavacanasadisaṃ yaṃ likhitaṃ, taṃ vajjayitvā apanetvā sabbaṃ pamāṇanti. Vakkhati hi tattha –
于是因其佛子弟不舍执持,以前曾作注疏,故有此义。词“tasmā”乃因缘标示之用,仅为表因果。若注疏中皆是规范法则,如实存在,甚至失足之笔亦实为规范,故言“摒弃错误之稿”。此处“摒弃错误之稿”指前人因粗心大意而作之错笔书写,视为非正式版本。此言即为告诫诸行者戒除因忘怠而所作不良文字,譬如先前已言“即便相反但亦为恶业”,暗示前世不善所致之恶业,现应摒弃废止。此言暗示,连文字之误录亦属业果,故当剔除。后文尚在详细论述。
‘‘Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana saccepi alikepi dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ, taṃ pamādalikhitanti veditabbaṃ. Na hi adinnādānassa pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭaṃ nāma atthī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94).
『大注疏中诚然也曾说过坏戒乃是不善行,为此应当了知其中多有疏漏缺失。因为不与取戒律事前的应用上,并无称其为恶的戒律存在』(某处注疏第1卷94页)。
Kesaṃ pamāṇanti āha ‘‘sikkhāsu sagāravānaṃ idha paṇḍitāna’’nti. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Puna ‘‘yasmā’’ti vacanassa ko sambandhoti ce? Ettha tāva mahāgaṇṭhipade gaṇṭhipade ca na kiñci vuttaṃ, majjhimagaṇṭhipade pana cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā pamāṇaṃ, tasmā nisāmentu pasannacittā’’ti. Evamassa sambandho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā idha vuttampi pamāṇamevāti pāṭhasesaṃ katvā vajirabuddhitthero vadati. Tattha idhāti imissā samantapāsādikāyāti attho gahetabbo.
关于度量标准,有言曰『此处指的是在戒律修习中具敬重者,谓之圣贤』。此言「此处」表示在此教法中。又关于“因为(yasmā)”此词,有何关联呢?这里在大戒团处及小戒团处未见相关论述,但中戒团和小戒团处却言曰『因为是度量标准,所以诸比库秉持心净清明宁静』。如此关联应当观察得知。既然在注疏中说到度量标准,那么此处所说的度量标准亦即遵循此注疏的整体原则,这是总括说明而佛音长老指出的。这里“此处”乃取自《永恒集论》(Samantapāsādikā)之意。
Tattha ‘‘yasmā’’ti vacanassa paṭhamaṃ vuttasambandhavasena aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ sabbampi pamāṇanti sādhitattā idāni vuccamānāpi saṃvaṇṇanā kevalaṃ vacanamatteneva bhinnā, atthato pana aṭṭhakathāyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tato ca bhāsantaramevā’’tiādimāha. Pacchā vuttasambandhavasena pana idha vuttampi kasmā pamāṇanti ce? Yasmā vacanamattaṃ ṭhapetvā esāpi aṭṭhakathāyeva, tasmā pamāṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tato ca bhāsantaramevā’’tiādimāha. Evamākulaṃ dubbiññeyyasabhāvañca katvā gaṇṭhipadesu sambandho dassito, anākulavacano ca bhadantabuddhaghosācariyo. Na hi so evamākulaṃ katvā vattumarahati, tasmā yathādhippetamatthamanākulaṃ suviññeyyañca katvā yathāṭhitassa sambandhavaseneva dassayissāma. Kathaṃ? Yasmā aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti evamettha sambandho daṭṭhabbo. Yadi nāma aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, ayaṃ pana idāni vuccamānā kasmā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti āha ‘‘tato ca bhāsantarameva hitvā’’tiādi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, yasmā ca ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāpi bhāsantarapariccāgādimattavisiṭṭhā, atthato pana abhinnāva, tatoyeva ca pamāṇabhūtā hessati, tasmā sakkaccaṃ ādaraṃ katvā anusikkhitabbāti. Tathā hi porāṇaṭṭhakathānaṃ pamāṇabhāvo, imissā ca saṃvaṇṇanāya bhāsantarapariccāgādimattavisiṭṭhāya atthato tato abhinnabhāvoti ubhayampetaṃ sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbabhāvahetūti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi kevalaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathānaṃ satipi pamāṇabhāve ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā tato bhinnā atthato aññāyeva ca sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti vattumarahati, nāpi imissā saṃvaṇṇanāya tatoabhinnabhāvepi porāṇaṭṭhakathānaṃ asati pamāṇabhāve ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti vattuṃ yuttarūpā hoti, tasmā yathāvuttanayena ubhayampetaṃ sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbabhāvahetūti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这里‘因为’一词作为首先所述之关系,注疏中所说‘一切皆为度量标准’,这是经过验证所认可者,如今虽以说明文方式表达,但意义应以注疏整体为准,故言『且此即是注释语言的变换表达』。后又作为所述关系,问为何此处也说度量标准?即仅以言语文本为基础立足,因此仍是属于注疏范畴,故言『且此即是语言上的旋转变化』。如此解释,表明该中小戒团处的关联已被理清,由佛音长老以明净语言述说。因其理路明晰,所以不会反对这样说,我们因而明了其不混乱,以恰当的意义正确通达其相互关系。如何做到?既然注疏中说到度量标准,理应细心遵守,故此处的关联应明示为“且此是语言上的变换”,故释为:“既注疏所述之度量标准存在,且此注释虽为语言表达上的转换舍弃,但意义本质上与原注疏一致,二者皆为度量标准,因此应恭敬细心地遵守”。诚然,古注疏若为度量标准,则此处说明的语言表达变化与古注疏意义实质相通,一致存在,故二者皆应细心遵守。非仅单就古注疏的度量标准而言,其语言表达变化并非完全不同,而应一同恭敬遵守,这是理所当然。因此我们观察到,此处理路是:因古注疏中存在度量标准,此处说明的语言变化也须细心遵守。
Tatoti aṭṭhakathāto. Bhāsantarameva hitvāti kañcukasadisaṃ sīhaḷabhāsaṃ apanetvā. Vitthāramaggañca samāsayitvāti porāṇaṭṭhakathāsu upari vuccamānampi ānetvā tattha tattha papañcitaṃ ‘‘ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampannoti bhikkhū’’ti (pārā. 45) ettha apalokanādīnaṃ catunnampi kammānaṃ vitthārakathā viya tādisaṃ vitthāramaggaṃ saṅkhipitvā vaṇṇayissāmāti adhippāyo. Tathā hi vakkhati –
论到此处注疏,所谓“语言变换”,即采用似衣袋的僧伽罗语表达方式。且“集成详述”意谓在前注疏之上,再引入并综合描述。其内还涉引古注疏中所说之言:“以四种戒律为基,正式巴拉摩羯比库受具足戒……”(某处第45页),这里涉及剔除及业相四种行为、以近听法规为例,再加以综合说解的立意。佛音长老道述曰:
‘‘Ettha ca ñatticatutthakammaṃ ekameva āgataṃ, imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā cattāri saṅghakammāni nīharitvā vitthārato kathetabbānīti sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ, tāni ca ‘apalokanakammaṃ ñattikammaṃ ñattidutiyakammaṃ ñatticatutthakamma’nti paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapetvā vitthārena khandhakato parivārāvasāne kammavibhaṅgato ca pāḷiṃ āharitvā kathitāni. Tāni mayaṃ parivārāvasāne kammavibhaṅgeyeva vaṇṇayissāma. Evañhi sati paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā ca na bhāriyā bhavissati, yathāṭhitāya ca pāḷiyā vaṇṇanā suviññeyyā bhavissati, tāni ca ṭhānāni asuññāni bhavissanti, tasmā anupadavaṇṇanameva karomā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.45 bhikkhupadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā).
『在此处,关于业相四种行为其中之一而来者,于此场所立说四种僧团戒则,依法皆在古注疏之中,且按顺序列示为“近听业、业相一、业相二、业相四”,并详细引述经文及戒律划分。此等部分将于结尾律篇附录中描述及详论。因如此,起首破戒篇的说明将不会过于繁复,按此文理对巴利文的注释也甚为明了,只余相关部分未作注释,故仅作简要解说』(某处大注疏第1卷45页,论比库分位释)
Vinicchayaṃsabbamasesayitvāti taṃtaṃaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ sabbampi vinicchayaṃ asesayitvā sesaṃ akatvā, kiñcimattampi apariccajitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vaṇṇituṃ yuttarūpaṃ hutvā anukkamena āgataṃ pāḷiṃ apariccajitvā saṃvaṇṇanato sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāsu ayuttaṭṭhāne vaṇṇitaṃ yathāṭhāneyeva saṃvaṇṇanato ca vuttaṃ ‘‘tantikkamaṃ kiñci avokkamitvā’’ti, kiñci pāḷikkamaṃ anatikkamitvā anukkameneva vaṇṇayissāmāti adhippāyo.
所谓“精细终结”,意谓在不同注疏中所说的全部均须作最终整理,不能有所遗漏和遗忘。亦说应详尽且适当,不可舍弃部分内容。为此,应采用恰当形式续写巴利文注释,并以同样顺序译成僧伽罗文注释,且于关键位置亦有注释说明曰:“若有遗漏则补之”,并约定“若复有巴利文遗漏部分,以此续写即可”,这是指导原则。
Suttantikānaṃ vacanānamatthanti suttantapāḷiyaṃ āgatānampi vacanānamatthaṃ. Sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘suttantikānaṃ bhāro’’ti vatvā avuttānampi verañjakaṇḍādīsu jhānakathāānāpānassatisamaādhiādīnaṃ suttantavacanānamatthaṃ taṃtaṃsuttānurūpaṃ sabbaso paridīpayissāmīti adhippāyo. Hessatīti bhavissati, kariyissatīti vā attho. Ettha ca paṭhamasmiṃ atthavikappe bhāsantarapariccāgādikaṃ catubbidhaṃ kiccaṃ nipphādetvā suttantikānaṃ vacanānamatthaṃ paridīpayantī ayaṃ vaṇṇanā bhavissatīti vaṇṇanāya vasena samānakattukatā veditabbā. Pacchimasmiṃ atthavikappe pana heṭṭhāvuttabhāsantarapariccāgādiṃ katvā suttantikānaṃ vacanānamatthaṃ paridīpayantī ayaṃ vaṇṇanā amhehi kariyissatīti evaṃ ācariyavasena samānakattukatā veditabbā. Vaṇṇanāpīti ettha apisaddaṃ gahetvā ‘‘tasmāpi sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti yojetabba’’nti cūḷagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Tattha pubbe vuttappayojanavisesaṃ pamāṇabhāvañca sampiṇḍetīti adhippāyo. Majjhimagaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘tasmā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāpī’’ti sambandho vutto. Ettha pana na kevalaṃ ayaṃ vaṇṇanā hessati, atha kho anusikkhitabbāpīti imamatthaṃ sampiṇḍetīti adhippāyo. Etthāpi yathāṭhitavaseneva apisaddassa attho gahetabboti amhākaṃ khanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, yasmā ca ayaṃ vaṇṇanāpi tato abhinnattā pamāṇabhūtāyeva hessati, tasmā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti.
经文之义即为经文的文义;对经文的译义也即是经文的文义。锡兰注疏中谓「经文之义为重」,即便对《诸恶出趣》等部分别讲解禅定、入出息念、正定等经文词义者,也应全面依照经文本义,贯通整体明示。此谓“意趣”。或言“应作”“将作”之义。此处初次意趣部分,略释离文译义等四种工作,明示经文之义,此为本注疏注解,显示了本注疏与经文本义的同一性。后来意趣部分,则删去低次译注,明示经文之义,此亦显示我们将依教授之意贯通一理。关于注疏者,戒律部小结中曾言“因此当谨慎修习”,此谓本注疏之目的倍加明白。故本注疏非独为释此注解,而为释明注疏之义。然我们亦以捨弃杂乱为忍,不失礼敬。此乃所说:因注疏中所证标准,且本注疏亦为准绳,以此故当谨慎用之。
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 论典开端语释已毕。
Bāhiranidānakathā
外部缘起讲解
Idāni ‘‘taṃ vaṇṇayissaṃ vinaya’’nti paṭiññātattā yathāpaṭiññātavinayasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo saṃvaravinayapahānavinayādivasena vinayassa bahuvidhattā idha saṃvaṇṇetabbabhāvena adhippeto tāva vinayo vavatthapetabboti dassento āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tattha tatthāti tāsu gāthāsu. Tāva-saddo paṭhamanti imasmiṃ atthe daṭṭhabbo. Tena paṭhamaṃ vinayaṃ vavatthapetvā pacchā tassa vaṇṇanaṃ karissāmīti dīpeti. Vavatthapetabboti niyametabbo. Tenetaṃ vuccatīti yasmā vavatthapetabbo, tena hetunā etaṃ ‘‘vinayo nāmā’’tiādikaṃ niyāmakavacanaṃ vuccatīti attho. Assāti vinayassa. Mātikāti uddeso. So hi niddesapadānaṃ jananīṭhāne ṭhitattā mātā viyāti mātikāti vuccati.
现今所谓“我要为律藏作此注解”,乃在约定俗成之义下,按照明确约定准备起草律藏注解。论律藏多样性依旧,以此文义作为总领,定律藏为注疏之目标而论述。谓“如彼处”等诗句所在。此中“彼处”之词,初步当在此文义中解知。于是先明述律藏本义,继而作其注解。所谓“应当注解”,即“应当加以规范”之意。由此,称“律藏”一词为此类规范名称。至于“纲目”者,意谓释义之母,因其于译释文义中立足故名。称“纲目”是因为其居于说明之基点。
Idāni vaṇṇetabbamatthaṃ mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā dassento āha ‘‘vuttaṃ yenā’’tiādi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – etaṃ ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharatī’’tiādinidānavacanapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ yena puggalena vuttaṃ, yasmiṃ kāle vuttaṃ, yasmā kāraṇā vuttaṃ, yena dhāritaṃ, yena ca ābhataṃ, yesu patiṭṭhitaṃ, etaṃ yathāvuttavidhānaṃ vatvā tato ‘‘tena samayenā’’tiādipāṭhassa atthaṃ anekappakārato dassayanto vinayassa atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmīti. Ettha ca ‘‘vuttaṃ yena yadā yasmā’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’tiādinidānavacanamattaṃ apekkhitvā vattukāmopi visuṃ avatvā ‘‘nidānena ādikalyāṇaṃ, ‘idamavocā’ti nigamanena pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti ca vacanato nidānanigamanānipi satthudesanāya anuvidhānattā tadantogadhānevāti nidānassapi vinayapāḷiyaṃyeva antogadhattā ‘‘vuttaṃ yena yadā yasmā’’ti idampi vinayapiṭakasambandhaṃyeva katvā mātikaṃ ṭhapesi. Mātikāya hi ‘‘eta’’nti vuttaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃyeva sāmaññato sabbattha sambandhamupagacchati.
今此意释设立纲目时,有言“此为所说诸义”,即以佛陀当时住于诸魔境故等缘起文为纲目,即律藏注解之根本,由某人为其阐释。其中叙述何时所说、由谁所说、缘由何在、由谁保持、由谁收受、由谁立法等事项。此以合理方式说明律藏义理,继而复合由“当时”为开头之文义解说。此“所说诸义”仅存缘起文义。意指此缘起文亦为律藏本体之一部分,故综合广义推写纲目注解。纲目本义即指律藏本体之通则,故又称纲目。
Idāni pana taṃ visuṃ nīharitvā dassento ‘‘tattha vuttaṃ yenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tesu mātikāpadesu. Atha kasmā idameva vacanaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘idañhī’’tiādi. Idanti ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’tiādivacanaṃ . Hi-saddo yasmāti atthe daṭṭhabbo, yasmā buddhassa bhagavato attapaccakkhavacanaṃ na hoti, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Attapaccakkhavacanaṃ na hotīti attano paccakkhaṃ katvā vuttavacanaṃ na hoti, bhagavatā vuttavacanaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Attapaccakkhavacanaṃ na hotīti āhacca bhāsitaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo’’ti kenaci vuttaṃ. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘attapaccakkhavacanaṃ na hotīti attano dharamānakāle vuttavacanaṃ na hotī’’ti likhitaṃ. Tadubhayampi atthato samānameva. Idāni pañhakaraṇaṃ vatvā anukkamena yathāvuttapañhavissajjanaṃ karonto ‘‘āyasmatā’’tiādimāha. Iminā puggalaṃ niyameti, ‘‘tañcā’’tiādinā kālaṃ niyameti. Tañca upālittherena vuttavacanaṃ kālato paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttanti attho.
今复舍去繁杂只明说“当时所说诸义”。此中“彼处”二字为纲目文词。复探此语所以而说,有言“因此”者,乃以该文中“当时所说佛陀”之集聚语句为由也。此“当时”乃谓佛世尊之所说直接语句非也,是故谓“所说”者非佛直接说者,乃释意曰:非佛直断所说之言云云。有人谓此谓“不是佛所说之语”云云。律藏结集部中曾言:“非佛所说,谓不是其自身法会时所说语句也。”两者从义上看殊途同归。今列举五问题,依次渐释,引出“长老”等敬称,所说意思即该言为由,示说是第一大结集时所说之意。此意旨在说话时空。
Paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā第一次大结集语释
Idāni taṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassetukāmo tassā tantiāruḷhāya idha vacane kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cesā…pe… veditabbā’’ti āha. Paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cesāti ca-saddo īdisesu ṭhānesu vattabbasampiṇḍanattho, tañca paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ, esā ca paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti evaṃ veditabbāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upaññāsattho vā ca-saddo. Upaññāsoti ca vākyārambho vuccati. Esā hi ganthakārānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ kiñci vatvā puna paraṃ vattumārabhantānaṃ casaddappayogo. Yaṃ pana kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cāti ettha ca-saddo atirekattho, tena aññāpi atthīti dīpetī’’ti. Tadeva tassa ganthakkame akovidataṃ dasseti. Na hettha casaddena atirekattho viññāyati. Yadi cettha etadatthoyeva ca-kāro adhippeto siyā, evaṃ sati na kattabboyeva paṭhamasaddeneva aññāsaṃ dutiyādisaṅgītīnampi atthibhāvassa dīpitattā. Dutiyādiṃ upādāya hi paṭhamasaddappayogo dīghādiṃ upādāya rassādisaddappayogo viya. Yathāpaccayaṃ tattha tattha desitattā paññattattā ca vippakiṇṇānaṃ dhammavinayānaṃ saṅgahetvā gāyanaṃ kathanaṃ saṅgīti. Etena taṃtaṃsikkhāpadānaṃ suttānañca ādipariyosānesu antarantarā ca sambandhavasena ṭhapitaṃ saṅgītikāravacanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Mahāvisayattā pūjanīyattā ca mahatī saṅgīti mahāsaṅgīti, paṭhamā mahāsaṅgīti paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti. Nidānakosallatthanti nidadāti desanaṃ desakālādivasena aviditaṃ viditaṃ katvā nidassetīti nidānaṃ, tattha kosallaṃ nidānakosallaṃ, tadatthanti attho.
今欲示第一大结集说法,于句中爬升层次,说明原因,谓“第一大结集名曰……”故言。第一大结集名词中,复言“乃以词语处所等扬说并合之义”,且曾名为“第一大结集”语。若有谓“第一大结集名中含多义,故亦可见别义”者,乃为识文断义,不宜为处。此处词义无他义,如此则不应由第一词语表示其他结集唱法的义理。第二结集等唱法乃依第一结集之词语生起其义理。第二结集唱法起因即为对第一结集词语之借用,致如拉长歌唱音之事。此乃诸律法间依序建立,唱诵呼说互相顺承关系。以此方有此众多修行戒法和经文的最初终结集合体。以其大要尊贵,故称“大结集”“第一大结集”。“缘起通巧”意谓切合说法时间和地条件,除隐显密而为明白讲说。
Sattānaṃ dassanānuttariyasaraṇādipaṭilābhahetubhūtāsu vijjamānāsupi aññāsu bhagavato kiriyāsu ‘‘buddho bodheyya’’nti paṭiññāya anulomanato veneyyānaṃ maggaphaluppattihetubhūtā kiriyā nippariyāyena buddhakiccanti āha ‘‘dhammacakkappavattanañhi ādiṃ katvā’’ti. Tattha saddhindriyādidhammoyeva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ. Atha vā cakkanti āṇā, dhammato anapetattā dhammañca taṃ cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena ñāyena cakkantipi dhammacakkaṃ. Yathāha –
在众生得以得见无上依止之法等因缘而追求时,即使诸智者中,若能了知世尊所作诸行为,即“觉者成道”,便知依顺演次而成就通达道果的行为乃究竟佛事。于是言曰:‘启动法轮最初已作’。其中由信根等诸法汇集而成的缘发动处,即称法轮。或说“轮”即慧,因无断正法而起,故此乃法轮;又由智慧因缘而转动此法轮。譬如言:“法转而为轮,轮转而为法,依法而转,依行法而转法轮”等语(参见释义集版第二卷第四十页)。
‘‘Dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammacariyāya pavattetīti dhammacakka’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 2.40).
“法转亦轮转,轮转亦法转,依法而转,即转法,而依行法而说法轮”等依文义解释(参释义集二二四〇页)。
Katabuddhakicceti kataṃ pariniṭṭhāpitaṃ buddhakiccaṃ yena, tasmiṃ katabuddhakicce bhagavati lokanātheti sambandho. Etena buddhakattabbassa kassacipi asesitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tatoyeva hi so bhagavā parinibbutoti. Nanu ca sāvakehi vinītāpi vineyyā bhagavatāyeva vinītā honti, tathā hi sāvakabhāsitaṃ suttaṃ buddhavacananti vuccati, sāvakavineyyā ca na tāva vinītāti? Nāyaṃ doso tesaṃ vinayanūpāyassa sāvakesu ṭhapitattā. Tenevāha –
所谓已成就的佛事,即已成就完成的佛行,世尊与世间之关系即在此佛事里。由此显示了佛的不可替代性。于是世尊谓涅槃已现。毋庸讥责弟子虽已规矩守戒,却仍应依世尊戒律谨守。实因弟子所说之经是佛所说,有弟子应守者,故戒慎。对此节制方式,世尊说曰:“我非恶人不会入涅槃,直至比库们学识精通、深入戒律、广闻经典、出席经典、知戒持戒及根本大纲章,扑灭外道谤法,善整治教,正宣说妙法”等(长部大念处经二一六八)。
‘‘Na tāvāhaṃ pāpima parinibbāyissāmi, yāva na bhikkhū viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṃ dhammaṃ desessantī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.168).
此为示现世尊涅槃真相之时间特质,时称“未涅槃世尊”,实为世间谬见,及世俗界礼敬身、等事亦假是故。实乃在人间形成极善之因,乃大圣始生,世尊遗留产业如家庭财物等皆在最后世间住处完成之时。名为拘尸那罗城。紧邻地名名为盐田。此地为马拉国王园,园中遍植沙罗树,称盐田园。园中有欲入园者绕园行走则谓之围绕而行,故称为盐田。其犹如阿努兰陀城南西方有高塔林,如此园位于拘尸那罗城南西游方。高塔林南门通往城门,出入口为北而回,园中树木朝向西门,这便称盐园。两沙罗园中间,称双沙罗园之间。传言世尊涅槃地即在此双沙罗园之间,一侧为头处一侧足处,中间亦有一年轻沙罗树各于头足两端故名。又“大注疏”言:“双沙罗园指由两根主干相连互相依附之树木所组之连生树群”为据。
‘‘Kusinārāya’’ntiādinā bhagavato parinibbutadesakālavisesadassanaṃ, ‘‘aparinibbuto bhagavā’’ti gāhassa micchābhāvadassanatthaṃ loke jātasaṃvaḍḍhabhāvadassanatthañca. Tathā hi manussabhāvassa supākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ mahābodhisattā carimabhave dārapariggahādīnipi karontīti. Kusinārāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Upavattane mallānaṃ sālavaneti tassa nagarassa upavattanabhūtaṃ mallarājūnaṃ sālavanuyyānaṃ dasseti. Tattha nagaraṃ pavisitukāmā uyyānato upecca vattanti gacchanti etenāti upavattananti sālavanaṃ vuccati. Yathā hi anurādhapurassa thūpārāmo dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ, evaṃ taṃ uyyānaṃ kusinārāya dakkhiṇapacchimadisāya hoti. Yathā ca thūpārāmato dakkhiṇadvārena nagaraṃ pavisanamaggo pācīnamukho gantvā uttarena nivattati, evaṃ uyyānato sālapanti pācīnamukhā gantvā uttarena nivattā, tasmā taṃ ‘‘upavattana’’nti vuccati. Yamakasālānamantareti yamakasālānaṃ vemajjhe. Tattha kira bhagavato paññattassa parinibbānamañcassa ekā sālapanti sīsabhāge hoti, ekā pādabhāge, tatrāpi eko taruṇasālo sīsabhāgassa āsanno hoti, eko pādabhāgassa, tasmā ‘‘yamakasālānamantare’’ti vuttaṃ. Api ca ‘‘yamakasālā nāma mūlakkhandhaviṭapapattehi aññamaññaṃ saṃsibbetvā ṭhitasālā’’tipi mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ.
所谓无依止涅槃因,即因缘业结净除,则是因缘。这里因缘即障碍根除,色法已除。此因缘由烦恼业染习灭尽,乃涅槃成就之根本。以业及行习烦恼灭尽为涅槃依止。此处涅槃依止意指涅槃之本体,以此为所依止,起因及作用俱可见。所谓圆满涅槃乃在涅槃处地、所缘及其因缘聚合之意。僧团长老即具资格长老所称。谓僧众规模若何时?称有一千七百位比库。恒常对应此数,如“天子家族”等。如此时规模正是长老所与之规模。一时维卢伽村,因感受障碍消失而生信心,听闻“世尊涅槃不远矣”后,在来方比库中一名比库转念缺席情况,无其他,故人数按数计算无误。阿耆达大长老为传法集律,令比库们发起精进事迹。
Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāti upādīyate kammakilesehīti upādi, vipākakkhandhā kaṭattā ca rūpaṃ. So pana upādi kilesābhisaṅkhāramāranimmathanena nibbānappattiyaṃ anossaṭṭho, idha khandhamaccumāranimmathanena ossaṭṭho nisesitoti ayaṃ anupādisesā nibbānadhātu natthi etissā upādisesoti katvā. Nibbānadhātūti cettha nibbutimattaṃ adhippetaṃ, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. Parinibbāneti parinibbānaṭṭhāne, nimittatthe vā bhummavacanaṃ, parinibbānahetu sannipatitānanti attho. Saṅghassa thero saṅghatthero. So pana saṅgho kiṃparimāṇoti āha ‘‘sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassāna’’nti. Niccasāpekkhattā hi īdisesu samāso hotiyeva yathā ‘‘devadattassa garukula’’nti. Sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassānanti ca saṅghattherānaṃyeva sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassānaṃ. Tadā hi ‘‘sannipatitā bhikkhū ettakā’’ti pamāṇarahitā. Tathā hi veḷuvagāme vedanāvikkhambhanato paṭṭhāya ‘‘na cirena bhagavā parinibbāyissatī’’ti sutvā tato tato āgatesu bhikkhūsu ekabhikkhupi pakkanto nāma natthi, tasmā gaṇanaṃ vītivatto saṅgho ahosi. Āyasmā mahākassapo dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti sambandho.
『于无余涅槃界』——「执取」者,即以业与烦恼所执取之义,指果报诸蕴及因故[所摄之]色。然而,此执取在以涅槃证得中通过镇伏烦恼、行、死魔而未被舍弃;于此,则因镇伏蕴魔与死魔而被彻底舍尽,故此名为「无余涅槃界」——以「此中无有余之执取」而得此称。此处「涅槃界」所意指者,乃单纯之寂灭;此处以第七格表示如是状态之特征。「于般涅槃时」——指般涅槃之处所,或此第七格为表示因缘之用法,意为「因般涅槃而聚集者」。「僧团之长老」即「僧团长老」。问:此僧团有多少人数?故说「七十万比库」。此类语境中,因常需对扩充说明,故必然构成复合词,如「迭瓦达德的大家族」之例。「七十万比库」,即僧团长老们之七十万比库。彼时「已集合之比库有多少」,实难以数量衡量。盖自竹林村[世尊]以禅定压制病苦以来,诸比库听闻「世尊不久将般涅槃」,从各处纷纷前来,无有一位比库离去,故僧团之数超越计算。具寿大咖萨巴为令比库们生起结集法与律之热情——此为上下文之关联。
Tattha mahākassapoti mahantehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattā mahanto kassapoti mahākassapo, apica kumārakassapattheraṃ upādāya ayaṃ mahāthero ‘‘mahākassapo’’ti vuccati. Atha kimatthaṃ āyasmā mahākassapo dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti āha ‘‘sattāhaparinibbute’’tiādi. Satta ahāni samāhaṭāni sattāhaṃ, sattāhaṃ parinibbutassa assāti sattāhaparinibbuto, bhagavā, tasmiṃ sattāhaparinibbute bhagavati, bhagavato parinibbānadivasato paṭṭhāya sattāhe vītivatteti vuttaṃ hoti. Subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitena vuttavacanaṃ samanussarantoti sambandho. Tattha subhaddoti tassa nāmaṃ, vuḍḍhakāle pana pabbajitattā vuḍḍhapabbajitoti vuccati. ‘‘Alaṃ āvuso’’tiādinā tena vuttavacanaṃ nidasseti. So hi sattāhaparinibbute bhagavati āyasmatā mahākassapattherena saddhiṃ pāvāya kusināraṃ addhānamaggappaṭipannesu pañcamattesu bhikkhusatesu avītarāge bhikkhū antarāmagge diṭṭhaājīvakassa santikā bhagavato parinibbānaṃ sutvā pattacīvarāni chaḍḍetvā bāhā paggayha nānappakāraṃ paridevante disvā evamāha.
其中名为大咖萨巴者,乃因具备广大戒蕴等品德,故称为伟大的咖萨巴。亦有因该大长老缘故,称小咖萨巴比库为咖萨巴老人。又何缘故尊者大咖萨巴生起闻法勤奋乎?答曰为集持佛陀教法。所谓「七日安息」者,即七个安息日。七日安息者,意谓在佛于七日安息期间涅槃后,于此七日安息维持不散。此所谓七日安息,即是佛于涅槃日之后之七日安息。由出家老比库须跋纳所述老比库须跋纳名为素波陀者,谓其老年出家故称为老出家。素波陀以「啊兰陀,尊者」等语示范所传。于佛涅槃后,素波陀与五百多比库在废弃无尘的拘尸那罗广场,会合于五众僧团中,见佛涅槃后悲伤不已,因而发言如此。
Kasmā pana so evamāha? Bhagavati āghātena. Ayaṃ kira so khandhake (mahāva. 303) āgate ātumāvatthusmiṃ nahāpitapubbako vuḍḍhapabbajito bhagavati kusinārato nikkhamitvā aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ ātumaṃ gacchante ‘‘bhagavā āgacchatī’’ti sutvā āgatakāle ‘‘yāgudānaṃ karissāmī’’ti sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhite dve putte etadavoca ‘‘bhagavā kira tātā ātumaṃ āgacchati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi, gacchatha tumhe tātā khurabhaṇḍaṃ ādāya nāḷiyāvāpakena anugharakaṃ anugharakaṃ āhiṇḍatha, loṇampi telampi taṇḍulampi khādanīyampi saṃharatha, bhagavato āgatassa yāgudānaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Atha bhagavati ātumaṃ āgantvā bhusāgārakaṃ paviṭṭhe subhaddo sāyanhasamayaṃ gāmadvāraṃ gantvā manusse āmantetvā ‘‘hatthakammamattaṃ me dethā’’ti hatthakammaṃ yācitvā ‘‘kiṃ bhante karomā’’ti vutte ‘‘idañcidañca gaṇhathā’’ti sabbūpakaraṇāni gāhāpetvā vihāre uddhanāni kāretvā ekaṃ kāḷakaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā tādisameva pārupitvā ‘‘idaṃ karotha, idaṃ karothā’’ti sabbarattiṃ vicārento satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā bhojjayāguñca madhugoḷakañca paṭiyādāpesi. Bhojjayāgu nāma bhuñjitvā pātabbayāgu, tattha sappimadhuphāṇitamacchamaṃsapupphaphalarasādi yaṃ kiñci khādanīyaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbaṃ pavisati, kīḷitukāmānaṃ sīsamakkhanayoggā hoti sugandhagandhā.
佛陀为何如是说?因其往昔在经中所记,于拘尸那罗出家已久的老出家素波陀,曾携八千多比库同行于佛陀所至之处,闻佛即来,众人乃于沙门地界立誓进行牺牲献供,两子谓曰:「佛陀来临与众大比库同至,应携取犊牛及竹筒,随后以盐、油、米及主副食饲粮备供。」众人遵义而行。佛至后,素波陀入粮仓,素波陀在暮时分往村口邀请人群,恳求:『请赐手工艺物』,当答曰:「施舍此物。」遂令持诸器皿收纳、清洁僧坊,设一坛黑色清汤焖煮,配制相似复及汤饭,以此逗留整夜,馈以蜜汁佳果,蜜汁乃食饭之饮食,在此中,各种芬芳花蜜果实等食物尽入其中,令人欲乐开怀,头脑清润香气绵延。
Atha bhagavā kālasseva sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto piṇḍāya carituṃ ātumābhimukho pāyāsi. Manussā tassa ārocesuṃ ‘‘bhagavā piṇḍāya gāmaṃ pavisati, tayā kassa yāgu paṭiyāditā’’ti. So yathānivatthapāruteheva tehi kāḷakakāsāvehi ekena hatthena dabbiñca kaṭacchuñca gahetvā brahmā viya dakkhiṇajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā vanditvā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhatu me bhante bhagavā yāgu’’nti āha. Tato ‘‘jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchantī’’ti khandhake (mahāva. 303) āgatanayena bhagavā pucchitvā ca sutvā ca taṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ vigarahitvā tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ akappiyasamādāpanasikkhāpadaṃ khurabhaṇḍapariharaṇasikkhāpadañcāti dve sikkhāpadāni paññapetvā ‘‘bhikkhave anekakappakoṭiyo bhojanaṃ pariyesanteheva vītināmitā, idaṃ pana tumhākaṃ akappiyaṃ, adhammena uppannabhojanaṃ imaṃ paribhuñjitvā anekāni attabhāvasahassāni apāyesveva nibbattissanti, apetha mā gaṇhathā’’ti bhikkhācārābhimukho agamāsi, ekabhikkhunāpi na kiñci gahitaṃ.
佛如法于食时披露身体,领众比库步入村庄乞食。人等闻知佛将入村,询问「佛将至,今设何牺牲式?」众人如实以此准备黑色汤饭,其中一人持器皿及竹筒,庄严布置好南方祭坛,恭敬供奉,祈请佛陀接受祭品。佛陀知道众亦问者,遂于经中(长部 303)有所述,观察此老出家素波陀,呈现无过失,未犯不净戒律,说明具两种禁戒,即远离泥土制品戒及断除砂器持有戒。佛告比库说:「诸比库历劫求食归来,今此食为你们之不净食,若执食此恶饮,将招数千万恶果,望勿受此。」佛语毕而离去,无一比库敢取。
Subhaddo anattamano hutvā ‘‘ayaṃ ‘sabbaṃ jānāmī’ti āhiṇḍati, sace na gahetukāmo pesetvā ārocetabbaṃ assa, pakkāhāro nāma sabbaciraṃ tiṭṭhanto sattāhamattaṃ tiṭṭheyya, idañca mama yāvajīvaṃ pariyattaṃ assa, sabbaṃ tena nāsitaṃ, ahitakāmo ayaṃ mayha’’nti bhagavati āghātaṃ bandhitvā dasabale dharamāne kiñci vattuṃ nāsakkhi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘ayaṃ uccakulā pabbajito mahāpuriso, sace kiñci vakkhāmi, mamaṃyeva santajjessatī’’ti. Svāyaṃ ajja mahākassapattherena saddhiṃ āgacchanto ‘‘parinibbuto bhagavā’’ti sutvā laddhassāso viya haṭṭhatuṭṭho evamāha. Thero pana taṃ sutvā hadaye pahāraṃ viya matthake patitasukkāsaniṃ viya maññi, dhammasaṃvego cassa uppajji ‘‘sattāhamattaparinibbuto bhagavā, ajjāpissa suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ sarīraṃ dharatiyeva, dukkhena bhagavatā ārādhitasāsane nāma evaṃ lahuṃ mahantaṃ pāpakasaṭaṃ kaṇṭako uppanno, alaṃ kho panesa pāpo vaḍḍhamāno aññepi evarūpe sahāye labhitvā sāsanaṃ osakkāpetu’’nti.
素波陀生不起我慢,言:「此人谓『吾悉知』,若无所取,应悉告知,常守分道,存活七日。此乃我之所围绕者,一切悉除,故此不愿取此。」对佛言辞安稳而不侵扰。于是其如来称其大修行者,若我有言,则暂时伤害于我。素波陀自入心中如击打,感心重苦为因,其与法缘起升起觉悟,「佛住七日安息,今持金色身强存,因佛教化而生轻薄与沉重烦恼之苦,诸恶荆棘穿刺,若恶逐长则必致他所迷乱摧毁佛法。」
Tato thero cintesi ‘‘sace kho panāhaṃ imaṃ mahallakaṃ idheva pilotikaṃ nivāsetvā chārikāya okirāpetvā nīharāpessāmi, manussā ‘samaṇassa gotamassa sarīre dharamāneyeva sāvakā vivadantī’ti amhākaṃ dosaṃ dassessanti, adhivāsemi tāva. Bhagavatā hi desitadhammo asaṅgahitapuppharāsisadiso, tattha yathā vātena pahaṭapupphāni yato vā tato vā gacchanti, evameva evarūpānaṃ vasena gacchante gacchante kāle vinaye ekaṃ dve sikkhāpadāni nassissanti vinassissanti, sutte eko dve pañhavārā nassissanti, abhidhamme ekaṃ dve bhūmantarāni nassissanti, evaṃ anukkamena mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāma, tasmā dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ karissāmi, evaṃ sati daḷhasuttena saṅgahitapupphāni viya ayaṃ dhammavinayo niccalo bhavissati. Etadatthañhi bhagavā mayhaṃ tīṇi gāvutāni paccuggamanaṃ akāsi, tīhi ovādehi upasampadaṃ akāsi, kāyato cīvaraparivattanaṃ akāsi, ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā candopamapaṭipadaṃ kathento maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā kathesi, tikkhattuṃ sakalasāsanaratanaṃ paṭicchāpesi, mādise bhikkhumhi tiṭṭhamāne ayaṃ pāpo sāsane vaḍḍhiṃ mā alatthu, yāva adhammo na dippati, dhammo na paṭibāhīyati, avinayo na dippati, vinayo na paṭibāhīyati, adhammavādino na balavanto honti, dhammavādino na dubbalā honti, avinayavādino na balavanto honti, vinayavādino na dubbalā honti, tāva dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyissāmi, tato bhikkhū attano attano pahonakaṃ gahetvā kappiyākappiye kathessanti, athāyaṃ pāpo sayameva niggahaṃ pāpuṇissati, puna sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkhissati, sāsanaṃ iddhañceva phītañca bhavissatī’’ti. Cintetvā so ‘‘evaṃ nāma mayhaṃ cittaṃ uppanna’’nti kassaci anārocetvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ samassāsetvā atha pacchā dhātubhājanadivase dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āyasmā mahākassapo sattāhaparinibbute…pe… dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti.
于是该长老思惟若在此安置此残尸于屋中,遮障隐蔽,众人将言:“此乃沙门果德玛尸身,其弟子相争”,恐令我为过,即我将镇守。佛陀所说法如无垢真花,随风吹落,其亦如是凡因缘中,众多教律将遗失。经中说,一、二条戒律消失,阿毗达摩中一、二品地亦会遗灭,若如此渐次发展,犹如鬼族所覆,我当统摄教律,令之坚固恆常。佛亦指示我三处牧地,我已降诫与达上戒,亲自履行纱衣换洗、空中摆手诵行咒语、三转供养佛法之宝,为令恶者不增长,使佛法久住不衰,恶者不能摧毁正法律儀。此念生起,即未告诉大众,即将随大咖萨巴共入聚落,生起精进教化比库们集持正法之心。故有言:「尊者大咖萨巴于佛七日安息时,生起教法集持之勤奋。」
Tattha alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Āvusoti paridevante bhikkhū ālapati. Mā socitthāti citte uppannabalavasokena mā socittha. Mā paridevitthāti vācāya mā paridevittha ‘‘paridevanaṃ vilāpo’’ti vacanato. Idāni asocanādīsu kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘sumuttā maya’’ntiādimāha. Tena mahāsamaṇenāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ, tato mahāsamaṇato suṭṭhu muttā mayanti attho, upaddutā ca homa tadāti adhippāyo. Homāti vā atītatthe vattamānavacanaṃ, ahumhāti attho, anussaranto dhammasaṃvegavasenāti adhippāyo. Dhammasabhāvacintāvasena pavattaṃ sahottappañāṇaṃ dhammasaṃvego. Vuttañhetaṃ –
此处出现反对发言。一比库悲叹曰:不要伤心,谓心中生起力量悲苦不要悲伤。又劝勿应受责骂,谓言语若为悲叹则勿怨之。今示不悲等因,称『我已得解脱』。此言乃大圣者所示无碍,乃语言释义,诸恶扰乱之因皆除,无漏无生之谓。依此理解法会不异常,生起共相正勤法缘觉悟力。此后有言说如下——
‘‘Sabbasaṅkhatadhammesu, ottappākārasaṇṭhitaṃ;
『众有为法中,具足惭愧心者;','151':'为智慧所蔽重者,具足对法生起深惧敬念』者。
Ñāṇamohitabhārānaṃ, dhammasaṃvegasaññita’’nti.
『于智慧遮蔽重担者,称之以法之感动』。
Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjatīti tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, hetu. Khoti avadhāraṇe, etaṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjateva, no na vijjatīti attho. Kiṃ taṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘yaṃ pāpabhikkhū’’tiādi. Ettha yanti nipātamattaṃ, kāraṇaniddeso vā, yena kāraṇena antaradhāpeyyuṃ, tadetaṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjatīti attho. Pāpabhikkhūti pāpikāya lāmikāya icchāya samannāgatā bhikkhū. Atīto atikkanto satthā ettha, etassāti vā atītasatthukaṃ, pāvacanaṃ. Padhānaṃ vacanaṃ pāvacanaṃ, dhammavinayanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pakkhaṃ labhitvāti alajjīpakkhaṃ labhitvā. Na cirassevāti na cireneva. Yāva ca dhammavinayo tiṭṭhatīti yattakaṃ kālaṃ dhammo ca vinayo ca lajjīpuggalesu tiṭṭhati.
此地有处,故谓为处,处者,因也。因是指把握,因即使有也不谓无。何因耶?谓『彼恶比库』等。此中,『因』或是谓止于词汇层面,指因缘,借此因缘而消失,此即因义。恶比库者,具恶欲心之比库。超越于过去者,谓以前大觉者,或谓昔时大觉导师,正言是戒法教诲。『得到边』谓获垢边。非久住谓非长期存续。『直到戒法长存』谓于谦恭人中法与律存续之时期。
Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatāti parinibbānamañcake nipannena bhagavatā bhikkhū ovadantena etaṃ vuttanti attho. Desito paññattoti dhammopi desito ceva paññatto ca. Suttābhidhammasaṅgahitassa hi dhammassa abhisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ vineyyasantāne ṭhapanaṃ paññāpanaṃ, tasmā dhammopi desito ceva paññatto cāti vutto. Paññattoti ca ṭhapitoti attho. Vinayopi desito ceva paññatto ca. Vinayatantisaṅgahitassa hi atthassa kāyavācānaṃ vinayanato vinayoti laddhādhivacanassa atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ asaṅkarato ṭhapanaṃ paññāpanaṃ, tasmā vinayopi desito ceva paññatto cāti vuccati.
如是所说世尊者,谓已临般涅槃之世尊,及比库受教导所说。所谓『教授』,意谓法亦为教授,亦为表达。经律合集之法,为觉知之开示,是言语教化。故法亦为教授,亦为表达。所谓『表达』,即建立之义。律亦如是说,律之义体乃为经律之聚合。由口意身行所产生言称『律』,谓其为高度教化,开示,说明,故律亦为教授,亦为表达。
So vo mamaccayenāti so dhammavinayo tumhākaṃ mamaccayena satthā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – mayā vo ṭhiteneva ‘‘idaṃ lahukaṃ, idaṃ garukaṃ, idaṃ satekicchaṃ, idaṃ atekicchaṃ, idaṃ lokavajjaṃ, idaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ. Ayaṃ āpatti puggalassa santike vuṭṭhāti, ayaṃ gaṇassa, ayaṃ saṅghassa santike vuṭṭhātī’’ti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ avītikkamanīyatāvasena otiṇṇavatthusmiṃ sakhandhakaparivāro ubhatovibhaṅgo mahāvinayo nāma desito, taṃ sakalampi vinayapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati ‘‘idaṃ vo kattabbaṃ, idaṃ vo na kattabba’’nti kattabbākattabbassa vibhāgena anusāsanato. Ṭhiteneva ca mayā ‘‘ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgāni, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti tena tena vineyyānaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpena pakārena ime sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme vibhajitvā suttantapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi suttantapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati taṃtaṃcariyānurūpaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā anusāsanato. Ṭhiteneva ca mayā ‘‘pañcakkhandhā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, cattāri saccāni, bāvīsatindriyāni, nava hetū, cattāro āhārā, satta phassā, satta vedanā, satta saññā, satta cetanā, satta cittāni, tatrāpi ettakā dhammā kāmāvacarā, ettakā rūpāvacarā, ettakā arūpāvacarā, ettakā pariyāpannā, ettakā apariyāpannā, ettakā lokiyā, ettakā lokuttarā’’ti ime dhamme vibhajitvā abhidhammapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi abhidhammapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati, khandhādivibhāgena ñāyamānaṃ catusaccasambodhāvahattā satthārā sammāsambuddhena kattabbakiccaṃ nipphādessati. Iti sabbampetaṃ abhisambodhito yāva parinibbānā pañcacattālīsa vassāni bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ, tīṇi piṭakāni, pañca nikāyā, navaṅgāni, caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānīti evaṃ mahappabhedaṃ hoti. Iti imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni tiṭṭhanti, ahaṃ ekova parinibbāyāmi, ahañca panidāni ekova ovadāmi anusāsāmi, mayi parinibbute imāni caturāsīti buddhasahassāni tumhe ovadissanti anusāsissanti ovādānusāsanīkiccassa nipphādanatoti.
『彼为尔等之教师』者,即法与律为尔等之教师。此有所说——『我为尔等所立,此为轻重、多少、多少杂难、世间应断、诳言应断……此为无漏之路径,即在圣众、团体等前展现』。如是三十一种过失之戒条,未违越已通达,而归入戒本,并分为两类。此皆皆为律藏,我入般涅槃时,乃为尔等教师,勉励『此当为尔所行,此当勿为』,以能行与勿为之区分,指导尔等。又说『此四正念、四正勤、四力、五根、五力、七觉支、圣八正道』,依据宜断之法,如理分辨,为尔等于经藏中三十三觉支之法分别,入我涅槃时,乃为尔等教师,以正行相应,而为指导。又说『五蕴、十二处、十八界、四圣谛、二十一根、九近因、四食、七触、七受、七想、七意、七心,且分为欲界色界无色界、遍及与非遍及、世俗与出世俗』,此分别法入阿毗达摩藏,我入般涅槃时,亦为尔等教师。以五蕴等分类,启发认识四圣谛之觉悟,圣者圣自觉者成就其所应为之事。如此悉皆开悟语,于我入般涅槃后三十五年间讲述,并涵盖三藏、五部、九分、四十八万法门,此为大分类。如是四十八万法存留,我乃唯一涅槃者,今亦为尔唯一教导,尔等当依我涅槃时教诲遵行。我涅槃时,四十八万佛法由众佛传授,尔等将教导并令教导者为此教义终结者也。
Sāsananti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividhaṃ sāsanaṃ, nippariyāyato pana sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Addhaniyanti addhānamaggagāmīti addhaniyaṃ, addhānakkhamanti attho. Ciraṭṭhitikanti ciraṃ ṭhiti etassāti ciraṭṭhitikaṃ, sāsanaṃ, assa bhaveyyāti sambandho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā yena pakārena idaṃ sāsanaṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ pavattituṃ samatthaṃ, tatoyeva ciraṭṭhitikaṃ assa, tathā tena pakārena dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyanti.
所谓教法,依传述、实践与诠释共三种,已圆满者为三十三个觉支法。所谓方便,即依于路径及过程。所谓久住,即久远存在,可谓久住之教法。此有说——依此方式,教法能长久流转,久住,且法与律随之会合摄持而成,是故有此关联。
Idāni sammāsambuddhena attano kataṃ anuggahavisesaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘yañcāhaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘yañcāha’’nti etassa ‘‘anuggahito’’ti etena sambandho. Tattha yanti yasmā, yena kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā etaṃ, tena ‘‘anuggahito’’ti ettha anuggaṇhanaṃ parāmasati. Dhāressasītiādikaṃ pana bhagavā aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle mahākassapattherena paññattasaṅghāṭiyaṃ nisinno taṃ cīvaraṃ vikasitapadumapupphavaṇṇena pāṇinā antare parāmasanto āha. Vuttañhetaṃ kassapasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 2.154) mahākassapatthereneva ānandattheraṃ āmantetvā kathentena –
今,[大咖萨巴长老]阐明正自觉者对自己所施予的特别摄受,故说「而我受世尊……」等语。其中,「而我」与「受摄受」相关联。其中「由于」即「以此因缘」之义。或此为指涉行为之语,以此「受摄受」指涉摄受之行为。至于「你将持用」等语,乃世尊坐于大咖萨巴长老所敷设之粪扫衣桑喀帝上,于某一树下,以色如盛开莲花之手,触摸其中那件衣时所说。此事在《咖萨巴相应》(相应部尼柯耶2.154)中,由大咖萨巴长老亲自招呼阿难长老而述说,如是记载——
‘‘Atha kho, āvuso, bhagavā maggā okkamma yena aññataraṃ rukkhamūlaṃ tenupasaṅkami, atha khvāhaṃ, āvuso, paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ catugguṇaṃ paññāpetvā bhagavantaṃ etadavocaṃ ‘idha, bhante, bhagavā nisīdatu, yaṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. Nisīdi kho, āvuso, bhagavā paññatte āsane, nisajja kho maṃ, āvuso, bhagavā etadavoca ‘mudukā kho tyāyaṃ kassapa paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭī’ti. ‘Paṭiggaṇhātu me, bhante, bhagavā paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ anukampaṃ upādāyā’ti. ‘Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ kassapa sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanānī’ti. ‘Dhāressāmahaṃ, bhante, bhagavato sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanānī’ti. So khvāhaṃ, āvuso, paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ bhagavato pādāsiṃ, ahaṃ pana bhagavato sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanāni paṭipajji’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154).
「友,尔时世尊离开道路,走向某一树下;友,我将粗布桑喀帝折叠成四层铺好,对世尊说:'大德,愿世尊坐于此处,愿此长久利益与安乐于我。'友,世尊坐于所铺之座;坐定后,友,世尊对我说:'咖萨巴,你这件粗布桑喀帝甚是柔软。'[我说:]'大德,愿世尊以慈悲故,受纳我此粗布桑喀帝。'[世尊说:]'然而,咖萨巴,你是否愿持用我这件麻布尘堆衣——此衣已破旧不堪?'[我说:]'大德,我愿持用世尊之麻布尘堆旧衣。'友,如是,我将粗布桑喀帝奉予世尊,我则受持世尊之麻布尘堆旧衣。」(相应部尼柯耶2.154)
Tattha (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) mudukā kho tyāyanti mudukā kho te ayaṃ. Kasmā bhagavā evamāhāti? Therena saha cīvaraṃ parivattetukāmatāya. Kasmā parivattetukāmo jātoti? Theraṃ attano ṭhāne ṭhapetukāmatāya. Kiṃ sāriputtamoggallānā natthīti? Atthi, evaṃ panassa ahosi ‘‘ime na ciraṃ ṭhassanti, kassapo pana vīsavassasatāyuko, ‘so mayi parinibbute sattapaṇṇiguhāyaṃ vasitvā dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ katvā mama sāsanaṃ pañcavassasahassaparimāṇaṃ kālaṃ pavattanakaṃ karissatī’ti attano naṃ ṭhāne ṭhapemi, evaṃ bhikkhū kassapassa sussūsitabbaṃ maññissantī’’ti, tasmā evamāha. Thero pana yasmā cīvarassa vā pattassa vā vaṇṇe kathite ‘‘imaṃ tumhākaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti cārittameva, tasmā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu me bhante bhagavā’’ti āha. Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ kassapāti kassapa tvaṃ imāni paribhogajiṇṇāni paṃsukūlāni pārupituṃ sakkhissasīti vadati. Tañca kho na kāyabalaṃ sandhāya, paṭipattipūraṇaṃ pana sandhāya evamāha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – ahaṃ imaṃ cīvaraṃ puṇṇaṃ nāma dāsiṃ pārupitvā āmakasusāne chaḍḍitaṃ tumbamattehi pāṇakehi samparikiṇṇaṃ te pāṇake vidhunitvā mahāariyavaṃse ṭhatvā aggahesiṃ, tassa me imaṃ cīvaraṃ gahitadivase dasasahassacakkavāḷe mahāpathavī mahāravaṃ viravamānā kampittha, ākāsaṃ taṭataṭāyi, cakkavāḷadevatā sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ gaṇhantena bhikkhunā jātipaṃsukūlikena jātiāraññikena jātiekāsanikena jātisapadānacārikena bhavituṃ vaṭṭati, tvaṃ imassa cīvarassa anucchavikaṃ kātuṃ sakkhissasī’’ti. Theropi attanā pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhāreti. So taṃ atakkayitvā ‘‘ahametaṃ paṭipattiṃ pūressāmī’’ti ussāhena sugatacīvarassa anucchavikaṃ kātukāmo ‘‘dhāressāmahaṃ bhante’’ti āha. Paṭipajjinti paṭipannosiṃ. Evaṃ pana cīvaraparivattanaṃ katvā therena pārutacīvaraṃ bhagavā pārupi, satthu cīvaraṃ thero. Tasmiṃ samaye mahāpathavī udakapariyantaṃ katvā unnadantī kampittha.
其中,(相应部注疏2.2.154)『柔软啊』,意即:『此等对你而言是柔软的』。为何世尊如此说?乃因欲与长老交换袈裟。为何欲与之交换?乃因欲将长老安置于自己的位置上。难道沙利子与摩嘎剌那不在吗?在,然而世尊心中如此思量:『此二人不能久住,然咖萨巴寿命可达二百岁,我般涅槃之后,彼将住于七叶窟中,结集法与律,令我的教法得以流传五千年。』因此,我将其安置于自己的位置,如此诸比库将认为应恭敬听从咖萨巴的教导——故而如此说。又,长老因为凡称赞袈裟或钵的功德后说『请你们取走此物』,此乃惯例,故说:『尊者,请世尊接受我的(袈裟)。』而『咖萨巴,你能持用我的(袈裟)吗』,意即:咖萨巴,你能够披上这些因受用而破旧的尘堆衣吗?此话并非针对身体的气力而说,而是针对圆满修行而说。此处的真实意趣如下——我曾披上这件袈裟,那是一个名叫普纳的女奴隶死后裹尸、弃置于野外露天墓地,被如拇指大小的虫子密密围绕,我抖去那些虫子,安住于崇高的圣贤传统而取来的。在我取这件袈裟的当日,十千轮围世界中,大地发出巨大的轰鸣声而震动,虚空发出爆裂之声,轮围界的天人们随声叫好,赞叹道:『取用此袈裟的比库,应当成为生来即奉行尘堆衣法者、生来即奉行住林法者、生来即奉行一座食法者、生来即奉行次第乞食法者——你能够担当此袈裟之相称者。』长老自身具有五头大象的气力,他并不轻视此事,而是以热忱之心,立志『我将圆满此修行』,欲使自身与善逝袈裟相称,故说:『尊者,我将持用。』『修行』,意即:你已奉行(此道)。如此换袈裟之后,世尊披上长老所披之衣,长老则披上导师之衣。在那一刻,大地以大海为边界,发出呼啸声而震动。
Sāṇānipaṃsukūlānīti matakaḷevaraṃ pariveṭhetvā chaḍḍitāni tumbamatte kimī papphoṭetvā gahitāni sāṇavākamayāni paṃsukūlacīvarāni. Rathikasusānasaṅkārakūṭādīnaṃ yattha katthaci paṃsūnaṃ upari ṭhitattā abbhuggataṭṭhena tesu paṃsukūlamivāti paṃsukūlaṃ. Atha vā paṃsu viya kucchitabhāvaṃ ulati gacchatīti paṃsukūlanti paṃsukūlasaddassa attho daṭṭhabbo. Nibbasanānīti niṭṭhitavasanakiccāni, paribhogajiṇṇānīti attho. Ettha ‘‘kiñcāpi ekameva taṃ cīvaraṃ, anekāvayavattā pana bahuvacanaṃ kata’’nti majjhimagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti ettha attanā sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti viññāyamānattā viññāyamānatthassa ca-saddassa payoge kāmācārattā ‘‘attanā’’ti na vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ, kassapa, sāṇāni paṃsukūlānī’’ti hi vuttattā attanāva sādhāraṇaparibhogo viññāyati, nāññena. Na hi kevalaṃ saddatoyeva sabbattha atthanicchayo bhavissati atthapakaraṇādināpi yebhuyyena atthassa niyametabbattā. Ācariyadhammapālattherena panettha idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti ettha attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenāti idha attanāsaddaṃ ānetvā cīvare attanā sādhāraṇaparibhogenā’’ti yojetabbaṃ.
『麻布尘堆衣』,意即:裹覆死尸、弃置于露天之地,取时先弹去如拇指大小的蛆虫的麻纤维所制的尘堆衣。因其矗立于街道、墓地、垃圾堆等各处尘土之上,故以高出之义,如置于尘土上者,称为『尘堆衣』。又或,『尘堆』一词的意义应理解为:如尘土般污秽不净之物,[Pali: ulati]即前往、抵达的意思——此为『尘堆衣』一词的字义。『已无可再穿』,意即已完成穿用之用途,亦即因受用而破旧之义。此处,《中部复注》中说:『虽然实为同一件袈裟,然因其有多个组成部分,故用复数。』关于『以自己对袈裟的共同受用』——此处,因『以自己』之义已可被理解,而「以」字在语义可理解时,其用法可自由省略,故未明言『以自己』。由于已说『咖萨巴,你能持用我的这些麻布尘堆衣吗』,所以可理解为仅是自己对袈裟的共同受用,而非他人。因为并非仅凭文字本身就能在一切处确定意义,在大多数情况下,意义须借助上下文等加以厘定。然而,法护长老在此说道:『关于「以自己对袈裟的共同受用」——此处应引入「以自己」一词,串联为「以自己对袈裟的同等分担受用」。』
‘‘Yassa yena hi sambandho, dūraṭṭhampi ca tassa taṃ;
「凡与某物有关联者,纵相隔遥远,
Atthato hyasamānānaṃ, āsannattamakāraṇa’’nti.
于意义上虽不相同,邻近之相亦非无因。」
Atha vā bhagavatā cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogena bhagavatā anuggahitoti yojanīyaṃ ekassapi karaṇaniddesassa sahayogakattutthajotakattasambhavatoti. Sabbattha ‘‘ācariyadhammapālattherenā’’ti vutte suttantaṭīkākārenāti gahetabbaṃ. Samānaṃ dhāraṇametassāti sādhāraṇo, paribhogo. Sādhāraṇaparibhogena ceva samasamaṭṭhapanena ca anuggahitoti sambandho.
又或者,世尊以普通穿着的袈裟作为共同使用的衣物身着,是因为这能促成合伙、协助、及共同行动的方便。这种说法应在任何地方都以“由老师法护长老宣说”的经文诠释为准。据此可以明白,其中“普通”的意思是共同的,使用是指共同占用。用普通衣物并且平等安置,即是彼此之间发生协助的关系。
Idāni (saṃ. ni. 2.152) –
现在(相应部2.152)——
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati.
『我比库啊,当我心意所愿,远离欲欲,远离不善法,具有正念正思维,内心清净,达到欢喜安乐,入初禅、住于初禅。咖萨巴比库亦如是,依其心意所愿,远离欲欲,远离不善法,具正念正思维,内心清净,达到欢喜安乐,入初禅、住于初禅。』
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā…pe… dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati.
『我比库啊,当我心意所愿,心念与思维皆已平静,内心清凉安住,专一不散,离念离思,具定生欢喜安乐,入第二禅、住于第二禅。咖萨巴比库亦如是,依其心意所愿,心念与思维皆已平静……(后文同),入第二禅、住于第二禅。』
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharāmi, sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedemi, yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati…pe… tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati.
『我比库啊,当我心意所愿,欢喜已断,持心平等,安住于此,正念正知,身中觉乐,如实了知修行者所宣说“持心平等,具念,安住于乐”,入第三禅、住于第三禅。咖萨巴比库亦如是,依其心意所愿,欢喜已断,持心平等,安住其中……(后文同),入第三禅、住于第三禅。』
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati.
『我比库啊,当我心意所愿,舍弃乐、舍弃苦,超越先前的欢喜与忧愁,安住于无苦无乐、念清净的平等和念中,入第四禅、住于第四禅。咖萨巴比库亦如是,依其心意所愿,舍弃乐、舍弃苦,超越先前的欢喜与忧愁……(后文同),入第四禅、住于第四禅。』
‘‘Ahaṃ , bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā…pe… ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati.
『比库们,我在欲界中,当我愿意彻底超越一切色相、超越对境阻碍的认识、超越分别认识以及放下心意不念时,即进入名为空无边处的界住行。咖萨巴尊者同样,当他愿意彻底超越一切色相,便进入名为空无边处的界住行。』
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkama ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma…pe… viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati.
『比库们,我在欲界中,当我愿意彻底超越空无边处的界住行时,便进入名为无边识处的界住行。咖萨巴尊者同样,愿意彻底超越空无边处的界住行时,便进入名为无边识处的界住行。』
‘‘Ahaṃ , bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati…pe… ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati.
『比库们,我在欲界中,当我愿意彻底超越无边识处的界住行时,便进入名为无所有处的界住行。咖萨巴尊者同样,当他愿意彻底超越无边识处的界住行时,便进入名为无所有处的界住行。』
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati.
『比库们,我在欲界中,当我愿意彻底超越无所有处的界住行时,便进入名为无受非想处的界住行。咖萨巴尊者同样,当他愿意彻底超越无所有处的界住行时,便进入无受非想处的界住行。』
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi…pe… saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharati.
『比库们,我在欲界中,当我愿意彻底超越无受非想处的界住行时,便进入名为想受灭尽的境界,并在其中住行。咖萨巴尊者同样,当他愿意彻底超越无受非想处的界住行时,也进入想受灭尽的境界,并在其中住行。』
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi anekavihitaṃ iddhividhaṃ paccanubhomi, ekopi hutvā bahudhā homi, bahudhāpi hutvā eko homi, āvibhāvaṃ tirobhāvaṃ tirokuṭṭaṃ tiropākāraṃ tiropabbataṃ asajjamāno gacchāmi seyyathāpi ākāse, pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṃ karomi seyyathāpi udake, udakepi abhijjamāne gacchāmi seyyathāpi pathaviyaṃ, ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamāmi seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo, imepi candimasūriye evaṃmahiddhike evaṃmahānubhāve pāṇinā parimasāmi parimajjāmi, yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṃ vattemi. Kassapopi bhikkhave yāvade ākaṅkhati anekavihitaṃ iddhividhaṃ paccanubhoti…pe… yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṃ vatteti.
『比库们,我当愿体验种种广泛的神通变化,能有同时化一为多、多为一的法门,能够隐没、隐蔽、侵蚀、上掩、覆盖、加遮障,犹如在空中漫游,在大地上腾跃浮沉,在水中潜游,水中冒出时可以行走于地,空中卧榻自适,似乎是翼鸟飞翔,以此种种神通术能驾驭日月星辰以及广大、强大的神力。我凭此随意活动,直到生身所在梵天世界止住。咖萨巴尊者同样,当他愿意体验种种神通变化时,也如是依此神通利益,行住于梵天界。』
‘‘Ahaṃ , bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāmi dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati dibbāya sotadhātuyā…pe… ye dūre santike ca.
「比库们,我于何时期,祈愿得闻神妙净化之圣音,闻之于天与人,远近皆得闻之。甚至咖萨巴尊者,于何时期,祈愿得闻神妙净化之圣音,闻之于天与人,远近皆得闻之。」
‘‘Ahaṃ , bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi, sarāgaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘sarāgaṃ citta’nti pajānāmi, vītarāgaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘vītarāgaṃ citta’nti pajānāmi, sadosaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… vītadosaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… samohaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… vītamohaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… saṃkhittaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… vikkhittaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… mahaggataṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… amahaggataṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… sauttaraṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… anuttaraṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… samāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… asamāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… vimuttaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… avimuttaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘avimuttaṃ citta’nti pajānāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti, sarāgaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘sarāgaṃ citta’nti pajānāti…pe… avimuttaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘avimuttaṃ citta’nti pajānāti.
「比库们,我于何时期,观知他心他意,知彼众生、他人之心,知有贪欲之心曰『贪心』,知无贪欲之心曰『无贪心』,知有瞋恚之心曰『瞋心』,知无瞋恚之心曰『无瞋心』,知有痴烦恼之心曰『痴心』,知无痴烦恼之心曰『无痴心』,知心专一集中的曰『集心』,知心散乱分散的曰『散心』,知心大聚的曰『大聚心』,知心非大聚的曰『非大聚心』,知心上升的曰『上行心』,知心未上升的曰『未上行心』,知心安住集中的曰『安住心』,知心未安住的曰『未安住心』,知心解脱的曰『解脱心』,知心不解脱的曰『不解脱心』。甚至咖萨巴尊者,于何时期,观知他心他意,亦知彼众生、他人之心,此心分贪有贪,无贪无瞋,无痴专散大聚上行安住解脱等相。」
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarāmi. Seyyathidaṃ – ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṃsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe ‘amutrāsiṃ evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto evaṃvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṃ, tatrāpāsiṃ evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto evaṃvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṃ sauddesaṃ anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati. Seyyathidaṃ – ekampi jātiṃ…pe… iti sākāraṃ sauddesaṃ anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati.
「比库们,我于何时期,忆念多种所造之过去住处。譬如——一世、二世、三世、四世、五世、十世、二十世、三十世、四十世、五十世、百世、千世、百万世;无数劫,或增或减,或增减交织的生死轮转,忆起者曰:他名彼姓,彼相彼色,彼食彼乐苦感受,彼寿命终了,生彼处所。此为忆念多种所造过去住处。甚至咖萨巴尊者,于何时期,忆念多种所造过去住处,亦忆起如是。」
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṃ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṃ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
「比库们,我于何时期,观见众生以清净神通之眼,越人之限,见彼生死灭以来,劣善丑并美善安乐不安,如实了解彼众生因身恶行、语恶行、意恶行,乃至取邪见等,犯圣者之谤毁者,行邪见之业,故至身坏死后,入恶道,陷堕地狱之苦中。又知彼众生若行身清净、语清净、意清净,非圣人之谤毁者,无邪见之业,故命尽后,得生善道,如天界。由于清净神通之眼,了解生死循环苦乐现状。甚至咖萨巴尊者,于何时期,以清净神通之眼,亦观见彼众生如是。」
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.152) –
「比库们,我于何时期,于现法自证无漏心解脱、智慧解脱、断尽烦恼,亲证无余涅槃,已得阿拉汉、无漏的果位,自行成就,证得自在,住于正法中。甚至咖萨巴尊者,于何时期,亦证无漏心解脱、智慧解脱,亲证无余涅槃,已得阿拉汉果,自行成就,住持正法。」
Evaṃ navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāppabhede uttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṭṭhapanatthāya bhagavatā vuttaṃ kassapasaṃyutte āgataṃ pāḷimimaṃ peyyālamukhena ādiggahaṇena ca saṅkhipitvā dassento āha ‘‘ahaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādi.
如此,以上诸三昧境界之上行境界,依序渐进而获胜智之分别,世尊为使彼咖萨巴尊者等于世间法得自安立,乃于咖萨巴会中,以古巴利文简约,摄录如是开示,称「比库们」以起言,予以阐述解释。
Tattha yāvade ākaṅkhāmīti yāvadeva icchāmīti attho. Tatoyeva hi majjhimagaṇṭhipade cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca ‘‘yāvadeti yāvadevāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti likhitaṃ. Saṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘yāvade ākaṅkhāmīti yāvadeva icchāmī’’ti attho vutto. Tathā hi tattha līnatthapakāsaniyaṃ ācariyadhammapālatthereneva vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvadevāti iminā samānatthaṃ yāvadeti idaṃ pada’’nti. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘yāvadevā’’ti ayameva pāṭho dissati. Yāni pana ito paraṃ ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā nayena cattāri rūpāvacarakiriyajhānāni, ‘‘sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā’’tiādinā nayena catasso arūpasamāpattiyo, ‘‘sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodha’’ntiādinā nayena nirodhasamāpatti, ‘‘anekavihitaṃ iddhividha’’ntiādinā nayena abhiññā ca vuttā. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ anupadavaṇṇanāya ceva bhāvanāvidhānena ca saddhiṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.69-70) sabbaso vitthāritaṃ. Idhāpi ca verañjakaṇḍe cattāri rūpāvacarajhānāni tisso ca vijjā āvi bhavissanti, tasmā tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ tattheva vaṇṇayissāma.
其中“yāvade ākaṅkhā”意为“正是所欲”。此语确实在中间章节与小章节中记载为“yāvadeti yāvadevāti”,即“正是所欲”。《相应部注疏》中亦说道“yāvade ākaṅkhāmīti yāvadeva icchāmīti”,意涵即是如此。且确有如法师法护长老所说“yāvadevāti此词意与yāvadeti相同”。不过在一些抄本中见有“yāvadevā”的读法。至于后文,以“特离欲仙”等说法引出了四种色界初禅、四空定、涵盖诸识灭定、并且说有具多种神通能通的知见。对此宜以无偏差的说明及修习方法,详尽分述于《清净道论》(《清净道》一六九至一七〇页)中。再者,在戒律复兴篇亦有四种色界初禅,以及三明智出现,因此此处宜全面阐述当说内容,正是本文所将努为之处。
Navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāppabhedeti ettha navānupubbavihārā nāma anupaṭipāṭiyā samāpajjitabbabhāvato evaṃsaññitā nirodhasamāpattiyā saha aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Chaḷabhiññā nāma āsavakkhayañāṇena saddhiṃ pañcābhiññāyoti evaṃ lokiyalokuttarabhedā sabbā abhiññāyo. Uttarimanussadhammeti uttarimanussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhammo uttarimanussadhammo. Atha vā uttari manussadhammāti uttarimanussadhammo, manussadhammo nāma dasakusalakammapathadhammo. So hi vinā bhāvanāmanasikārena pakatiyāva manussehi nibbattetabbato manussattabhāvāvahato vā ‘‘manussadhammo’’ti vuccati, tato uttari pana jhānādīni ‘‘uttarimanussadhammo’’ti veditabbāni. Attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenāti ahaṃ yattakaṃ kālaṃ yattake vā samāpattivihāre abhiññāyo ca vaḷañjemi, tathā kassapopīti evaṃ yathāvuttauttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṃ katvā ṭhapanena. Idañca navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññādibhāvasāmaññena pasaṃsāmattaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi āyasmā mahākassapo bhagavā viya devasikaṃ catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā samāpattiyo samāpajjati, yamakapāṭihāriyādivasena vā abhiññāyo vaḷañjeti. Ettha ca ‘‘uttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenā’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi –
此处所说“新次第方便修习具六种神通分别”,指的是新次第方便修习法,应按先后先行摄取之次第,与相应的八种定相分别连行。所谓六种神通,即断尽烦恼之智与五种神通,总共六种。区分有世间与无世间两种所有神通。所谓“上人行”,即是上人及阿拉汉禅那等觉者所具的法。所谓“上人果”,即上人果位,乃指人道十善道。若不借修习思惟等方法,能使凡夫得度而无后退,这即人法。若借修习则禅定等功德称为“上人行法”。我曾如实依教修成此上人行法中各禅那与神通,故称之为“卡萨巴修习法”。此即所谓“新次第方便修习及六神通等”,仅是赞叹之词。大阿阇黎卡萨巴未曾如世尊一般,修成两种三十余万亿四圣谛定,亦未有神通表现如独特变化奇迹。此中所说“上人行法实自我正勤建立”,终归为示意之辞。
‘‘Ovada kassapa bhikkhū, karohi kassapa bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ, ahaṃ vā kassapa bhikkhū ovadeyyaṃ tvaṃ vā, ahaṃ vā kassapa bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kareyyaṃ tvaṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.149).
“诫勉卡萨巴比库,劝勉卡萨巴比库修行法门,或我劝勉卡萨巴比库,你亦当劝勉彼等如是而行。”(《增支相应部续传》卷二一四)
Evampi attanā samasamaṭṭhāne ṭhapetiyeva, tassa kimaññaṃ āṇaṇyaṃ bhavissati aññatra dhammavinayasaṅgāyanāti adhippāyo. Tattha ‘‘tassāti tassa anuggahassā’’ti majjhimagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Tassa meti vā attho gahetabbo. Potthakesu hi katthaci ‘‘tassa me’’ti pāṭhoyeva dissati, dhammavinayasaṅgāyanaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ kiṃ nāma tassa me āṇaṇyaṃ aṇaṇabhāvo bhavissatīti attho. ‘‘Nanu maṃ bhagavā’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ upamāvasena vibhāveti. Sakakavacaissariyānuppadānenāti ettha cīvarassa nidassanavasena kavacassa gahaṇaṃ kataṃ, samāpattiyā nidassanavasena issariyaṃ gahitaṃ. Kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakanti kulavaṃsassa kulappaveṇiyā patiṭṭhāpakaṃ. ‘‘Me saddhammavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpako’’ti niccasāpekkhattā samāso daṭṭhabbo, me saddhammavaṃsassa patiṭṭhāpako pavattakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttavacanamanussaranto anuggahesīti cintayanto dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti sambandho, dhātubhājanadivase tattha sannipatitānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti attho.
如是自我正勤确立修行之际,将有何利何益?唯有与法律共同守护耳。中间章节中说“tassāti tassa anuggahassā”,意即“某人助持某人”。可按此义解。部分抄本有“tassa me”句,安排法律设定后,除协助之外,别无其他利弊。以“难道非世尊乎”等类似譬喻,予以说明。所谓天帝衣,是指袈裟穿戴之示范;神通示范则指其威力的展现。世系建立者,即指建系祖先。所谓“我乃正法世系建立者”,常作必备结论,明确示知。研习教言上下时,心思专注助力比库等生起讷愿,尤其于修奉法节会时,助生发心之意乃此义也。
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyā vibhāvento āha ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Tattha ekamidāhanti ettha idanti nipātamattaṃ. Ekaṃ samayanti ca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ, ekasmiṃ samayeti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāvāyāti pāvānagarato, tattha piṇḍāya caritvā kusināraṃ gamissāmīti addhānamaggappaṭipannoti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhānamaggoti ca dīghamaggo vuccati. Dīghapariyāyo hettha addhānasaddo. Mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti guṇamahattenapi saṅkhyāmahattenapi mahatā. Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅghena bhikkhusaṅghena, samaṇagaṇena saddhiṃ ekatoti attho. ‘‘Pañcamattehī’’tiādinā saṅkhyāmahattaṃ vibhāveti. Matta-saddo cettha pamāṇavacano ‘‘bhojane mattaññutā’’tiādīsu viya. Sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ vitthārato veditabbanti sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ idha ānetvā vitthārato dassetabbanti adhippāyo.
此前解说意即依次分别阐明,始于“如其说”等句。其中文字“ekhamidāha”此处乃指“idanti”(感叹词,仅此而已)。“一时”则为指定特定场合用语,意为“在某一时刻”。“Pāvāya”意指“前往祗树给孤独园”,有记载“苦行散食往瞿尼罗城”的传说。所谓“addhānamaggo”即长路之径。此处“长”含能量广大之意。大僧团之广大即大小僧团之意义,同众多弟子结集众多比库众等,称为僧团。以“五分成五”等例说明数量概念。“matta”此处可理解为量度含义,如用饭食适量之义。所有关于“善分部”皆应详尽推敲,须将善分部原文引入文中详细阐述,正是设定此段所旨。
‘‘Tato paranti tato bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananato para’’nti ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Mahāgaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘tato paranti subhaddakaṇḍato para’’nti vuttaṃ. Idamevettha sārato paccetabbanti no takko. Ayameva hi ussāhajananappakāro, yadidaṃ ‘‘handa mayaṃ, āvuso, dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyāma, pure adhammo dippatī’’tiādi, tasmā ussāhajananato paranti na vattabbaṃ heṭṭhā ussāhajananappakārassa pāḷiyaṃ avuttattā. Ayañhettha pāḷikkamo –
“随后由比库们之生起奋发心而前进。”这是法护长老在大章节所说。中章节亦说“随后由善分部而后。”立论之道即是如此,此理不可反驳。此即生发积极努力之法门。正如“啊朋友,让我们精进持守法律,以前愚昧黑暗已逝”等语,故“不应谈论下等生起而谈及努力发心法门,因不合时宜破坏先行之法”由此可知。其中巴利文此为倒装。
‘‘Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo bhikkhū āmantesi, ekamidāhaṃ, āvuso, samayaṃ pāvāya kusināraṃ addhānamaggappaṭipanno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Atha khvāhaṃ, āvuso, maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdiṃ.
于是具寿大咖萨巴比库告诫众比库言:‘今当此时,诸位比库啊,我等随大比库僧团共同护持正道,正走于库西那洛城的前往之路。于是,我等于某株树根下等一处休息。’
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena aññataro ājīvako kusinārāya mandāravapupphaṃ gahetvā pāvaṃ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti. Addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, āvuso, taṃ ājīvakaṃ dūratova āgacchantaṃ, disvāna taṃ ājīvakaṃ etadavocaṃ ‘apāvuso, amhākaṃ satthāraṃ jānāsī’ti ? ‘Āma, āvuso, jānāmi. Ajja sattāhaparinibbuto samaṇo gotamo, tato me idaṃ mandāravapupphaṃ gahitanti. Tatrāvuso, ye te bhikkhū avītarāgā, appekacce bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṃ papatanti āvaṭṭanti vivaṭṭanti, ‘atikhippaṃ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṃ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṃ cakkhuṃ loke antarahita’nti. Ye pana te bhikkhū vītarāgā, te satā sampajānā adhivāsenti ‘aniccā saṅkhārā, taṃ kutettha labbhā’’’ti.
那时有一位行商来到库西那洛,携带一朵晚香玉花,意欲前往那前行之路。我见那行商远远而来,便对他说:“朋友,请问你是否认识我们的师长?”他答:“是的,我认识。今天,那位断尽生死烦恼的出家人果德玛正行于此处,手持此晚香玉花。”诸位啊,那些无嗔恚的比库们看见他,有些拿起石子投掷,有些断枝跌落,有些缠绕反绕,议论曰:“世尊圆寂太早,觉者早逝,眼光已从世间隐没。”然无嗔恚的比库们,明了知觉,洞察住于“诸行无常,何处可得?”
‘‘Atha khvāhaṃ, āvuso, te bhikkhū etadavocaṃ – ‘alaṃ, āvuso, mā socittha mā paridevittha, nanvetaṃ, āvuso, bhagavatā paṭikacceva akkhātaṃ ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo. Taṃ kutettha, āvuso, labbhā, yaṃ taṃ jātaṃ bhūtaṃ saṅkhataṃ palokadhammaṃ, taṃ vata mā palujjī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti.
于是诸比库语曰:“诸位!勿忧勿伤,绝非师长所言,‘诸法皆因缘所生,依所缘不同,自有不同。既然生有,不应弃念’,此处别无他处可得所生、所成、所成法,故勿忧念此。”
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena, āvuso, subhaddo nāma vuḍḍhapabbajito tassaṃ parisāyaṃ nisinno hoti. Atha kho āvuso subhaddo vuḍḍhapabbajito te bhikkhū etadavoca ‘alaṃ, āvuso, mā socittha mā paridevittha, sumuttā mayaṃ tena mahāsamaṇena, upaddutā ca mayaṃ homa’ ‘idaṃ vo kappati, idaṃ vo na kappatī’ti, ‘idāni pana mayaṃ yaṃ icchissāma, taṃ karissāma, yaṃ na icchissāma, na taṃ karissāmā’ti. Handa mayaṃ āvuso dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyāma, pure adhammo dippati, dhammo paṭibāhīyati, avinayo pure dippati, vinayo paṭibāhīyati, pure adhammavādino balavanto honti, dhammavādino dubbalā honti, pure avinayavādino balavanto honti, vinayavādino dubbalā hontī’’ti.
当时,年长出家人苏伐多坐于其会中。苏伐多告诉诸比库:“诸位!莫悲莫恸,因吾等得解脱于大神仙,故不受牵累。尔等若为成就所愿,当为行所欲,非欲则勿为。且宜努力共同守持法与律:昔日邪法显现,法被违犯,律昔显现戒被破坏。先时邪说强盛,法语弱小,先时守律遭重视,律语罹轻蔑。”
‘‘‘Tena hi, bhante, thero bhikkhū uccinatū’ti. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo ekenūnapañcaarahantasatāni uccini. Bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ mahākassapaṃ etadavocuṃ ‘ayaṃ, bhante, āyasmā ānando kiñcāpi sekkho, abhabbo chandā dosā mohā bhayā agatiṃ gantuṃ, bahu cānena bhagavato santike dhammo ca vinayo ca pariyatto. Tena hi, bhante, thero āyasmantampi ānandaṃ uccinatū’’’tiādi (cūḷava. 437).
于是,长老比库们获得坚立之勇气。具寿大咖萨巴比库选立五百多阿拉汉。比库们对具寿大咖萨巴说:“此长老阿难虽为学人,然志不坚,不能离欲、恚、痴,恐迷途失行。然佛陀前所教法与律,已颂流甚广。故此,长老也坚定令阿难勇立。”
Tasmā tato paranti ettha subhaddakaṇḍato paranti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ vitthārato veditabba’’nti hi iminā ‘‘yaṃ na icchissāma, na taṃ karissāmā’’ti etaṃ pariyantaṃ subhaddakaṇḍapāḷiṃ dassetvā idāni avasesaṃ ussāhajananappakārappavattaṃ pāḷimeva dassento ‘‘handa mayaṃ āvuso’’tiādimāha.
自此以后,应当审详观察苏伐多章节之义理,详见“凡不欲者,亦不为之”之终章。今展现苏伐多章节全体,并应持续展现激励努力之作用,于巴利文中详加呈现,如“诸位啊,吾辈当共守护法与律”等语。
Tattha pure adhammo dippatīti ettha adhammo nāma dasakusalakammapathadhammapaṭipakkhabhūto adhammo. Pure dippatīti api nāma dippati. Atha vā yāva adhammo dhammaṃ paṭibāhituṃ samattho hoti, tato puretaramevāti attho. Āsanne hi anāgate ayaṃ puresaddo. Dippatīti dippissati. Pure-saddayogena hi anāgatatthe ayaṃ vattamānapayogo yathā ‘‘purā vassati devo’’ti. Keci panettha evaṃ vaṇṇayanti ‘‘pureti pacchā anāgate yathā addhānaṃ gacchantassa gantabbamaggo ‘pure’ti vuccati, tathā idha daṭṭhabba’’nti. Avinayoti pahānavinayasaṃvaravinayānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūto avinayo. ‘‘Vinayavādino dubbalā hontī’’ti evaṃ iti-saddopi ettha daṭṭhabbo, ‘‘tato paraṃ āhā’’ti iminā sambandho. Potthakesu pana katthaci iti-saddo na dissati, pāḷiyaṃ pana dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyañca attheva iti-saddo.
释此处“先前谓人是愚夫”之义,所谓先前愚夫者,是指不善十业道法而践行之者,此即愚之义。又谓先前愚夫,亦称为愚者。或曰,有至愚而能胜法者,谓先前愚夫即是此义。未来将至之人,即谓愚夫也。谓将现之义为“将显”。“先”与“显”句相连者,指当下与未来之关系,犹如“从前有天雨”之现用与过去时之对应。有说此处“先”者谓后即未来,如“从前行者,路之归处谓‘先’”此义应察。愚者即无约束戒律、持戒等者,谓无戒者。说戒者不足者、软弱者,亦当察此意。经藏中无此“究竟”之义,但巴利长部及其注疏表达意旨明确。
Tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Uccinane uyyojentā hi taṃ mahākassapattheraṃ evamāhaṃsu. Bhikkhū uccinatūti saṅgītiyā anurūpe bhikkhū uccinitvā gaṇhātūti attho. ‘‘Sakalanavaṅga…pe… pariggahesī’’ti etena sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavapariyantānaṃ yathāvuttapuggalānaṃ satipi āgamādhigamasabbhāve saha paṭisambhidāhi tevijjādiguṇayuttānaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiyā ukkaṃsagatattā saṅgītiyā bahūpakārataṃ dasseti. Tattha sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanapariyattidhareti sakalaṃ suttageyyādi navaṅgaṃ ettha, etassa vā atthīti sakalanavaṅgaṃ, satthusāsanaṃ. Atthakāmena pariyāpuṇitabbato diṭṭhadhammikādipurisattapariyattabhāvato ca pariyattīti tīṇi piṭakāni vuccanti, taṃ sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanasaṅkhātaṃ pariyattiṃ dhārentīti sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanapariyattidharā, tādiseti attho. Bahūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā ca avihatattā tā janenti, tāhi vā janitāti puthujjanā. Duvidhā puthujjanā andhaputhujjanā kalyāṇaputhujjanāti. Tattha yesaṃ khandhadhātuāyatanādīsu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇapaccavekkhaṇāni natthi, te andhaputhujjanā. Yesaṃ tāni atthi, te kalyāṇaputhujjanā. Te idha ‘‘puthujjanā’’ti adhippetā. Samathabhāvanāsinehābhāvena sukkhā lūkhā asiniddhā vipassanā etesanti sukkhavipassakā.
故谓此为加注结语。长老大咖萨巴及诸比库皆以“比库增多”诠此义。意谓齐集之比库以合议传受。此称“诸般守护诸逸恶净断修习者”,具三明诸德,通达诸经文之理,彰显三明慧之利益。所谓“诸般九分”,即为萨咖教法八部分及修习法等全经义总称,亦谓“诸般法义”,此意也。以善愿补足之因,故称“具足传承之三藏全经义”。多种烦恼因我执故起者,随学外道无明谓之愚人。愚人分为盲愚与善愚二,盲愚者,对色根等无觉知,善愚者则有所觉。此处“愚人”特指此二类,前者无根本修持,后者有之。以修止观修习者,谓清净慧者。
Tipiṭakasabbapariyattippabhedadhareti tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ samāhāro tipiṭakaṃ, tipiṭakasaṅkhātaṃ navaṅgādivasena anekadhā bhinnaṃ sabbapariyattippabhedaṃ dhārentīti tipiṭakasabbapariyattippabhedadharā, tādiseti attho. Anu anu taṃsamaṅgīnaṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti anubhāvo, anubhāvo eva ānubhāvo, pabhāvo. Mahanto ānubhāvo yesaṃ te mahānubhāvā. Tevijjādibhedeti tisso vijjāyeva tevijjā, tā ādi yesaṃ chaḷabhiññādīnaṃ te tevijjādayo, te bhedā anekappakārā bhinnā etesanti tevijjādibhedā, khīṇāsavā, tādiseti attho. Atha vā tisso vijjā etassa atthīti tevijjo, so ādi yesaṃ chaḷabhiññādīnaṃ te tevijjādayo, te bhedā yesaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ te tevijjādibhedā, tādiseti attho. Ye sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti ye bhikkhū sandhāya idaṃ ‘‘atha kho āyasmā’’tiādivacanaṃ saṅgītikkhandhake (cūḷava. 437) vuttanti attho.
此谓三藏全经义之各种加注流派。三藏合称为“藏”,其总称为“诸藏释义本”,因其有多种不同注解而异称“藏释异记”,亦谓“诸藏释义力持者”,是也。谓以渐次修持,增强生起之力,即为眷属力。所谓大眷属力者,为众多大力也。三明之异,即三明之别。三明者,有灭尽三明等,因分别而称三明异。或谓三明为此意,谓三明为六通等三明之首,种种差别出于无漏三明之异,亦谓此意。若言“三明者”,则指三明之原义,乃六通等三明之别名。经文中有“世尊诸藏义述于此”等句,出自小结集卷437,所释意乃如是。
Kissa panāti kasmā pana. Sikkhatīti sekkho, atha vā sikkhanaṃ sikkhā, sāyeva tassa sīlanti sekkho. So hi apariyositasikkhattā ca tadadhimuttattā ca ekantena sikkhanasīlo na asekkho viya pariniṭṭhitasikkho tattha paṭipassaddhussāho, nāpi vissaṭṭhasikkho pacurajano viya tattha anadhimutto. Atha vā ariyāya jātiyā tīsu sikkhāsu jāto, tattha vā bhavoti sekkho. Atha vā ikkhati etāyāti ikkhā, maggaphalasammādiṭṭhi. Saha ikkhāyāti sekkho. Uparimaggattayakiccassa apariyositattā saha karaṇīyenāti sakaraṇīyo. Assāti anena. Asammukhā paṭiggahitaṃ nāma natthīti nanu ca –
此谓为何故而名之修习?修学即教诲,谓修习中法度戒律,谓修习之戒者即教诲。彼修习不舍已然深通者谓完善修习者,非浅表修习,非未得定者,亦非放逸世俗者也。亦谓圣众出世圣者,生于三修行中,此谓完善者。或谓渴念,谓对正见道果之企求。连带渴念者谓完善修学者。上行道之事未尽且行携带之义谓共事,名为共事者。持戒谓以此义。未与现前所受谓无现义,否也。
‘‘Dvāsīti buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto;
二者谓佛所持,二千比库,
Caturāsīti sahassāni, ye me dhammā pavattino’’ti. (theragā. 1027) –
四千八百,比库教令者如是宣说。
Vuttattā kathametaṃ yujjatīti? Dve sahassāni bhikkhutoti vuttampi bhagavato santike paṭiggahitamevāti katvā vuttanti nāyaṃ virodho. Bahukārattāti bahuupakārattā. Upakāravacano hettha kārasaddo. Assāti bhaveyya.
已被宣说者,云何此事合乎正理?据世尊在座所说,称二千名比库,彼此共受奉行,故云此无冲突。谓多善者,谓多有利益者。此处“多有利益”二字,作为缘由之声。若有异说,应当出世间。
Ativiya vissatthoti ativiya vissāsiko. Nanti ānandattheraṃ, ‘‘ovadatī’’ti iminā sambandho. Ānandattherassa yebhuyyena navakāya parisāya vibbhamanena mahākassapatthero evamāha ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti. Tathā hi parinibbute satthari mahākassapatthero satthuparinibbāne sannipatitassa bhikkhusaṅghassa majjhe nisīditvā dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ pañcasate bhikkhū uccinitvā ‘‘āvuso, rājagahe vassaṃ vasantā dhammavinayaṃ saṅgāyeyyāma, tumhe pure vassūpanāyikāya attano attano palibodhaṃ pacchinditvā rājagahe sannipatathā’’ti vatvā attanā rājagahaṃ gato. Ānandattheropi bhagavato pattacīvaramādāya mahājanaṃ saññāpento sāvatthiṃ gantvā tato nikkhamma rājagahaṃ gacchanto dakkhiṇagirismiṃ cārikaṃ cari. Tasmiṃ samaye ānandattherassa tiṃsamattā saddhivihārikā yebhuyyena kumārabhūtā ekavassikaduvassikabhikkhū ceva anupasampannā ca vibbhamiṃsu. Kasmā panete pabbajitā, kasmā vibbhamiṃsūti? Tesaṃ kira mātāpitaro cintesuṃ ‘‘ānandatthero satthuvissāsiko aṭṭha vare yācitvā upaṭṭhahati, icchiticchitaṭṭhānaṃ satthāraṃ gahetvā gantuṃ sakkoti, amhākaṃ dārake etassa santike pabbājessāma, so satthāraṃ gahetvā āgamissati, tasmiṃ āgate mayaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ kātuṃ labhissāmā’’ti iminā tāva kāraṇena nesaṃ ñātakā te pabbājesuṃ. Satthari pana parinibbute tesaṃ sā patthanā upacchinnā, atha ne ekadivaseneva uppabbājesuṃ.
所谓“过于信赖”,谓甚信也。长老阿难曰:“他说”的关系由此而生。阿难与其众新众弟子数人中,大咖萨巴长老以示殊胜如此言:“我们并非幼稚者。”正如已入般涅槃的师长,大咖萨巴长老于师长捨报后僧团会中,居中坐,率领五百比库持诵法律,说:“诸友,尔等于王舍城住夏,依教律集,尔等先住夏中自察自身,后于王舍城集会。”言毕,亲自前往王舍城。阿难长老亦承受世尊法衣,通知大众,往沙瓦提后离去,向南方行走。时阿难长老带领三十多信心强固的年轻比库及初学比库,年少者一岁、两岁均在其中。为何这些出家者会放逸懈怠呢?据说其父母思虑曰:“阿难长老信佛师,入八年乞食而持守,欲归依师长,护持师长而往,吾等当令孩童受其教化,彼得师长归来时,当得我等大敬重。”由此因缘,其亲戚便将儿子送出家。然师长涅槃后,此念决裂,遂有一日即出家。
Atha ānandattheraṃ dakkhiṇagirismiṃ cārikaṃ caritvā rājagahamāgataṃ disvā mahākassapatthero evamāha ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ kassapasaṃyutte –
时大咖萨巴长老见阿难长老南行,自言:“我等非幼稚之徒。”此义在咖萨巴律集说曰——
‘‘Atha kiñcarahi tvaṃ, āvuso ānanda, imehi navehi bhikkhūhi indriyesu aguttadvārehi bhojane amattaññūhi jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttehi saddhiṃ cārikaṃ carasi, sassaghātaṃ maññe carasi, kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasi, olujjati kho te, āvuso ānanda, parisā, palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyā, na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti.
“阿难汝以何事,而与此等新众比库同行?彼辈于感官敢失控,饮食无节制,宿食不守,行迹放逸,毁坏僧团,汝兄疑此。阿难,其会众败坏,尔等非幼稚者。”
‘‘Api me bhante kassapa sirasmiṃ palitāni jātāni, atha ca pana mayaṃ ajjāpi āyasmato mahākassapassa kumārakavādā na muccāmāti. Tathā hi pana tvaṃ, āvuso ānanda, imehi navehi bhikkhūhi indriyesu aguttadvārehi bhojane amattaññūhi jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttehi saddhiṃ cārikaṃ carasi, sassaghātaṃ maññe carasi, kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasi, olujjati kho te, āvuso ānanda, parisā, palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyā, na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154).
“然我尊者咖萨巴,头发已出白发,仍言我等不会放逸。正因然,阿难汝与此新众比库,感官不御,饮食无节,宿食不守,行迹放逸,毁坏僧团,族群败坏,尔会非正道,尔等非幼稚者。”(律集第二百五十四章)
Tattha (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) sassaghātaṃ maññecarasīti sassaṃ ghātento viya āhiṇḍasi. Kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasīti kulāni upaghātento viya hananto viya āhananto viya āhiṇḍasi. Olujjatīti palujjati bhijjati. Palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyāti, āvuso, evaṃ ete tuyhaṃ pāyena yebhuyyena navakā ekavassikaduvassikadaharā ceva sāmaṇerā ca palujjanti. Na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ayaṃ kumārako attano pamāṇaṃ na vata jānātīti theraṃ tajjento āha. Kumārakavādā na muccāmāti kumārakavādato na muccāma. Tathā hi pana tvanti idamassa evaṃ vattabbatāya kāraṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – yasmā tvaṃ imehi navakehi bhikkhūhi indriyasaṃvararahitehi saddhiṃ vicarasi, tasmā kumārakehi saddhiṃ caranto ‘‘kumārako’’ti vattabbataṃ arahasīti.
此处“毁坏僧团”之意,谓若杀虫害虫一般。谓“毁坏族群”,意为伤害族群,如杀害一般。谓“败坏”,即败坏、腐败。是故“败坏会众”,指君彼以此过失污染新众比库及少年出家者。耆老称“尔等非幼稚者”,即此幼稚者不知自身份量,故指称之。谓“不能放逸”之意,实为“因放逸,致不能免放逸”。故此论断为因缘示现,谓:“尔等与此新人无节制之感官往来,故同行者可称‘幼稚者’,阿拉汉则当称非如此。”
‘‘Na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti ettha vā-saddo padapūraṇe. Vā-saddo hi upamānasamuccayasaṃsayavavassaggapadapūraṇavikappādīsu bahūsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘paṇḍito vāpi tena so’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 63) upamāne dissati, sadisabhāveti attho. ‘‘Taṃ vāpi dhīrā muni vedayantī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 213) samuccaye. ‘‘Ke vā ime kassa vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 296) saṃsaye. ‘‘Ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.181) vavassagge. ‘‘Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.170; saṃ. ni. 2.13) vikappeti. Idha pana padapūraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Teneva ca ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘vāsaddassa atthuddhāraṃ karontena ‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.154) padapūraṇe’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyampi (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) ettakameva vuttaṃ ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ayaṃ kumārako attano pamāṇaṃ na vata jānātīti theraṃ tajjento āhā’’ti. Etthāpi vatāti vacanasiliṭṭhatāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘na vāyanti ettha vāti vibhāsā, aññāsipi na aññāsipīti attho’’ti . Taṃ tassa matimattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hettha ayamattho sambhavati, tasmā attano pamāṇaṃ nāññāsīti evamattho veditabbo. Tatrāti evaṃ sati. Chandāgamanaṃ viyāti ettha chandā āgamanaṃ viyāti padacchedo kātabbo, chandena āgamanaṃ pavattanaṃ viyāti attho, chandena akattabbakaraṇaṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Chandaṃ vā āgacchati sampayogavasenāti chandāgamanaṃ, tathā pavatto apāyagamanīyo akusalacittuppādo. Atha vā ananurūpaṃ gamanaṃ agamanaṃ, chandena agamanaṃ chandāgamanaṃ, chandena sinehena ananurūpaṃ gamanaṃ pavattanaṃ akattabbakaraṇaṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Asekkhapaṭisambhidāppatteti asekkhabhūtā paṭisambhidā asekkhapaṭisambhidā, taṃ patte, paṭiladdhaasekkhapaṭisambhideti attho. Anumatiyāti anuññāya, yācanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“非吾等儿童自称醉矣”此处以“vā”字作句词补足。谓“vā”字多用于比喻、总汇疑义、消除疑问之句词补足中,见用于许多义理。如“贤者亦如其人”等语,以比喻见,如《论书·辅23》;“圣人亦慧知”等句中作总汇;“彼诸何人”式用作疑问;“此等沙门婆罗门悉皆愚痴”等语中作消解;又如“诸沙门婆罗门者”作转折。此处当观词补义理。师法法护长老所说“以‘vā’字作词补,如‘非吾等儿童自称醉’等语”,此即词补。论疏亦如是释:“非吾等儿童自称醉”者,即此儿童非其自身尺度自知也。此语亦可见为语言习惯。若他处或有释“vā非此处”,“非他知”等意者,当视为不同解读。由此当知,此“vā”为词补,用以解除疑义。又说“欲来者别断”,“以愿来者为起点”,“以愿为不做根本”,此为语法义理。欲发即来者,依止联结,为欲来;如恶心生起则不可因缘,谓欲来异于愿来。尚需辨析。又所谓无限辨察者,即无穷辨明,亦即辨得至理。许可者,谓曰准许;乞求者谓请求。皆有所指。
‘‘Kiñcāpi sekkho’’ti idaṃ na sekkhānaṃ agatigamanasabbhāvena vuttaṃ, asekkhānaṃyeva pana uccinitattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paṭhamamaggeneva hi cattāri agatigamanāni pahīyanti, tasmā kiñcāpi sekkho, tathāpi thero āyasmantampi ānandaṃ uccinatūti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Na pana kiñcāpi sekkho, tathāpi abhabbo agatiṃ gantunti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Abhabbo’’tiādinā pana dhammasaṅgītiyā tassa arahabhāvaṃ dassentā vijjamāne guṇe kathenti. Tattha chandāti chandena, sinehenāti attho. Agatiṃ gantunti agantabbaṃ gantuṃ, akattabbaṃ kātunti vuttaṃ hoti. Imāni pana cattāri agatigamanāni bhaṇḍabhājanīye ca vinicchayaṭṭhāne ca labbhanti. Tattha bhaṇḍabhājanīye tāva attano bhārabhūtānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ amanāpe bhaṇḍe sampatte taṃ parivattitvā manāpaṃ dento chandāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Attano pana abhārabhūtānaṃ manāpe bhaṇḍe sampatte taṃ parivattitvā amanāpaṃ dento dosāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Bhaṇḍesu bhājanīyavatthuñca ṭhitikañca ajānanto mohāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Mukharānaṃ vā rājādinissitānaṃ vā ‘‘ime me amanāpe bhaṇḍe dinne anatthaṃ kareyyu’’nti bhayena parivattitvā manāpaṃ dento bhayāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Yo pana evaṃ na gacchati, sabbesaṃ tulābhūto pamāṇabhūto majjhattova hutvā yaṃ yassa pāpuṇāti, tadeva tassa deti, ayaṃ catubbidhampi agatiṃ na gacchati nāma. Vinicchayaṭṭhāne pana attano bhārabhūtassa garukāpattiṃ lahukāpattiṃ katvā kathento chandāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Itarassa lahukāpattiṃ garukāpattiṃ katvā kathento dosāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Āpattivuṭṭhānaṃ pana samuccayakkhandhakañca ajānanto mohāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Mukharassa vā rājapūjitassa vā ‘‘ayaṃ me garukaṃ katvā āpattiṃ kathentassa anatthampi kareyyā’’ti garukameva lahukāpattiṃ kathento bhayāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Yo pana sabbesaṃ yathābhūtameva kathesi, ayaṃ catubbidhampi agatigamanaṃ na gacchati nāma. Theropi tādiso catunnampi agatigamanānaṃ paṭhamamaggeneva pahīnattā, tasmā saṅgāyanavasena dhammavinayavinicchaye sampatte chandādivasena aññathā akathetvā yathābhūtameva kathetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘abhabbo…pe… agatiṃ gantu’’nti. Pariyattoti adhīto, uggahitoti attho.
“有所不去”此语非指一切不去,而在别出“一切不去”口意也。首道则言四种不去,故曰“有所不去”,虽有不去,且为尊长长老安阿难之所显扬也。故有之虽无去,亦不可全无去者。谓曰“不堪”,此括法义相应,佛教通论以其阿拉汉之具足业果证显。此处“欲”为欲念,“爱”为爱恋。去者谓当去者、应观者、不可患者。如四类不去,则在珍宝分及决断处可获。此中珍宝分者,谓自身累积诸负担众多比库,不忍诸宝轻失,故逆转反向发欲行走称欲行。己有无负担者亦有受欲无负宝逆转称恶行。贵重之物及宫王等所依贤士,恐怖逆转称恐怖行。唯有不行此道者,称四类不去之绝对分。于决断时,则自我重负之轻重,重轻者各别论之,所获自在分别,称为欲行。于是他人轻重分别,则组成恶行。闻者与尊者敬重者,见其重轻不同,恐怖心发称恐怖行。唯如实说明,此四类不去不行也。长老亦如是自第一道弃四不去故。故集结之中,以法律教诀转述,其所成法义为“不可去”。
Uccinitenāti uccinitvā gahitena. Etadahosīti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Rājagahaṃ kho mahāgocaranti ettha ‘‘rājagahanti rājagahasāmantaṃ gahetvā vutta’’nti cūḷagaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gocaro viya gocaro, bhikkhācaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. So mahanto assa, etthāti vā mahāgocaraṃ, rājagahaṃ. Thāvarakammanti ciraṭṭhāyikammaṃ. Visabhāgapuggalo subhaddasadiso. Ukkoṭeyyāti nivāreyyāti attho. Ñattidutiyena kammena sāvesīti –
“取持坚固”者,即坚执不动也。此为转述语言习惯。王舍城盖为大牧场之地,谓“王舍城”处,人众如牛羊之牧场,即“牧场”义也。此大场所强盛,故称“王舍城大牧场”。“久住功课”者,指长时停留之修业。谓“结禁”、“禁止”以止息妄念,谓此也。第二义即以行为清净不受染污。
‘‘Suṇātu me, āvuso, saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imāni pañca bhikkhusatāni sammanneyya ‘rājagahe vassaṃ vasantāni dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabba’nti, esā ñatti.
“汝等听闻,善士僧众,若僧众达成共意,即五比库同志和集会议,议定‘于王舍城共住于雨季,修持正法律仪,不应他僧共住此城雨季’是为合约。”
‘‘Suṇātu me, āvuso, saṅgho, saṅgho imāni pañca bhikkhusatāni sammannati ‘rājagahe vassaṃ vasantāni dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabba’nti, yassāyasmato khamati imesaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ sammuti ‘rājagahe vassaṃ vasantānaṃ dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabba’nti, so tuṇhassa. Yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.
“汝等听闻,善士僧众,僧众五比库同志共达和议,谓‘于王舍城雨季共住,修持律仪法,不应他僧雨季共住于此城’。若此和议获尊长许可,则为确立;若被反对,则为争论。”
‘‘Sammatāni saṅghena imāni pañca bhikkhusatāni ‘rājagahe vassaṃ vasantāni dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabba’nti, khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti (cūḷava. 437) –
“僧众已达成以上五比库同志和议,许可此约,不许他僧雨季共住于王舍城,故此誓守。此语见于《小部》第437经。”
Evaṃ ñattidutiyena kammena sāvesi. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ saṅgītikkhandhake vuttanayeneva ñātabba’’nti.
如此由于第二次的业故而堕落。为此说曰:『此应当如此在合唱律中所说的,』。
Ayaṃ pana kammavācā tathāgatassa parinibbānato ekavīsatime divase katā. Vuttañhetaṃ dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā) ‘‘ayaṃ pana kammavācā tathāgatassa parinibbānato ekavīsatime divase katā. Bhagavā hi visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ paccūsasamaye parinibbuto, athassa sattāhaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ sarīraṃ gandhamālādīhi pūjayiṃsu. Evaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷanadivasā nāma ahesuṃ. Tato sattāhaṃ citakāya agginā jhāyi, sattāhaṃ sattipañjaraṃ katvā santhāgārasālāyaṃ dhātupūjaṃ kariṃsūti ekavīsati divasā gatā. Jeṭṭhamūlasukkapakkhapañcamiyaṃ pana dhātuyo bhājayiṃsu. Etasmiṃ dhātubhājanadivase sannipatitassa mahābhikkhusaṅghassa subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitena kataṃ anācāraṃ ārocetvā vuttanayeneva bhikkhū uccinitvā ayaṃ kammavācā katā. Imañca pana kammavācaṃ katvā thero bhikkhū āmantesi ‘āvuso idāni tumhākaṃ cattālīsadivasā okāso, tato paraṃ ayaṃ nāma no palibodho atthīti vattuṃ na labbhā, tasmā etthantare yassa rogapalibodho vā ācariyupajjhāyapalibodho vā mātāpitupalibodho vā atthi, pattaṃ vā pana pacitabbaṃ cīvaraṃ vā kātabbaṃ, so taṃ palibodhaṃ chinditvā karaṇīyaṃ karotū’ti. Evañca pana vatvā thero attano pañcasatāya parisāya parivuto rājagahaṃ gato, aññepi mahātherā attano attano parivāraṃ gahetvā sokasallasamappitaṃ mahājanaṃ assāsetukāmā taṃ taṃ disaṃ pakkantā. Puṇṇatthero pana sattasatabhikkhuparivāro ‘tathāgatassa parinibbānaṭṭhānaṃ āgatāgataṃ mahājanaṃ assāsessāmī’ti kusinārāyameva aṭṭhāsi. Āyasmā ānando yathā pubbe aparinibbutassa, evaṃ parinibbutassapi bhagavato sayameva pattacīvaramādāya pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṃ pakkāmi. Gacchato panassa parivārā bhikkhū gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā’’ti. Tasmā tathāgatassa parinibbānato tīsu sattāhesu atikkantesu ekavīsatime divase imaṃ kammavācaṃ sāvetvā thero rājagahaṃ pakkantoti veditabbaṃ.
这段业语是记载如来涅槃后第二十一天所作。根据《长部注疏》记载(长部尼注,第一章合唱律注释)说:「这段业语正是世尊涅槃后第廿一天所作。世尊涅槃时恰逢维萨卡月满日,其时天众以金花香饰其体七日,称为善戏乐日。其后七日以黄火焰供烧骨灰,七日建骨舎利框以供于庙堂,骨舍利在朱栢木月福日被分祭。当天聚集广大僧团,长老须跋陀以违教法事起恶行,众比库呵斥起哄故宣称此业语。长老比库劝诫弟子们:『诸比库,汝等于今起四十日之休息,之后不可再讲此事,若有病乱或师长家属忧恼者,若需解脱病苦,应断绝此事。』长老于是率五百比库及弟子,忧心忡忡前往王舍城,他长老亦携亲属四方迎教,期望慰藉广大众生。福长老则率七百比库同行,誓愿慰藉往来于拘尸那罗广大众生。长老阿难如涅槃前亦复如是,于世尊涅槃当日授受袈裟,携五百比库同往舍卫城,行经路上以规矩数比库。故此,目录应知如来涅槃后第二十一天,长老包藏此业语而赴王舍城。
Yadi evaṃ kasmā pana idha maṅgalasuttaṭṭhakathāyañca (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) ‘‘sattasu sādhukīḷanadivasesu sattasu ca dhātupūjādivasesu vītivattesū’’ti vuttaṃ? Sattasu dhātupūjādivasesu gahitesu tadavinābhāvato majjhe citakāya jhāpanasattāhampi gahitamevāti katvā visuṃ na vuttaṃ viya dissati. Yadi evaṃ atha kasmā ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto, diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti ca vuttanti? Nāyaṃ doso. Appakañhi ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hoti, tasmā samudāyo appakena adhikopi anadhiko viya hotīti katvā aḍḍhamāsato adhikepi pañca divase ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘dvāsītikhandhakavattānaṃ katthaci asītikhandhakavattānī’’ti vacanaṃ viya. Tathā appakena ūnopi ca samudāyo anūno viya hotīti katvā ‘‘diyaḍḍhamāsato ūnepi pañca divase diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyañhi (vibha. aṭṭha. 356) chamāsato ūnepi aḍḍhamāse ‘‘cha māse sajjhāyo kātabbo’’ti vuttavacanaṃ viya. Tattha hi tacapañcakādīsu catūsu pañcakesu dvīsu ca chakkesu ekekasmiṃ anulomato pañcāhaṃ, paṭilomato pañcāhaṃ, anulomapaṭilomato pañcāhaṃ, tathā purimapurimehi pañcakachakkehi saddhiṃ anulomato pañcāhaṃ, paṭilomato pañcāhaṃ, anulomapaṭilomato pañcāhanti evaṃ visuṃ tipañcāhaṃ ekato tipañcāhañca sajjhāyaṃ katvā chamāsaṃ sajjhāyo kātabboti vacanaṃ viya. Tattha hi vakkapañcakādīsu tīsu pañcakesu dvīsu ca chakkesu visuṃ heṭṭhimehi ekato ca sajjhāye pañcannaṃ pañcannaṃ pañcakānaṃ vasena pañcamāsaparipuṇṇā labbhanti, tacapañcake pana visuṃ tipañcāhamevāti aḍḍhamāsoyeveko labbhatīti aḍḍhamāsādhikapañcamāsā labbhanti.
若问为何《吉祥经注疏》(柱部=小部合唱律注,五节第一大合唱律注)云:「七日善戏乐日及七日供骨日已过去」?因七日供骨等日并未成立,居中黄火焰烧骨之七日亦未占据,故未详述。若说「半年已过,余下半年」,此亦无过错。小数或大数皆不拘束,因众数不等,故成多或少亦非违理,半年以上与五日而言,正是言过半故。犹如二十八日之转轮,分为四周五日、五周六日、依此合成二十八日亦然。又《念处分解注》第三百五十六页解释:三个月零半月时应办研习结转。此乃阻止随时修学而始终未见文教传承,故半年之中办研习乃合时宜。又以不同论著有异,佛体七日黄火焰烧骨,故小语集曰,涅槃后二十一日为朱栢木月福日。涅槃经巴利文中,烧骨七日不入,唯有两七日入;可取其乐者,因无碍故。又传说云:「半年逾期处,其间有一日为中断日,称为修行日骚闹日,故此日不计入。」此并不美妙,故涅槃经巴利云:「修行日如是三七日盛满」,以三七相应证三周满也。如此,涅槃七日善戏乐日转完后,第八日烧佛体于黄火焰,再后七日供骨,合计逾半月,如今余期即为半年余与五日,故此义应持此释义。
Evaṃ sati yathā tattha aḍḍhamāse ūnepi māsaparicchedena paricchijjamāne sajjhāye cha māsā paricchedakā hontīti paricchijjamānassa sajjhāyassa sattamāsādimāsantaragamananivāraṇatthaṃ chamāsaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, na sakalachamāse sajjhāyappavattidassanatthaṃ, evamidhāpi māsavasena kāle paricchijjamāne ūnepi pañcadivase diyaḍḍhamāso paricchedako hotīti paricchijjamānassa kālassa dvimāsādimāsantaragamananivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti diyaḍḍhamāsaggahaṇaṃ katanti evamettha attho gahetabbo. Aññathā ca aṭṭhakathāvacanānaṃ aññamaññavirodho āpajjati. Ekāhameva vā bhagavato sarīraṃ citakāya jhāyīti khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ adhippāyoti gahetabbaṃ. Evañhi sati parinibbānato sattasu sādhukīḷanadivasesu vītivattesu aṭṭhamiyaṃ citakāya bhagavato sarīraṃ jhāpetvā tato paraṃ sattasu divasesu dhātupūjaṃ akaṃsūti aḍḍhamāso atikkanto, gimhānaṃ diyaḍḍho ca māso seso hoti. Parinibbānasuttantapāḷiyampi hi citakāya jhāpanasattāhaṃ na āgataṃ, dveyeva sattāhāni āgatāni, upaparikkhitvā pana yaṃ ruccati, taṃ gahetabbaṃ. Ito aññena vā pakārena yathā na virujjhati, tathā kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkantoti ettha eko divaso naṭṭho. So pāṭipadadivaso kolāhaladivaso nāma, tasmā idha na gahito’’ti. Taṃ na sundaraṃ parinibbānasuttantapāḷiyaṃ pāṭipadadivasatoyeva paṭṭhāya sattāhassa vuttattā aṭṭhakathāyañca parinibbānadivasenapi saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ gahitattā. Tathā hi parinibbānadivasena saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ gahitattā jeṭṭhamūlasukkapañcamī ekavīsatimo divaso hoti.
如此般若,依时以半年余之月数分割,于修习时刻割除,结转为六个月后复行。此乃防止结转中间出现月份次序错乱,为六月集法所成,非整半年内随意结转以展示修习,也非由月数点定。亦依月数约略结转,半月内余日以两个月计,用于说明依此理义。又以不同注疏之言或有歧义。一次佛体七日黄火焰烧骨,应理解为小乘论述之主旨。由是知涅槃后二十一日内七日善戏乐日与七日供骨日已过,第八日烧骨焚体,随后七日供骨。半月逾期复有余日,两个月余故。巴利文涅槃经中,七日烧骨未录入,仅两七日,无碍取法。若云「半年逾期中有一日未算」,名为修行日骚闹日,故不计者,亦非佳理。涅槃巴利文云:「三七日修行日已满」,即三周期结转法也。故七日善戏乐日过后,佛体烧骨完成,七日供骨期满为止。二十一天已满,其中两个七日各有其义。
Sattasu sādhukīḷanadivasesūti ettha sādhukīḷanaṃ nāma saṃvegavatthuṃ kittetvā kittetvā aniccatāpaṭisaṃyuttāni gītāni gāyitvā pūjāvasena kīḷanato sundaraṃ kīḷananti sādhukīḷanaṃ. Atha vā saparahitasādhanaṭṭhena sādhu, tesaṃ saṃvegavatthuṃ kittetvā kittetvā kīḷanaṃ sādhukīḷanaṃ, uḷārapuññapasavanato samparāyikatthāvirodhikīḷāvihāroti attho. Ettha ca purimasmiṃ sattāhe sādhukīḷāya ekadesena katattā sādhukīḷanadivasā nāma te jātā. Visesato pana dhātupūjādivasesuyeva sādhukīḷanaṃ akaṃsu. Tatoyeva ca mahāparinibbānasuttantapāḷiyaṃ –
「七日善戏乐日」处,此「善戏乐」指称兴奋激发之因缘,唱歌乐舞以表敬奉,谓此为优美之戏乐。又或依他助之方便而称善戏乐,此助缘激发功德,为护持生死轮回之外道戏剧之事。早期佛教教法中,前七日内施行善戏乐日,因而称此为七日善戏乐日。特别指于七日供骨等时节施行善戏乐,称之为善戏乐。由此可知大涅槃经巴利文记载曰——
‘‘Atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato sarīrāni sattāhaṃ santhāgāre sattipañjaraṃ karitvā dhanupākāraṃ parikkhipāpetvā naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkariṃsu garuṃ kariṃsu mānesuṃ pūjesu’’nti (dī. ni. 2.235).
「当时迦毗罗卫之笄那鹿窟国,摩揭陀国王室众人,为佛身七日在骨舍中建框,置弓箭武器以防护,众载歌载舞,演奏乐器,以花环香料装饰,庄严敬礼国王贵族。」
Etassa aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.235) vuttaṃ –
此处在阿毗达摩分部注疏中(《中部增支释》第二卷第235页)曾言—
‘‘Kasmā panete evamakaṃsūti? Ito purimesu dvīsu sattāhesu te bhikkhusaṅghassa ṭhānanisajjokāsaṃ karontā khādanīyabhojanīyādīni saṃvidahantā sādhukīḷikāya okāsaṃ na labhiṃsu. Tato nesaṃ ahosi ‘imaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷitaṃ kīḷissāma, ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati, yaṃ amhākaṃ pamattabhāvaṃ ñatvā kocideva āgantvā dhātuyo gaṇheyya, tasmā ārakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā kīḷissāmā’ti, tena te evamakaṃsū’’ti.
「为何是如是呢?从此以前的两个七天时间里,这比库僧团中那些处于住所与安坐之间的时间,因事务繁忙未得暇时共修正行。他们调理食用的副食、主食等,却未找到合适游乐的时机。于是他们心中生起念头:‘今后这七天当修习正行游乐。因为我们知晓自身的粗心大意,若外来之人入内动军器,故立守护而共修正行。’于是他们如是议论。」
Tasmā visesato sādhukīḷikā dhātupūjādivasesuyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Te pana dhātupūjāya katattā ‘‘dhātupūjādivasā’’ti pākaṭā jātāti āha ‘‘sattasu ca dhātupūjādivasesū’’ti. Upakaṭṭhāti āsannā. Vassaṃ upanenti upagacchanti etthāti vassūpanāyikā. Ekaṃ maggaṃ gatoti cārikaṃ caritvā mahājanaṃ assāsetuṃ ekena maggena gato. Evaṃ anuruddhattherādayopi tesu tesu janapadesu cārikaṃ caritvā mahājanaṃ assāsentā gatāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yena sāvatthi, tena cārikaṃ pakkāmīti yattha sāvatthi, tattha cārikaṃ pakkāmi, yena vā disābhāgena sāvatthi pakkamitabbā hoti, tena disābhāgena cārikaṃ pakkāmīti attho.
因此,须特别注重所谓的正行游乐以及礼敬舍利宝物的时间范围。对于舍利宝物的礼敬已经明确为“舍利宝物礼敬时间”等说法。所谓近似居止,被称为“然后前来”,如说是雨季巡行,对外出携带一条道途经行访众生,乃一条道往返行走。由此可见,像尊者阿奴鲁达长老等亦于各地行道访众,广度大众。所谓‘以那处为娑婆提,以那处巡路结束’,谓在娑婆提为起点,往返此地;‘以往哪一方向至娑婆提显然应当返回’,就是指按适当方位往返巡行的意思。
Tatrāti tassaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ. Aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttāyāti ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinayappavattāya. Asamucchinnataṇhānusayattā avijjātaṇhābhisaṅkhatena kammunā bhavayonigatiṭhitisattāvāsesu khandhapañcakasaṅkhātaṃ attabhāvaṃ janeti abhinibbattetīti jano, kilese janeti, ajani, janissatīti vā jano, mahanto janoti mahājano, taṃ mahājanaṃ, bahujananti attho. Saññāpetvāti samassāsetvā. Gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivaritvāti paribhogacetiyabhāvato gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivarīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) ‘‘gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Milātaṃ mālākacavaraṃ milātamālākacavaraṃ. Yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvāti paṭhamaṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ anatikkamitvā yathāṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapetvāti attho. Bhagavato ṭhitakāle karaṇīyaṃ vattaṃ sabbamakāsīti senāsane kattabbavattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Karonto ca nhānakoṭṭhake sammajjanaudakūpaṭṭhānādikālesu gandhakuṭiṃ gantvā ‘‘nanu bhagavā ayaṃ tumhākaṃ nhānakālo, ayaṃ dhammadesanākālo, ayaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ovādadānakālo, ayaṃ sīhaseyyaṃ kappanakālo, ayaṃ mukhadhovanakālo’’tiādinā nayena paridevamānova akāsi. Tamenaṃ aññatarā devatā ‘‘bhante ānanda, tumhe evaṃ paridevamānā kathaṃ aññe assāsayissathā’’ti saṃvejesi. So tassā vacanena saṃviggahadayo santhambhitvā tathāgatassa parinibbānato pabhuti ṭhānanisajjabahulatāya ussannadhātukaṃ kāyaṃ samassāsetuṃ khīravirecanaṃ pivi. Idāni taṃ dassento ‘‘atha thero’’tiādimāha.
‘那里’指那娑婆提城。‘Sudanti’为助词。‘Aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttāyāti’则是喻示“三法印”之义,即“诸行无常”等教理由此起显。由于未断除渴爱习气及无明习气而致业流转生死,此中五蕴集聚而显现其自身本性,生起我执,轮回不息。‘jano’是指众生、烦恼、无生者、生者或大众,‘mahanto janoti mahājano’则指广大众生的意思。‘Saññāpetvāti’含有“汇聚、摄受”之含义。‘Gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivariti’即表礼敬香亭时拓开其门,从而礼敬香亭。此义亦可见于《长部增支释》(《中部增支释》第一卷第一大部注疏)记载“礼敬香亭”等文。‘Milātaṃ mālākacavaraṃ’意为净布、净花环。‘Yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā’表立正于本处不移,虽未越过初定所处之地,亦即不移离被立止处。《佛遗教经》称世尊住世时,安置法座,夏季作息时必应就座,如军队设立营帐一样。比库们洗浴、看护饮水井等时,更出入香亭,谓此乃“佛陀之浴时,佛法宣说时,比库劝说授戒时,狮子坐席时,口面洗涤时”等之时,因而若此经义令人感动似乎是因敬礼而生。当诸天以此问尊者阿难:“尊者阿难!你等如此感动,如何又能劝说他人?”受此启发,尊者以佛涅槃后大量难舍的遗物摄集众生,以乳汁解渴饮用。现今由此故事示现,说“此时长老”等语。
Ussannadhātukanti upacitasemhādidhātukaṃ kāyaṃ. Samassāsetunti santappetuṃ. Dutiyadivaseti devatāya saṃvejitadivasato. ‘‘Jetavanavihāraṃ paviṭṭhadivasato vā dutiyadivase’’ti vadanti. Viriccati etenāti virecanaṃ, osadhaparibhāvitaṃ khīrameva virecananti khīravirecanaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ bhesajjapānaṃ sandhāya. Aṅgasubhatāya subhoti evaṃ laddhanāmattā subhena māṇavena. Pahitaṃ māṇavakanti ‘‘satthā parinibbuto ānandatthero kirassa pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā āgato, mahājano ca taṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamatī’’ti sutvā ‘‘vihāraṃ kho pana gantvā mahājanamajjhe na sakkā sukhena paṭisanthāraṃ vā kātuṃ dhammakathaṃ vā sotuṃ, gehaṃ āgataṃyeva naṃ disvā sukhena paṭisanthāraṃ karissāmi, ekā ca me kaṅkhā atthi, tampi naṃ pucchissāmī’’ti cintetvā subhena māṇavena pesitaṃ māṇavakaṃ. Etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘akālo kho’’tiādikaṃ ānandatthero avoca. Akālo khoti ajja gantuṃ yuttakālo na hoti. Kasmāti ce āha ‘‘atthi me ajjā’’tiādi. Bhesajjamattāti appamattakaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Appattho hi ayaṃ mattāsaddo ‘‘mattā sukhapariccāgā’’tiādīsu viya.
所谓“Ussannadhātuka”即已增盛的像宝体。‘Samassāsetunti’是加热、煮沸的意思。‘Dutiyadivaseti’即第二天。此为天人因感于佛涅槃次日所发之感应,谓“入杰陀颂寺次日”即是指第二日。‘Viriccati’意为促使排出,因药物作用排泄而称为排乳。‘Yaṃ sandhāyāti’谓指药或饮剂之取用。‘Aṅgasubhatāya subhoti’则因身体洁净美好而称美称。‘Pahitaṃ māṇavakanti’谓“奉命之童子”。“师尊已证涅槃,尊者阿难携其法衣回来,大众为见礼而聚集”,诸如此类。听闻后,童子思虑“前去法座示现诵法难以安适,既然已回家,便安心示现礼拜,然尚有一疑难,将加以询问”,遂托童子而传达。此处记载尊者阿难说“此时不宜”,谓不是动身合适时机。何以故?若他回答“今有时间”,则表承诺有时间。此中“药量”意味着适量药剂,‘appamattako bhesajjaṃ’,因“稍有醉意”亦含类似语义。
Dutiyadivaseti khīravirecanaṃ pītadivasato dutiyadivase. Cetakattherenāti cetiyaraṭṭhe jātattā ‘‘cetako’’ti evaṃladdhanāmena. Subhena māṇavena puṭṭhoti ‘‘yesu dhammesu bhavaṃ gotamo imaṃ lokaṃ patiṭṭhāpesi, te tassa accayena naṭṭhā nu kho, dharanti, sace dharanti, ānando jānissati, handa naṃ pucchāmī’’ti evaṃ cintetvā ‘‘yesaṃ so bhavaṃ gotamo dhammānaṃ vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṃ janataṃ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesi, katamesānaṃ kho bho ānanda dhammānaṃ so bhavaṃ gotamo vaṇṇavādī ahosī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.448) subhena māṇavena puṭṭho. Athassa thero tīṇi piṭakāni sīlakkhandhādīhi tīhi khandhehi saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ kho, māṇava, khandhānaṃ so bhagavā vaṇṇavādī’’tiādinā subhasuttamabhāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘dīghanikāye subhasuttaṃ nāma dasamaṃ suttamabhāsī’’ti.
“第二日”谓为排乳之日,与喝乳之日相别。‘Cetakattherenāti’谓此天人出身于称为“杰塔”的国度。“Subhena māṇavena puṭṭhoti”即“托清净童子以询”,意谓“诸法存在,果德玛固然创设此世界但终有毁灭,众法保留,佛陀则知此事。请教我。”如此思量后,责问说“谁是那个详细阐说法义而慰安大众之果德玛?”对此(《中部增支释》第一卷448页)亦有记载。尊者以三藏戒群聚合体,示现所谓“这三大蕴,果德玛长老为其描绘”。因而得名《善经》中的记载曰:“善经是第十卷经。”
Khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇanti ettha khaṇḍanti chinnaṃ. Phullanti bhinnaṃ. Tesaṃ paṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ puna sammā pākatikakaraṇaṃ, abhinavakaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Rājagahanti evaṃnāmakaṃ nagaraṃ. Tañhi mandhatumahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā ‘‘rājagaha’’nti vuccati. Chaḍḍitapatitauklāpāti chaḍḍitā ca patitā ca uklāpā ca ahesunti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhagavato parinibbānaṭṭhānaṃ gacchantehi bhikkhūhi chaḍḍitā vissaṭṭhā, tatoyeva ca upacikādīhi khāditattā ito cito ca patitā, sammajjanābhāvena ākiṇṇakacavarattā uklāpā ca ahesunti. Imamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Paricchedavasena veṇiyati dissatīti pariveṇaṃ. Tatthāti tesu vihāresu. Khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇanti iminā sambandho. Paṭhamaṃ māsanti vassānassa paṭhamaṃ māsaṃ, accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Senāsanavattānaṃ paññattattā senāsanakkhandhake ca senāsanapaṭibaddhānaṃ bahūnaṃ vacanato ‘‘bhagavatā…pe… vaṇṇita’’nti vuttaṃ.
所谓断裂花朵的重新聚合,是指断裂、破碎。断裂即破损。对断裂、破碎事物的重新聚合,被称为恰当的再制作、新制作。王舍城,便是以此命名的城镇。该城因大象如缓慢巨象般被豢养而得名“王舍城”。弃绝、坠落、聚集之意,其中弃绝者即被舍弃,坠落者为已落下,聚集者即集合成形。此义乃针对世尊入般涅槃时前来瞻礼的比库们,他们因避难而分散,及侍从已被驱散、分离,不净衣缠身之苦乃至聚集成团皆有涵义。释者以此示诸义,故称“世尊遗属”等。章节之义称为围绕,意指诸圣所居住处。断裂花朵的重新聚合即此相关。初指第一个月,即雨季第一个月,亦用于说明时间连接的用语。关于营房停驻及其指定,在营房辑录中多次言及“由世尊……赞叹”等。
Dutiyadivaseti ‘‘khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ karomā’’ti cintitadivasato dutiyadivase. So ca vassūpanāyikadivasato dutiyadivasoti veditabbo. Te hi therā āsāḷhīpuṇṇamāya uposathaṃ katvā pāṭipade sannipatitvā vassaṃ upagantvā evaṃ cintesuṃ. Ajātasattu rājāti ajāto hutvā pituno paccatthiko jātoti ‘‘ajātasattū’’ti laddhavohāro rājā. Tasmiṃ kira kucchigate deviyā evarūpo dohaḷo uppajji ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ rañño dakkhiṇabāhuto lohitaṃ piveyya’’nti . Atha tassā kathetuṃ asakkontiyā kisabhāvaṃ dubbaṇṇabhāvañca disvā rājā sayameva pucchitvā ñatvā ca vejje pakkosāpetvā suvaṇṇasatthakena bāhuṃ phāletvā suvaṇṇasarakena lohitaṃ gahetvā udakena sambhinditvā pāyesi. Nemittakā taṃ sutvā ‘‘esa gabbho rañño sattu bhavissati, iminā rājā haññissatī’’ti byākariṃsu, tasmā ‘‘ajātoyeva rañño sattu bhavissatī’’ti nemittakehi niddiṭṭhattā ajātasattu nāma jāto. Kinti kāraṇapucchanatthe nipāto, kasmāti attho. Paṭivedesunti nivedesuṃ, jānāpesunti attho. Vissatthāti nirāsaṅkacittā. Āṇācakkanti āṇāyeva appaṭihatavuttiyā pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti āṇācakkaṃ. Sannisajjaṭṭhānanti sannipatitvā nisīdanaṭṭhānaṃ.
所谓“第二日”,是指经过第一日思维而至第二天。此应理解为雨安居期间下的第二日。那些长老们在阿萨利满月日举行斋戒日,集会遵守安居规章,内心如此思虑。阿阇世王,即未出世者,此名源于其父追忆未生之意。传说此王在皮丘城土堆旁生出奇特的瘘疾,有人感叹“唉,我愿以南方胳膊之血饮之”。由于医师无法医治,王亲自问明后药方,执金杖敲打,以金杖血沾水饮服。占卜者据此预言“此胎将成王之敌,故名未生”。问及原因与名称意义,释为“通告”“知晓”之义。悲忍之意为摈弃怀疑的坚定心。轮回之眼即洞察轮回流转的眼。集会之处乃集会座位。
Rājabhavanavibhūtinti rājabhavanasampattiṃ. Avahasantamivāti avahāsaṃ kurumānaṃ viya. Siriyā niketamivāti siriyā vasanaṭṭhānamiva. Ekanipātatitthamiva ca devamanussanayanavihaṅgānanti ekasmiṃ pānīyatitthe sannipatantā pakkhino viya sabbesaṃ janānaṃ cakkhūni maṇḍapeyeva nipatantīti devamanussānaṃ nayanasaṅkhātavihaṅgānaṃ ekanipātatitthamiva ca. Lokarāmaṇeyyakamiva sampiṇḍitanti ekattha sampiṇḍitaṃ rāsikataṃ loke ramaṇīyabhāvaṃ viya. Yadi loke vijjamānaṃ ramaṇīyattaṃ sabbameva ānetvā ekattha sampiṇḍitaṃ siyā, taṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Daṭṭhabbasāramaṇḍanti pheggurahitasāraṃ viya kasaṭavinimuttaṃ pasannabhūtaṃ viya ca daṭṭhabbesu daṭṭhuṃ araharūpesu sārabhūtaṃ pasannabhūtañcā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Daṭṭhabbo dassanīyo sārabhūto visiṭṭhataro maṇḍo maṇḍanaṃ alaṅkāro etassāti daṭṭhabbasāramaṇḍo, maṇḍapoti evamettha attho gahetabboti amhākaṃ khanti, upaparikkhitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ. Maṇḍaṃ sūriyarasmiṃ pāti nivāretīti maṇḍapo. Vividha…pe… cāruvitānanti ettha kusumadāmāni ca tāni olambakāni cāti kusumadāmaolambakāni. Ettha ca visesanassa paranipāto daṭṭhabbo, olambakakusumadāmānīti attho. Tāni vividhāni anekappakārāni viniggalantaṃ vamentaṃ nikkhāmentamiva cāru sobhanaṃ vitānaṃ etthāti vividhakusumadāmaolambakaviniggalantacāruvitāno, maṇḍapo, taṃ alaṅkaritvāti yojetabbaṃ. Ratanavicitramaṇikaoṭṭimatalamivāti nānāpupphūpahāravicittasupariniṭṭhitabhūmikammattāyeva nānāratanehi vicittabhūtamaṇikoṭṭimatalamivāti attho. Ettha ca ratanavicittaggahaṇaṃ nānāpupphūpahāravicittatāya nidassanaṃ, maṇikoṭṭimatalaggahaṇaṃ supariniṭṭhitabhūmiparikammatāyāti veditabbaṃ. Maṇiyo koṭṭetvā katatalattā maṇikoṭṭanena nibbattatalanti maṇikoṭṭimatalaṃ. Nanti maṇḍapaṃ. Pupphūpahāro pupphapūjā. Uttarābhimukhanti uttaradisābhimukhaṃ. Āsanārahanti nisīdanārahaṃ. Dantakhacitanti dantehi racitaṃ, dantehi katanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etthāti āsane. Niṭṭhitaṃ bhante mama kiccanti mayā kattabbakiccaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho.
所谓王宫之繁盛,意指王宫财用之充足。比喻犹如奉献犀牛而得供养。所谓尊贵住所,如庄严华服宜居之所。又如群鸟聚集水滨,落如眼睛般众生关注之地,谓群鸟集中如眼之地。此乃诸天、人共通见之眷属鸟,称其如单一集结之地。称其如适合观赏,世间美妙存在若汇聚于一处,如此谓之。若将世界美好诸相尽集于一处,谓之以此。曾言“所见之珠宝园地,如无车轮处之莲花、如净洁之象牙、透露明净之欢乐”,于三处聚集之处有如此描述。所见者为应赏识之物,宝贵而独特,华盖装饰称之。此华盖即庙堂,上覆日光以避光。种种俊美花蔓垂挂,称为花蔓悬饰。此种花饰为众多形态装点之华丽饰物。宝石缤纷如镶嵌圆盘,意指各种花饰缀成华美绚烂之饰物。宝石华盖之意即花饰缤纷装饰。宝石圆盘分层聚合,名为宝石圆盖。宝石聚合成层如圆轮。故称之为宝石华园。鲜花供养即为鲜花供养。面向北方者,谓面朝北面。坐席即坐具。牙制打磨物,意指用牙制作之物。此即坐席。所言“办事已毕”,是言已完成所当行之事。
Tasmiṃ pana divase ekacce bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ sandhāya evamāhaṃsu ‘‘imasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe eko bhikkhu vissagandhaṃ vāyanto vicaratī’’ti. Thero taṃ sutvā ‘‘imasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe añño vissagandhaṃ vāyanto vicaraṇakabhikkhu nāma natthi, addhā ete maṃ sandhāya vadantī’’ti saṃvegaṃ āpajji. Ekacce naṃ āhaṃsuyeva ‘‘sve, āvuso, sannipāto’’tiādi. Idāni taṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āhaṃsū’’tiādi. Tenāti tasmā. Āvajjesīti upanāmesi. Anupādāyāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena kañci dhammaṃ agahetvā, yehi vā kilesehi sabbehi vimuccati, tesaṃ lesamattampi agahetvāti attho. Āsavehīti bhavato ābhavaggaṃ dhammato vā āgotrabhuṃ savanato pavattanato āsavasaññitehi kilesehi. Lakkhaṇavacanañcetaṃ āsavehīti, tadekaṭṭhatāya pana sabbehipi kilesehi, sabbehipi pāpadhammehi cittaṃ vimuccatiyeva. Cittaṃ vimuccīti cittaṃ arahattamaggakkhaṇe āsavehi vimuccamānaṃ katvā arahattaphalakkhaṇe vimuccīti attho. Caṅkamenāti caṅkamanakiriyāya. Vivaṭṭūpanissayabhūtaṃ kataṃ upacitaṃ puññaṃ etenāti katapuñño, arahattādhigamāya katādhikāroti attho. Padhānamanuyuñjāti vīriyaṃ anuyuñja, arahattādhigamāya anuyogaṃ karohīti attho. Kathādoso nāma natthīti kathāya aparajjhaṃ nāma natthi. Accāraddhaṃ vīriyanti ativiya āraddhaṃ vīriyaṃ. Uddhaccāyāti uddhatabhāvāya. Vīriyasamataṃ yojemīti caṅkamanavīriyassa adhimattattā tassa pahānavasena samādhinā samarasatāpādanena vīriyasamataṃ yojemi.
当天,一些比库前来询问长老阿难,称“此比库僧团中,有人放屁异味游行”。听闻此言,长老心内震动,谓“此僧团中无他散发异味者,只此说我者虚妄”。众人劝曰“是,同修集会正当”,此时呈现朋侪聚会,亦称“比库尊者阿难如是说”。“给予道理”意即“入其境”。“无执着”是指不着于贪嗔痴等,远离一切烦恼的境界。阿含中所说烦恼,即诸不善业之根本。统称烦恼,形容能使心净除一切烦恼、恶法。指心净,是心在入圣者道中去除烦恼,于阿拉汉果时无烦恼净除也。前进勤勉名为前进用力。“起发奋锐”等于极度起劲。衡量志力均等,是用定力与均衡入修,以共成成果。
Dutiyadivaseti therena arahattappattadivasato dutiyadivase. Dhammasabhāyaṃ sannipatitāti pakkhassa pañcamiyaṃ sannipatiṃsu. Attano arahattappattiṃ ñāpetukāmoti ‘‘sekkhatāya dhammasaṅgītiyā gahetuṃ ayuttampi bahussutattā gaṇhissāmā’’ti cintetvā nisinnānaṃ therānaṃ ‘‘idāni arahattappatto’’ti somanassuppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appamatto hohī’’ti dinnaovādassa saphalatādīpanatthaṃ attupanāyikaṃ akatvā aññabyākaraṇassa bhagavatā saṃvaṇṇitattā ca thero attano arahattappattiṃ ñāpetukāmo ahosīti veditabbaṃ. Yathāvuḍḍhanti vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiṃ anatikkamitvā. Eketi majjhimabhāṇakānaṃyeva eke. Pubbe vuttampi hi sabbaṃ majjhimabhāṇakā vadantiyevāti veditabbaṃ. Dīghabhāṇakā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) panettha evaṃ vadanti –
“第二日”,指比库在得阿拉汉果那日之后的第二天。齐集法会,为集会第五次。意欲宣示自身得果,故心念曰“用简略修法、广泛闻法,当能广阔传播”,想着此意而端坐。欲使弟子心生欢喜,以完成开示功德,未作他说者,亦由佛言明。此处意指超越生死之事。谓乃中道行者之解脱。中道,有时比喻为中等言说者的观念。一切法先于此有过无不及,均可知晓。长论中亦有此说,意指此处内容相同。
‘‘Atha kho āyasmā ānando arahā samāno sannipātaṃ agamāsi. Kathaṃ agamāsi? ‘Idānimhi sannipātamajjhaṃ pavisanāraho’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhacitto ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā bandhanā muttatālapakkaṃ viya paṇḍukambale nikkhittajātimaṇi viya vigatavalāhake nabhe samuggatapuṇṇacando viya bālātapasamphassavikasitareṇupiñjaragabbhaṃ padumaṃ viya ca parisuddhena pariyodātena sappabhena sassirikena mukhavarena attano arahattappattiṃ ārocayamāno viya ca agamāsi. Atha naṃ disvā āyasmato mahākassapassa etadahosi ‘sobhati vata bho arahattappatto ānando, sace satthā dhareyya, addhā ajja ānandassa sādhukāraṃ dadeyya, handa imassāhaṃ idāni satthārā dātabbaṃ sādhukāraṃ dadāmī’ti tikkhattuṃ sādhukāramadāsī’’ti.
当时,比库长老阿难成就阿拉汉果后前来法会。其如何获得?心无疑虑地,穿着一件作袈裟的布,宛若松散、开垦的芦苇之布,用蟾蜍皮般清凉时令衣服包住,似无热汗污染,宛如满月初现于无云天空,纯洁洁净如莲花生长在牢笼般的水田中,光彩熠熠,面容庄严地宣说自身得果法义,宛如来临。此时,大咖萨巴尊者目睹,心生欢喜,谓“真善果成就者阿难,若佛尚存,今当授受欢喜法,以嘉奖成就。”遂速予欢喜仪式。
Ākāsena āgantvā nisīdītipi eketi ettha pana tesaṃ tesaṃ tathā tathā gahetvā āgatamattaṃ ṭhapetvā visuṃ visuṃ vacane aññaṃ visesakāraṇaṃ natthīti vadanti. Upatissatthero panāha ‘‘sattamāsaṃ katāya dhammasaṅgītiyā kadāci pathaviyaṃ nimujjitvā āgatattā taṃ gahetvā eke vadanti. Kadāci ākāsena āgatattā taṃ gahetvā eke vadantī’’ti.
这里说的是即使凭空来临而坐,也没有什么特别的区分,人们说:在这里,每个人都各自拿取并放置其所得之物,没有区别。长老Upatissa则说:“有一次,由于反复诵读佛法,某人在地上跌倒后再来时有人称道并取其物,有时也有人说是他凭空来时有人称道并取其物。”
Bhikkhūāmantesīti bhikkhū ālapi abhāsi sambodhesīti ayamettha attho. Aññatra pana ñāpanepi hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘āmantayāmi vo, bhikkhave, (dī. ni. 2.218) paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave’’ti (a. ni. 7.72). Pakkosanepi dissati. Yathāha ‘‘ehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena sāriputtaṃ āmantehī’’ti (a. ni. 9.11). Āvusoti āmantanākāradīpanaṃ. Kaṃ dhuraṃ katvāti kaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā. Kiṃ ānando nappahotīti aṭṭhakathācariyehi ṭhapitapucchā. Nappahotīti na sakkoti. Etadagganti eso aggo. Liṅgavipallāsena hi ayaṃ niddeso. Yadidanti ca yo ayanti attho, yadidaṃ khandhapañcakanti vā yojetabbaṃ. Sammannīti sammataṃ akāsi. Upāliṃ vinayaṃ puccheyyanti pucchadhātussa dvikammakattā vuttaṃ. Bījaniṃ gahetvāti ettha bījanīgahaṇaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ dhammatāti veditabbaṃ. Bhagavāpi hi dhammakathikānaṃ dhammatādassanatthameva vicittabījaniṃ gaṇhāti. Na hi aññathā sabbassapi lokassa alaṅkārabhūtaṃ paramukkaṃsagatasikkhāsaṃyamānaṃ buddhānaṃ mukhacandamaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādetabbaṃ hoti. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ, āvuso upāli, pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu tassa saṅgītiyā purimakāle paṭhamabhāvo na yuttoti? No na yutto bhagavatā paññattānukkamena pātimokkhuddesānukkamena ca paṭhamabhāvassa siddhattā. Yebhuyyena hi tīṇi piṭakāni bhagavato dharamānakāle ṭhitānukkameneva saṅgītāni, visesato vinayābhidhammapiṭakānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kismiṃ vatthusmiṃ methunadhammeti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ.
“与比库说话”即比库们交谈,这就是此处的意义。也有教诲之意,例如:“我告诉你们,比库们,我向你们陈说。”这也可视为劝诫,如“你来,和我说话吧,比库,向沙利子劝说。”“请进”等说法是邀请之意。“做什么广阔,做什么长老”,以及“安陀诺是否在”的问题,是注疏师们提出的解释,若说不在即是不行,此为裁断。他们说这是一种词义颠倒。此处意指的是前行相或五蕴中须结合的部分。汇集即是已经被认可的。对于比库伍巴离提出的关于戒律的问题,释义者以“取种子”指涉说法者的说法根本,正如世尊自己为了展示教义而已掌握了说法之根基。否则,世间一切装饰佛陀的教导,佛陀的面容如月轮,使人们不能忽视这是不可能的。“第一巴拉基所判处之罪”之说为何?难道不是依佛陀制定的律法和巴拉基戒律而论定第一次巴拉基罪行吗?不是的,佛陀所制定的律法是按照经典的内容以及巴拉基戒律内容规定的。据此,世尊时期三藏经文均一体并被广泛承认,尤其是律藏阿毗达摩,必须将之看作集合的产物。那么,佛典中所说的“种子法(maṭṭhā)”和“地(bhūmi)”的词义就是作为标记的事由吧。
Vatthumpi pucchītiādi ‘‘kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā dassitena saha tato avasiṭṭhampi saṅgahetvā dassanavasena vuttaṃ. Kiṃ panettha paṭhamapārājikapāḷiyaṃ kiñci apanetabbaṃ vā pakkhipitabbaṃ vā āsi nāsīti? Buddhassa bhagavato bhāsite apanetabbaṃ nāma natthi. Na hi tathāgatā ekabyañjanampi niratthakaṃ vadanti, sāvakānaṃ pana devatānaṃ vā bhāsite apanetabbampi hoti, taṃ dhammasaṅgāhakattherā apanayiṃsu, pakkhipitabbaṃ pana sabbatthāpi atthi, tasmā yaṃ yattha pakkhipituṃ yuttaṃ, taṃ tattha pakkhipiṃsuyeva. Kiṃ pana tanti ce? ‘‘Tena samayenā’’ti vā ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’ti vā ‘‘atha kho’’iti vā ‘‘evaṃ vutte’’ti vā ‘‘etadavocā’’ti vā evamādikaṃ sambandhavacanamattaṃ. Evaṃ pakkhipitabbayuttaṃ pakkhipitvā pana idaṃ paṭhamapārājikanti ṭhapesuṃ . Paṭhamapārājike saṅgahamāruḷhe pañca arahantasatāni saṅgahaṃ āropitanayeneva gaṇasajjhāyamakaṃsu. ‘‘Tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharatī’’ti ca nesaṃ sajjhāyārambhakāleyeva sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viya mahāpathavī udakapariyantaṃ katvā kampittha. Te eteneva nayena sesapārājikānipi saṅgahaṃ āropetvā ‘‘idaṃ pārājikakaṇḍa’’nti ṭhapesuṃ. Evaṃ terasa saṅghādisesāni ‘‘terasaka’’ntiādīni vatvā vīsādhikāni dve sikkhāpadasatāni ‘‘mahāvibhaṅgo’’ti kittetvā ṭhapesuṃ. Mahāvibhaṅgāvasānepi purimanayeneva mahāpathavī akampittha. Tato bhikkhunivibhaṅge aṭṭha sikkhāpadāni ‘‘pārājikakaṇḍaṃ nāmā’’tiādīni vatvā tīṇi sikkhāpadasatāni cattāri ca sikkhāpadāni ‘‘bhikkhunivibhaṅgo’’ti kittetvā ‘‘ayaṃ ubhatovibhaṅgo nāma catusaṭṭhibhāṇavāro’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Ubhatovibhaṅgāvasānepi vuttanayeneva pathavī akampittha. Etenevupāyena asītibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ khandhakaṃ pañcavīsatibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ parivārañca saṅgahaṃ āropetvā ‘‘idaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Vinayapiṭakāvasānepi vuttanayeneva pathavīkampo ahosi. Taṃ āyasmantaṃ upālittheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso, idaṃ tuyhaṃ nissitake vācehī’’ti evamettha avuttopi viseso veditabbo.
问题还在于“在何处定名”为由,从而以所示现象和结论说明。那时是否有些第一巴拉基律文没涵盖或遗漏?佛陀所说不存在遗漏。正如无漏者不说多余之语,弟子和天人间的对话会有遗漏,那是教法聚集的长老们根据需要予以增加,且各处都有该补充,所以必当加者则加之。那“因何为此”呢?或许是“当时”或“那时”之类的连接词。因此以合适的理由加以补入后,即以“第一巴拉基”为名定名。关于第一巴拉基律集,五百位阿拉汉弟子基于该律集而收集、整理成一个集合,即所谓“群集事先定型”式的集合。在此期间,“世尊住于韦然伽邑”时,大家在传授时精心施为,如同大地水面微微摆动。他们用这种方式往往把后续巴拉基罪行也一并收集,称之为“巴拉基章节”。如此三大巴拉基罪章节的讲说称为“十三罪”,之后制订了二百七十条戒律,其中又有一百条分属维持僧团纪律的“伟大律”,名为“大律论”。大律论结尾时也用同样方式,像大地未被震动一样安稳。再如比库尼戒律分为八十条巴拉基罪,三百条戒律和四十条戒律,共计四百六十条,称为“比库尼律”,结束时同样说大地安稳。借助这种方式,以七十五条篇集加二十五条篇集和附录的方式,最终形成了“律藏”。律藏结尾时说大地震动,表明庄严宏大。由此我们向长老Upāli请教,他回答说:“这都是应当奉行的规矩。”这里说明了特别要指出的细节。
Evaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ saṅgahamāropetvā suttantapiṭakaṃ saṅgāyiṃsu. Idāni taṃ dassento āha ‘‘vinayaṃ saṅgāyitvā’’tiādi. Mahākassapatthero ānandattheraṃ dhammaṃ pucchīti ettha ayamanukkamo veditabbo – ānandatthere dantakhacitaṃ bījaniṃ gahetvā dhammāsane nisinne āyasmā mahākassapatthero bhikkhū pucchi ‘‘kataraṃ, āvuso, piṭakaṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti? ‘‘Suttantapiṭakaṃ, bhanteti. Suttantapiṭake catasso saṅgītiyo, tāsu paṭhamaṃ kataraṃ saṅgītinti? Dīghasaṅgītiṃ, bhanteti. Dīghasaṅgītiyaṃ catuttiṃsa suttāni, tayo ca vaggā, tesu paṭhamaṃ kataraṃ vagganti. Sīlakkhandhavaggaṃ, bhanteti. Sīlakkhandhavagge terasa suttantā, tesu paṭhamaṃ kataraṃ suttanti? Brahmajālasuttaṃ nāma bhante tividhasīlālaṅkataṃ nānāvidhamicchājīvakuhanalapanādividdhaṃsanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhijālaviniveṭhanaṃ dasasahassilokadhātupakampanaṃ, taṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ etadavoca ‘‘brahmajālaṃ, āvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’nti?
在完成律藏的集结后,接着将佛陀所说的经藏也予以汇集。传说此时有人讲道“律已集结”,近日长老摩诃咖萨巴问长老阿难有关此事,应当知此陈述的顺序。阿难带着染指制作的总纲坐在佛法之座上,长老摩诃咖萨巴问:“尊者,哪部藏是最早被汇集的?”阿难答曰:“是经藏。经藏共有四个部分,其首的是哪一部分?”“长部经藏。长部经藏包含三十三部经,分为三卷。其中首卷为何?”“戒藏部。戒藏部有十三经,首卷为何?”“名为《梵网经》,尊者,此经具三种戒律的总相,涵盖各种错误的行为和恶行,为世界十方震动,堪称首卷经。”于是摩诃咖萨巴向阿难问道:“尊者阿难,《梵网经》讲述于何处?”
Antarāca bhante rājagahaṃ antarā ca nāḷandanti ettha antarā-saddo kāraṇakhaṇacittavemajjhavivarādīsu dissati. Tathā hi ‘‘tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya aññatra tathāgatā’’ti (a. ni. 6.44; 10.75) ca, ‘‘janā saṅgamma mantenti, mañca tañca kimantara’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.228) ca ādīsu kāraṇe antarāsaddo vattati. ‘‘Addasa maṃ bhante aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṃ dhovantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) khaṇe. ‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā’’tiādīsu (udā. 20) citte. ‘‘Antarā vosānamāpādī’’tiādīsu vemajjhe. ‘‘Api cāyaṃ tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 231) vivare. Svāyamidha vivare vattati, tasmā rājagahassa ca nāḷandāya ca vivareti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo, antarāsaddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti. Ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanappasaṅge antarāsaddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Idha pana yojetvā evaṃ vutto. Rājāgāraketi tattha rañño kīḷanatthaṃ paṭibhānacittavicitraṃ agāraṃ akaṃsu, taṃ rājāgārakanti pavuccati, tasmiṃ. Ambalaṭṭhikāti rañño uyyānaṃ. Tassa kira dvārasamīpe taruṇo ambarukkho atthi, taṃ ambalaṭṭhikāti vadanti. Tassa avidūrabhavattā uyyānampi ambalaṭṭhikātveva saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ ‘‘varuṇānagara’’ntiādīsu viya.
然后告知说,在王舍城及那兰陀之间,另有“间”字出现于因果、人心善恶、中心地等语境中。如经中“除了如来谁知此间?”、“众人纷纷议论,我该如何处置?”等语句中,“间”字即是因果障碍、世间妨碍思想的表现。“某时我见一女子,在明净的水边洗涤”,以及“内心无怒”等语句也是如此用法。“间”为障碍、隔离之意,如“两个恶道之间的空隙”般描述由此而生的心境。自行在此详细说明,由是可见王舍城与那兰陀作为障碍相隔之地,这即是此义。故“间”字确用作障碍意味的连接词语。在这类文句中,文字工作者往往联结“间”字与“村”或“河”,重复用一个“间”字时需加第二字补充解释,否则无法表达预期之意义。此处便以接续语句方式连用解释。王舍人们用“王舍镇”和“园观”形容这段地方,称为“王舍园”。“园”指王的花园,门近处有年轻常绿树,名为“园树”。此树因处于园中,称为“园树”,离近近处的园林即以“水城”等名称计算数目。
Suppiyañca paribbājakanti ettha suppiyoti tassa nāmaṃ, paribbājakoti sañjayassa antevāsī channaparibbājako. Brahmadattañca māṇavakanti ettha brahmadattoti tassa nāmaṃ. Māṇavoti sattopi coropi taruṇopi vuccati. Tathā hi –
此处“Suppiya”指称名为Suppiya的游方者,“paribbājaka”为游方之意,意指散泽耶等人的游行之士。关于“Brahmadatta”为名的学童。“学童”一词又指乞丐或年轻者。具体释义如下——
‘‘Coditā devadūtehi, ye pamajjanti māṇavā;
『诸天使者曾以唤醒之言示现,指出那些人类沉于懈怠者,』
Te dīgharattaṃ socanti, hīnakāyūpagā narā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.271; a. ni. 3.36) –
『那些人终日悲恸,形体羸弱,卑劣之人也。』(《大念处经》3.271;《增支部》3.36)——
Ādīsu satto māṇavoti vutto. ‘‘Māṇavehipi samāgacchanti katakammehipi akatakammehipī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) coro. ‘‘Ambaṭṭhamāṇavo aṅgako māṇavo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.258-261, 316) taruṇo māṇavoti vutto. Idhāpi ayameva adhippeto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘brahmadattaṃ nāma taruṇapurisaṃ ārabbhā’’ti. Jīvakambavaneti jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane. Atha ‘‘kaṃ ārabbhā’’ti avatvā ‘‘kenasaddhi’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ? Na etaṃ suttaṃ bhagavatā eva vuttaṃ, raññāpi ‘‘yathā nu kho imāni puthusippāyatanānī’’tiādinā kiñci kiñci vuttaṃ atthi, tasmā evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vedehiputtenāti ayaṃ kosalarañño dhītāya putto, na videharañño, ‘‘vedehī’’ti pana paṇḍitādhivacanametaṃ. Vidanti etenāti vedo, ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vedena īhati ghaṭati vāyamatīti vedehī, vedehiyā putto vedehiputto, tena.
最初称为众生者谓之人类。『无论是聚众行动者,还是单独行动者』等文中(《大念处经》2.149)称其为“强盗”。又如『朴实人』、『肢体之人』等用语(《长部注》1.258-261,316)称之为青年人。此亦为所主掌者。谓之『有一名为梵达塔的年轻男子开头』。所谓吉瓦卡园,即吉瓦卡王子孩童时期所在的果树园。后来问『何人开头?由谁言说?』非世尊所亲自宣说,但王命有以『诸铁匠师徒等』等语语,故当如此说。谓维德希王之子,非维德哈王,维德希为贤哲所称谓之。谓知者名曰维多,是智慧之意。谓维多即指闻知、动摇等,维德希及其子曰维德希子,故乃如此称之。
Etenevupāyena pañca nikāye pucchīti ettha ayamanukkamo veditabbo. Vuttanayena brahmajālassa pucchāvisajjanāvasāne pañca arahantasatāni sajjhāyamakaṃsu. Vuttanayeneva ca pathavīkampo ahosi. Evaṃ brahmajālaṃ saṅgāyitvā tato paraṃ ‘‘sāmaññaphalaṃ panāvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā pucchāvisajjanānukkamena saddhiṃ brahmajālena terasasuttantaṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘ayaṃ sīlakkhandhavaggo nāmā’’ti kittetvā ṭhapesuṃ. Tadanantaraṃ mahāvaggaṃ, tadanantaraṃ pāthikavagganti evaṃ tivaggasaṅgahaṃ catuttiṃsasuttantapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ catusaṭṭhibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ tantiṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘ayaṃ dīghanikāyo nāmā’’ti vatvā āyasmantaṃ ānandattheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso, imaṃ tuyhaṃ nissitake vācehī’’ti. Tato anantaraṃ asītibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ majjhimanikāyaṃ saṅgāyitvā dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherassa nissitake paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘imaṃ tumhe pariharathā’’ti. Tadanantaraṃ bhāṇavārasataparimāṇaṃ saṃyuttanikāyaṃ saṅgāyitvā mahākassapattheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘bhante, imaṃ tumhākaṃ nissitake vācethā’’ti. Tadanantaraṃ vīsatibhāṇavārasatapaamāṇaṃ aṅguttaranikāyaṃ saṅgāyitvā anuruddhattheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘imaṃ tumhākaṃ nissitake vācethā’’ti.
依此方法诗歌及提问,故此处应辨别顺序。经藏中于梵网经问答末,五阿拉汉弟子应答,于其后地震也随之。梵网经既成后,又次于『尊者阿难,汝知平凡果报何处?』等问答之间,连结梵网,经号为第三十经,命名为『戒蕴品』。随后集大品,随后巷品,如此三品合计三十四经,约六十八个布施日之讲诵,名为《长部》。之后,集中部诵讲约一百布施日,呈献予尊者沙利佛多。之后,又诵讲相应部经约一百布施日,呈献尊者大咖萨巴。之后,又诵讲增支部约二十布施日,呈献尊者阿努儒达。
Tadanantaraṃ –
紧接着——
‘‘Dhammasaṅgaṇiṃ vibhaṅgañca, kathāvatthuñca puggalaṃ;
『戒法集、分别论与因缘论、由律法书;各类说法与人众;』
Dhātuyamakaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ, abhidhammoti vuccatī’’ti. –
此处所谓‘界双重之基’即谓‘阿毗达摩’。
Evaṃ saṃvaṇṇitaṃ sukhumañāṇagocaraṃ tantiṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘idaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti vatvā pañca arahantasatāni sajjhāyamakaṃsu. Vuttanayeneva pathavīkampo ahosi. Tato paraṃ jātakaṃ mahāniddeso paṭisambhidāmaggo apadānaṃ suttanipāto khuddakapāṭho dhammapadaṃ udānaṃ itivuttakaṃ vimānavatthu petavatthu theragāthā therīgāthāti imaṃ tantiṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘khuddakagantho nāma aya’’nti ca vatvā abhidhammapiṭakasmiṃyeva saṅgahaṃ āropayiṃsūti dīghabhāṇakā vadanti. Majjhimabhāṇakā pana ‘‘cariyāpiṭakabuddhavaṃsehi saddhiṃ sabbampi taṃ khuddakaganthaṃ suttantapiṭake pariyāpanna’’nti vadanti. Ayamettha adhippāyo – jātakādike khuddakanikāyapariyāpanne yebhuyyena ca dhammaniddesabhūte tādise abhidhammapiṭake saṅgaṇhituṃ yuttaṃ, na pana dīghanikāyādippakāre suttantapiṭake, nāpi paññattiniddesabhūte vinayapiṭaketi. Dīghabhāṇakā ‘‘jātakādīnaṃ abhidhammapiṭake saṅgaho’’ti vadanti. Cariyāpiṭakabuddhavaṃsānañcettha aggahaṇaṃ jātakagatikattā. Majjhimabhāṇakā pana aṭṭhuppattivasena desitānaṃ jātakādīnaṃ yathānulomadesanābhāvato tādise suttantapiṭake saṅgaho yutto, na pana sabhāvadhammaniddesabhūte yathādhammasāsane abhidhammapiṭaketi jātakādīnaṃ suttapariyāpannataṃ vadanti. Tattha yuttaṃ vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Khuddakanikāyassa sesanikāyānaṃ viya apākaṭattā sese ṭhapetvā khuddakanikāyaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento ‘‘tattha khuddakanikāyo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tatthāti tesu nikāyesu. Tatthāti khuddakanikāye.
如是精细而微妙、觉悟能知之教法叙述成串后,便说:“此名为阿毗达摩藏”,于是五百位阿拉汉聚集讲习此经。此时,如同大地震动般的动摇即显现。继而集结《本生经》、《大集经》、《对事论》、《事迹藏》及经部的《法句》、《优昙婆罗》、《伊提毗婆娑》、论部的《天宫经》《饿鬼经》、长老歌及长尼歌,共七珠串,聚合称作“小部藏”。至于长部讲师则说:“此珍重经藏连佛行藏、佛传记皆具,其全部皆包含于根本经藏之中”,这是他们的同说。而中部讲师则主张:“佛行藏及佛传皆随佛行事而立,因此虽包含于根本经典,却并不属于经藏。”对此有不同观点。长部讲师认为:“像本生经等的辑录属于阿毗达摩藏。”行藏部佛传方面,论其辑录本生等因无顺序解说,归入此类经典较为适宜,而不属于具正法释门的阿毗达摩藏。此处为何如此,是当细微推究者。如同小部其余分部,若各自不完整,则保留剩余部分合为完整,最后示现为“小部”。此言“小部”为其中所含诸部,谓小部藏中之义。
Evaṃ nimittapayojanakāladesakārakakaraṇappakārehi paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassetvā idāni tattha vavatthāpitesu dhammavinayesu nānappakārakosallatthaṃ ekavidhādibhede dassetuṃ ‘‘tadetaṃ sabbampī’’tiādimāha. Tattha anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti ettha anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ maggañāṇaṃ maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ ‘‘sammāsambodhī’’ti vuccati. Paccavekkhantena vāti udānādivasena pavattadhammaṃ sandhāyāha. Vimuttirasanti arahattaphalassādaṃ vimuttisampattikaṃ vā aggaphalanipphādanato, vimuttikiccaṃ vā kilesānaṃ accantavimuttisampādanato.
如是得因缘由、时节、方位、智能不同之因而首次示现大集合藏时,即已广示,于诸法与律藏中,今欲通过种种巧妙分别方式,说明种种差别,乃至称道:“一切皆归于此”。在此所说“无上正觉”为无上明了境界与道知之觉,称为“正自觉者”。复以浑然不息之风起雨涌,示现大道。所谓解脱者即阿拉汉果德,果证解脱成果,或因修净解脱业果而得生之功德,或为斩断烦恼之彻底解脱功效。
Kiñcāpi avisesena sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ kilesavinayanena vinayo, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyapatanādito dhāraṇena dhammo ca hoti , idhādhippete pana dhammavinaye niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tattha vinayapiṭaka’’ntiādimāha. Khandhādivasena sabhāvadhammadesanābāhullato āha ‘‘avasesaṃ buddhavacanaṃ dhammo’’ti. Atha vā yadipi dhammoyeva vinayo pariyattiādibhāvato, tathāpi vinayasaddasannidhāno abhinnādhikaraṇabhāvena payutto dhammasaddo vinayatantiviparītaṃ tantiṃ dīpeti yathā ‘‘puññañāṇasambhāro, gobalībadda’’ntiādi.
于此处缘不异论,佛说一切法语皆以除烦恼为律,循佛所依之戒行时,能防止堕落之失,故此即谓为“律藏”等语。因诸蕴等所依自性本质之丰富,复言“一切余余悉为佛语法”,亦是此义。又论若仅言律藏为文字解说之经,不论依律藏声相,语义合一,若相违逆,則不能传其正法义,譬如“功德智慧聚”“牛鬼蛇神”等语即属此类相违。故以此分别为例示。
Anekajātisaṃsāranti ayaṃ gāthā bhagavatā attano sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ arahattappattiṃ paccavekkhantena ekūnavīsatimassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa anantaraṃ bhāsitā. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti. Idaṃ kira sabbabuddhehi avijahitaudānaṃ. Ayamassa saṅkhepattho (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.154) – ahaṃ imassa attabhāvagehassa kārakaṃ taṇhāvaḍḍhakiṃ gavesanto yena ñāṇena taṃ daṭṭhuṃ sakkā, tassa bodhiñāṇassatthāya dīpaṅkarapādamūle katābhinīhāro ettakaṃ kālaṃ anekajātisaṃsāraṃ anekajātisatasahassasaṅkhyaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭaṃ anibbisaṃ anibbisanto taṃ ñāṇaṃ avindanto alabhantoyeva sandhāvissaṃ saṃsariṃ. Yasmā jarābyādhimaraṇamissatāya jāti nāmesā punappunaṃ upagantuṃ dukkhā, na ca sā tasmiṃ adiṭṭhe nivattati, tasmā taṃ gavesanto sandhāvissanti attho.
“多生轮回”此偈是世尊于自觉智慧尽地成阿拉汉果后,于二十九岁正觉未久,经回顾往昔无数生生,遍历千百无数生数,思虑无边轮回之苦苦因所作。由此偈言:“此为初佛所说语。”是诸佛普遍宣扬之迹象。佛陀于成佛前受缠怨求明其本身存在,诸多烦恼增广之渴望深探求故,由灯明足底獻燈起无量劫以来多生轮回中察觉诀窍,识得了脱之道。此时亦见诸老病死苦反复来临,复出轮回无终,斯痛苦无断如是探求而得其要旨。
Diṭṭhosīti idāni mayā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhantena diṭṭho asi. Puna gehanti puna imaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ mama gehaṃ na kāhasi na karissasi. Tava sabbā anavasesā kilesaphāsukā mayā bhaggā. Imassa tayā katassa attabhāvagehassa kūṭaṃ avijjāsaṅkhātaṃ kaṇṇikamaṇḍalaṃ visaṅkhataṃ viddhaṃsitaṃ. Visaṅkhāraṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gataṃ anupaviṭṭhaṃ idāni mama cittaṃ, ahañca taṇhānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ arahattaphalaṃ vā ajjhagā adhigato pattosmīti attho. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana ‘‘visaṅkhāragatanti cittameva taṇhānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ arahattaphalaṃ vā ajjhagā adhigato patto’’ti evampi attho vutto. Ayaṃ manasā pavattitadhammānaṃ ādi. ‘‘Yadā have pātubhavanti dhammāti ayaṃ pana vācāya pavattitadhammānaṃ ādī’’ti vadanti. Antojappanavasena kira bhagavā ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādimāha.
云“见”者,今由对真如之一切智慧观照而现证其见解。复复而言:“此心所主之存在之家,汝不毁灭于此,非所行也。”汝众烦恼悉由我加持,汝此心所有之处,愚痴所染结之根基地现已毁坏破碎。此毁根即为涅槃之缘起境界,今我心已无痴染断灭,证得阿拉汉道与果。此意由言“离诸染之心现为涅槃者”,诸言语表述一致。此总述心境演变之源初。谓“若于所见之法事出现时,此处乃为心所起始”,如是而说。以此涵盖之音声,世尊称此为“多生轮回”等词汇。
Kecīti khandhakabhāṇakā. Paṭhamaṃ vutto pana dhammapadabhāṇakānaṃ adhippāyoti veditabbo. Ettha ca khandhakabhāṇakā vadanti ‘‘dhammapadabhāṇakānaṃ gāthā manasā desitattā tadā mahato janassa upakārāya na hoti, amhākaṃ pana gāthā vacībhedaṃ katvā desitattā tadā suṇantānaṃ devabrahmānaṃ upakārāya ahosi, tasmā idameva paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti. Dhammapadabhāṇakā pana ‘‘desanāya janassa upakārānupakārabhāvo lakkhaṇaṃ na hoti, bhagavatā manasā desitattāyeva idaṃ paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti vadanti, tasmā ubhayampi aññamaññaṃ viruddhaṃ na hotīti veditabbaṃ. Nanu ca yadi ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti manasā desitaṃ, atha kasmā dhammapadaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.153-154) ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāranti imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ satthā bodhirukkhamūle nisinno udānavasena udānetvā aparabhāge ānandattherena puṭṭho kathesī’’ti vuttanti? Tatthāpi manasā udānetvāti evamattho gahetabbo. Atha vā manasāva desitanti evaṃ gahaṇe kiṃ kāraṇanti ce? Yadi vacībhedaṃ katvā desitaṃ siyā, udānapāḷiyaṃ āruḷhaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā udānapāḷiyaṃ anāruḷhabhāvoyeva vacībhedaṃ akatvā manasā desitabhāve kāraṇanti vadanti.
所谓“经规论述者”。首先所说的是应当知晓“法句论述者”的规约。在此,称为经规论述者者说:“法句论述者对偈语用心而说,当时并非为了广大众生的利益,而是为我们(比库们)通过划分偈语句节而说,当时对听闻的天、梵天众生有利益,因此这是第一佛陀的言语。”法句论述者又说:“宣说的利益或无利益并非对众生的特定标志,此偈语确是世尊用心所说的第一佛陀言语。”故此二者彼此并不相违背,应当明了。况且若心意以“众生多劫轮回”为所说义,然何以法句注疏(法句经注2.153-154)云:“称为‘众生多劫轮回’的此法教,是佛陀坐于菩提树下,以偈语形式启发并在晚年由长老阿难提问而讲解”呢?此处“启发”当以用心启发义解。或解为单纯用心所说何益?若谓是划分偈语句节而说,则须假设偈语经为诵声之记载,故称诵声经而非划分偈语经,则此处依划分偈语而以心诠释的说法应去除,方为合理。
Yadā have pātubhavanti dhammāti ettha itisaddo ādiattho. Tena ‘‘ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa, athassa kaṅkhā vapayanti sabbā. Yato pajānāti sahetudhamma’’nti ādigāthāttayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Udānagāthanti pana jātiyā ekavacanaṃ, tatthāpi paṭhamagāthaṃyeva vā gahetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ettha pana yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ khandhake āvi bhavissati. Pāṭipadadivaseti idaṃ ‘‘sabbaññubhāvappattassā’’ti na etena sambandhitabbaṃ, ‘‘paccavekkhantassa uppannā’’ti etena pana sambandhitabbaṃ. Visākhapuṇṇamāyameva hi bhagavā paccūsasamaye sabbaññutaṃ pattoti. Somanassamayañāṇenāti somanassasampayuttañāṇena. Āmantayāmīti nivedayāmi, bodhemīti attho. Vayadhammāti aniccalakkhaṇamukhena dukkhānattalakkhaṇampi saṅkhārānaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vacanato. Lakkhaṇattayavibhāvananayeneva tadārammaṇaṃ vipassanaṃ dassento sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ buddhāveṇikaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānaṃ aviparītaṃ nibbānagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ pakāsetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Idāni tattha sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ niyojeti ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘vayadhammā saṅkhārā’’ti etena saṅkhepena saṃvejetvā ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti saṅkhepeneva niravasesaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Appamādapadañhi sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ sāsanaṃ pariyādiyitvā tiṭṭhatīti. Antareti antarāḷe, vemajjheti attho.
「当法得闻」者,即此处“是时”之义。依此,辑录“热诚者思念时,婆罗门疑惑尽除;由于彼解了因缘法。”三偈句。至于依出生而立一词的一偈,即便只取第一偈也当知晓。此义必包含于经规之中。所谓“修道之日”,与“皆具智慧者已至”不相应,唯与“反观者出现”有关。于维萨卡满月日,世尊于暮时得圆满智慧。暮时智慧者,即与欢喜相应之智慧。所谓“致敬”,为表敬意;“菩提”,为觉醒义。“无常法”则由无常之相透显苦之相,表诸行相之差别:“何者无常即苦,何者苦则无我”,据说文(三藏法次第3.15)等语。由相之差别观见,展现超越现象界的真实,展示四圣谛之根基,及通向涅槃之道,必须观见。此时,应当认真修习此法,故云“应以谨慎完成修行。”又或简言之,由“诸行无常”,迂回展现“应以谨慎完成修行”,以简证完整正修行法门。谨慎一词乃修行之汇集,称为完备的教法而立。所谓“间隔”,意指间隙或正中。
Suttantapiṭakanti ettha yathā kammameva kammantaṃ, evaṃ suttameva suttantanti veditabbaṃ. Asaṅgītanti saṅgītikkhandhakakathāvatthuppakaraṇādi. Keci pana ‘‘subhasuttampi paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ asaṅgīta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati. ‘‘Paṭhamasaṅgītito puretarameva hi āyasmatā ānandattherena jetavane viharantena subhassa māṇavassa desita’’nti ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Subhasuttaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ āyasmā ānando sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme aciraparinibbute bhagavatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.444) āgataṃ. Tattha ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādivacanaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ āyasmatā ānandatthereneva vattuṃ yuttarūpaṃ na hoti. Na hi ānandatthero sayameva subhasuttaṃ desetvā ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādīni vadati. Evaṃ pana vattabbaṃ siyā ‘‘ekamidāhaṃ, bhante, samayaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ viharāmi jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’ti, tasmā dutiyatatiyasaṅgītikārakehi ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādinā subhasuttaṃ saṅgītimāropitaṃ viya dissati. Atha ācariyadhammapālattherassa evamadhippāyo siyā ‘‘ānandatthereneva vuttampi subhasuttaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītiṃ āropetvā tantiṃ ṭhapetukāmehi mahākassapattherādīhi aññesu suttesu āgatanayeneva ‘evaṃ me suta’ntiādinā tanti ṭhapitā’’ti, evaṃ sati yujjeyya. Atha vā āyasmā ānandatthero subhasuttaṃ sayaṃ desentopi sāmaññaphalādīsu bhagavatā desitanayeneva desesīti bhagavato sammukhā laddhanaye ṭhatvā desitattā bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ attani adahanto ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādimāhāti evamadhippāyo veditabbo.
所谓经藏集,是如手工业之工匠者仅制其所工之器物,正如经藏集是汇聚经藏之义。当说“不合调者”者,指是与经藏不符之法规论释章节者。有说“美妙经句亦属第一集录之非合调者。”此说不当。由老师法音长老所说,曰:“第一集录修定本是昔日长老阿难在揭树林所住时,佛陀以美男子释迦牟尼所说经文所汇聚。”美妙经文——所谓“如是我闻,一时,长老阿难在舍卫城揭树林给孤独园内佛陀涅槃不久时所述”,此开头语乃属第一集录所录长老语,故不能以长老阿难单独宣说的身份取之。若以“我,尊者,请于某时在舍卫城揭树林给孤独园内住”自言为真,故由第二、第三集录作者以「如是我闻」等语加于美妙经处,显其受承录之意。又或,若尊者阿难自说美妙经,亦仅为宣说佛陀所说出家果位之教法,由此承接佛陀口传,得佛陀亲自听闻实证的法理。此则为应知之释义。
Ubhayāni pātimokkhānīti bhikkhubhikkhunīpātimokkhavasena. Dve vibhaṅgānīti bhikkhubhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaseneva dve vibhaṅgāni. Dvāvīsati khandhakānīti mahāvaggacūḷavaggesu āgatāni dvāvīsati khandhakāni. Soḷasaparivārāti soḷasahi parivārehi upalakkhitattā soḷasaparivārāti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi parivārapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yaṃ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena paṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā (pari. 1) paññattivāro, tato paraṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanto kati āpattiyo āpajjatī’’tiādinā (pari. 157) katāpattivāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo catunnaṃ vipattīnaṃ kati vipattiyo bhajantī’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 182) vipattivāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ katihi āpattikkhandhehi saṅgahitā’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 183) saṅgahavāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo channaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhānānaṃ katihi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhantī’’tiādinā (pari. 184) samuṭṭhānavāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ katamaṃ adhikaraṇa’’ntiādinā (pari. 185) adhikaraṇavāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo sattannaṃ samathānaṃ katihi samathehi sammantī’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 186) samathavāro, tadanantaraṃ samuccayavāro cāti aṭṭha vārā vuttā. Tato paraṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanapaccayā pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā (pari. 188) nayena puna paccayavasena eko paññattivāro, tassa vasena purimasadisā eva katāpattivārādayo satta vārāti evaṃ aparepi aṭṭha vārā vuttā. Iti imāni aṭṭha, purimānipi aṭṭhāti mahāvibhaṅge soḷasa vārā dassitā. Tato paraṃ teneva nayena bhikkhunivibhaṅgepi soḷasa vārā āgatāti imehi soḷasahi vārehi upalakkhitattā soḷasaparivārāti vuccati. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘parivāro’’ti ettakameva dissati, bahūsu pana potthakesu dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘soḷasaparivārā’’ti evameva vuttattā ayampi pāṭho na sakkā paṭibāhitunti tassevattho vutto.
所谓“二重巴帝摩卡”,是指比库与比库尼的巴帝摩卡戒。所谓“两分”,即是指比库与比库尼戒律的两分律。所谓二十二篇,则是大部小部经中齐备奉行的二十二篇戒条。所谓十六章,是以十六个章节分类之意。章之排列,谓如经中云:“由世尊所知所见的阿拉汉、正自觉者,第一大犯何处定立”等等(范畴第一经),其中有定罪条款,及“守戒中生犯者多少”等(范畴157条),犯种区别,“守戒生起所犯中多少犯种归入何罪”等(范畴182条),“守戒生起所犯中多少罪聚集于何罪”等(范畴183条),“守戒生起所犯中多少罪聚集中犯共多少事例”等(范畴184条),“守戒生起所犯中多少罪四种诉讼何种诉讼”等(范畴185条),“守戒生起所犯中多少罪十七审理何等审理”等(范畴186条),随后又有合并章,合共八章。继而以“守戒之因,第一大犯何处定立”等论点作为判别标准,其中前方地区按此前七章类推,此即表明又八章。由此,大部律藏释论十八章与此相应称为大律十八章。继而比库尼律也依此八周律而成,称为十六章合集。虽有文献中仅称“章”,然于多部佛经长部经注及阿毗达摩论中皆称“十六章合集”,且本文献不宜争执误读。
Brahmajālādicatuttiṃsasuttasaṅgahoti brahmajālasuttādīni catuttiṃsa suttāni saṅgayhanti ettha, etenāti vā brahmajālādicatuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho. Vuttappamāṇānaṃ vā suttānaṃ saṅgaho etassāti brahmajālādicatuttiṃsasuttasaṅgahoti. Evaṃ sesesupi veditabbaṃ.
所谓“梵网及其余三十三品部经集”,指的是梵网经等共计三十三部经文的汇集。此处名为“梵网及其余三十三品部经集”。或云“梵网等三十三品部经集”。名称意指所包含之经文数目。总之,此义也当如此理解。
Vividhavisesanayattāti imissā gāthāya atthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘vividhā hī’’tiādi. Daḷhīkammasithilakaraṇappayojanāti yathākkamaṃ lokavajjesu sikkhāpadesu daḷhīkammappayojanā, paṇṇattivajjesu sithilakaraṇappayojanāti veditabbaṃ. Ajjhācāranisedhanatoti saññamavelaṃ atibhavitvā pavatto ācāro ajjhācāro, vītikkamo, tassa nisedhanatoti attho. Tenāti vividhanayattādihetunā. Etanti ‘‘vividhavisesanayattā’’tiādigāthāvacanaṃ. Etassāti vinayassa. Itaraṃ panāti suttaṃ.
所谓“多种差别因缘”,乃是在此偈语中分别阐明其义,称之“种种因缘”等。就如针对行为坚固或松懈所引起的世俗戒律制订,或对戒律繁多所致宽松所制定的规则,应当明了。所谓“妨碍违教”是指因行为过甚导致的妨碍及抵制。故称“种种差别因缘”等偈语句。此义属律藏。至于其余则属于经藏。
Idāni atthānaṃ sūcanatotiādigāthāya atthaṃ pakāsento āha ‘‘tañhī’’tiādi. Attatthaparatthādibhedeti yo taṃ suttaṃ sajjhāyati suṇāti vāceti cinteti deseti ca, suttena saṅgahito sīlādiattho tassapi hoti, tena parassa sādhetabbato parassapi hotīti tadubhayaṃ taṃ suttaṃ sūceti dīpeti. Tathā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthe lokiyalokuttaratthe cāti evamādibhede atthe ādisaddena saṅgaṇhāti. Atthasaddo cāyaṃ hitapariyāyavacano, na bhāsitatthavacano. Yadi siyā, suttaṃ attanopi bhāsitatthaṃ sūceti parassapīti ayamattho vutto siyā, suttena ca yo attho pakāsito, so tasseva hoti, na tena parattho sūcito hotīti. Tena sūcetabbassa paratthassa nivattetabbassa abhāvā attaggahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ. Attatthaparatthavinimuttassa bhāsitatthassa abhāvā ādiggahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttassa hitapariyāyassa atthassa sutte asambhavato suttādhārassa puggalassa vasena attatthaparatthā vuttā.
现在关于『指示意义』的开头偈颂,开示了『渴爱』等词的意义。所谓意义根本和次第之差,指的是讲解、聆听、诵说、思惟、宣说该经文时,其文句所包含的戒律等内容其实也是其意义的一部分,因此该经文对自己和他人均有应当实现的意义,这样双重意义即是经文本身所指示、启示的内容。对于现象法、世俗与出世间法差别等,亦是如此,都是依照这些开头的词语加以归纳的。所谓意义词,是指对利益方面的解释用语,而非文字本义。如果存在这种情况:经文说明的意义本身指向自身和他人,则此义应视为已明示;且经文所阐明的意义,确实是它自己的意义,而不另指向别的意义。因此不存在所指示的意义另有所指、另有所归的问题,也无必要承接或回避此义。对于脱离自身和他者意义的文义,没有论述的承接或防避,所以应按照前述既定的利益解释,在经文中以个人的人格立场阐述根本与次第的意义。
Atha vā suttaṃ anapekkhitvā ye attatthādayo atthappabhedā ‘‘na haññadatthatthi pasaṃsalābhā’’ti etassa padassa niddese (mahāni. 63) vuttā attattho, parattho, ubhayattho, diṭṭhadhammiko attho, samparāyiko attho, uttāno attho, gambhīro attho, guḷho attho, paṭicchanno attho, neyyo attho, nīto attho, anavajjo attho, nikkileso attho, vodāno attho, paramatthoti, te atthe suttaṃ sūcetīti attho gahetabbo. Tathā hi kiñcāpi suttanirapekkhaṃ attatthādayo vuttā suttatthabhāvena aniddiṭṭhattā, tesu pana ekopi atthappabhedo suttena dīpetabbataṃ nātikkamati, tasmā te atthe suttaṃ sūcetīti vuccati. Imasmiñca atthavikappe attha-saddoyaṃ bhāsitatthapariyāyopi hoti. Ettha hi purimakā pañca atthappabhedā hitapariyāyā, tato pare cha bhāsitatthabhedā, pacchimakā pana ubhayasabhāvā. Tattha duradhigamatāya vibhāvane agādhabhāvo gambhīro, na vivaṭo guḷho, mūludakādayo viya paṃsunā akkharasannivesādinā tirohito paṭicchanno. Niddhāretvā ñāpetabbo neyyo, yathārutavasena veditabbo nīto. Anavajjanikkilesavodānā pariyāyavasena vuttā, kusalavipākakiriyadhammavasena vā. Paramattho nibbānaṃ, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo eva vā.
或者若不考虑经文本身,而对各种意义及其差别说“无毁式目的,不得利益”这句话的解释(见《大念处经》63中),涉及根本义、次第义、双重义、现象法义、依止义、上升义、深奥义、难解义、隐藏义、可否决义、次第牵引义、无亏损义、无缺漏义、真言义、究竟义等,应当采择这些义。从另一方面说,不管何种不理经文的意义说法,若违背经文本义的显现,没有一个意义的差别能被经文所启示超越,因此这些意义说都归纳为经文所指示的意义。当前这个意义变迁时期,意义词本身也可能是对文义的解释。其间以前五种义差别属于利益解释,后两种为文义差别,最后一种兼具有双重性质。关于难以理解的要切忌生起贪嗔等烦恼,应针对难根本(意为文义根部,本书发音疑为“mūludaka”)及诸流毒,犹如隐藏文字的沙尘积聚那样隐蔽、被遮蔽。对于不可成就的、应知的意义应予思考,遵循所闻所说的理解。无亏损、无缺漏及真言义作为解释术语,可能从善果报或业行法则的角度理解。究竟义即涅槃,是法的永不变质的本质。
Atha vā attanā ca appiccho hotīti attatthaṃ, appicchākathañca paresaṃ kattā hotīti paratthaṃ sūceti. Evaṃ ‘‘attanā ca pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hotī’’tiādīni (a. ni. 4.99) suttāni yojetabbāni. Vinayābhidhammehi ca visesetvā suttasaddassa attho vattabbo, tasmā veneyyajjhāsayavasappavattāya desanāya attahitaparahitādīni sātisayaṃ pakāsitāni honti tappadhānabhāvato, na āṇādhammasabhāvavasappavattāyāti idameva atthānaṃ sūcanato suttanti vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpanna’’nti (pāci. 655) ca ‘‘sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) ca evamādīsu suttasaddo upacaritoti gahetabbo.
或者若自己欲愿不足,即表示指自身义,若不足的论述又是他人所作,则表示指他人义。如此,如《阿毗尼毗婆沙论》4.99中说「自己于不杀生戒坚守」等经文,应当加以连接。依律藏细分,应以经句意义为准,因此对修行指引、利己利益及利益他人等分别给予逐一阐述,为重要主题,非空谈法理论述,故本段是指以此说明所指示的经文义。整理完毕后,称其为「彼世尊所说的归纳经文」,《大品般若经注》、《法句经释》等亦称包含类似内容的经句为「五百多经文」,应据此看待。
Suttesu āṇādhammasabhāvā ca veneyyajjhāsayaṃ anuvattanti, na vinayābhidhammesu viya veneyyajjhāsayo āṇādhammasabhāve, tasmā veneyyānaṃ ekantahitapaṭilābhasaṃvattanikā suttantadesanā hotīti ‘‘suvuttā cettha atthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ekantahitapaṭilābhasaṃvattanikā suttantadesanā’’ti idampi veneyyānaṃ hitasampāpane suttantadesanāya tapparabhāvaṃyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tapparabhāvo ca veneyyajjhāsayānulomato daṭṭhabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘veneyyajjhāsayānulomena vuttattā’’ti . Vinayadesanaṃ viya issarabhāvato āṇāpatiṭṭhāpanavasena adesetvā veneyyānaṃ ajjhāsayānulomena cariyānurūpaṃ vuttattā desitattāti attho.
在经文中关于空谈法理的情况也会因时因地而生,但它们与律藏中的空谈法理不同,故经文的说明法不宜如律藏那般空谈。由此可解说为,对于仅单方求利的经义说明是不相容的,因此称其为“此处经义良好”。所谓经义良好,意为经文对有利法益的圆满传授。圆满传授应视为顺从修学者心意,故云“顺修学者之意而说”。又如律藏教化强调领导性、授戒之意,都是依修学者心意,发出适当教示,因此说法如是。
Anupubbasikkhādivasena kālantare abhinipphattiṃ dassento āha ‘‘sassamiva phala’’nti. Pasavatīti phalati, nipphādetīti attho. Upāyasamaṅgīnaṃyeva nipphajjanabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘dhenu viya khīra’’nti āha. Dhenutopi hi upāyavantānaṃyeva khīrapaṭilābho hoti. Anupāyena hi akāle ajātavacchaṃ dhenuṃ dohanto kālepi vā visāṇaṃ gahetvā dohanto neva khīraṃ paṭilabhati. ‘‘Suttāṇā’’ti etassa atthaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘suṭṭhu ca ne tāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
借助逐步教导的方式,时空推移中显示效果,于是形容为『果实般』。果实意为成果,消除意指结果的完成。形象比照了手段一致而成就的状态,称为“牛奶般”(意指奶牛因手段获得乳汁),因为即使奶牛是有手段的,若不及时挤奶,所产生的乳汁将消失或失去。因此说“经文”的意义在此被阐明,有言说“得当且不过度”。
Suttasabhāganti suttasadisaṃ. Suttasabhāgataṃyeva dassento āha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi. Tacchakānaṃ suttanti vaḍḍhakīnaṃ kāḷasuttaṃ. Pamāṇaṃ hotīti tadanusārena tacchanato. Evametampi viññūnanti yathā kāḷasuttaṃ pasāretvā saññāṇe kate gahetabbaṃ vissajjetabbañca paññāyati, evaṃ vivādesu uppannesu sutte ānītamatte ‘‘idaṃ gahetabbaṃ, idaṃ vissajjetabba’’nti viññūnaṃ pākaṭattā vivādo vūpasammatīti etampi suttaṃ viññūnaṃ pamāṇaṃ hotīti attho. Idāni aññathāpi suttasabhāgataṃ dassento āha ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi. Suttaṃ viya pamāṇattā saṅgāhakattā ca suttamiva suttanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca attatthādividhāne suttassa pamāṇabhāvo attatthādīnaṃyeva ca saṅgāhakattaṃ yojetabbaṃ tadatthappakāsanapadhānattā suttassa. Vinayābhidhammehi visesattañca pubbe vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Etanti ‘‘atthānaṃ sūcanato’’tiādikaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Etassāti suttassa.
所谓“经文部分”即指与经文相似之处。解释“如同蜜蜂”,即是成熟时的传授。适用度即其照应的程度。如此,智者们得出结论,如同通过摊开时令蜜蜂采蜜、并加以采集和丢弃的过程,即在争辩中将经文视为分寸标准,从而通过智者们公然的争论得到平息,这亦是经文的应有标准。现今亦有说法比拟“如蜜蜂般”,即经文压缩、汇聚时的状态。经文本身视为分寸标准及相互归纳的对象,针对根本及次第等义项,应作归纳说明,依律藏之前所说为准。由此得出「指示意义」等词,是对经文意义的综合说明,这即是本经文范围所含义理。
Yanti yasmā. Etthāti abhidhamme. Abhikkamantīti ettha abhi-saddo kamanakiriyāya vuḍḍhibhāvaṃ atirekataṃ dīpetīti āha ‘‘abhikkamantītiādīsu vuḍḍhiyaṃ āgato’’ti. Abhiññātāti aḍḍhacandādinā kenaci saññāṇena ñātā paññātā pākaṭāti attho. Aḍḍhacandādibhāvo hi rattiyā upalakkhaṇavasena saññāṇaṃ hoti, yasmā aḍḍho cando, tasmā aṭṭhamī, yasmā ūno, tasmā cātuddasī, yasmā puṇṇo, tasmā pannarasīti. Abhilakkhitāti etthāpi ayamevattho veditabbo. Abhilakkhitasaddapariyāyo abhiññātasaddoti āha ‘‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitātiādīsu lakkhaṇe’’ti. Ettha ca vācakasaddantarasannidhānena nipātānaṃ tadatthajotakamattattā lakkhitasaddatthajotako abhisaddo lakkhaṇe vattatīti vutto. Rājābhirājāti rājūhi pūjetuṃ araho rājā. Pūjiteti pūjārahe.
“顺其自然地去吧”此为“在此”法义中的说法。此处“abhikkamantī”之“abhi”字,表示加强作用,“kamanakiriyā”意指感官驱动的活动,所以合起来表示加强此类感官活动的增长,因此说“abhikkamantī等词中具增长的意义”。“Abhiññāta”则意为通过某种认识和觉知得以了解、明白、确认之义。所谓“aḍḍhacandādinā”指的是通过半月等诸相(如半月、八日、半望、满月、十五日)而认知之,因半月为天色之标记,故以其类属于识的范围。“Abhilakkhitā”一词在这里也应当如此理解,所谓“abhiññātasaddo”即“abhiññāta”与“abhilakkhitā”这两词合成,表示以此类特征称谓的名称。“Rājābhirājā”是指配合国王礼敬之应受礼敬者为阿拉汉。所谓“pūjārahe”即是“应该礼敬”。
Abhidhammeti ‘‘supinantena sukkavissaṭṭhiyā anāpattibhāvepi akusalacetanā upalabbhatī’’tiādinā vinayapaññattiyā saṅkaravirahite dhamme. ‘‘Pubbāparavirodhābhāvato dhammānaṃyeva ca aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite dhamme’’tipi vadanti. ‘‘Pāṇātipāto akusala’’nti evamādīsu ca maraṇādhippāyassa jīvitindriyupacchedakapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā akusalaṃ, na pāṇasaṅkhātajīvitindriyassa upacchedasaṅkhāto atipāto, tathā adinnassa parasantakassa ādānasaṅkhātā viññatti abyākato dhammo, taṃviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā akusalo dhammoti evamādināpi aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite dhammeti attho veditabbo. Abhivinayeti ettha ‘‘jātarūparajataṃ na paṭiggahetabba’’nti vadanto vinaye vineti nāma. Ettha ‘‘evaṃ paṭiggaṇhato pācittiyaṃ, evaṃ dukkaṭanti vadanto ca abhivinaye vineti nāmā’’ti vadanti. Tasmā jātarūparajataṃ theyyacittena parasantakaṃ gaṇhantassa yathāvatthu pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭesu aññataraṃ, bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena gaṇhantassa pācittiyaṃ, attatthāya gaṇhantassa nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Kevalaṃ lolatāya gaṇhantassa anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ, rūpiyachaḍḍakassa sammatassa anāpattīti evaṃ aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite vinaye paṭibalo vinetunti attho veditabbo. Abhikkantenāti ettha kantiyā adhikattaṃ abhisaddo dīpetīti āha ‘‘adhike’’ti.
“Abhidhamma”意指不违反律藏的和谐教法,譬如说“睡眠安稳无梦时邪恶意念消失”之类依律的善法。此内涵表明“先后无冲突的和谐法”,多个教法彼此相融无碍。诸如“杀生为不善法”,此及其它造业止灭生命根本的行为皆属于不善意,并非指断绝生命器官之过重杀害,而是指意念引发之不善;盗取他物虽为罪恶,其分类在于偷盗的完成体而非相关意念。处罚之罪行根据意念而非单纯动作界定,即教法中意念为根本的善恶标准。“Abhivinaya”一词指守律行持戒制,即“不可受取生死业果”。语律中“如实接受犯戒之罪,谓之内律守持”,故杀业持戒中种种罪行之分类,依意念程度区分轻重,如“贪婪取物为轻罪”。不存在纯因贪婪而无意犯罪仍记录为罪的情形,故以此类无碍冲突的律藏共成一体。此处“abhikkantenā”所表述,依“adhibhāva”即更加强烈含义,故说明此处词义精细。
Nanu ca ‘‘abhikkamantī’’ti ettha abhisaddo kamanakiriyāya vuḍḍhibhāvaṃ atirekataṃ dīpeti, ‘‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitā’’ti ettha ñāṇalakkhaṇakiriyānaṃ supākaṭattā visesaṃ, ‘‘abhikkantenā’’ti ettha kantiyā adhikattaṃ visiṭṭhataṃ dīpetīti idaṃ tāva yuttaṃ kiriyāvisesakattā upasaggassa, ‘‘abhirājā abhivinayo’’ti pana pūjitaparicchinnesu rājavinayesu abhisaddo vattatīti kathametaṃ yujjeyyāti ce? Idhāpi natthi doso pūjanaparicchedanakiriyādīpanato, tāhi ca kiriyāhi rājavinayānaṃ yuttattā, tasmā ettha atimālādīsu atisaddo viya abhisaddo saha sādhanena kiriyaṃ vadatīti abhirājaabhivinayasaddā siddhā, evaṃ abhidhammasadde abhisaddo saha sādhanena vuḍḍhiyādikiriyaṃ dīpetīti ayamattho dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
难道说“abhikkamantī”中所用“abhi”字,只是表示感官驱动增长之加强吗?“Abhiññātā abhilakkhitā”中所指,乃觉知与特征印记识别之明显;“abhikkantenā”又体现了加强和独特程度之区别作用。这些都表明谓词后缀“abhi-”兼具不同语义功能。再者“abhirājā abhivinayo”中谓词乃指先除去诸礼敬环节而专论国王戒律之言辞,所属上下文而成语义整体。对此如何调和?大意是,此处无任何贪执之嫌。国王戒律文中以此类谓词旁附别的名词形成习惯用语,故此谓词应视具广泛而综合的用法。此即“abhisaddo”与“abhi-”复合表达为依凭执行的工具或媒介,故语义得以证明。遂明此处巴利词汇复合运用之多义和细致分层。
Etthacāti abhidhamme. Bhāvetīti cittassa vaḍḍhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Pharitvāti ārammaṇassa vaḍḍhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuḍḍhimantoti bhāvanāpharaṇavuḍḍhīhi vuḍḍhimantopi dhammā vuttāti attho. Ārammaṇādīhīti ārammaṇasampayuttakammadvārapaṭipadādīhi. Lakkhaṇīyattāti sañjānitabbattā. Ekantato lokuttaradhammānaṃyeva pūjārahattā ‘‘sekkhā dhammā’’tiādinā lokuttarāyeva pūjitāti dassitā. Sabhāvaparicchinnattāti phusanādisabhāvena paricchinnattā. Adhikāpi dhammā vuttāti ettha kāmāvacarehi mahantabhāvato mahaggatā dhammāpi adhikā nāma hontīti tehi saddhiṃ adhikā dhammā vuttā.
“Etthacāti”即“如此说之”,说明“abhidhamma”表示培养心意增长。心的成长称“bhāveti”,意指因修习而更盛。心所起缘增长“pharitvā”也即意指支配境界的增长。具“vuḍḍhi-manta”者,说明因修持增长而生效力或果效更显;诸法由取缘等因素而生,从而应予认定。所谓“ārammaṇādīhīti”者,指所有缘起因缘的累积及其行为的行路等。所谓应当确定为特征“lakkhaṇīyatta”,是指具辨别特征的性质。单独界定“世俗外法”之中应尊敬法的正道,经称“sekkhā dhammā”等,显示它们为世间超越,一种崇高受敬的法门。此等法门因其无碍涤净之相,自然被认为是应增加和尊敬的对象。还有“sabhāvaparicchinnatta”,即由其本性和特征构成其内涵与定义。进一步法行扩展,“adhikāpi dhammā”说明,即使是世俗界中的“kāma”,但因巨大的法相和所趋,亦被称为“adhikā”(重要)。“Tehi saddhiṃ adhikā dhammā”意即与它们类似的更加重要的法也包含其中。
Yaṃ panettha avisiṭṭhanti ettha vinayādīsu tīsu aññamaññavisiṭṭhesu yaṃ avisiṭṭhaṃ samānaṃ, taṃ piṭakasaddanti attho. Vinayādayo hi tayo saddā aññamaññaṃ asādhāraṇattā visiṭṭhā nāma, piṭakasaddo pana tehi tīhipi sādhāraṇattā avisiṭṭhoti vuccati. Mā piṭakasampadānenāti pāḷisampadānavasena mā gaṇhathāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kudālañca piṭakañca kudālapiṭakaṃ. Tattha ku vuccati pathavī, tassā dālanato vidālanato ayomayo upakaraṇaviseso kudālaṃ nāma, tālapaṇṇavettalatādīhi kato bhājanaviseso piṭakaṃ nāma, taṃ ādāya gahetvāti attho. Yathāvuttenāti ‘‘evaṃ duvidhatthenā’’tiādinā vuttappakārena.
“Yaṃ panettha avisiṭṭhanti”即指分别律藏等三藏中不等之处,或差异之特有者,视为三藏内部同类名称中的“piṭaka-saddha”,意为藏法名称。律、经、论三藏各自词语虽异而殊胜,且“saddā”彼此情形多不同,称为“visiṭṭhā”,即特别显著且特殊。三藏名称却因其覆盖面皆共通,故为“avisiṭṭha”,即整体通用名称。此处说“mā piṭakasampadānena”,意谓不因字音或名称之细错而废弃其整体認知。以此举“kudāla”及“piṭaka”之名为例,说明“kudāla”意为地面开凿之铜铁用具,泛指工具;“piṭaka”指以棕榈叶等制成的分册,用以书写佛法教义。两者名词虽不同,皆代表所划分的实物类别,这是理解其双重含义与词类区分之典型例证。
Desanāsāsanakathābhedanti ettha kathetabbānaṃ atthānaṃ desakāyattena āṇādividhinā abhisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā. Sāsitabbapuggalagatena yathāparādhādinā sāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ vinayanaṃ sāsanaṃ. Kathetabbassa saṃvarāsaṃvarādino atthassa kathanaṃ vacanapaṭibaddhatākaraṇaṃ kathāti vuccati. Tasmā desitāraṃ bhagavantamapekkhitvā desanā, sāsitabbapuggalavasena sāsanaṃ, kathetabbassa atthassa vasena kathāti evamettha desanādīnaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha ca kiñcāpi desanādayo desetabbādinirapekkhā na honti, āṇādayo pana visesato desakādiadhīnāti taṃtaṃvisesayogavasena desanādīnaṃ bhedo vutto. Tathā hi āṇāvidhānaṃ visesato āṇārahādhīnaṃ tattha kosallayogato. Evaṃ vohāraparamatthavidhānāni ca vidhāyakādhīnānīti āṇādividhino desakāyattatā vuttā. Aparādhajjhāsayānurūpaṃ viya dhammānurūpampi sāsanaṃ visesato, tathā vinetabbapuggalāpekkhanti sāsitabbapuggalavasena sāsanaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṃvarāsaṃvaranāmarūpānaṃ viya viniveṭhetabbāya diṭṭhiyāpi kathanaṃ sati vācāvatthusmiṃ nāsatīti visesato tadadhīnanti kathetabbassa atthassa vasena kathā vuttā. Bhedasaddo visuṃ visuṃ yojetabbo ‘‘desanābhedaṃ sāsanabhedaṃ kathābhedañca yathārahaṃ paridīpaye’’ti. Bhedanti ca nānattanti attho. Tesu piṭakesu sikkhā ca pahānāni ca gambhīrabhāvo ca sikkhāpahānagambhīrabhāvaṃ, tañca yathārahaṃ paridīpayeti attho. Pariyattibhedañca vibhāvayeti sambandho.
“Desanā sāsana kathā bhedanti”指讲说与戒律等教示之差别,本节说明其中意义应当依据宣说者、受教者、目的及境界加以区别。讲说以激发修行、觉悟为主要目的,故称“desanā”;戒训针对犯戒者及规劝者,谓之“sāsana”;而论述具体条款、法律规范之分离则称“kathā”。依此划分,即使法义相近,由于宣说立场和受众的不同,其表达方式与重点亦将有异,因此须予以细分和明辨。并指出宣说句式常依所在段落的上下文而各异,含有法义的巨大细节差异。又以“āṇādividhinā”说明,戒律中授教时内容琐细且极具技巧性。此类差别体现在戒律解释中,便于学者深入理解。总言之,法义的差异不能简单以字面或表层含义衡量,须具体考量教导对象与目的,端正心念,从而体会其中细微的教法分类与启示。
Pariyattibhedanti ca pariyāpuṇanabhedanti attho. Yahinti yasmiṃ vinayādike piṭake. Yaṃ sampattiñca vipattiñca yathā pāpuṇāti, tampi sabbaṃ vibhāvayeti sambandho. Atha vā yaṃ pariyattibhedaṃ sampattiñca vipattiñcāpi yahiṃ yathā pāpuṇāti, tampi sabbaṃ vibhāvayeti yojetabbaṃ. Ettha yathāti yehi upārambhādihetupariyāpuṇanādippakārehi upārambhanissaraṇadhammakosakarakkhaṇahetupariyāpuṇanaṃ suppaṭipatti duppaṭipattīti etehi pakārehīti vuttaṃ hoti.
『pariyatti』与『pariyāpuṇana』所区别者,即其涵义。此处所系者,即是于律藏及其他藏中。所谓成就与败坏皆如所获,此即一切皆由关系分别。又或于成就败坏之区别及所在,随其所获,皆当分别结合。此中『yathā』者,是指由『起始因』、『成就因』、『消散因』等诸『完成因』,即起始与消散之法为维护,成就或不成就,以及不成就所显现之法,此即所谓分别诸因相续而明示之意。
Paridīpanā vibhāvanā cāti heṭṭhā vuttassa anurūpato vuttaṃ, atthato pana ekameva. Āṇārahenāti āṇaṃ ṭhapetuṃ arahatīti āṇāraho, bhagavā. So hi sammāsambuddhatāya mahākāruṇikatāya ca aviparītahitopadesakabhāvena pamāṇavacanattā āṇaṃ paṇetuṃ arahati, vohāraparamatthānampi sambhavato āha ‘‘āṇābāhullato’’ti. Ito paresupi eseva nayo.
『Paridīpanā vibhāvanā cāti』乃依下文所言相应而说,一义而已。所谓『Āṇāraha』,谓是舍弃烦恼之客,譬如世尊。彼者因正觉者之大慈悲无逆诤利说教之故,遵守教典戒律,故得舍弃烦恼,亦因修持至善道理而称『āṇābāhullato』。此乃诸外道所依循之理解。
Paṭhamanti vinayapiṭakaṃ. Pacurāparādhā seyyasakattherādayo. Te hi dosabāhullato ‘‘pacurāparādhā’’ti vuttā. Pacuro bahuko bahulo aparādho doso vītikkamo yesaṃ te pacurāparādhā. Anekajjhāsayātiādīsu āsayova ajjhāsayo. So ca atthato diṭṭhi ñāṇañca, pabhedato pana catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tathā hi pubbacariyavasena āyatiṃ sati paccaye uppajjamānārahā sassatucchedasaṅkhātā micchādiṭṭhi saccānulomikañāṇakammassakataññāṇasaṅkhātā sammādiṭṭhi ca ‘‘āsayo’’ti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
『第一者 Vinaya Piṭaka』即律藏。所谓『Pacurāparādhā』,谓罪多重者,萨耶萨长老等即为此类。因其烦恼盛起,故谓其罪多重。所谓『Pacuro』多者,谓多种罪过,烦恼消尽者,即其多重罪。『Anekajjhāsayāti』,谓种种执着,是谓『ajjhāsayo』。从义理上看,所谓见与知识,上可分四种。以其前行由来,基于久远之正念而生,断除生灭,基于相关真理之知识,正见,则称为『āsayo』。经中言——
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhi ca, khanti cevānulomikā;
『断灭见亦为耐心正见;』
Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaññita’’nti.
『及真实知识,谓此即谓执着所缘净知。』
Idañca catubbidhaṃ āsayanti ettha sattā nivasantīti āsayoti vuccati. Anusayā kāmarāgabhavarāgadiṭṭhipaṭighavicikicchāmānāvijjāvasena satta. Mūsikavisaṃ viya kāraṇalābhe uppajjanārahā anāgatā kilesā, atītā paccuppannā ca tatheva vuccanti. Na hi kālabhedena dhammānaṃ sabhāvabhedo atthīti. Cariyāti rāgacariyādikā cha mūlacariyā, antarabhedena anekavidhā, saṃsaggavasena pana tesaṭṭhi honti. Atha vā cariyāti caritaṃ, taṃ sucaritaduccaritavasena duvidhaṃ. ‘‘Adhimutti nāma ‘ajjeva pabbajissāmi, ajjeva arahattaṃ gaṇhissāmī’tiādinā tanninnabhāvena pavattamānaṃ sanniṭṭhāna’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘sattānaṃ pubbacariyavasena abhirucī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā duvidhā hīnapaṇītabhedena. Yathānulomanti ajjhāsayādīnaṃ anurūpaṃ. Ahaṃ mamāti saññinoti diṭṭhimānataṇhāvasena ahaṃ mamāti evaṃ pavattasaññino. Yathādhammanti natthettha attā attaniyaṃ vā, kevalaṃ dhammamattametanti evaṃ dhammasabhāvānurūpanti attho.
此四种即为执着。于此谓众生之寄住故称执着。所谓『Anusayā』,即余所习,谓以色欲、贪爱、生死、恶业之见,饶益疑惑,所以无明为缘。譬如鼠毒,因缘条件而起之现起毒害烦恼,即过去、现在和未来之污秽烦恼,皆同是。而不是因时间不同,而有所别此法之本质。所谓『Cariya』者,是指以贪欲行为等为六根本行为,依内在不同而有多种分架,以往行缘故而生,共集存在。又或谓行为,谓此行为,分为善行为与不善行为,二分。所谓『Adhimutti』,谓如言『今日发愿出家,今日取阿拉汉果』等,由此发愿及其实践所成之因果场所,此称为『起结』。而经师老德称此为『众生之以往行为之欢喜』。此有二种乃低劣善贞之不同,依执着等相续。如『我属于我』见,因贪等烦恼而执我我者,是谓『我所属』。又所谓『法如实者』,于此处不指个人或他者,唯指法本身,如此遂成其义。
Saṃvarāsaṃvaroti ettha saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro, kāyavācāhi avītikkamo. Mahanto saṃvaro asaṃvaro. Vuḍḍhiattho hi ayaṃ a-kāro yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti, tasmā khuddako mahanto ca saṃvaroti attho. Diṭṭhiviniveṭhanāti diṭṭhiyā vimocanaṃ. Adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ vibhāgo parato paṭhamapārājikasaṃvaṇṇanāya āvi bhavissati. Suttantapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā samādhidesanābāhullato ‘‘suttantapiṭake adhicittasikkhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vītikkamappahānaṃ kilesānanti saṃkilesadhammānaṃ kammakilesānaṃ vā yo kāyavacīdvārehi vītikkamo, tassa pahānaṃ. Anusayavasena santāne anuvattantā kilesā kāraṇalābhe pariyuṭṭhitāpi sīlabhedavasena vītikkamituṃ na labhantīti āha ‘‘vītikkamapaṭipakkhattā sīlassā’’ti. Pariyuṭṭhānappahānanti okāsadānavasena kilesānaṃ citte kusalappavattiṃ pariyādiyitvā uṭṭhānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṃ, tassa pahānaṃ cittasantānesu uppattivasena kilesānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānassa pahānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Anusayappahānanti appahīnabhāvena santāne anu anu sayanakā kāraṇalābhe uppattiarahā anusayā. Te pana anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ laddhā uppajjanārahā thāmagatā kāmarāgādayo satta kilesā, tesaṃ pahānaṃ anusayappahānaṃ. Te ca sabbaso ariyamaggapaññāya pahīyantīti āha ‘‘anusayapaṭipakkhattā paññāyā’’ti.
“坚持自持”者,此处所说之“坚持”即为守护,意指身语不违犯。坚持极大与不坚持相对。此坚持指此类行为之无成,即如“未萌动法”之义,故此坚持有大、小之别。所谓“现见与违弃”,即由见解而得解脱。自他之间,戒修等诸法之分类,首先要说明巴拉基咖罪的坚持。根据经藏,“独居欲避”及类似语句用于深入讲述定,故称为“经藏中以定为主的戒修”。放弃违犯,谓以身语门不违犯即放弃垢烦,谓与染污法及其业染法相应者。在心续流中,染污虽已除,但因戒法破坏故不能称为放弃戒法,故说“对坚持相反者即为戒”。放弃染污,谓以机缘方便意识于染污于心起伏、消退之善巧境界,其起伏之消除即为放弃。放弃习气,谓在续流中尚存未除之业力所致习气,但已无助缘其生灭,由此习气乃为放弃。说七种根本染污因缘放弃称为习气放弃。且所有习气悉由圣道智慧而断除,称“得习气相反者即为慧”。
Tadaṅgappahānanti dīpālokeneva tamassa dānādipuññakiriyavatthugatena tena tena kusalaṅgena tassa tassa akusalaṅgassa pahānaṃ ‘‘tadaṅgappahāna’’nti vuccati. Idha pana tena tena susīlyaṅgena tassa tassa dussīlyaṅgassa pahānaṃ ‘‘tadaṅgappahāna’’nti veditabbaṃ. Vikkhambhanasamaucchedappahānānīti ettha upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattinivāraṇena ghaṭappahāreneva jalatale sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena pahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ. Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato santāne samudayapakkhikassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattisaṅkhātasamucchedavasena pahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ. Duccaritasaṃkilesassa pahānanti kāyaduccaritādi duṭṭhu caritaṃ, kilesehi vā dūsitaṃ caritanti duccaritaṃ. Tadeva yattha uppannaṃ, taṃ santānaṃ sammā kileseti bādhayati upatāpeti cāti saṃkileso, tassa pahānaṃ, kāyavacīduccaritavasena pavattasaṃkilesassa tadaṅgavasena pahānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Samādhissa kāmacchandapaṭipakkhattā suttantapiṭake taṇhāsaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Attādivinimuttasabhāvadhammappakāsanato abhidhammapiṭake diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ vuttaṃ.
「分别放弃」,如持火把向暗处放光,亦如以施舍等功德行为消灭恶业,分别以各种善根除灭各种恶根者称为“分别放弃”。此处须知以善净业灭除恶业即为分别放弃。断除放逸散乱等障碍如用器皿倒水上的污浊,依止断除种种障碍法即为断除散乱放逸,称为散乱断除。依圣道四谛修习,有集中道所缘之集谛诸染污彻底断除,即为断除散乱。断除恶行肇基者,如身恶行等,依染污所染恶行为恶行。彼恶行生起即令续流苦染污,即“染污”,其断除为身语恶行基起者的分别断除。经藏中,于定相反者即除除贪欲污染。于阿毗达摩部分,显示见相反者即除见染污。
Ekamekasmiñcetthāti etesu tīsu piṭakesu ekamekasmiṃ piṭaketi attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhammoti pāḷīti ettha pakaṭṭhānaṃ ukkaṭṭhānaṃ sīlādiatthānaṃ bodhanato sabhāvaniruttibhāvato buddhādīhi bhāsitattā ca pakaṭṭhānaṃ vacanappabandhānaṃ āḷīti pāḷi, pariyattidhammo. ‘‘Dhammoti pāḷīti ettha bhagavatā vuccamānassa atthassa vohārassa ca dīpano saddoyeva pāḷi nāmā’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Abhidhammaṭṭhakathāya likhite sīhaḷagaṇṭhipade pana idaṃ vuttaṃ – sabhāvatthassa sabhāvavohārassa ca anurūpavasena bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitā paṇḍatti pāḷīti vuccati. Yadi saddoyeva pāḷi siyā, pāḷiyā desanāya ca nānattena bhavitabbaṃ. Manasā vavatthāpitāya ca pāḷiyā vacībhedakaraṇamattaṃ ṭhapetvā desanāya nānattaṃ natthi. Tathā hi desanaṃ dassentena manasā vavatthāpitāya pāḷiyā desanāti vacībhedakaraṇamattaṃ vinā pāḷiyā saha desanāya anaññathā vuttā. Tathā ca upari ‘‘desanāti paññattī’’ti vuttattā desanāya anaññabhāvena pāḷiyā paṇṇattibhāvo kathito hoti. Apica yadi pāḷiyā aññāyeva desanā siyā, ‘‘pāḷiyā ca pāḷiatthassa ca desanāya ca yathābhūtāvabodho’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, evaṃ pana avatvā ‘‘pāḷiyā ca pāḷiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho’’ti vuttattā pāḷiyā desanāya ca anaññabhāvo dassito hoti. Evañca katvā upari ‘‘desanā nāma paññattī’’ti dassentena desanāya anaññabhāvato pāḷiyā paṇṇattibhāvo kathitova hotīti.
“三藏中各别处”者,三藏中各一藏亦当分别理解。“法”是巴利语,这里指露现心法及戒等义项,此乃诸佛发无量教言时所用之根本语汇。释义称“‘法’为巴利语,乃分别法之现名称”。阿毗达摩注释者以锡兰语释此言,谓据心所法及法之现名称,称为“法”,若仅是声音,尚不足以成语言。故语言须依其心所相应而产生意义,语言才能成立。释义言:“因明示故,字义称为‘说明’。若无说明,无谓言语。是为‘说明’字义出处。”如是说明称为文字语言之根本,若无说明,则文字仅为声音而无意义。由此“说明”为有本质意义指称。
Ettha ca ‘‘saddoyeva pāḷi nāmā’’ti imasmiṃ pakkhe dhammassapi saddasabhāvattā dhammadesanānaṃ ko visesoti ce? Tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ bodhakabhāvena ñāto uggahaṇādivasena ca pubbe vavatthāpito saddappabandho dhammo, pacchā paresaṃ avabodhanatthaṃ pavattito tadatthappakāsako saddo desanāti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā yathāvuttasaddasamuṭṭhāpako cittuppādo desanā ‘‘desīyati samuṭṭhāpīyati saddo etenā’’ti katvā musāvādādayo viya. Tatthāpi hi musāvādādisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādādisaddena voharīyati.
此处“仅谓巴利语名称”者,若问法之声音本质有何特别?乃知所指之意义及引导之理义,乃为教法根本。此教法根本借助释义、分类等展开,说明名称意旨,后因通达他者,普遍传布此名称。亦或语音生起而为教言,此属语言生起称为“教法”。若失实则如妄语般,此等不实语言因意念伪劣而生,为妄语。妄语生起以假声音为表,非真实语义因故生。
Tīsupi cetesu ete dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhāti ettha pāḷiattho pāḷidesanā pāḷiatthapaṭivedho cāti ime tayo pāḷivisayā hontīti vinayapiṭakādīnaṃ atthassa desanāya paṭivedhassa ca ādhārabhāvo yutto, piṭakāni pana pāḷiyoyevāti tesaṃ dhammassa ādhārabhāvo kathaṃ yujjeyyāti ce? Pāḷisamudāyassa avayavapāḷiyā ādhārabhāvato. Avayavassa hi samudāyo ādhārabhāvena vuccati yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Ettha ca dhammādīnaṃ dukkhogāhabhāvato tehi dhammādīhi vinayādayo gambhīrāti vinayādīnampi catubbidho gambhīrabhāvo vuttoyeva, tasmā dhammādayo eva dukkhogāhattā gambhīrā, na vinayādayoti na codetabbametaṃ sammukhena visayavisayīmukhena ca vinayādīnaṃyeva gambhīrabhāvassa vuttattā. Dhammo hi vinayādayo, tesaṃ visayo attho, dhammatthavisayā ca desanāpaṭivedhāti. Tattha paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ, desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya ca dukkhogāhabhāvo veditabbo. Paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā taṃvisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Dukkhena ogayhantīti dukkhogāhā. Ekadesena ogāhantehipi mandabuddhīhi patiṭṭhā laddhuṃ na sakkāti āha ‘‘alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā cā’’ti. Ekamekasminti ekekasmiṃ piṭake. Etthāti etesu piṭakesu. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.
此三种法藏为法理阐释,即巴利语言内涵、法义阐明与教法说明等,均为阐释三藏之基础。问三藏为何以“巴利”为名?乃巴利铸造此语,承载教法主题。故称为巴利者,乃言教言之来源。因法理深奥涉及苦集灭道,故律法亦属深奥。如是,以苦理、听闻难及思维难三因缘,故称绝难法理。又因律等深入讲述,亦属根深柢固之苦理。故修学此三藏者,应晓法和教义之深理,明白读解之难处,况无明慧不易达成。故有“不易得决断”等说。
Idāni hetuhetuphalādīnaṃ vasenapi gambhīrabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādi. Hetūti paccayo. So hi attano phalaṃ dahati vidahatīti dhammoti vuccati. Dhammasaddassa cettha hetupariyāyatā kathaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Nanu ca ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti etena vacanena dhammassa hetubhāvo kathaṃ viññāyatīti ce? Dhammapaṭisambhidāti etassa samāsapadassa avayavapadatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇa’’nti vuttattā. ‘‘Dhamme paṭisambhidā dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti ettha hi ‘‘dhamme’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘paṭisambhidā’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti, tasmā hetudhammasaddā ekatthā ñāṇapaṭisambhidāsaddā cāti imamatthaṃ vadantena sādhito dhammassa hetubhāvo. Hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidāti etena vacanena sādhito atthassa hetuphalabhāvopi evameva daṭṭhabbo. Hetuno phalaṃ hetuphalaṃ. Tañca yasmā hetuanusārena arīyati adhigamīyati sampāpuṇīyati, tasmā atthoti vuccati.
此中始显因缘与果报之深意云。因者谓关系,于教法中为触发果报之因缘。故法名为“烧毁自己果报之因”。问法名中如何识别因缘意义?答曰“所说因”即因知。因缘之“知”即智慧观察,故名为法之正断智慧。此智慧可辨因缘果报。因果相应以故,智慧成就因果相续之正理。因者即缘故,果为成就,故称为理义中通达理性智慧之证明。
Yathādhammanti ettha dhammasaddo hetuṃ hetuphalañca sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabhāvavācako hesa dhammasaddo, na pariyattihetubhāvavācako, tasmā yathādhammanti yo yo avijjādisaṅkhārādidhammo, tasmiṃ tasminti attho. Dhammānurūpaṃ vā yathādhammaṃ. Desanāpi hi paṭivedho viya aviparītavisayavibhāvanato dhammānurūpaṃ pavattati, tatoyeva ca aviparītābhilāpoti vuccati. Dhammābhilāpoti atthabyañjanako aviparītābhilāpo. Ettha ca abhilappatīti abhilāpoti saddo vuccati. Etena ‘‘tatra dhammaniruttābhilāpe ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 718) ettha vuttaṃ dhammaniruttiṃ dasseti saddasabhāvattā desanāya. Tathā hi niruttipaṭisambhidāya parittārammaṇādibhāvo paṭisambhidāvibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 718 ādayo) vutto. Aṭṭhakathāyañca (vibha. aṭṭha. 718) ‘‘taṃ sabhāvaniruttiṃ saddaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’tiādinā saddārammaṇatā dassitā. Tathā hi imassa atthassa ayaṃ saddo vācakoti vacanavacanatthe vavatthapetvā taṃtaṃvacanatthavibhāvanavasena pavattito saddo desanāti vuccati. Adhippāyoti etena ‘‘desanāti paññattī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ dhammaniruttābhilāpaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tato vinimuttaṃ paññattiṃ sandhāyāti adhippāyaṃ dasseti. Desīyati attho etenāti hi desanā, pakārena ñāpīyati etena, pakārato ñāpetīti vā paññattīti dhammaniruttābhilāpo vuccati. Evaṃ ‘‘desanā nāma saddo’’ti imasmiṃ pakkhe ayamattho veditabbo. ‘‘Desanāti paññattī’’ti ettha paññattivādino pana evaṃ vadanti – kiñcāpi ‘‘dhammābhilāpo’’ti ettha abhilappatīti abhilāpoti saddo vuccati, na paṇṇatti, tathāpi sadde vuccamāne tadanurūpaṃ vohāraṃ gahetvā tena vohārena dīpitassa atthassa jānanato sadde kathite tadanurūpā paṇṇattipi kāraṇūpacārena kathitāyeva hoti. Atha vā ‘‘dhammābhilāpoti attho’’ti avatvā ‘‘dhammābhilāpoti adhippāyo’’ti vuttattā desanā nāma saddo na hotīti dīpitamevāti.
如法者,在此指法音声即缘起、缘果等一切诸法总摄。此所称法音,乃指现象本性所显之法音,不是经律义理文字的字句说明。故如法者,于众无明行等诸法世俗现象中,各各当法有所涵义。或称顺法,皆应法而行。又譬如开示,因其不反逆所缘境界对治故,其行事皆顺法,此即所谓不反逆之教法。法意谓启示义理且无反逆,此为法意。不反逆即指教法对境无误,故曰法言意。此中所谓欲言,即称欲言为语声。由此谓「其有教法相应之辞说,即名为教法声。」以此故有“彼处对法言音之意,知能解法理之智慧,即名闻法智之语解能通也”。此即注释所说法义之自然现象,显于说法中。又诸说法持此辞所能起念相者,皆为辞所主宰。于是以辞为教乃称言辞。故依此界定‘教法辞’为言辞所载之法音说,即言辞与教法内容相应所发之音。言辞有别字符串句理,故训此‘说法为辞言体现’。又《戒律论》云‘说法即文字’。此处“辞”为语句,非纯文字,而是语言承载者。故谓“辞言即说法内容之体现”。“教”指教法内容故列为理义,辞言只是教法表述方式。又云:“言辞非为描述本体义理,而是依辞言相与义理间所对应之关系表达教义。”由此非称辞言即教,只是一种教法之表露。此即阐释“辞言之教法义”分明,谓以辞言表达义理之真实性义,辞言乃教法显现也。又称教法辞即精义辞令。其意说,教法辞乃教法彰显之言说明,故曰“辞言体现”有加诸及教法。论述“言辞即表达”说说明教义且以辞展现法理。由此理证“说即文字表达”,“辞即教法说”。至于“宣扬”即表露,说明,阐释教义。故曰“宣说即辞言”。其意谓,诠释以方言或其他通俗辞令传示教义。这即“教法辞”之用意。又曰“宣说即概念”,此指言辞乃传递法义之符号系统,概念即辞之法义含摄。又「宣说」者,宣扬义理,开示修学之法义。于此角度,宣说即辩说演讲之义。故非常用‘文书’或‘书面文字’,而是以言辞形式展现教法义理。此述明“宣说即辞言”义理与辞言相符。又言“概念论者谓宣说为意之阐述”,此对言辞说法细分出二义:一者辞言,即外在语言;二者意念,即内在法义。此处区别“教法辞言”与“意念”,言辞非单纯概念,乃召集于意义诸说之表达。最后总结曰:“故宣说即言辞,此义在此处当明了。”
Idāni paṭivedhaṃ niddisanto āha ‘‘paṭivedhoti abhisamayo’’ti. Paṭivijjhatīti ñāṇaṃ paṭivedhoti vuccati. Paṭivijjhanti etenāti vā paṭivedho , abhisametīti abhisamayo, abhisamenti etenāti vā abhisamayo. Idāni abhisamayappabhedato abhisamayappakārato ārammaṇato sabhāvato ca pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘so ca lokiyalokuttaro’’tiādimāha. Visayato asammohato ca avabodhoti sambandho. Tattha visayato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho nāma avijjādidhammārammaṇo saṅkhārādiatthārammaṇo tadubhayapaññāpanārammaṇo lokiyo avabodho. Asammohato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho pana nibbānārammaṇo maggayutto yathāvuttadhammatthapaññattīsu sammohaviddhaṃsano lokuttaro abhisamayo. Tathā hi ‘‘ayaṃ hetu, idamassa phalaṃ, ayaṃ tadubhayānurūpo vohāro’’ti evaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena lokiyañāṇaṃ visayato paṭivijjhati, lokuttarañāṇaṃ pana hetuhetuphalādīsu sammohassa maggañāṇena samucchinnattā asammohato paṭivijjhati. Atthānurūpaṃ dhammesūti avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, saṅkhāre uppādeti avijjāti evaṃ kāriyānurūpaṃ kāraṇesūti attho. Atha vā puññābhisaṅkhāraapuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhāresu tīsu apuññābhisaṅkhārassa sampayuttaavijjā paccayo, itaresaṃ yathānurūpantiādinā kāriyānurūpaṃ kāraṇesu paṭivedhoti attho. Dhammānurūpaṃ atthesūti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā kāraṇānurūpaṃ kāriyesu avabodhoti attho. Paññattipathānurūpaṃ paññattīsūti paññattiyā vuccamānadhammānurūpaṃ paṇṇattīsu avabodhoti attho.
现在说到“知解”,即“与内证相应之认知境界”。《注疏》言“知解即知识之正确认知”。“知解”乃能辨析之解,解为认知的完整状态,非泛泛知觉。又“辨明”即清楚、妥善理解;“深入知见”如解析事理般。亦有“明了”即清晰认知对象而无迷惑。此分别能显所知事物之本体。故《注疏》说“知解”是认知真实之智明察,非妄想迷执。又有“世俗知”,与“超世俗知”之分。世俗知是对对象依赖所生的通俗认知,直接因缘显现,其中无迷惑未尽。《注疏》云此为“世俗之觉照”,以依止事理规律,得其真实性。超世俗知乃断除无明及其依缘,通达涅槃与正法实相之见。故超世俗之智断绝无明,是智慧之最高境界。此即〈释义〉述“缘起、果报依止法关系,通达彼理即为世俗智慧;断除疑惑妄念而通达涅槃,则为超世俗智慧”。再者,知解依缘起义而言,是因缘所生现象认识;依业果义,则负责显现业之果报。再依恒常之言,即顺义理为知解。且知解可分三种:事物相对知识、因果相关知识、以及语言概念知识。一般来说,知解就是对法理三方面的正确知晓。
Yathāvuttehi dhammādīhi piṭakānaṃ gambhīrabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idāni yasmā etesu piṭakesū’’tiādimāha. Dhammajātanti kāraṇappabhedo kāraṇameva vā. Atthajātanti kāriyappabhedo kāriyameva vā. Yā cāyaṃ desanāti sambandho. Yo cetthāti etāsu taṃtaṃpiṭakagatāsu dhammatthadesanāsu yo paṭivedhoti attho. Dukkhogāhanti ettha avijjāsaṅkhārādīnaṃ dhammatthānaṃ duppaṭivijjhatāya dukkhogāhatā. Tesaṃ paññāpanassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya paṭivedhanasaṅkhātassa paṭivedhassa ca uppādanavisayīkaraṇānaṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Evampīti pisaddo pubbe vuttappakārantaraṃ sampiṇḍeti. Etthāti etesu tīsu piṭakesu. Vuttatthāti vutto saṃvaṇṇito attho assāti vuttatthā.
如前言及诸法各面,欲示三藏经藏之深意,故曰“如在此三藏中”。此所谓“三藏”即律藏、经藏、论藏,代表佛教教义之全貌。所谓“法性生”即因缘之理,法生实义。又“义性生”指事务之含义现起,法义生发。此均属法理层面。此所谓“教法”即教义内容及其联系。又“此处诠释义意”,即于法义说来。所谓“得通”,是说能透彻了解理义,达到明了之解。所谓“痛破苦障”,指在无明无知下之烦恼痛苦获解脱,即说破苦障。此痛破之义涵,即为知见不迷惑正觉。因果条理能被明解,则苦集灭道之理显现,便得通达苦乐因果之义。所谓“难通”,谓理解或说明法理甚难,理由在于法理深奥难明,难以浅显言说。故布施等诸法,实难以口语文字表白,一旦透彻详说,即难以为普及所懂。又曰“由此愈难,故意分说,断续蠲除疑惑”。是说明诸经典之叙述,非随意语句,而是依据教义层层递进之演绎,使听众得明白。此为详解法理之教义演绎法。今文中所谓“法性”和“义生”即为此理。且法为因缘生起,义为诸法含义,因文句离不开义生。由此法藏内容之丰富,须分三藏略解之。
Tīsupiṭakesūti ettha ‘‘ekekasmi’’nti adhikārato pakaraṇato vā veditabbaṃ. Pariyattibhedoti pariyāpuṇanaṃ pariyatti. Pariyāpuṇanavācako hettha pariyattisaddo, na pāḷipariyāyo, tasmā evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo ‘‘tīsu piṭakesu ekekasmiṃ pariyāpuṇanappakāro daṭṭhabbo ñātabbo’’ti. Tatoyeva ca ‘‘pariyattiyo pariyāpuṇanappakārā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Atha vā tīhi pakārehi pariyāpuṇitabbā pāḷiyo eva pariyattīti vuccanti, tatoyeva ca ‘‘pariyattiyo pāḷikkamā’’ti abhidhammaṭṭhakathāya likhite sīhaḷagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Evampi hi alagaddūpamāpariyāpuṇanayogato alagaddūpamā pariyattīti pāḷipi sakkā vattuṃ, evañca katvā ‘‘duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā alagaddūpamā’’ti parato niddesavacanampi upapannaṃ hoti. Tattha hi pāḷiyeva duggahitā pariyāpuṭāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Alagaddūpamāti alagaddo alagaddaggahaṇaṃ upamā etissāti alagaddūpamā. Alagaddassa gahaṇañhettha alagaddasaddena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Āpūpiko’’ti ettha apūpasaddena apūpakhādanaṃ viya alagaddaggahaṇena gahitapariyatti upamīyati, na pana alagaddena. ‘‘Alagaddaggahaṇūpamā’’ti vā vattabbe majjhepadalopaṃ katvā ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘oṭṭhamukho’’tiādīsu viya. Alagaddoti cettha āsīviso vuccati. Gadoti hi visassa nāmaṃ. Tañca tassa alaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ atthi, tasmā alaṃ pariyatto paripuṇṇo gado assāti anunāsikalopaṃ dakārāgamañca katvā ‘‘alagaddo’’ti vuccati. Atha vā alaṃ jīvitaharaṇe samattho gado assāti alagaddo. Nissaraṇatthāti vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇaṃ attho payojanaṃ etissāti nissaraṇatthā. Bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattīti ettha bhaṇḍāgāre niyutto bhaṇḍāgāriko, bhaṇḍāgāriko viya bhaṇḍāgāriko, dhammaratanānupālako. Aññaṃ atthaṃ anapekkhitvā bhaṇḍāgārikasseva sato pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti.
有关三藏每部内容,应分别认知和分类整理。所谓“句义不同”,是指各藏所述之内容规范、篇章构成、宗旨各有异同。又谓“宗义规范”,指律经论各具宗旨、范畴与规则。故三藏各有正统指引,即称“各自规范”和“正统”。又称律部包含戒律、经部述佛陀教说、论部阐释义理。文中说“律藏亦称经义”,指出律藏为传授戒戒律规范之文本。律藏中所用语与口授文字相辅相成,故用词严谨完整以合教义。且有注写“如注释中所述某词‘阿拉末迦’”等语法术语,表明律藏与语法密切相关。律藏以戒律内容为教法保障。故律藏文本有完整体系和规范。此处以比喻“仓库管理者”、“宝物保管员”等形象说明律藏对戒律财物、教法宝藏之守护功能。
Duggahitāti duṭṭhu gahitā. Duggahitabhāvameva vibhāvento āha ‘‘upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā’’ti, upārambhā itivādappamokkhādihetu uggahitāti attho. Lābhasakkārādihetu pariyāpuṇanampi ettheva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ alagaddasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.239) –
所谓“害己害他之事”,即为恶业或不善行为。此处阐述“恶惡害义”,即能致害于己及他者之行为或念头。又刊述“此乃诸恶业之起因”,指不善行为为诸恶缘起之始端。此处用“如因起因之名”,说明疑惑、烦恼等不善业为果,因生缘相续故谓之“起因”。又云“贪嗔痴等为诸恶之因”,揭示烦恼为业起点。此处“恶害为综合泛指”,属于阻碍修行障碍。故劝导舍弃恶行,防止恶害扩散。
‘‘Yo hi buddhavacanaṃ ‘evaṃ cīvarādīni vā labhissāmi, catuparisamajjhe vā maṃ jānissantī’ti lābhasakkārādihetu pariyāpuṇāti, tassa sā pariyatti alagaddapariyatti nāma. Evaṃ pariyāpuṇanato hi buddhavacanaṃ apariyāpuṇitvā niddokkamanaṃ varatara’’nti.
《注释书》云:“若有比库言:‘吾将得此等衣物,于四方集市受供养’。”此以“得衣物”等供养受福因缘为随逐之规范,是修行者所依。因言语表述“有得有受”,故谓此“依言规范”。又谓“依言规范者,即依世尊教诲语言规范”,此为佛言表达严谨之体现,安住正法道理,是佛法经典规范义。此证明佛陀教言所述规范,并非无序,而是精确严密。
Nanu ca alagaddaggahaṇūpamā pariyatti alagaddūpamāti vuccati, evañca sati suggahitāpi pariyatti alagaddūpamāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati tatthāpi alagaddaggahaṇassa upamābhāvena pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
难道说,比喻以毒蛇咬伤那样的释经传习法被称为毒蛇咬伤吗?即便是这样说,连善比喻也被称为释经传习的毒蛇咬伤,这也是因借用毒蛇咬伤的喻体而成的巴利用语。经文这样说:
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso alagaddatthiko alagaddagavesī alagaddapariyesanaṃ caramāno, so passeyya mahantaṃ alagaddaṃ, tamenaṃ ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṃ niggaṇheyya, ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā gīvāya suggahitaṃ gaṇheyya. Kiñcāpi so, bhikkhave, alagaddo tassa purisassa hatthaṃ vā bāhaṃ vā aññataraṃ vā aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ bhogehi paliveṭheyya, atha kho so neva tatonidānaṃ maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya maraṇattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ. Taṃ kissa hetu, suggahitattā, bhikkhave, alagaddassa, evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacce kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti suttaṃ geyya’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.239).
“譬如,比库们,有个人像毒蛇那样寻找毒蛇,游行于毒蛇之所寻找者,他若看到一条大毒蛇,便用无声的指棒将其牢牢揪住,揪住后无声地收紧,并将其固定于舌上。又有若干时,他凡毒蛇会用手或臂或某一肢体和财物磨蹭那人,这个人既不会因此而死亡,也不会因此死去时受到苦痛。因何缘故?比库们,这是因为固定于舌头上的缘故,某些家子为学业庄严,于此法中完善学得经典,因而其言说。”(中部经集1.239)
Tasmā idha duggahitā eva pariyatti alagaddūpamāti ayaṃ viseso kuto viññāyati, yena duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā alagaddūpamāti vuccatīti? Saccametaṃ, idaṃ pana pārisesañāyena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi nissaraṇatthabhaṇḍāgārikapariyattīnaṃ visuṃ gahitattā pārisesato alagaddassa duggahaṇūpamā pariyatti alagaddūpamāti viññāyati. Suggahaṇūpamā hi pariyatti nissaraṇatthā vā hoti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti vā, tasmā suvuttametaṃ ‘‘duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā alagaddūpamā’’ti. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ pariyattiduggahaṇaṃ sandhāya. Vuttanti alagaddasutte vuttaṃ.
因此,这里所谓有害比喻即释经传习的毒蛇咬伤,那这一特别含义从何而知呢?这是因为以有害比喻为开启缘起而修持出的释经传习法才被称之谓毒蛇咬伤。此理实为众所周知。正如汉传所言,内含解脱之用、持法如藏者所传习的释经特具此害喻。因此,善喻归属于解脱法、藏法的释经传习,而称之“以有害为缘起的释经传习之毒蛇咬伤”。此语旨在指涉那种以释经传习有害性为依缘者。此意在释诸毒蛇经中有所表述。
Alagaddatthikoti āsīvisatthiko. Alagaddaṃ gavesati pariyesati sīlenāti alagaddagavesī. Alagaddapariyesanaṃ caramānoti alagaddapariyesanatthaṃ caramāno. Bhogeti sarīre. Hatthe vā bāhāyavāti ettha maṇibandhako yāva agganakhā ‘‘hattho’’ti veditabbo, saddhiṃ aggabāhāya avasesā ‘‘bāhā’’ti. Katthaci pana ‘‘kapparato paṭṭhāyapi yāva agganakhā hattho’’ti vuccati. Aññatarasmiṃ vā aṅgapaccaṅgeti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ hatthañca bāhañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sarīraṃ ‘‘aṅgapaccaṅga’’nti veditabbaṃ. Tatonidānanti taṃnidānaṃ, taṃkāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Purimapade hi vibhattialopaṃ katvā niddeso. Taṃ hatthādīsu ḍaṃsanaṃ nidānaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassāti taṃnidānanti hi vattabbe ‘‘tatonidāna’’nti purimapade paccatte nissakkavacanaṃ katvā tassa ca lopaṃ akatvā niddeso. Taṃ kissa hetūti yaṃ vuttaṃ hatthādīsu ḍaṃsanaṃ taṃnidānañca maraṇādiupagamanaṃ, taṃ kissa hetu kena kāraṇenāti ce. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Ekacce moghapurisāti ekacce tucchapurisā. Dhammanti pāḷidhammaṃ. Pariyāpuṇantīti uggaṇhantīti attho, sajjhāyanti ceva vācuggatā karontā dhārenti cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthanti yathābhūtaṃ bhāsitatthaṃ payojanatthañca. Na upaparikkhantīti na pariggaṇhanti na vicārenti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā kathitā, mayañca taṃ pūressāmā’’ti evaṃ bhāsitatthaṃ payojanatthañca ‘‘sīlaṃ samādhissa kāraṇaṃ, samādhi vipassanāyā’’tiādinā na pariggaṇhantīti. Anupaparikkhatanti anupaparikkhantānaṃ. Na nijjhānaṃ khamantīti nijjhānapaññaṃ nakkhamanti, nijjhāyitvā paññāya disvā rocetvā gahetabbā na hontīti adhippāyo. Tena imamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘tesaṃ paññāya atthaṃ anupaparikkhantānaṃ te dhammā na upaṭṭhahanti, ‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ, samādhi, vipassanā, maggo, phalaṃ, vaṭṭaṃ, vivaṭṭaṃ kathita’nti evaṃ jānituṃ na sakkā hontī’’ti.
所谓毒蛇者,即具有毒牙之蛇。寻找毒蛇即寻觅守戒之人。游行于毒蛇之所寻找者,即四处游行以寻找守戒者。身谓肉体。手或臂者,此处当为指人中的腕节及最长指甲,称为“手”,剩余臂部称为“臂”。有时说“即使在棍棒下至最长指甲为止,称‘手’,连同最长臂为‘臂’。”某处也说“即使贴近脊背的腕节也算手。”指骨与腕骨以上余下身体称为肢体。缘起即该缘起因由。此前语为省略法与说明。此处所谓在手等处有刺伤即为缘起,因为刺伤引起之缘故,故称缘起。此前语经省略未现,故谓此前语为缘起。问此因缘为何?如经中所言,刺伤来自手等处,缘起亦在此。其因为何?曰:在此教法中,有愚痴凡夫与世俗之人。法即巴利语中的“法”,释为道理。完善即摄取,意即认真听受、学习、理解与贯彻。因此说,“完善”为“摄取”的意思,即表示以口头诠释为修习,是教导也是牢记,将所学入心持行之意。义即实义,为正义、目的等。非指疑惑、考究。此段意旨说:“在此处说戒法,进而说禅定、智慧,说‘我等将此充满完成’,意指戒为禅定之因,禅定为慧观之因,故此不包括不检验者的义理。不检验者指不反覆考察经义者。非指不具真慧,不执行智慧见解。以此为意旨,示现:‘因其智慧未周,凡夫不理解法义,即使说有戒、禅定、慧观、道、果、行、废之法,也不能真正领会。’
Te upārambhānisaṃsā cevāti te paresaṃ vāde dosāropanānisaṃsā hutvā pariyāpuṇantīti attho. Itivādappamokkhānisaṃsā cāti iti evaṃ etāya pariyattiyā vādappamokkhānisaṃsā, attano upari parehi āropitavādassa niggahassa pamokkhappayojanā hutvā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – parehi sakavāde dose āropite taṃ dosaṃ evañca evañca mocessāmāti iminā ca kāraṇena pariyāpuṇantīti. Atha vā so so vādo itivādo, itivādassa pamokkho itivādappamokkho, itivādappamokkho ānisaṃso etesanti itivādappamokkhānisaṃsā, taṃtaṃvādappamocanānisaṃsā cāti attho . Yassa catthāya dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti yassa ca sīlādipūraṇassa maggaphalanibbānassa vā atthāya imasmiṃ sāsane kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti. Tañcassa atthaṃ nānubhontīti tañca assa dhammassa sīlādiparipūraṇasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ ete duggahitagāhino nānubhonti na vindanti.
诸“开启缘起”,即为借由加诸他人论断中侮辱烦恼而转为完善。此所谓释经传习,旨在借助使其释经自我之别人侮辱告解的解脱目的,因而掌握经典。故曰:“他人以共悖论而污蔑加罪,因由此故,我们能够解脱之。”因此,此释经之意为:“若有论定为是,论定之解脱为‘如是,如是’;而这种‘如是’得以解脱,谓为‘断时之解脱’。”此即释经引说之解脱意。以该理皆为令经典得以完善,在戒定慧具足,入道果证众多家子得以学得经典之意,若不具此理便不能体证,不得其义。
Atha vā yassa upārambhassa itivādappamokkhassa vā atthāya ye moghapurisā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, te parehi ‘‘ayamattho na hotī’’ti vutte duggahitattāyeva soyevatthoti paṭipādanakkhamā na hontīti parassa vāde upārambhaṃ āropetuṃ attano vādā taṃ mocetuñca asakkontāpi taṃ atthaṃ nānubhontiyevāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantīti tesaṃ te dhammā duggahitattā upārambhamānadappamakkhapalāsādihetubhāvena dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti. Ettha hi kāraṇe phalavohārena ‘‘te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi kiñcāpi na te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, tathāpi vuttanayena pariyāpuṇantānaṃ sajjhāyakāle vivādasamaye ca taṃmūlakānaṃ upārambhādīnaṃ anekesaṃ akusalānaṃ uppattisabbhāvato ‘‘te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantī’’ti kāraṇe phalavohārena vuttaṃ. Taṃ kissa hetūti ettha tanti yathāvuttassatthassa anabhisambhuṇanaṃ tesañca dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanaṃ parāmasati.
若谓以“开启之释经解脱”为意者,若愚人能学得,则彼愚人虽被他人诟病而语:“此理非正理”,乃属有害比喻性质,故不能宣说。彼人不能获得自身释经的解脱之法,因不能解决他人诽谤言论,再者也不能破除己见,以收摄真理。此理显明:若长时积累此种害法,必陷痛苦与不幸之故。因果相续,即说“彼法引发痛苦与不幸。”故曰:“这些法仍然带来害处与苦痛。”实则无一法带来害处,然因论述教授之际,以及教诲者讲说时,众多不善因缘自然生成,于根本解除中,此等法被视为导致害苦之因。缘由为何?此为教理被非正断解,破坏教义之因;且彼等法带来害苦,是因学者误解不真正证悟所致。
Sīlakkhandhādipāripūriṃyevāti ettha ādisaddena samādhivipassanādīnaṃ saṅgaho veditabbo. Yo hi buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne sīlaṃ pūretvā samādhino āgataṭṭhāne samādhigabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā vipassanāya āgataṭṭhāne vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā maggaphalānaṃ āgataṭṭhāne maggaṃ bhāvessāmi, phalaṃ sacchikarissāmīti uggaṇhāti, tasseva sā pariyatti nissaraṇatthā nāma hoti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttanti yaṃ pariyattisuggahaṇaṃ sandhāya alagaddasutte vuttaṃ. Dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattantīti sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhāne sīlādīni pūrentānampi arahattaṃ patvā parisamajjhe dhammaṃ desetvā dhammadesanāya pasannehi upanīte cattāro paccaye paribhuñjantānampi paresaṃ vāde sahadhammena upārambhaṃ āropentānampi sakavādato dosaṃ harantānampi dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattanti. Tathā hi na kevalaṃ suggahitapariyattiṃ nissāya maggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyādīneva, paravādaniggahasakavādapatiṭṭhāpanānipi ijjhanti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.168).
此处“戒蕴等圆满已足如是义”者,以此起首言应当了知的是禅那与观等的总摄汇集。若有修习者承袭佛言,先于戒的所归之处圆满戒法,然后于禅那的所归之处取持禅那功根,复于观的所归之处确立正见,复于道果的所归之处修习道,证得果时实现果报,则称为承袭,所谓的“教理承袭”即是如此。此传承正如《阿拉迦陀经》中所说,为长远利益与幸福的所在。即便是于戒等所归之处圆满戒法的修习者,若证入阿拉汉果后,认真弘法于结集戒法之法理者,并以使众生欢喜顺从的教说为基础,依四因修持而涵摄他人之辩论,断除怨恨者,亦长久生活于利益与安乐之中。此理不仅依赖于承袭的教理,更以道之修习与果报实现为根本,亦欲维护他人之辩论成立。故如经云:“将此产生的他人谤议,以契合正理的方式加以违止”者,乃此义也。
Pariññātakkhandhoti dukkhaparijānanena pariññātakkhandho. Pahīnakilesoti samudayappahānena pahīnakileso. Paṭividdhākuppoti paṭividdhaarahattaphalo. Na kuppatīti akuppanti hi arahattaphalassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Satipi hi catunnaṃ maggānaṃ catunnañca phalānaṃ akuppasabhāve sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ sakasakanāmapariccāgena uparūpari nāmantarappattito tesaṃ maggaphalāni ‘‘akuppānī’’ti na vuccanti, arahā pana sabbadāpi arahāyeva nāmāti tasseva phalaṃ ‘‘akuppa’’nti vuttaṃ. Iminā ca imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘khīṇāsavasseva pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāmā’’ti. Tassa hi apariññātaṃ appahīnaṃ abhāvitaṃ asacchikataṃ vā natthi, tasmā buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇanto tantidhārako paveṇīpālako vaṃsānurakkhako ca hutvā uggaṇhāti. Tenevāha ‘‘paveṇīpālanatthāyā’’tiādi. Tattha paveṇīti dhammasantati, dhammassa avicchedena pavattīti attho. Vaṃsānurakkhaṇatthāyāti buddhassa bhagavato vaṃsānurakkhaṇatthaṃ. Tassa vaṃsopi atthato paveṇīyevāti veditabbaṃ.
所谓“圆解蕴”,是指因透彻理解苦集灭道四圣谛而得圆满解脱的蕴。所谓“断染污”,是指通过断除烦恼而止息污垢。所谓“非怒怒者”,乃指非怒之意,即阿拉汉果的名称。确实,在四种道及四种果中,非怒之名仅应用于阿拉汉果。再者,七种学者(即七种圣弟子)的相续,各自以非怒者作为名称。由此显明,此“圆解蕴”即是“已除烦恼的教理承袭”之义。此者无未圆满、无未断除、无不证得、无不实现之义故。是以修习者护持佛陀之言,担当保存教理与律藏责任而称为“教理承袭者”。如经中有言“护持教理之人”者,所指即是此也。其中“护持”指的是法的无间断流转,“传承”则指佛陀后世子孙的护持。
Nanu ca yadi paveṇīpālanatthāya buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti, kasmā ‘‘khīṇāsavo’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Ekaccassa puthujjanassapi hi ayaṃ nayo labbhati. Tathā hi ekacco bhikkhu chātakabhayādīsu ganthadharesu ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasituṃ asakkontesu sayaṃ bhikkhācārena akilamamāno atimadhuraṃ buddhavacanaṃ mā nassatu, tantiṃ dhāressāmi, vaṃsaṃ ṭhapessāmi, paveṇiṃ pālessāmīti pariyāpuṇāti, tasmā tassapi pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma kasmā na hotīti? Vuccate – evaṃ santepi puthujjanassa pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma na hoti. Kiñcāpi hi puthujjano ‘‘paveṇiṃ pālessāmī’’ti ajjhāsayena pariyāpuṇāti, attano pana bhavakantārato anittiṇṇattā tassa pariyatti nissaraṇapariyatti nāma hoti, tasmā puthujjanassa pariyatti alagaddūpamā vā hoti nissaraṇatthā vā, sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ nissaraṇatthāva, khīṇāsavānaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattiyevāti veditabbaṃ. Khīṇāsavo ca bhaṇḍāgārikasadisattā bhaṇḍāgārikoti vuccati. Yathā hi bhaṇḍāgāriko alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ paṭisāmetvā pasādhanakāle tadupiyaṃ alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ rañño upanāmetvā alaṅkaroti, evaṃ khīṇāsavopi dhammaratanabhaṇḍaṃ sampaṭicchitvā mokkhādhigamassa bhabbarūpe sahetuke satte passitvā tadanurūpaṃ dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggaṅgabojjhaṅgādisaṅkhātena lokuttarena alaṅkārena alaṅkarotīti bhaṇḍāgārikoti vuccati.
但若说护持教理就是为了保护佛语,那么为何特别指出“已断浊者”?因为有些凡夫虽然言“我护持教理”,实际上并不能真护持。譬如某些比库因畏惧恶劣社会压力,不能安住单处,终日外出散布甜美佛语以求生计者,称之为“护持者”,这是“教理承袭”的修习之义何以为不?答案是,纵然如此,凡夫之“护持”,终究不是真正的教理护持。凡夫虽言“我护持”,实是心背何,仍受轮回之苦,此故称为“凡夫护持”;而真正教理护持则在于已断烦恼圣者及七圣弟子之无漏传续,是故凡夫称为“不圆满护持”、“教理貌似护持”者。已断烦恼者则被称为“护持教理之人”,正如装饰匠妥善保养皇室宝物,因而得名。
Evaṃ tisso pariyattiyo vibhajitvā idāni tīsupi piṭakesu yathārahaṃ sampattivipattiyo vitthāretvā dassento āha ‘‘vinaye panā’’tiādi. Sīlasampattiṃ nissāya tisso vijjā pāpuṇātītiādīsu yasmā sīlaṃ visujjhamānaṃ satisampajaññabalena kammassakataññāṇabalena ca saṃkilesamalato visujjhati, pāripūriñca gacchati, tasmā sīlasampadā sijjhamānā upanissayasampattibhāvena satibalaṃ ñāṇabalañca paccupaṭṭhapetīti tassā vijjattayūpanissayatā veditabbā sabhāgahetusampadānato. Satibalena hi pubbenivāsavijjāsiddhi, sampajaññena sabbakiccesu sudiṭṭhakāritāparicayena cutūpapātañāṇānubaddhāya dutiyavijjāya siddhi, vītikkamābhāvena saṃkilesappahānasabbhāvato vivaṭṭūpanissayatāvasena ajjhāsayasuddhiyā tatiyavijjāsiddhi. Puretarasiddhānaṃ samādhipaññānaṃ pāripūriṃ vinā sīlassa āsavakkhayañāṇūpanissayatā sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavehi dīpetabbā. ‘‘Samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.99; 3.5; netti. 40; mi. pa. 2.1.14) vacanato samādhisampadā chaḷabhiññatāya upanissayo. ‘‘Yogā ve jāyati bhūrī’’ti (dha. pa. 282) vacanato pubbayogena garuvāsadesabhāsākosallauggahaṇaparipucchādīhi ca paribhāvitā paññāsampatti paṭisambhidāppabhedassa upanissayo. Ettha ca ‘‘sīlasampattiṃ nissāyā’’ti vuttattā yassa samādhivijambhanabhūtā anavasesā cha abhiññā na ijjhanti, tassa ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena na samādhisampadā atthīti satipi vijjānaṃ abhiññekadesabhāve sīlasampattisamudāgatā eva tisso vijjā gahitā. Yathā hi paññāsampattisamudāgatā catasso paṭisambhidā upanissayasampannassa maggeneva ijjhanti maggakkhaṇe eva tāsaṃ paṭilabhitabbato. Evaṃ sīlasampattisamudāgatā tisso vijjā samādhisampattisamudāgatā ca cha abhiññā upanissayasampannassa maggeneva ijjhantīti maggādhigameneva tāsaṃ adhigamo veditabbo. Paccekabuddhānaṃ sammāsambuddhānañca paccekabodhisammāsambodhidhammasamadhigamasadisā hi imesaṃ ariyānaṃ ime visesādhigamāti.
此虽分三种护持,此三种护持又分别说明在三藏经典中,详述其成就与失落,言“戒律中护持”。戒法的圆满依赖于三种智慧:因净戒使念力与正知力强化,进而逐渐断除业报与烦恼,净心得定,达至圆满。戒法成就以念为力,智慧为具,成就三种相应之智:之前世净修所成智慧,正知引导一切善业,有感障断烦恼清净心故第三智慧成果成就。先证定慧成就乃为灭尽烦恼之智凭依,是故于戒法中应显示此护持之义。若无正定与通达,精进便难以成立,三种智力之护持正是道场成就之基础。此心境乃依四种分别智与三藏精通成就,循序前进,方便圆满成道。辟支佛与正觉佛皆以此三智为达道之指引,由此便知三智护持乃诸圣成就差别之所依。
Tāsaṃyeva ca tattha pabhedavacanatoti ettha tāsaṃyevāti avadhāraṇaṃ pāpuṇitabbānaṃ chaḷabhiññācatupaṭisambhidānaṃ vinaye pabhedavacanābhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Verañjakaṇḍe hi tisso vijjāva vibhattāti. Dutiye tāsaṃyevāti avadhāraṇaṃ catasso paṭisambhidā apekkhitvā kataṃ, na tisso vijjā. Tā hi chasu abhiññāsu antogadhattā sutte vibhattāyevāti. Tāsañcāti ettha ca-saddena sesānampi tattha atthibhāvaṃ dīpeti. Abhidhammapiṭake hi tisso vijjā cha abhiññā catasso ca paṭisambhidā vuttāyeva. Paṭisambhidānaṃ pana aññattha pabhedavacanābhāvaṃ tattheva ca sammā vibhattabhāvaṃ dīpetukāmo heṭṭhā vuttanayena avadhāraṇaṃ akatvā ‘‘tatthevā’’ti parivattetvā avadhāraṇaṃ ṭhapesi.
此处所述三智护持是否有差别词义?此处“他们三者”的用法正是基于此。于释迦律藏中,三智护持虽同称“三种智慧”,然第二“护持”是依照四种分别智而分开,与前一“护持”不同。此三智因诸种内证法界而分出。《阿毗达摩》中亦称三智皆含八种辩别智。然为避免混淆,释迦经论中掩藏细微差别,以“他们三者”表述,从而在此确立“护持”之所指。是以本段注解特为释明三智能护中分别义而不混用。
Idāni ‘‘vinaye duppaṭipanno ‘mudukānaṃ attharaṇādīnaṃ samphasso viya itthisamphassopi vaṭṭatī’ti methunavītikkame dosaṃ adisvā sīlavipattiṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti dassento āha ‘‘vinaye pana duppaṭipanno’’tiādi. Tattha sukho samphasso etesanti sukhasamphassāni, attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni. Upādinnaphasso itthiphasso, methunadhammoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttampi hetanti ariṭṭhena bhikkhunā vuttaṃ. So hi bahussuto dhammakathiko kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhesu antarāyikesu sesantarāyike jānāti, vinaye pana akovidattā paṇṇattivītikkamantarāyike na jānāti, tasmā rahogato evaṃ cintesi ‘‘ime agārikā pañca kāmaguṇe paribhuñjantā sotāpannāpi sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi honti. Bhikkhūpi manāpikāni cakkhuviññeyyāni rūpāni passanti…pe… kāyaviññeyye phoṭṭhabbe phusanti, mudukāni attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni paribhuñjanti, etaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭati, kasmā itthīnaṃyeva rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbā na vaṭṭanti, etepi vaṭṭantī’’ti anavajjena paccayaparibhuñjanarasena sāvajjakāmaguṇaparibhogarasaṃ saṃsanditvā sacchandarāgaparibhogañca nicchandarāgaparibhogañca ekaṃ katvā thūlavākehi saddhiṃ atisukhumasuttaṃ ghaṭento viya sāsapena saddhiṃ sineruno sadisataṃ upasaṃharanto viya pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppādetvā ‘‘kiṃ bhagavatā mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viya mahatā ussāhena paṭhamapārājikaṃ paññattaṃ, natthi ettha doso’’ti sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhanto vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhanto ariyamagge khāṇukaṇṭakādīni pakkhipanto ‘‘methunadhamme doso natthī’’ti jinassa āṇācakke pahāramadāsi. Tenāha ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādi.
今释『律藏中不善行为犯戒,如淫等行为如触女子之侵害,即生戒罪』,又说“不善犯戒则有戒漏”。所谓“触”乃返还所生的淫欲不当行为,淫是指男女间的行为。经中云,“出于恶意的言辞”,即说淫行为是由贪瞋痴等烦恼所生,故为五种障碍中憍慢误解所扰。然律中不识此漏,故成戒训之障碍。此由未知因则生误认,故意有疑而不知戒理。由此示此义理云:世间外道虽修五欲诸色根具,凡夫修止得定,诸比库识净众妙色身,唯女子色身不堪净,故生烦恼以致淫行,戒法所禁止。此非仅男子所禁,也适用于女子。“故佛世尊应律将以此重罪初显为巴拉基咖第一条罪。”此即释此教言真义。
Tattha antarāyikāti taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho. Anatikkamanaṭṭhena tasmiṃ antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlāti antarāyikā, saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyakarāti vuttaṃ hoti. Te ca kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhā. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā parato ariṭṭhasikkhāpade (pāci. 417) āvi bhavissati. Ayaṃ panettha padatthasambandho – ye ime dhammā antarāyikā antarāyakarāti bhagavatā vuttā desitā ceva paññattā ca, te dhamme paṭisevato paṭisevantassa yathā yena pakārena te dhammā antarāyāya saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyakaraṇatthaṃ nālaṃ samatthā na honti, tathā tena pakārenāhaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ ājānāmīti. Tato dussīlabhāvaṃ pāpuṇātīti tato anavajjasaññībhāvahetuto vītikkamitvā dussīlabhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti.
此中所谓障碍者,是指因缠结阻碍而令诸众生分隔彼此,内在有所阻滞,故称为障碍;此乃见解错误等之不善所致。若执着于不能超越之障碍,则谓对该障碍执著,或障碍成为果报之障碍,或障碍是其行为之障碍,因障碍阻断天人解脱之路,故称为障碍者。此障碍者因业烦恼之果报,转生之中断五种有别。关于其详尽解说,将于他处不净戒论(《巴治》417)中明示。此处因言义相系,谓这些所谓障碍及障碍因由,是世尊所说、并已阐明之法,此诸法若为修受者不顺所感,应知无论何种方式,此诸障碍皆非能令天人之解脱乃至成就灭尽道果位之动因。故世尊所说正法,应了知于心。继而由此法之修持遭失谛戒而致不净习性,由不净习性生起邪见心态,所以遂致不善习性之果报。
Cattārome, bhikkhavetiādinā –
于是,由“比库们”等四句说起——
‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, puggalā santo saṃvijjamānā lokasmiṃ. Katame cattāro, attahitāya paṭipanno hoti, no parahitāya, parahitāya paṭipanno hoti, no attahitāya, neva attahitāya paṭipanno hoti no parahitāya, attahitāya ceva paṭipanno hoti parahitāya cā’’ti (a. ni. 4.96; pu. pa. mātikā, catukkauddesa 24) –
“比库们,世间存在四类众生。何等四者?一者修行为自利,不为他利;二者修行为他利,不为自利;三者既不为自利,亦不为他利;四者兼为自利及他利。”(《论事》4.96;《婆沙摩提卡》四分篇24)——
Ādinā puggaladesanāpaṭisaṃyuttasuttantapāḷiṃ nidasseti. Adhippāyaṃ ajānantoti ‘‘ayaṃ puggaladesanā vohāravasena, na paramatthato’’ti evaṃ bhagavato adhippāyaṃ ajānanto. Buddhassa hi bhagavato duvidhā desanā sammutidesanā paramatthadesanā cāti. Tattha ‘‘puggalo satto itthī puriso khattiyo brāhmaṇo devo māro’’ti evarūpā sammutidesanā. ‘‘Aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni satipaṭṭhānā’’ti evarūpā paramatthadesanā. Tattha bhagavā ye sammutivasena desanaṃ sutvā atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā mohaṃ pahāya visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ sammutidesanaṃ deseti. Ye pana paramatthavasena desanaṃ sutvā atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā mohaṃ pahāya visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ paramatthadesanaṃ deseti.
“等”者,指对应众生教说的巴利语短句。谓世尊此等教说虽为阐述性言语,但并非究竟义,即世尊的俗义与究竟义之区分。世尊教义有二:俗义教说与究竟义教说。所谓俗义者,如“人、畜生、男女、贵族、婆罗门、天人、魔”等归类的教说。而究竟义者,如“无常、苦、无我,及五蕴、六界、四念处”等真理之教说。在此,世尊为能听闻俗义教诲、了解其义理、破迷悟入专注解脱者,乃讲述俗义教说。若能听闻究竟义教诲、了达其义、弃惑证悟彻见者,则宣说究竟义教说。
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi desabhāsākusalo tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ atthasaṃvaṇṇako ācariyo ye damiḷabhāsāya vutte atthaṃ jānanti, tesaṃ damiḷabhāsāya ācikkhati, ye andhakabhāsādīsu aññatarāya, tesaṃ tāya bhāsāya, evaṃ te māṇavā chekaṃ byattaṃ ācariyamāgamma khippameva sippaṃ uggaṇhanti. Tattha ācariyo viya buddho bhagavā, tayo vedā viya kathetabbabhāve ṭhitāni tīṇi piṭakāni, desabhāsāya kosallamiva sammutiparamatthakosallaṃ, nānādesabhāsāmāṇavakā viya sammutiparamatthavasena paṭivijjhanasamatthā veneyyasattā, ācariyassa damiḷabhāsādiācikkhanaṃ viya bhagavato sammutiparamatthavasenapi desanā veditabbā. Āha cettha –
此处以譬喻说明:譬如善于该地方言语的教师,能传达三种感受之义,而他以多利族语讲授,能令熟悉多利语者明了;对不懂暗哈语等族语的,他则以其语讲授。如此,人们各因初学老师所传异趣教法,能迅速习得技艺。教师如佛陀世尊,比喻为三种感受,三藏法典即三种教义,世尊以熟练多方言通晓究竟义的方式,依众生语言能力,分别对不同生类说法。由此,觉知其义者,如教师释多利语的指示,即为世尊以究竟通晓的方式宣说。佛言,
‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo;
“我已宣说二谛法,正觉者所言尊贵真理;
Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati.
约定说与究竟义之间,第三者是不可获得的。
‘‘Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇā;
『约定言是真实,乃世间约定的缘起;
Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtakāraṇā.
究竟义言是真实,乃法之根本缘起。』
‘‘Tasmā vohārakusalassa, lokanāthassa satthuno;
因此,诸护持善法、世间尊主、导师,
Sammutiṃ voharantassa, musāvādo na jāyatī’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.57; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170);
护持约定言者,谬语不生。』(中部尼柯耶诠释1.57;增支部尼柯耶诠释1.1.170)
Apica aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ katheti – hirottappadīpanatthaṃ kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ lokasammutiyā appahānatthañcāti. ‘‘Khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni hiriyanti ottappantī’’ti vutte mahājano na jānāti, sammohamāpajjati, paṭisattu hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni hiriyanti ottappanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Itthī hiriyati ottappati, puriso khattiyo brāhmaṇo devo māro’’ti vutte mahājano jānāti, na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti, tasmā bhagavā hirottappadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā kammassakā dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Veḷuvanādayo mahāvihārā khandhehi kārāpitā, dhātūhi āyatanehī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā mātaraṃ jīvitā voropenti, pitaraṃ arahantaṃ, ruhiruppādakammaṃ saṅghabhedaṃ karonti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
此外,世尊以八因缘说人之说法,谓之:发起羞耻与恐惧之因,起于业缚之因,发自对现行之人之觉察,发起不善行为之因,梵行之因,前生相续之因,南方净除之因,及断除世间约定之因。『五蕴、十二界、六处皆生羞耻与恐惧』时,大众不知而迷惑,反对曰:“云何诸蕴、界、六处生羞耻与恐惧之名乎?”『女人生羞耻恐惧,男人为阉人、士族婆罗门、天人与魔亦然』时,大众了知而不迷惑,不反对。是故世尊说以发起羞耻恐惧之因的人之说法。『五蕴是业缚、十二界、六处诸因』时,亦如是说。故世尊说以业缚之因的人之说法。『如娑罗林等大比库众聚集于五蕴、界、六处』时,亦如是说。是故世尊说以觉察现行之人之因的人之说法。『五蕴伤害母亲生命,伤害父亲阿拉汉,造生死苦之业,分裂僧团,是诸蕴、界与六处也』时,亦如是说。故世尊说以发起不善行为之因的人之说法。
‘‘Khandhā mettāyanti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā dānaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi mahājano na jānāti, sammohamāpajjati, paṭisattu hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni paṭiggaṇhanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Puggalā paṭiggaṇhanti sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā’’ti vutte pana jānāti, na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti. Tasmā bhagavā dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. Lokasammutiñca buddhā bhagavanto na vijahanti, lokasamaññāya lokaniruttiyā lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva dhammaṃ desenti. Tasmā bhagavā lokasammutiyā appahānatthampi puggalakathaṃ katheti , tasmā iminā ca adhippāyena bhagavato puggaladesanā, na paramatthadesanāti evaṃ adhippāyaṃ ajānantoti vuttaṃ hoti.
「蕴是慈心所在,界是感官所缘」这样说过之后,原则是相同的。因此世尊说论及梵天说法的教义者时云:「蕴追忆先行所住,界是感官所缘」也是如此的原则。因此世尊说论及前世所住的教义者时云:「蕴承受布施,界是感官所缘」但大众不解其义,陷入迷惑,反对说:「何以蕴境界承受布施乎?」然佛曰:「众生承受的是具戒善法者」于是大众知晓,无迷惑,无反对。因此世尊说论及净除右方的教义者时此义。众生共识世尊不违背世俗约定,依世俗说法与众生所喜欢而宣说正法。因此世尊亦顺世俗说法微言而讲论教义,故此以此方便,世尊所说众生教诲,不是究竟义说法,此约定故曰不究竟义说法,谓不知此方便也。
Duggahitaṃ gaṇhātīti ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati, anañña’’ntiādinā duggahitaṃ katvā gaṇhāti, viparītaṃ gaṇhātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Duggahitanti hi bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ duggahitagāhaṃ sandhāya. Attanā duggahitena dhammenāti pāṭhaseso veditabbo. Atha vā duggahaṇaṃ duggahitaṃ. Attanāti ca sāmiatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, tasmā attano duggahaṇena viparītagāhenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Amhe ceva abbhācikkhatīti amhākañca abbhācikkhanaṃ karoti. Attānañca khanatīti attano kusalamūlāni khananto attānaṃ khanati nāma.
「难受持」即谓「如我由世尊所说法,知其识感受即为轮回,毫无二致」等是称作难受持、乃至难执。难受即指对修行人有所指称。所谓执持者,即执持难受。执持者与难受相对。执持者为自体义使役之词,故谓自我所执持的难受为相反的执持。又我彼此显现,即为我等也作显现。所谓自我开凿,即开凿自身善根,开凿自身者也。
Dhammacintanti dhammasabhāvavijānanaṃ. Atidhāvantoti ṭhātabbamariyādāyaṃ aṭṭhatvā ‘‘cittuppādamattena dānaṃ hoti, sayameva cittaṃ attano ārammaṇaṃ hoti, sabbaṃ cittaṃ asabhāvadhammārammaṇa’’nti evamādinā atidhāvanto atikkamitvā pavattamāno. Cattārīti buddhavisayaiddhivisayakammavipākalokavisayasaṅkhātāni cattāri. Vuttañhetaṃ –
「法智」者,谓法之自相了知。所谓逾越,即于该处住立恭敬心,称为止住,谓以心根本清净,则得布施,心本身是自心的所缘,诸种心皆无自相境所缘。由此等故,逾越而具足现行。四者,谓有关佛所趣领域、神通所趣领域、业果报所趣领域、出世间法所趣领域者,悉为四事。所言已,
‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni, yāni cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Katamāni cattāri? Buddhānaṃ bhikkhave buddhavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yaṃ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Jhāyissa, bhikkhave, jhānavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo…pe… kammavipāko, bhikkhave, acinteyyo na cintetabbo…pe… lokacintā bhikkhave acinteyyā na cintetabbā…pe… imāni, bhikkhave, cattāri acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni, yāni cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77).
「诸比库,四者不可思量,不得思维,因思维者是狂乱之扰乱部分。何等为四?佛之所趣领域不可思量,不得思维;禅定所趣领域不可思量,不得思维;业果报不可思量,不得思维;世间思虑不可思量,不得思维。诸比库,此四不可思量者不可思虑,因思虑者必得狂乱之扰乱。」(增支部4.77)
Tattha ‘‘acinteyyānī’’ti tesaṃ sabhāvanidassanaṃ. ‘‘Na cintetabbānī’’ti tattha kattabbatānidassanaṃ. Tattha acinteyyānīti cintetumasakkuṇeyyāni, cintetuṃ araharūpāni na hontīti attho. Acinteyyattā eva na cintetabbāni, kāmaṃ acinteyyānipi cha asādhāraṇādīni anussarantassa kusaluppattihetubhāvato tāni cintetabbāni, imāni pana evaṃ na hontīti aphalabhāvato na cintetabbānīti adhippāyo. Tenevāha ‘‘yāni cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti. Tesanti tesaṃ piṭakānaṃ.
其中「不可思量」为其固有本质之显现。所谓「不得思维」是应为不得思虑者之显现。所谓不可思量者,谓不应思量者,是谓不具思量之相,不是指阿拉汉不能思量也。以不可思量而言,并非谓连欲乐等不可思量,由于善根自起缘故,必然应思;但此四不可思量者不应思虑,是无得果故不得思虑之意。所以说道「因思虑则狂乱扰乱之故,此四不可思量。」此为三藏识者。
Etanti etaṃ buddhavacanaṃ. Tivaggasaṅgahānīti sīlakkhandhavaggamahāvaggapāthikavaggasaṅkhātehi tīhi vaggehi saṅgaho etesanti tivaggasaṅgahāni. Catuttiṃseva suttantāti gāthāya evamatthayojanā veditabbā – yassa nikāyassa suttagaṇanāto catuttiṃseva ca suttantā vaggasaṅgahavasena tayo vaggā assa saṅgahassāti tivaggo saṅgaho. Esa paṭhamo nikāyo dīghanikāyoti anulomiko apaccanīko, atthānulomanato anvatthanāmoti vuttaṃ hoti.
以上即是佛陀所说。所谓三归集,是指戒蕴品、长老品、大品之三品集合故名三归集。所谓四十三经集,即应由小部所藏经文四十三部按品集归,三品为集合亦云三归集。此初部是长部,即顺序逆序相反。意为依义顺序跟随先后所述。
Atthānulomanato anulomiko, anulomikattaṃyeva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Ekanikāyampīti ekasamūhampi. Evaṃ cittanti evaṃ vicittaṃ. Yathayidanti yathā ime. Poṇikā cikkhallikā ca khattiyā, tesaṃ nivāso poṇikanikāyo cikkhallikanikāyoti vuccati. Evamādīni cettha sādhakāni sāsanato ca lokato cāti evamādīni udāharaṇāni ettha nikāyasaddassa samūhanivāsānaṃ vācakabhāve sāsanato ca vohārato ca sādhakāni pamāṇānīti attho. Ettha paṭhamamudāharaṇaṃ sāsanato sādhakavacanaṃ, dutiyaṃ lokatoti veditabbaṃ.
关于按义随顺,称为随顺者,正是在随顺里分辨其随顺性质,所谓‘为何如此’等语。所谓一部,即是一同组集。如此心意,即如此分别。譬如这些。例如贵族中的蝗民和刀民,居住地称为蝗民部落、刀民部落。类似的例子此处为教法及世间所通,故此类例证即表示此处‘部落’的音义,同时教法也是通行及可量度的意思。这里第一例为教法作为通行者用语,第二例需理解为‘世间’。
Pañcadasavaggasaṅgahānīti mūlapariyāyavaggādīhi pañcadasahi vaggehi saṅgaho etesanti pañcadasavaggasaṅgahāni. Diyaḍḍhasataṃ dve ca suttānīti aḍḍhena dutiyaṃ diyaḍḍhaṃ, ekaṃ sataṃ dve paññāsasuttāni cāti attho. Yatthāti yasmiṃ nikāye. Pañcadasavaggapariggahoti pañcadasahi vaggehi pariggahito saṅgahitoti attho.
所谓十五部集,是指由根本类别部诸五十五部组成的集合。所谓一百五十五两部经文,是一百加五十五法句即一百五十五部经文之意。所谓于何处,指的是某部内。十五部集编成即由十五部分组成的集合、编辑的意思。
Suttantānaṃ sahassāni sattasuttasatāni cāti pāṭhe suttantānaṃ satta sahassāni satta satāni cāti yojetabbaṃ. Katthaci pana ‘‘satta suttasahassāni satta suttasatāni cā’’tipi pāṭho. Saṃyuttasaṅgahoti saṃyuttanikāyassa saṅgaho.
‘经文之千七百七十’之意应当是指集经的七千余经文。诵读中称七千七百七十。有人诵作‘七千经七百及’,即集经部之集。
Pubbe nidassitāti suttantapiṭakaniddese nidassitā. Vuttameva pakārantarena saṅkhipitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā cattāro nikāye avasesaṃ buddhavacana’’nti vuttaṃ. Sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakantiādinā niddiṭṭhameva hi iminā pakārantarena saṅkhipitvā vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘ṭhapetvā caturopete’’tiādi. Tadaññanti tehi catūhi nikāyehi aññaṃ avasesanti attho.
“先前已示”指经藏文献中已有指示。略述方法是将其总结说明,说‘立置四部经藏为师说之剩余’之意。亦即律藏亦如是,乃由不同途径简略说明。这里所言‘立置四重’等意思,指的是这四部经藏及剩余部分的内涵。
Sabbameva2 hidanti sabbameva idaṃ buddhavacanaṃ. Navappabhedanti ettha kathaṃ panetaṃ navappabhedaṃ hoti. Tathā hi navahi aṅgehi vavatthitehi aññamaññasaṅkararahitehi bhavitabbaṃ, tathā ca sati asuttasabhāvāneva geyyaṅgādīni siyuṃ, atha suttasabhāvāneva geyyaṅgādīni, evaṃ sati suttanti visuṃ suttaṅgameva na siyā, evaṃ sante aṭṭhaṅgaṃ sāsananti āpajjati. Apica ‘‘sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇa’’nti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Suttañca nāma sagāthakaṃ vā siyā niggāthakaṃ vāti aṅgadvayeneva tadubhayaṃ saṅgahitanti tadubhayavinimuttañca suttaṃ udānādivisesasaññārahitaṃ natthi, yaṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, athāpi kathañci visuṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho vā na siyā gāthābhāvato dhammapadādīnaṃ viya, geyyaṅgasaṅgaho vā siyā sagāthakattā sagāthakavaggassa viya, tathā ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānanti? Vuccate –
“一切皆是”即此佛说法全体。何谓九种分类此处?实则如是,九个方面的详细说明,彼此彼此无混乱之义。又因无律藏性质故有歌集等,因有律藏故又有经集歌等,所以经的整体内涵不致是孤立的,经藏自然涵盖八正道教法。又释论中称‘有歌经,歌经有注释’。所谓经乃包括有歌经及无歌经,此两种集合而成,没有专门示出此经或彼经之差别。又问如何使经藏纯净?诸如吉祥经歌集乃经集之一部,无歌经等亦为经集部分,如此二分在集经中形成歌集及注释?称之曰——
Suttanti sāmaññavidhi, visesavidhayo pare;
经者为普通教法,特殊教法则在别处。
Sanimittā niruḷhattā, sahatāññena nāññato.
『有相』者,乃已显现而具足相貌;『非从他处』者,乃与彼相合,非出自他处也。
Yathāvuttassa dosassa, natthi etthāvagāhaṇaṃ;
如经所说之感恼,自此无所深究之理;
Tasmā asaṅkaraṃyeva, navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ.
故此,无杂乱混合之法,圣尊教法分为九科。
Sabbassapi hi buddhavacanassa suttanti ayaṃ sāmaññavidhi. Tathā hi ‘‘ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpannaṃ, sāvatthiyā suttavibhaṅge, sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’’tiādivacanato vinayābhidhammapariyattivisesesupi suttavohāro dissati. Teneva ca āyasmā mahākaccāno nettiyaṃ (netti. saṅgahavāra) āha – ‘‘navavidhasuttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti. Tattha hi suttādivasena navaṅgassa sāsanassa pariyeṭṭhi pariyesanā atthavicāraṇā ‘‘navavidhasuttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti vuttā. Tadekadesesu pana geyyādayo visesavidhayo tena tena nimittena patiṭṭhitā. Tathā hi geyyassa sagāthakattaṃ tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Lokepi hi sasilokaṃ sagāthakaṃ vā cuṇṇiyaganthaṃ ‘‘geyya’’nti vadanti. Gāthāvirahe pana sati pucchaṃ katvā visajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Pucchāvisajjanañhi ‘‘byākaraṇa’’nti vuccati. Byākaraṇameva veyyākaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sante sagāthakādīnampi pucchaṃ katvā visajjanavasena pavattānaṃ veyyākaraṇabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati. Geyyādisaññānaṃ anokāsabhāvato saokāsato anokāsavidhi balavāti ‘‘gāthāvirahe satī’’ti visesitattā ca. Tathā hi dhammapadādīsu kevalaṃ gāthābandhesu sagāthakattepi somanassañāṇamayikagāthāyuttesu ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādivacanasambandhesu abbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttesu ca suttavisesesu yathākkamaṃ gāthāudānaitivuttakaabbhutadhammasaññā patiṭṭhitā. Ettha hi satipi saññantaranimittayoge anokāsasaññānaṃ balavabhāveneva gāthādisaññā patiṭṭhitā, tathā satipi gāthābandhabhāve bhagavato atītāsu jātīsu cariyānubhāvappakāsakesu jātakasaññā patiṭṭhitā, satipi pañhāvisajjanabhāve sagāthakatte ca kesuci suttantesu vedassa labhāpanato vedallasaññā patiṭṭhitāti evaṃ tena tena sagāthakattādinā nimittena tesu tesu suttavisesesu geyyādisaññā patiṭṭhitāti visesavidhayo suttaṅgato pare geyyādayo. Yaṃ panettha geyyaṅgādinimittarahitaṃ, taṃ suttaṅgaṃ visesasaññāparihārena sāmaññasaññāya pavattanato.
于一切佛语中,此称为『经法总纲』。确如云:‘此为世尊所说入经已成之经法,乃释迦族舍卫城经卷,含说五经百篇’等文,律藏论藏中特定注释亦显经文用法。此亦由长老大玛哈咖吒那用《方略集》中语称‘九类经文总括’。所谓以经等名目,乃指对九科经文教法之详审思议。然歌谣等专门类别,因其目的各异,故分别成立。如歌谣之有韵句,具引导记忆之义胜。世间俗人称有韵之歌谣为『geyya』。无韵语句问答疏解,具解释语法之义,曰『vyākaraṇa』。故问答疏解即为语法之事。如此,则韵句等虽发起于问答,语法之体用并现乎其中,然不具争执纷扰之意。韵句等诸相由无韵语句分别转现,称为音韵组合。犹如《法句经》等纯属韵句类集,虽具韵句,系以悦意有智之韵句组成。于经文中的句首句尾有关韵句关联言说词汇,皆有所归依于特殊经典现象。此间,亦以现报意识之诸印相,及历劫往昔佛陀传迹、行为经验之相应记忆为韵句结合缘。又于问答疏解中,于韵句集成即具辨施善解之力。由此可见,因缘所生之歌谣知识,非独依集韵而定。佛陀之教法,遍显于韵句中之以往生行迹印证之经念,及问答疏解中以知觉教学为缘之特色。种种以韵句等集成之缘故,于诸经篇中特殊歌谣之现象显现。凡去除歌谣等缘起之专门缘故者,余即为‘通俗认识’,由此而行。
Nanu ca evaṃ santepi sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇanti suttaṅgaṃ na sambhavatīti codanā tadavatthā evāti? Na tadavatthā. Sodhitattā. Sodhitañhi pubbe gāthāvirahe sati pucchāvisajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittanti. Yañca vuttaṃ ‘‘gāthābhāvato maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā’’ti, taṃ na, niruḷhattāti. Niruḷho hi maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttabhāvo. Na hi tāni dhammapadabuddhavaṃsādayo viya gāthābhāvena paññātāni, atha kho suttabhāveneva. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ suttanāmakanti nāmaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘sagāthakattā geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti, tampi natthi. Yasmā sahatāññena. Sahabhāvo hi nāma atthato aññena hoti, saha gāthāhīti ca sagāthakaṃ. Na ca maṅgalasuttādīsu gāthāvinimutto koci suttappadeso atthi, yo ‘‘saha gāthāhī’’ti vucceyya. Nanu ca gāthāsamudāyo gāthāhi añño hoti, tathā ca tassa vasena saha gāthāhīti sagāthakanti sakkā vattunti? Taṃ na. Na hi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma koci atthi. Yampi vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānaṃ geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti, tampi na aññato. Aññāyeva hi tā gāthā jātakādipariyāpannattā. Atho na tāhi ubhatovibhaṅgādīnaṃ geyyaṅgabhāvoti evaṃ suttādīnaṃ aṅgānaṃ aññamaññasaṅkarābhāvo veditabbo.
然即便如此,亦不可因而自说有韵句经为歌谣经,无韵问答为语法经者,谓此等经织分不能成立也?并非如此。经研究已定。因韵句之缺失,问答疏解状态显现语法本质。所云“无韵句即无吉祥经等经集”不可谓然;此系不周详之说。诚然,吉祥经等因不依韵句识别,亦具有经之本质。正因如是,论疏中名为经集之,乃是称名既定也。又所云“歌谣经集必有韵句分类”者,亦不可得。因其相随性,实义上即与他相异,歌谣即韵句,并非吉祥经中有韵句解别。且韵句集合非独立实体,全体非构成。所谓“于两分类等,具歌谣经辑”,亦不可知。他然为韵句已悉入如《本生经》等经典合集。或谓“于两分类等必有歌谣辑”,亦非别解。反之,依《经单》等分法,诸经典各宗之间无杂乱交合现象,须以此理知之。
Idāni suttādīni navaṅgāni vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘tattha ubhatovibhaṅganiddesakhandhakaparivārā’’tiādi. Tattha niddeso nāma suttanipāte –
此时,上述经典等九科分别明示,谓『是两分类指示章及相关章节』等语。所谓指示,为经部文集——
‘‘Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa, tassa cetaṃ samijjhati;
『欲乐』者,欲求欲乐之人,其心由此而生厌恶;
Addhā pītimano hoti, laddhā macco yadicchatī’’ti. (su. ni. 772) –
达到所求后,则生欢喜,死亡即随其愿而至。」(增支部·章772)——
Ādinā āgatassa aṭṭhakavaggassa,
此为八十经集开头,
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko, (iccāyasmā ajito;)
『何者使世间得以宁静?』(欲寿者阿季陀)
Kenassu nappakāsati;
『何者不可抛弃?』;
Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi,
『你说何等的沾染?』
Kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya’’nti. (su. ni. 1038) –
‘何谓彼所谓大怖?’(注疏·尼连禅经卷1038)——
Ādinā āgatassa pārāyanavaggassa,
从『最初到来者』这一终结范畴中说:
‘‘Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ,
『于诸有情中,施加刑罚,
Aviheṭhayaṃ aññatarampi tesaṃ;
却不伤害他们中任何一人;
Na puttamiccheyya kuto sahāyaṃ,
不忍其子,不害其伴,
Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti. (su. ni. 35) –
独自如持锋利毒箭一般行事。』(注疏·尼连禅经卷35)——
Ādinā āgatassa khaggavisāṇasuttassa ca tadatthavibhāgavasena satthukappena āyasmatā dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherena kato niddeso mahāniddeso cūḷaniddesoti ca vuccati. Evamidha niddesassa suttaṅgasaṅgaho bhadantabuddhaghosācariyena dassitoti veditabbo. Aññatthāpi ca dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathādīsu sabbattha ubhatovibhaṅganiddesakhandhakaparivārāti niddesassa suttaṅgasaṅgaho eva dassito. Ācariyadhammapālattherenapi nettipakaraṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ evametassa suttaṅgasaṅgahova kathito. Keci pana niddesassa gāthāveyyākaraṇaṅgesu dvīsu saṅgahaṃ vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ niddesaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ upasenattherena –
由比库长老达摩塞纳帕提萨利普塔尊者,以论义阐述圣教之锋利尖锐者及其教义分析,所作的解释称为“大释”、“小释”等。应知此释义为世尊的弟子佛音法师解说的经文汇集。除此之外,在长部注疏等诸处,凡将大、小释及其分类同类称为释义者,实际上亦指经文汇集。即使是比库长老达摩巴拉师所作的经文指引注疏中,亦是这样称呼此经文汇集。有的说释义中之歌谣和诠释等,合称为两种汇集。已说故,释义注疏者,称为上尊比库布萨纳长老所作注释。
‘‘Tadetaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ suttantapiṭakaṃ abhidhammapiṭakanti tīsu piṭakesu suttantapiṭakapariyāpannaṃ, dīghanikāyo majjhimanikāyo saṃyuttanikāyo aṅguttaranikāyo khuddakanikāyoti pañcasu mahānikāyesu khuddakamahānikāye pariyāpannaṃ, suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ gāthā udānaṃ itivuttakaṃ jātakaṃ abbhutadhammaṃ vedallanti navasu satthusāsanaṅgesu yathāsambhavaṃ gāthāveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahita’’nti (mahāni. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā).
所谓此即律藏、经藏、论藏三藏中的经藏部份,上下五部经、长部、中部、相应部、增支部、小部大部五藏之内皆包括其中。经文、歌辞、诠释、偈颂、欢喜颂、说法录、奇特法以及各种佛陀教法等九种经文部门,均按相应而合为两部分:偈辞与诠释。此义出自大长部诸藏诸经之始注释开篇。
Ettha tāva katthaci pucchāvisajjanasabhāvato niddesekadesassa veyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho yujjatu nāma , gāthaṅgasaṅgaho pana kathaṃ yujjeyyāti idamettha vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Dhammapadādīnaṃ viya hi kevalaṃ gāthābandhabhāvo gāthaṅgassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Dhammapadādīsu hi kevalaṃ gāthābandhesu gāthāsamaññā patiṭṭhitā, niddese ca na koci kevalo gāthābandhappadeso upalabbhati. Sammāsambuddhena bhāsitānaṃyeva hi aṭṭhakavaggādisaṅgahitānaṃ gāthānaṃ niddesamattaṃ dhammasenāpatinā kataṃ. Atthavibhajanatthaṃ ānītāpi hi tā aṭṭhakavaggādisaṅgahitā niddisitabbā mūlagāthāyo suttanipātapariyāpannattā aññāyevāti na niddesasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu āgatabhāvepi taṃ vohāraṃ alabhamānā jātakādigāthāpariyāpannā gāthāyo viya, tasmā kāraṇantaramettha gavesitabbaṃ, yuttataraṃ vā gahetabbaṃ.
此处须细审疑问者,由于释义多有杂合之状,故以释义独树部分为诠释合摄;至偈部分如何合成,亦应细详。譬如法句经等,纯属偈辞合摄,其目的在于确定偈的意涵。但释义中,纯粹偈合总的地方尚未见,释义诸偈均系世尊所说诸八聚门等偈的释义,为所断义之方便。虽将主旨带入,然因其偈俱为经部集结之根本偈,即所谓长部、相应部合集偈句,故未纳释义数下之範圍,且两部分皆涵盖不定内容,又取用经藏集偈等,须另外探求,或择其理适当者采纳。
Nālakasuttatuvaṭṭakasuttānīti ettha nālakasuttaṃ nāma padumuttarassa bhagavato sāvakaṃ moneyyapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannaṃ disvā tadatthaṃ abhikaṅkhamānena tato pabhuti kappasatasahassaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā āgatena asitassa isino bhāgineyyena nālakattherena dhammacakkappavattitadivasato sattame divase ‘‘aññātameta’’ntiādīhi dvīhi gāthāhi moneyyapaṭipadaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā ‘‘moneyyaṃ te upaññissa’’ntiādinā (su. ni. 706) nālakattherassa bhāsitaṃ moneyyapaṭipadāparidīpakaṃ suttaṃ. Tuvaṭṭakasuttaṃ pana mahāsamayasuttantadesanāya sannipatitesu devesu ‘‘kā nu kho arahattappattiyā paṭipattī’’ti uppannacittānaṃ ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ tamatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘pucchāmi taṃ ādiccabandhū’’tiādinā (su. ni. 921; mahāni. 150 ) nimmitabuddhena attānaṃ pucchāpetvā ‘‘mūlaṃ papañcasaṅkhāyā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 922) bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ. Evamidhasuttanipāte āgatānaṃ maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho dassito, tattheva āgatānaṃ asuttanāmikānaṃ suddhikagāthānaṃ gāthaṅgasaṅgahañca dassayissati, evaṃ sati suttanipātaṭṭhakathārambhe –
所谓那罗迦经及吐瓦达卡经者,此处说那罗迦经乃佛陀弟子布多摩得查尊者依止钱财修行之道,观察其修持状况后,为使其进一步娴熟,历经千百劫积累波罗蜜,遂由尊长阿氏那执掌转授,于古那一日所传说称“别人不知”的双偈,以示布多摩得查的修道法门。同样吐瓦达卡经,是佛陀在各天众集会大法会时,为一等发心求道的天人示现,作问答引发其发起阿拉汉果报之心的话语,也是尊长启示令其自悟根本之劝导经录。依此,诸经汇集则借此显示已来诸经偈集,后文即将显现净偈所合之偈语汇总,故该经文集结内容作如上引导。
‘‘Gāthāsatasamākiṇṇo , geyyabyākaraṇaṅkito;
偈语纷纷聚集,歌辞诠释俱备;
Kasmā suttanipātoti, saṅkhamesa gatoti ce’’ti. (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) –
问为何名曰经藏,为内容所得之归集也。——此出自大长部初始注释开篇。
Sakalassapi suttanipātassa geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho kasmā coditoti? Nāyaṃ virodho. Kevalañhi tattha codakena sagāthakattaṃ katthaci pucchāvisajjanamattañca gahetvā codanāmattaṃ katanti gahetabbaṃ. Aññathā suttanipāte niggāthakassa suttasseva abhāvato veyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho na codetabbo siyāti. Sagāthāvaggo geyyanti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi asaṅgahitaṃ nāma paṭisambhidādī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana paṭisambhidāmaggassa geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahaṃ vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāmaggaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) ‘‘navasu satthusāsanaṅgesu yathāsambhavaṃ geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahita’’nti.
为何要对整个经集部的韵文和释义部分加以集中整理呢?这并非反对。仅仅是由整理者将连音句式整理成韵句的样式,加之或不过问典疑,凭借整理的形式而称之为整理,我们便应这样理解。若经集部中缺少韵诗部分,则无须设有释义部分的集中整理。必须将具备连音句的章节合成韵文部分。所谓“以八部不合的方式称为分析之道”等语,三处关键词中皆有说明。有些人则说是以分析之道的歌与释义两部分合为一体。对此,在分析之道讲义中(分析之道讲义卷第一)有云:“在新设的佛陀教法各部中,以尽可能符合实际的方式,将韵文与释义两部分合为一体。”
Nosuttanāmikāti asuttanāmikā. ‘‘Suddhikagāthā nāma vatthugāthā’’ti tīsu gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Tattha vatthugāthāti –
“Nosuttanāmikā”为“不称韵文名称者”。“纯净韵文”名为“关于材料的韵文”,此义三处关键词中曾说明。其所谓“关于材料的韵文”即是——
‘‘Kosalānaṃ purā rammā, agamā dakkhiṇāpathaṃ;
“迦毗罗国的过去游乐处,人们沿南方道而行;
Ākiñcaññaṃ patthayāno, brāhmaṇo mantapāragū’’ti. (su. ni. 982) –
没有束缚所依的婆罗门,是论议通达者。”(《修多罗尼》982)——
Ādinā pārāyanavaggassa nidānaṃ āropentena āyasmatā ānandattherena saṅgītikāle vuttā chappaññāsa ca gāthāyo, ānandatthereneva saṅgītikāle nālakasuttassa nidānaṃ āropentena vuttā –
起初由具寿阿难长老,在音乐会期间因强调“波罗奈部”的缘故所加上标题者。《波罗奈部》五十五偈即源于此;同样由阿难长老在音乐会期间因强调《金刚经》而加标题——
‘‘Ānandajāte tidasagaṇe patīte,
“生于阿难家族,放逐于门徒之中,”
Sakkañca indaṃ sucivasane ca deve;
萨咖与天人同住净处宫殿,
Dussaṃ gahetvā atiriva thomayante,
承受艰难,极为悲愤,
Asito isi addasa divāvihāre’’ti. (su. ni. 684) –
隐士阿希陀曾见他们白昼居处。〔出自《相应部》684偈〕
Ādikā vīsatimattā gāthāyo ca vuccanti. Tattha ‘‘nālakasuttassa vatthugāthāyo nālakasuttasaṅkhyaṃyeva gacchantī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ suttanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.685) –
起初约有二十多偈颂被称说。据注疏所云:‘纳洛迦经的经文数量正是纳洛迦数目’。此意见于经集注释(《相应部经集注》二卷684页)——
‘‘Parinibbute pana bhagavati saṅgītiṃ karontena āyasmatā mahākassapena āyasmā ānando tameva moneyyapaṭipadaṃ puṭṭho yena yadā ca samādapito nālako bhagavantaṃ pucchi, taṃ sabbaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetukāmo ‘ānandajāte’tiādikā vīsati vatthugāthāyo vatvā abhāsi. Taṃ sabbampi nālakasuttanti vuccatī’’ti.
‘佛陀涅槃后,长老大咖萨巴等尊者与长老阿难共同开展诵经。阿难因某种牢固的定境被尊称诚实者,且当纳洛迦曾向佛陀请教时,一一明示诸事,欲昭示众生,遂口述二十余首经文。此等皆被称作纳洛迦经文。’
Tasmā nālakasuttassa vatthugāthāyo nālakasuttaggahaṇeneva saṅgahitāti pārāyanikavaggassa vatthugāthāyo idha suddhikagāthāti gahetabbaṃ. Tattheva panassa pārāyaniyavagge ajitamāṇavakādīnaṃ soḷasannaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ pucchāgāthā bhagavato visajjanagāthā ca idha suddhikagāthāti evampi vattuṃ yujjati. Tāpi hi pāḷiyaṃ suttanāmena avatvā ‘‘ajitamāṇavakapucchā tissamettayyamāṇavakapucchā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 1038-1048) āgatattā cuṇṇiyaganthehi amissattā ca nosuttanāmikā suddhikagāthā nāmāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
因此,对纳洛迦经文应作纳洛迦经文总集之理解。取至彼经济卷中有关经文集,亦收录有阿吉陀、摩纳瓦等十六位婆罗门提问偈,以及佛陀解问偈,此处亦属纯洁经典偈的范畴。且即便这些经文未以‘经’名义列于巴利文经典中,仍因曾传承于著名传承系谱,故可被称作纯洁经偈。
Idāni udānaṃ sarūpato vavatthapento āha ‘‘somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaṃyuttā’’tiādi. Kenaṭṭhena (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) panetaṃ ‘‘udāna’’nti vuccati? Udānanaṭṭhena. Kimidaṃ udānaṃ nāma? Pītivegasamuṭṭhāpito udāhāro. Yathā hi yaṃ telādi minitabbavatthu mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘avaseko’’ti vuccati, yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘mahogho’’ti vuccati, evameva yaṃ pītivegasamuṭṭhāpitaṃ vitakkavipphāraṃ hadayaṃ sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti, so adhiko hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahi vacīdvārena nikkhanto paṭiggāhakanirapekkho udāhāraviseso ‘‘udāna’’nti vuccati. Dhammasaṃvegavasenapi ayamākāro labbhateva. Tayidaṃ katthaci gāthābandhavasena katthaci vākyavasena pavattaṃ. Tathā hi –
现在对《吽哀那》这部出自同形起义颂歌连结的经文进行了说明。何以此处称为“吽哀那”?这是因为开篇即以“吽哀那”为名。那什么是“吽哀那”?比喻如土地上的泥沙被搅动后所鼓荡起来的激流。比如油脂等物如同欲盖而不可止,遂倾泻而去,称为“流放”;又如水中的浮藻无法被手握住或稳固,扬起后随水漂流,称为“泛滥”。同理,内心因激烈情感生起而生的念头起伏无法收摄,愈发剧烈,终至从内心深处涌出言说无暇斟酌的言辞,这种特殊的心念现象被称为“吽哀那”。此一状态亦可视为对法的激发或震动。其可或以歌咏相联,或以句子形式流通,俱是如此。
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā bhikkhū nibbānapaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṃseti. Tedha bhikkhū aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi katvā sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā ohitasotā dhammaṃ suṇanti. Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṃ viditvā tāyaṃ velāyaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi ‘atthi, bhikkhave, tadāyatanaṃ, yattha neva pathavī na āpo’’’ti (udā. 71-72) –
当时世尊对比库们宣说与涅槃相联系的法语,予以呈显、启发、警醒和劝勉。彼时,比库们以身心集中、一心清净、全神贯注的态度,专心聆听世尊宣讲的法义。世尊知晓此情境,遂以此机缘说出该《吽哀那》经:“比库们,确有一境所,即不存在土地亦无水。”(《吽哀那》第71-72节)——
Ādīsu somanassañāṇasamuṭṭhitavākyavasena pavattaṃ.
经文最初即以带来欢喜与愉悦的觉知生起之语句开始宣说。
Nanu ca udānaṃ nāma pītisomanassasamuṭṭhāpito dhammasaṃvegasamuṭṭhāpito vā dhammapaṭiggāhakanirapekkho udāhāro tathā ceva sabbattha āgataṃ, idha kasmā bhagavā udānento bhikkhū āmantesīti? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saññāpanatthaṃ. Nibbānapaṭisaṃyuttañhi bhagavā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammaṃ desetvā nibbānaguṇānussaraṇena uppannapītisomanassena udānaṃ udānento ‘‘idha nibbānavajjo sabbo sabhāvadhammo paccayāyattavuttikova upalabbhati, na paccayanirapekkho, ayaṃ pana nibbānadhammo kathamappaccayo upalabbhatī’’ti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cetoparivitakkamaññāya tesaṃ ñāpetukāmo ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, tadāyatana’’nti (udā. 71)-ādimāha. Na ekantato te paṭiggāhake katvāti veditabbaṃ.
那么,这里的“吽哀那”是否指由喜与乐所生起、由于对法的震动感而产生而无执的心识特别辩证现象?此义为何处而来?当世尊以“吽哀那”召唤比库们,是为了使他们明了。因为世尊向诸比库宣讲与涅槃相应之法,借由涅槃的殊胜特质引发自在而欢喜的心境,借助这种以喜乐生起的“吽哀那”作为召唤之声。世尊教导说:『涅槃的性质,虽似布满一切界域、依因缘发生,但非无因缘独立存在。此涅槃法为什么会有因缘而得现前呢?』基于诸比库心念的转变与明了,世尊便加以指示说:“比库们,就有这一境所存在。”(见《吽哀那》第71节开头)须知此处有别于仅以无执之心作为持握。
‘‘Sace bhāyatha dukkhassa, sace vo dukkhamappiyaṃ;
“若当忧惧苦难,若于汝等是不悦之苦;
Mākattha pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā raho’’ti. (udā. 44) –
莫为恶业,或现形、或秘密流布。”(《吽哀那》第44节)——
Evamādikaṃ pana dhammasaṃvegavasappavattaṃ udānanti veditabbaṃ.
如此等种种法门中法意趣激励激发之讽诵,应当了知。
‘‘Sukhakāmāni bhūtāni, yo daṇḍena vihiṃsati;
“贪欲享安乐众生者,若以杖棒加害之,
Attano sukhamesāno, pecca so na labhate sukha’’nti. (dha. pa. 131; udā. 13) –
其自安乐之所期望者,既死则不得安隐。”(《法句经/发语经》第131偈;《讽诵集》13)——
Idampi dhammasaṃvegavasappavattaṃ udānanti vadanti. Tathā hi ekasmiṃ samaye sambahulā gopālakā antarā ca sāvatthiṃ antarā ca jetavanaṃ ahiṃ daṇḍehi hananti. Tena ca samayena bhagavā sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya gacchanto antarāmagge te dārake ahiṃ daṇḍena hanante disvā ‘‘kasmā kumārakā imaṃ ahiṃ daṇḍena hanathā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘ḍaṃsanabhayena bhante’’ti ca vutte ‘‘ime ‘attano sukhaṃ karissāmā’ti imaṃ paharantā nibbattaṭṭhāne dukkhaṃ anubhavissanti, aho avijjāya nikatikosalla’’nti dhammasaṃvegaṃ uppādesi. Teneva ca dhammasaṃvegena imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Evametaṃ katthaci gāthābandhavasena katthaci vākyavasena katthaci somanassavasena katthaci dhammasaṃvegavasena pavattanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaṃyuttānī’’ti yaṃ udānalakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Yebhuyyena hi udānaṃ gāthābandhavasena bhāsitaṃ pītisomanassasamuṭṭhāpitañca.
此亦为法意趣激励激发之讽诵所述。缘何?昔有一时,众多牧童互相在舍卫城及祗树给孤独园间,用杖棒无害之杖击他人。彼时,世尊自舍卫城往乞食途中,见此等童子以杖棒相打,问曰:“何以诸童以杖击此?”答以“恐受咬伤”。世尊告诫:“彼等妄生‘当自乐’之念,乃伤害他人,终至苦恼境地,愚昧无知且技艺近乎拙劣。”如是启发法意趣激励。即此激励,或以偈语、或以句语、或以欢喜意趣、或以法意趣激励方式启发,皆应了知。因此本疏称之为『附以欢喜智慧之偈句所连结者』,此为讽诵之特色,应取用之。因讽诵乃以偈句为连带,流露欢喜与安乐之情。
Tayidaṃ sabbaññubuddhabhāsitaṃ paccekabuddhabhāsitaṃ sāvakabhāsitanti tividhaṃ hoti. Tattha paccekabuddhabhāsitaṃ –
此类教导由全知佛所说,除彼佛之外,亦由辟支佛及声闻所说,分为三种。其中辟支佛所说者——
‘‘Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ,
“诸众生中皆置以杖”——
Aviheṭhayaṃ aññatarampi tesa’’nti. –
「Aviheṭhayaṃ」者,有释曰不可伤害者,意指无害无过之意,其含义乃指心无敌害,不生烦恼之境。
Ādinā khaggavisāṇasutte (su. ni. 35) āgatameva. Sāvakabhāsitānipi –
此等义理,已于犀角经(经集第三十五经)中以『以此为首』等文句阐明。弟子所说之偈亦有——
‘‘Sabbo rāgo pahīno me, sabbo doso samūhato;
「我一切贪欲已断,一切嗔恚已根除;
Sabbo me vihato moho, sītibhūtosmi nibbuto’’ti. –
我一切痴迷已破,已清凉、已般涅槃。」——
Ādinā theragāthāsu (theragā. 79),
此以『以此为首』等文句见于长老偈(长老偈第七十九偈),
‘‘Kāyena saṃvutā āsiṃ, vācāya uda cetasā;
谓「我以身调御已,语声与意心亦一律收摄。」此为身、语、意三业皆调护的表述。
Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbhuyha, sītibhūtāmhi nibbutā’’ti. –
断尽根本渴爱,入于清凉之境而寂灭。
Therigāthāsu (therīgā. 15) ca āgatāni. Aññānipi sakkādīhi devehi bhāsitāni ‘‘aho dānaṃ paramadānaṃ kassape supatiṭṭhita’’ntiādīni (udā. 27), soṇadaṇḍabrāhmaṇādīhi manussehi ca bhāsitāni ‘‘namo tassa bhagavato’’tiādīni (dī. ni. 2.371; ma. ni. 1.290) tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhāni udānāni santi eva, na tāni idha adhippetāni. Yāni pana sammāsambuddhena sāmaṃ āhaccabhāsitāni jinavacanabhūtāni, tāneva ca dhammasaṅgāhakehi ‘‘udāna’’nti saṅgītaṃ. Etāniyeva ca sandhāya bhagavato pariyattidhammaṃ navavidhā vibhajitvā uddisantena udānanti vuttaṃ.
此说出自比库尼颂中(比库尼颂第十五),且如他经文与萨咖诸天等所说,如“啊,布施乃至至上布施,尊者迦萨巴安住坚固”等(如《犊子语》第二十七篇),再如梵志索那杖等人和人间众生所称“顶礼彼世尊”等(如《长部尼注》第三七一页;《中部尼注》第一二九页),皆为三种不同唱诵的颂歌,非此处所指。真正由正自觉者同一时期开示、且性质为圣言的称为“颂”,即僧众收藏的“欣惟颂”。基于此,世尊所教出经文法义,依其系统分为九种不同类别,将这些颂文称为“欣惟颂”乃成文献名称。
Yā pana ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādigāthā bhagavatā bodhiyā mūle udānavasena pavattitā anekasatasahassānaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ udānabhūtā ca, tā aparabhāge dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa bhagavatā desitattā dhammasaṅgāhakehi udānapāḷiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ anāropetvā dhammapade saṅgahitā. Yañca ‘‘aññāsi vata bho koṇḍañño’’ti udānavacanaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuyā devamanussānaṃ pavedanasamatthanigghosavipphāraṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, tadapi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ sabbesaṃ eva bhikkhūnaṃ sammāpaṭipattipaccavekkhaṇahetukaṃ ‘‘ārādhayiṃsu vata maṃ bhikkhū ekaṃ samaya’’ntiādivacanaṃ (ma. ni. 1.225) viya dhammacakkappavattanasuttadesanāpariyosāne attanā adhigatadhammekadesassa yathādesitassa ariyamaggassa sāvakesu sabbapaṭhamaṃ therena adhigatattā attano parissamassa saphalabhāvapaccavekkhaṇahetukaṃ pītisomanassajanitaṃ udāhāramattāṃ, na ‘‘yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā’’tiādivacanaṃ (mahāva. 1-3; udā. 1-3) viya pavattiyā nivattiyā vā pakāsananti na dhammasaṅgāhakehi udānapāḷiyaṃ saṅgītanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
而所谓“多生轮回”等诸颂,由正觉尊者于觉悟之根基,以欣惟颂形式流转传承,是数十万圣者的欣惟颂出处。其后半部分,由守护法藏的尊者宣说佛陀所教经典义理,聚合为“欣惟颂藏”以汇聚法句。至于“阿那西呵舍,呵呵,拘缔罗”的欣惟颂,是佛陀于世间诸天人于十千世界域的示现应化,由如来亲说。尽管如此,其实在初转法轮众比库中,亦曾对此法门首度修习,体验证得并心悦其法(如《中部尼注》第一二二五页所载:“比库们曾对我恳请”)。故此欣惟颂不过是宣说佛法之具足法门的一个形态,非“诸法何时现起”等普通经文故事段落所含阐义之所具。此理不欲混称为僧团收藏的欣惟颂。
Udānapāḷiyañca bodhivaggādīsu aṭṭhasu vaggesu dasa dasa katvā asītiyeva suttantā saṅgītā , tatoyeva ca udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ –
欣惟颂藏中,从开悟篇开始共八品,分为十十番众,即共三百颂。正如《欣惟颂注》(此书开卷注疏)由大师法护长老所说:
‘‘Asīti eva suttantā, vaggā aṭṭha samāsato;
“共三百颂,分为八品,整体齐聚;
Gāthā ca pañcanavuti, udānassa pakāsitā.
歌颂共五十句,彰显欣惟颂义。”
‘‘Aḍḍhūnanavamattā ca, bhāṇavārā pamāṇato;
「以诵量而论,半缺九卷,
Ekādhikā tathāsīti, udānassānusandhayo.
八十一个,是如此;此乃《自说经》之连结数目。
‘‘Ekavīsasahassāni, satameva vicakkhaṇo;
「二万一千,加上整整一百;」
Padānetānudānassa, gaṇitāni viniddise. –
「《自说经》之句,智者当如此列举计数。」
Gāthāpādato pana –
然就偈颂句而言——
‘‘Aṭṭhasahassamattāni, cattāreva satāni ca;
「恰好八千句,加上四百句;」
Padānetānudānassa, tevīsati ca niddise.
关于足谓的前缀,共标示三十七个。
‘‘Akkharānaṃ sahassāni, saṭṭhi satta satāni ca;
『字母共有一千六百七十七个;』
Tīṇi dvāsīti ca tathā, udānassa paveditā’’ti.
『三十二个加上二十二个,也称为前缀的组合。』
Idha pana ‘‘dvāsīti suttantā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na sameti, tasmā ‘‘asīti suttantā’’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ.
但这里曾说『二十二个经文』,这不合适,因此应从诵读法中改为『八十二个经文』。
Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘vuttamarahatāti me sutaṃ. Ekadhammaṃ, bhikkhave, pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāya. Katamaṃ ekadhammaṃ? Lobhaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāyā’’ti evamādinā ekakadukatikacatukkavasena itivuttakapāḷiyaṃ (itivu. 1) saṅgahamāropitāni dvādasuttarasatasuttantāni itivuttakaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Dasuttarasatasuttantāti etthāpi ‘‘dvādasuttarasatasuttantā’’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ. Tathā hi ekakanipāte tāva sattavīsati suttāni, dukanipāte dvāvīsati, tikanipāte paññāsa, catukkanipāte terasāti dvādasuttarasatasuttantāneva itivuttakapāḷiyaṃ āgatāni. Tatoyeva ca pāḷiyaṃ –
世尊对此说:「‘已说阿拉汉’,我曾听闻。比库们,应当舍弃一法,我将为你们宣说入无余涅槃之义。何为一法?比库们,务必舍弃贪,这是我为你们宣说入无余涅槃之法。」如是,依照一、二、三、四法,以十二部经集计两百三十篇、《如是我闻集》名义而归纳,称为《说已述》。“已说”指的即是此义。关于两百三十篇,应当从诵读法中说为“十二部二百三十篇”才是正确。是的,如单部有二十七篇,二部有二十二篇,三部有五十篇,四部有十三篇,共计十二部二百三十篇《说已述巴利经》。巴利语正是如是记载——
‘‘Lobho doso ca moho ca,
『贪、嗔、痴三毒皆为』,
Kodho makkhena pañcamaṃ;
嗔恚为五蕴中的第五蕴;
Māno sabbaṃ puna māno,
慢为一切均为慢,
Lobho dosena terasa.
贪欲与嗔恨分为三种。
‘‘Moho kodho puna makkho,
‘痴、嗔与慢,
Nīvaraṇā taṇhāya pañcamaṃ;
是渴爱所生的五种障碍;
Dve sekkhabhedā sāmaggī,
有二种错误愚痴不和合,
Paduṭṭhanirayena terasa.
以恶行的相续为三十余。
‘‘Pasannā ekamābhāyi, puggalaṃ atītena pañcamaṃ;
『清净无恐者,其人过去第五,
Evañce opadhikaṃ puññaṃ, sattavīsa pakāsitā’’ti. –
如是,其所缓慢的功德,二十七已显。』
Evamādinā uddānagāthāhi dvādasuttarasatasuttāni gaṇetvā dassitāni. Teneva ca aṭṭhakathāyampi (itivu. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) –
由此,以此开头的颂歌,统摄了十二卷、三百经,得以显现。由此注疏亦是 (即序论注疏)——
‘‘Suttato ekakanipāte tāva sattavīsati suttāni, dukanipāte dvāvīsati, tikanipāte paññāsa, catukkanipāte terasāti dvādasādhikasatasuttasaṅgaha’’nti –
『从经上说,一卷二十七经,二卷二十经,三卷五十经,四卷十三经,共计一百二十余经』,
Vuttaṃ. Kāmañcettha appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti katvā ‘‘dvāsīti khandhakavattānī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘asīti khandhakavattānī’’ti vuttavacanaṃ viya ‘‘dvādasuttarasatasuttantā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘dasuttarasatasuttantā’’ti vuttantipi sakkā vattuṃ, tathāpi īdise ṭhāne pamāṇaṃ dassentena yāthāvatova niyametvā dassetabbanti ‘‘dvādasuttarasatasuttantā’’ icceva pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ.
已有所说。若在此处计算,略多或略少,则说为『二十卷之经』者,即如律藏中的『十二卷之经』说法,例如称『十二卷、三百经』时,也有说为『十卷、三百经』之例,皆可成立,但在此种处所,必须以能显示规范的计数,依原文『十二卷、三百余经』为当行读法。
Jātaṃ bhūtaṃ purāvutthaṃ bhagavato pubbacaritaṃ kāyati katheti pakāsetīti jātakaṃ.
所谓生起者、已生者、古已有之者,即是世尊以往所行之事,讲述、阐明者,谓之本生经。
‘‘Cattārome , bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande. Katame cattāro? Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā ānandaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanenapi sā attamanā hoti. Tattha ce ānando dhammaṃ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti, atittāva, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā hoti, atha ānando tuṇhī bhavati. Sace bhikkhunīparisā…pe… upāsakaparisā…pe… upāsikā parisā ānandaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanenapi sā attamanā hoti. Tattha ce ānando dhammaṃ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti, atittāva, bhikkhave, upāsikāparisā hoti, atha ānando tuṇhī bhavati. Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande’’ti (a. ni. 4.129) evamādinayappavattā sabbepi acchariyaabbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttā suttantā abbhutadhammaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave’’tiādi.
世尊谓:『比库们,阿难,四种神妙奇异法显现。何为四?若比库僧团为见阿难而来,见时心悦诚服。如阿难说法,则众更甚悦服,僧团常在,阿难乃入静寂。若比库尼僧团……若优婆塞僧团……若优婆夷僧团如此来观阿难,见时悦服,听阿难说法,更加悦服,僧团恒在,阿难入静。此四为阿难处所显神妙奇异法也』(阿含·相应部4.129)如是开示,各处皆称此为神妙奇异法,于言说中有『四者,比库们』等语开头。
Cūḷavedallādīsu (ma. ni. 1.460 ādayo) visākhena nāma upāsakena puṭṭhāya dhammadinnāya nāma bhikkhuniyā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ cūḷavedallanti veditabbaṃ. Mahāvedallaṃ (ma. ni. 1.449 ādayo) pana mahākoṭṭhikattherena pucchitena āyasmatā sāriputtattherena bhāsitaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhisuttampi (ma. ni. 1.89 ādayo) bhikkhūhi puṭṭhena tenevāyasmatā sāriputtattherena bhāsitaṃ. Etāni majjhimanikāyapariyāpannāni. Sakkapañhaṃ (dī. ni. 2.344 ādayo) pana sakkena puṭṭho bhagavā abhāsi, tañca dīghanikāyapariyāpannanti veditabbaṃ. Mahāpuṇṇamasuttampi (ma. ni. 3.85 ādayo) tadahuposathe pannarase puṇṇamāya rattiyā aññatarena bhikkhunā puṭṭhena bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, taṃ pana majjhimanikāyapariyāpannanti veditabbaṃ. Vedanti ñāṇaṃ. Tuṭṭhinti yathābhāsitadhammadesanaṃ viditvā ‘‘sādhu ayye, sādhāvuso’’tiādinā abbhanumodanavasappavattaṃ pītisomanassaṃ. Laddhā laddhāti labhitvā labhitvā, punappunaṃ labhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
《小钵喇洹经》诸处(中部大念处经编1.460段首)有维萨卡优婆塞女问称以法赋予之婆罗门女比库尼说之经,此称《小钵喇洹》。又《大钵喇洹经》(中部大念处经编1.449段首)为大拘留掌长老沙利徒尊者所问说。正见经(中部大念处经编1.89段首)亦诸比库共问,同沙利徒尊者说。此诸为中部经集。《萨咖问经》(长部大念处经编2.344段首)为萨咖问世尊所说,属长部经集。《大满月经》(中部大念处经编3.85段首)在十五日望夕,一比库问世尊所说,亦属中部经集。闻者得智。于所讲法已知便欢喜称善阿耆,依欢喜而得喜乐满足。得者谓有所获,并反复获,此称。
Evaṃ aṅgavasena sakalampi buddhavacanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni dhammakkhandhavasena vibhajitvā kathetukāmo āha ‘‘kathaṃ dhammakkhandhavasenā’’tiādi. Tattha dhammakkhandhavasenāti dhammarāsivasena. Dvāsīti sahassāni buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto gaṇhinti sambandho. Tattha buddhato gaṇhinti sammāsambuddhato uggaṇhiṃ, dvesahassādhikāni asīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni satthu santikā adhigaṇhinti attho. Dve sahassāni bhikkhutoti dve dhammakkhandhasahassāni bhikkhuto uggaṇhiṃ, dhammasenāpatiādīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santikā adhigaṇhiṃ. Sāriputtattherādīhi bhāsitānaṃ sammādiṭṭhisuttantādīnaṃ vasena hi ‘‘dve sahassāni bhikkhuto’’ti vuttaṃ. Caturāsīti sahassānīti tadubhayaṃ samodhānetvā catusahassādhikāni asīti sahassāni. Ye me dhammā pavattinoti ye dhammā mama pavattino pavattamānā paguṇā vācuggatā jivhagge parivattanti, te dhammā caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Keci pana ‘‘ye ime’’ti padacchedaṃ katvā ‘‘ye ime dhammā buddhassa bhagavato bhikkhūnañca pavattino, tehi pavattitā, tesvāhaṃ dvāsīti sahassāni buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhutoti evaṃ caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti evamettha sambandhaṃ vadanti.
如是既分割全部佛语,现又欲以法蕴章段方式分说,言『法蕴章段』者曰:法的军队。佛有两千军,谓两千比库军队合称宗派。此谓佛所化众,即正觉世尊所获洽采以两千法蕴千为落得义。两千比库军,乃诸法的军队主帅诸比库之众。此文所引沙利徒尊者及诸尊者所说正见等经典中以『两千比库』语出现。四千八百乃此二与四者加起即逾四千之数。尔时我所兴顺说者,即谓八十四支法蕴二千重。若言『我所兴悉法』者,即此佛语弟子所弘宣;复有异解者谓『我所兴悉法为佛与比库所兴法』;皆就义理而说。
Ettha ca subhasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 1.444 ādayo) gopakamoggallānasuttañca (ma. ni. 3.79 ādayo) parinibbute bhagavati ānandattherena vuttattā caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassesu antogadhaṃ hoti, na hotīti? Tattha paṭisambhidāgaṇṭhipade tāva idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sayaṃ vuttadhammakkhandhānaṃ bhikkhuto gahiteyeva saṅgahetvā evamāhāti daṭṭhabba’’nti. Bhagavatā pana dinnanaye ṭhatvā bhāsitattā sayaṃ vuttadhammakkhandhānampi ‘‘buddhato gaṇhi’’nti ettha saṅgahaṃ katvā vuttanti evamettha vattuṃ yuttataraṃ viya dissati. Bhagavatāyeva hi dinnanaye ṭhatvā sāvakā dhammaṃ desenti. Teneva hi tatiyasaṅgītiyañca moggaliputtatissattherena bhāsitampi kathāvatthuppakaraṇaṃ buddhabhāsitaṃ nāma jātaṃ, tatoyeva ca attanā bhāsitampi subhasuttādi saṅgītiṃ āropentena āyasmatā ānandattherena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vuttaṃ.
此中《殊胜经》(长部大念处经1.444段首)、《保护摩诃迦罗经》(中部大念处经3.79段首)由般涅槃世尊阿难尊者而说以八十四支法蕴。如是否定不可?此处经断集段曰:『比库应当了知此诸法蕴紧执不放,如是判定』。世尊在世时言教,弟子则受持解说,故以自己所说法蕴称为佛所获法蕴,以便统摄开敷,此说尤合理。世尊在世时角色,弟子由说法。第三僧集时摩诃利子尊者所说,名为佛语,且同阿难尊者所说殊胜经及诸节集,谓之闻如是说。
Evaṃ paridīpitadhammakkhandhavasenāti gopakamoggallānena brāhmaṇena ‘‘tvaṃ bahussutoti buddhasāsane pākaṭo, kittakā dhammā te satthārā bhāsitā, tayā dhāritā’’ti pucchite tassa paṭivacanaṃ dentena āyasmatā ānandattherena evaṃ ‘‘dvāsīti buddhato gaṇhi’’ntiādinā paridīpitadhammakkhandhānaṃ vasena. Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ satipaṭṭhānādi. Satipaṭṭhānasuttañhi ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.373) cattāro satipaṭṭhāne ārabhitvā tesaṃyeva vibhāgadassanavasena pavattattā ‘‘ekānusandhika’’nti vuccati. Anekānusandhikanti nānānusandhikaṃ parinibbānasuttādi. Parinibbānasuttañhi nānāṭhānesu nānādhammadesanānaṃ vasena pavattattā ‘‘anekānusandhika’’nti vuccati. Gāthābandhesu pañhapucchananti –
所谓分明说法蕴,系般涅槃世尊问答中由婆罗门般涅槃世尊问云:『汝博学多闻,为佛教中明白说法,师所说法皆具持。』阿难尊者应答曰:『吾以两千佛所获法计数』,因称之为分明法蕴。又有单指出经典如念处经云:『比库们,此为独行之道,令众生清净』,开四念处起修,由诸分解而行,称为单行。多般行则谓多处多法不同处所开示如般涅槃经由多处多法说故称多行语。诗结集有问答称为探问解答。
‘‘Kati chinde kati jahe, kati cuttari bhāvaye;
「断者多少、舍者多少、遣者多少,比库以何等增上心而衡量?」
Kati saṅgātigo bhikkhu, ‘oghatiṇṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.5) –
「断尽五蕴、断绝五根、断除诸贪欲的比库,被称为‘已过烦恼’。」(《相应部尼》1.5)
Evamādinayappavattaṃ pañhapucchanaṃ eko dhammakkhandhoti attho.
以上问答启自所行之法,所问即为一法蕴之义。
‘‘Pañca chinde pañca jahe, pañca cuttari bhāvaye;
「五断、五舍、五遣,断尽贪恚之人,堪称渡过大患。」
Pañca saṅgātigo bhikkhu, ‘oghatiṇṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.5) –
谓断绝五盖,舍弃五盖,遣出五盖,称为『已过波浪』的比库。」(《相应部尼》1.5)
Evamādinayappavattaṃ visajjananti veditabbaṃ. Tikadukabhājanaṃ nikkhepakaṇḍaaṭṭhakathākaṇḍavasena veditabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘kusalā dhammā, akusalā dhammā, abyākatā dhammā, sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā dhammā, dukkhāya vedanāya sampayuttā dhammā, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā dhammā’’ti evamādīsu tikesu kusalattikassa vibhajanavasena yaṃ vuttaṃ nikkhepakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 985-987) –
此等开示应当从实际领悟而得见解。依《述集经注长分》章理解,释义成三境——「善法、不善法、不分别法」、「与乐受俱行法」、「与苦受俱行法」、「与非苦非乐受俱行法」等诸法之分。以此三种划分善品为基础,归纳于《施食经注》章节(《法集》985-987)内所说。
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Tīṇi kusalamūlāni alobho adoso amoho, taṃsampayutto vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho saṅkhārakkhandho viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ. Ime dhammā kusalā.
“何为善法?有三种善的根本:无贪、无嗔、无痴。与之相应者,便是苦蕴、想蕴、行蕴、识蕴。由此而生起的,即是身业、语业、意业。这些法即是善法。”
‘‘Katame dhammā akusalā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni lobho doso moho, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā, taṃsampayutto vedanākkhandho…pe… manokammaṃ. Ime dhammā akusalā.
“何为不善法?有三种不善的根本:贪欲、嗔恚、愚痴。当中包含着这些烦恼,与之相应者,便是苦蕴、想蕴、行蕴、识蕴。由此而生起的,即是身业、语业、意业。这些法即是不善法。”
‘‘Katame dhammā abyākatā? Kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ vipākā kāmāvacarā rūpāvacarā arūpāvacarā apariyāpannā vedanākkhandho …pe… viññāṇakkhandho, ye ca dhammā kiriyā neva kusalā nākusalā na ca kammavipākā sabbañca rūpaṃ asaṅkhatā ca dhātu. Ime dhammā abyākatā’’ti –
“何为不确定法?是善恶法的果报,以及依欲界色界无色界所生的苦蕴、想蕴、行蕴、识蕴,这些都不属于善恶法,也没有业果,且一切形色及非形色法,皆为无为法。这些法即是不确定法。”
Ayameko dhammakkhandho. Evaṃ sesattikānampi ekekassa tikassa vibhajanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandhoti veditabbaṃ.
这是其中之一蕴。如此,余下若干蕴中,各自的三种分类,亦当如是理解为各蕴之法。
Tathā ‘‘hetū dhammā’’ti evamādikesu dukesu ekekassa dukassa vibhajanavasena yaṃ vuttaṃ –
又如所谓“因缘法”,在此两法中,分别依各法的两种分类说法,所陈述者如是。
‘‘Katame dhammā hetū? Tayo kusalā hetū, tayo akusalā hetū, tayo abyākatā hetū’’ti (dha. sa. 1059) –
“何为因缘法?有三种善的因缘,三种不善的因缘,三种不确定的因缘。”(引自《法集要》1059)
Ādi, tatthāpi ekekassa dukassa vibhajanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandho. Puna aṭṭhakathākaṇḍe (dha. sa. 1384-1386) –
起初,同样地,每一苦谛的分法各有一法蕴。且在注疏部分(第1384-1386行)中云——
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Catūsu bhūmīsu kusalaṃ. Ime dhammā kusalā. Katame dhammā akusalā? Dvādasa akusalacittuppādā. Ime dhammā akusalā. Katame dhammā abyākatā? Catūsu bhūmīsu vipāko tīsu bhūmīsu kiriyābyākataṃ rūpañca nibbānañca. Ime dhammā abyākatā’’ti –
『哪些法是善法?在四个地位中是善法。这些法是善法。哪些法是不善法?是十二种不善心所生起的法。这些法是不善法。哪些法是未分别法?在四个地位中果报三处,行为未分别,还有色法与涅槃。这些法是未分别法。』——
Evamādinā kusalattikādivibhajanavasena pavattesu tikabhājanesu ekekassa tikassa bhājanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandho. Tathā –
如此起,用善法及色等分类展开,三种分法中每一法蕴各自属于三分法中的一分。犹如——
‘‘Katame dhammā hetū? Tayo kusalā hetū, tayo akusalā hetū, tayo abyākatā hetū’’ti (dha. sa. 1441) –
『哪些法是因?三种是善因,三种是不善因,三种是未分别因。』(第1441行)——
Ādinayappavattesu dukabhājanesu ekamekaṃ dukabhājanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandhoti evamettha tikadukabhājanavasena dhammakkhandhavibhāgo veditabbo.
在从因起的二苦分中,每一苦分各自属于一苦分法蕴,依此以三分二苦分法来认识法蕴的区分。
Ekamekañca cittavārabhājananti ettha pana –
至于每一心类的分法,此处却——
‘‘Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ vā…pe… tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti…pe… avikkhepo hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 1) –
“当时,身心生起与欲境相应的善心,伴随欢喜,具有智慧专注于色欲相……如是,接触亦随之生起……且内心不动摇。”(此语出自[dh. sa. 1])——
Evamādinayappavatte cittuppādakaṇḍe ekamekaṃ cittavārabhājanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandhoti gahetabbaṃ. Eko dhammakkhandhoti ettha ‘‘ekekatikadukabhājanaṃ ekamekaṃ cittavārabhājana’’nti vuttattā ekeko dhammakkhandhoti attho veditabbo. ‘‘Ekeko’’ti avuttepi hi ayamattho atthato viññāyamānova hotīti ‘‘eko dhammakkhandho’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthi vatthūtiādīsu vatthu nāma sudinnakaṇḍādi . Mātikāti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’tiādinā (pārā. 44) tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ajjhācāre paññattasikkhāpadaṃ. Padabhājanīyanti tassa tassa sikkhāpadassa ‘‘yo panāti yo yādiso’’tiādinayappavattaṃ (pārā. 45) vibhajanaṃ. Antarāpattīti ‘‘paṭilātaṃ ukkhipati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 355) evamādinā sikkhāpadantaresu paññattā āpatti. Anāpattīti ‘‘anāpatti ajānantassa asādiyantassa ummattakassa khittacittassa vedanāṭṭassa ādikammikassā’’tiādinayappavatto kacchedoti ‘‘dasāhātikkante atikkantasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, dasāhātikkante vematiko nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, dasāhātikkante anatikkantasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 468) evamādinayappavatto tikapācittiyatikadukkaṭādibhedo tikaparicchedo.
由此可知,在此过程中,于身心生起之心蕴中,应分别取其每一心流的各个法蕴为单个法蕴。此处的“单个法蕴”,根据教法所说的“各自微少而缺”的意思,应理会为“各自独立分割的单个心流部分”即“单独的法蕴”。此理由“单个”一词可知,即指出该法义乃从意义上理会开的存在,是如教法所述的“单个法蕴”。“存在事物”等语义中,事物乃是指诸如善恶法蕴等内容。佛陀的教典纲要中说:“若比库已于比库群中,完成修习生活教法”,即于每项具体修习戒律而言,为其相应的戒律划分。所谓的“词分”指的正是该修戒中“什么样法门”的划分,依经文(如[帕拉44],[帕拉45])所示。所谓的“中断障”,即“故意犯戒,称为恶业”,诸戒律之间规定的禁止犯戒情况,如经文[巴吉帝亚355]述及。《尼萨耆亚巴吉帝亚》(pācittiya)则书记犯戒之种类,称为不可犯、应悔过等不同等级。所谓“无过”,如经文所言:“未知、不嫉妒、不狂妄、心平静、虽伤害但非故意的人”,故不算过犯。经文[帕拉468]记载三类过犯,即超越十戒之有不同种类。由此表明,此处述说的三类回控过失范围、过戒之异同,构成三条戒律各别处分章节的涵盖范畴。
Idāni evametaṃ abhedato rasavasena ekavidhantiādinā ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo…pe… imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti buddhavacanaṃ dhammavinayādibhedena vavatthapetvā saṅgāyantena mahākassapapamukhena vasīgaṇena anekacchariyapātubhāvapaṭimaṇḍitāya saṅgītiyā imassa piṭakassa vinayabhāvo majjhimabuddhavacanādibhāvo ca vavatthāpitoti dasseti. Na kevalaṃ imamevimassa yathāvuttappabhedaṃ vavatthapetvā saṅgītaṃ, atha kho aññampīti dassento āha ‘‘na kevalañca imamevā’’tiādi. Tattha uddānasaṅgaho paṭhamapārājikādīsu āgatānaṃ vinītavatthuādīnaṃ saṅkhepato saṅgahadassanavasena dhammasaṅgāhakehi kathitā –
如今,为了明确不分彼此,藉修辞和平易之说,以「法法戒戒……此为律、此为法……如是而非彼」诸佛陀所说经典为基础,及由大师大咖萨巴等众多圣众会集、曾显现多般神迹的集会,藉由议论归纳而缔成本经律藏的律体,已充分说明律藏之本义及其根本于中佛陀语中的根本法义。不仅如此,以如实叙说这般律体原义与分派,多次会合而成《集论》传诵。以此而示现学人不可仅止于这一义,而当观察甚广、多方涵盖之内容。
‘‘Makkaṭī vajjiputtā ca, gihī naggo ca titthiyā;
“诡辩者与委蛇族之子,以及居家男,裸体者与异教外道;
Dārikuppalavaṇṇā ca, byañjanehipare duve’’ti. (pārā. 66) –
青涩女儿和另一类尽是谣诼者。”(节选自[帕拉66])——
Ādikā gāthāyo. Sīlakkhandhavaggamūlapariyāyavaggādivasena saṅgaho vaggasaṅgaho. Uttarimanussadhammapeyyālanīlacakkapeyyālādivavatthāpanavasena peyyālasaṅgaho. Aṅguttaranikāyādīsu ekakanipātādisaṅgaho. Saṃyuttanikāye devatāsaṃyuttādivasena saṃyuttasaṅgaho. Majjhimanikāyādīsu mūlapaṇṇāsakādivasena paṇṇāsakasaṅgaho.
此为开端章节之诗句。依戒律聚集卷、诗论卷、总序卷等组合而成的篇章聚集称为卷聚。上人善护及各时代常人、贤圣所赞之聚昭示善法。阿含经集内诸天聚、侍者聚等内容汇聚称为集聚。中部经及其他部派五十卷之聚合谓之五十聚。
Assa buddhavacanassa saṅgītipariyosāne sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viyāti sambandho. Saṅkampīti uddhaṃ uddhaṃ gacchantī suṭṭhu kampi. Sampakampīti uddhaṃ adho ca gacchantī sampakampi. Sampavedhīti catūsu disāsu gacchantī suṭṭhu pavedhi. Accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttāni acchariyāni, pupphavassacelukkhepādīni . Yā paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti dhammasaṅgāhakehi mahākassapādīhi pañcahi satehi yena katā saṅgītā, tena pañcasatāni etissā atthīti ‘‘pañcasatā’’ti ca, thereheva katattā therā mahākassapādayo etissā atthīti ‘‘therikā’’ti ca loke vuccati, ayaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāmāti sambandho.
这段是关于佛陀所说法的集结终结处的详细解释。这里说明「saṅgīti」一词本意为“齐声诵持”,其词根「saṅkam」含义是“向上震动”,“sampakamp」意指“上下震动”,“sampavedh」则为“向四方震颤”。又说「accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttāni acchariyāni」指的是适合用来敲击的铜钹、盆形器等。所谓「paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti」即最初的大集结,指由持法者、大咖萨巴等五百人聚集而成的传承,故称「pañcasatāni」五百人,其意不仅仅在数目,而蕴涵此大集结的意义。又称「therā mahākassapādayo」即“长老们及大咖萨巴们”,连称为「therikā」——世间通称为长老们组成的首次大集结,意指佛法教团首次集会的集结事理。此即所谓最初大集结的名称与关联。
Evaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassetvā yadatthaṃ sā idha nidassitā, taṃ nigamanavasena dassento ‘‘imissā’’tiādimāha. Āyasmatā upālittherena vuttanti ‘‘tena samayenā’’tiādi vakkhamānaṃ sabbaṃ nidānavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Kimatthaṃ panettha dhammavinayasaṅgahe kathiyamāne nidānavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu ca bhagavatā bhāsitavacanasseva saṅgaho kātabboti? Vuccate – desanāya ṭhitiasammosasaddhaeyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakaparisāpadesehi upanibandhitvā ṭhapitā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti asammosadhammā saddheyyā ca, desakālakattuhetunimittehi upanibandho viya vohāravinicchayo. Teneva ca āyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘paṭhamapārājikaṃ āvuso, upāli, kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā desādipucchāsu katāsu tāsaṃ visajjanaṃ karontena āyasmatā upālittherena ‘‘tena samayenā’’tiādinā paṭhamapārājikassa nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ.
继续说明该“最初大集结”的涵义之后,阐明此集结的指示目的是用于做结语时的说明,别出心裁地说“imissā”是开头。且引述具寿长老乌波利的说法:「tena samayenā」等词语作开头。说明在论述佛陀所说戒律及教法汇集时,开头的缘由是所谓“结语”。接着提出疑问:如今讨论的教法律藏汇集是否就是佛陀所说法的集结?回答是:此为“安住演说”(desanāya ṭhitiasammosa)与信可证法的确立。缘于时间地域等诸多因缘条件的牵连,维持会集,使得经典教法能够长久保存,如同契约般维持而不败坏。具寿长老大咖萨巴对此首次巴拉基戒律的起因也给予了相应的说明和根源返溯。
Apica sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthakā paṭipatti attahitatthā vā, tasmā paresaṃyevatthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ yathāpavattaṃ vuccamānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ sattānaṃ anusāsanaṭṭhena sāsanaṃ, na kabbaracanā. Tayidaṃ satthuracitaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesehi saddhiṃ tattha tattha nidānavacanehi yathārahaṃ pakāsīyati.
并指明开启结语的原因不仅是为了展现三藏教法的圆满成就。指出除世尊外,无人能以无上智慧悲愍为众生摄持此圆满事业。故依佛所成就之法,透过世尊的身语意与正法正行,以示范众生而非人为虚构。如此,透过时间与地域的传承,借助结语文字,正现佛陀至尊圣法的广泛弘持,由是佛法在世长存。
Apica satthuno pamāṇabhāvappakāsanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ, tañcassa pamāṇabhāvadassanaṃ ‘‘buddho bhagavā’’ti iminā padadvayena vibhāvitanti veditabbaṃ. Buddhoti hi iminā tathāgatassa anaññasādhāraṇasuparisuddhañāṇādiguṇavisesayogaparidīpanena, bhagavāti ca iminā rāgadosamohādisabbakilesamaladuccaritādidosappahānadīpanena, tato eva ca sabbasattuttamabhāvadīpanena ayamattho sabbathā pakāsito hotīti idamettha nidānavacanappayojanassa mukhamattanidassanaṃ.
进一步指出结语的话语具足佛法圆满规模的展现,且「buddho bhagavā」这对词直接表达佛陀的法身广大。所称“佛”指的是如来般彼无二无别的清净智慧与殊胜法德。而“世尊”所彰显的是其能断除贪瞋痴等烦恼烦秽的德行。基于此二词,表明这是佛陀最高完美的展现,是绝对无二的最高真理。此即「nidānavacana」——结语话语的根本用意,仅以此开篇示现教法正法圆满为宗旨。
Tatrāyaṃ ācariyaparamparāti tasmiṃ jambudīpe ayaṃ ācariyānaṃ paramparā paveṇī paṭipāṭi. Upāli dāsakotiādīsu upālitthero pākaṭoyeva, dāsakattherādayo pana evaṃ veditabbā . Vesāliyaṃ kira eko dāsako nāma brāhmaṇamāṇavo tiṇṇaṃ antevāsikasatānaṃ jeṭṭhantevāsiko hutvā ācariyassa santike sippaṃ uggaṇhanto dvādasavassikoyeva tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū ahosi. So ekadivasaṃ antevāsikaparivuto dhammavinayaṃ saṅgāyitvā vālikārāme nivasantaṃ āyasmantaṃ upālittheraṃ upasaṅkamitvā attano vedesu sabbāni gaṇṭhiṭṭhānāni theraṃ pucchi. Theropi sabbaṃ byākaritvā sayampi ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanto nāmaṃ sandhāya imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi ‘‘ekadhammo kho, māṇava, sabbesu dhammesu anupatati, sabbepi, māṇava, dhammā ekadhammasmiṃ osaranti, katamo nu kho so, māṇavaka, dhammo’’ti. Sopi kho māṇavo pañhassa atthaṃ ajānanto ‘‘kimidaṃ bho pabbajitā’’ti āha. Buddhamantoyaṃ māṇavāti. Sakkā panāyaṃ bho mayhampi dātunti. Sakkā, māṇava, amhehi gahitapabbajjaṃ gaṇhantassa dātunti. ‘‘Sādhu kho bho pabbajitā’’ti māṇavo sampaṭicchitvā attano mātaraṃ pitaraṃ ācariyañca anujānāpetvā tīhi antevāsikasatehi saddhiṃ therassa santike pabbajitvā paripuṇṇavīsativasso upasampadaṃ labhitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Thero taṃ dhuraṃ katvā khīṇāsavasahassassa piṭakattayaṃ vācesi.
此段述及师承相传,指出在此人间界即“Jambudīpa”,此乃诸导师相传之轨迹。举例称持律长老乌波利出自名为Upāli dāsako弟子支派,传承世间众多长老。及其略述称乌波利及诸长老为沙门教团中声誉极高的人物。说起乌波利与一位名为“达萨哥”的调达婆罗门学徒的故事,彼于家中住满十二三十年,得法后归依长老,最终于二十二年间授具足戒道果,且讲解佛陀法教。乌波利讲授有关戒律与教义,成为广大弟子的尊师,得到释迦牟尼佛正法三藏的承传,堪称佛教传承重要根基。
Soṇako pana dāsakattherassa saddhivihāriko. So kira kāsīsu ekassa vāṇijakassa putto hutvā pañcadasavassuddesiko ekaṃ samayaṃ mātāpitūhi saddhiṃ vāṇijjāya giribbajaṃ gato. Tato pañcapaññāsadārakehi saddhiṃ veḷuvanaṃ gantvā tattha dāsakattheraṃ saparisaṃ disvā ativiya pasanno pabbajjaṃ yācitvā therena mātāpitaro anujānāpetvā ‘‘pabbajāhī’’ti vutto mātāpitusantikaṃ gantvā tamatthaṃ ārocetvā tesu anicchantesu chinnabhatto hutvā mātāpitaro anujānāpetvā pañcapaññāsāya dārakehi saddhiṃ therassa santike pabbajitvā laddhūpasampado arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Taṃ thero sakalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhāpesi. Sopi gaṇapāmokkho hutvā bahūnaṃ dhammavinayaṃ vācesi.
续述名为索拿者是名为“达萨哥”的长老的信徒。索拿家住迦尸国商人家庭,年十五随父母商旅渐入道场,参访森林中达萨哥比库长老与其众弟子。极为欢喜,求受出家戒定,获父母允准,最终具足戒果,成就阿拉汉果位。此长老传授佛之教法广大经典,被众生称扬。最终,索拿比库成就自由解脱,为多数弟子讲说法教律藏,此乃教团解脱与传承的重要基石。
Siggavatthero pana soṇakattherassa saddhivihāriko ahosi. So kira pāṭaliputte siggavo nāma amaccaputto hutvā tiṇṇaṃ utūnaṃ anucchavikesu tīsu pāsādesu sampattiṃ anubhavamāno ekadivasaṃ attano sahāyena caṇḍavajjinā seṭṭhiputtena saddhiṃ saparivāro kukkuṭārāmaṃ gantvā tattha soṇakattheraṃ nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā nisinnaṃ disvā vanditvā attanā saddhiṃ anālapantaṃ ñatvā gantvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pucchitvā bhikkhūhi ‘‘samāpattiṃ samāpannā nālapantī’’ti vutto ‘‘kathaṃ, bhante, samāpattito vuṭṭhahantī’’ti puna pucchitvā tehi ca bhikkhūhi ‘‘satthuno ceva saṅghassa ca pakkosanāya yathāparicchinnakālato āyusaṅkhayā ca vuṭṭhahantī’’ti vatvā tassa saparivārassa upanissayaṃ disvā saṅghassa vacanena nirodhā vuṭṭhāpitaṃ soṇakattheraṃ disvā ‘‘kasmā, bhante, mayā saddhiṃ nālapitthā’’ti pucchitvā therena ‘‘bhuñjitabbakaṃ kumāra bhuñjimhā’’ti vutte ‘‘sakkā nu kho, bhante, amhehipi taṃ bhojetu’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘sakkā, kumāra, amhādise katvā bhojetu’’nti vutte tamatthaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ ārocetvā tehi anuññāto attano sahāyena caṇḍavajjinā tehi ca pañcahi purisasatehi saddhiṃ soṇakattherassa santike pabbajitvā upasampanno ahosi. Tattha siggavo ca caṇḍavajjī ca dve upajjhāyasseva santike dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā aparabhāge chaḷabhiññā ahesuṃ.
比库长老思伽迦是善信修行者,见于巴塔利布特。思伽迦乃名,当时为无父之子,于三层高楼三座殿阁中享有安乐。一日,他与其助手善达跋闍、长者之子及伙伴众等,共同前往鸡庵。抵达后,思伽迦长老进入寂止入定,坐下后见众人敬礼,自己亦与众同礼,内心深知未曾动摇。随后他前往拜访并询问比库僧团,僧众告知“已入定者未动摇”,他又问诸比库:“尊者,如何定已立而未动摇?”比库们答曰:“师与僧团,为防其间不和故,虽时日短暂亦能延寿。”显示他们因僧团和师的教导,防止不和,使心定稳固。思伽迦长老就此向随行家眷示现其依止,获允并荐告其母父。他与助手善达跋闍,以及五百男众同住,正式出家并得具足上座学位。此间,思伽迦与善达跋闍作为两位辅导师,共同修习律法,后皆获六种通达智慧。
Tissassa pana moggaliputtassa anupubbakathā parato āvi bhavissati. Vijitāvinoti vijitasabbakilesapaṭipakkhattā vijitavanto. Paramparāyāti paṭipāṭiyā, anukkamenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Jambusirivhayeti jambusadisanāme, jambunāmaketi vuttaṃ hoti. Mahantena hi jamburukkhena abhilakkhitattā dīpopi ‘‘jambū’’ti vuccati. Acchijjamānaṃ avinassamānaṃ katvā.
关于摩诃里子长老,后续将有渐次阐述。梵音“Vijitāvinoti”意为誓服一切污垢之法,称为已胜、已服之意。传承(paramparā)指依序传递法义,循序渐进(anukkamena)又是对应说法。朱摩伞(Jambusiri)指印度一带,也称朱摩。当中“大朱摩树”(mahantena jamburukkha)采用“朱摩”为名,即使树生灭变化不常常存在,故称恒常不灭。
Vinayavaṃsantiādīhi tīhi vinayapāḷiyeva kathitā pariyāyavacanattā. Pakataññutanti veyyattiyaṃ, paṭubhāvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhuraggāho ahosīti padhānaggāhī ahosi, sabbesaṃ pāmokkho hutvā gaṇhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhikkhūnaṃ samudāyo samūho bhikkhusamudāyo, samaṇagaṇoti attho.
《律藏谱记》等三部律译书中,使用多种释名称谓。所谓‘现成把持者’意为专执主干的把持者,能摄持全体而不失。比库的集合称为“比库聚集”,意指比库群体统合,亦称“沙门众”。
Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ · 如是《一切善见》律注释中《心义灯》
Paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā samattā. · 第一大结集故事解释完毕。
Dutiyasaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā第二结集故事解释
‘‘Yadā nibbāyiṃsū’’ti sambandho. Jotayitvā ca sabbadhīti tameva saddhammaṃ sabbattha pakāsayitvā. ‘‘Jutimanto’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena ‘‘jutīmanto’’ti vuttaṃ, paññājotisampannāti attho, tejavantoti vā, mahānubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nibbāyiṃsūti anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyiṃsu. Pahīnasabbakilesattā natthi etesaṃ katthaci ālayo taṇhāti anālayā, vītarāgāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“当涅槃时”之语关系,点燃普遍光明宏法。诗句中“有光明者”亦作“有光焰者”,指智慧光明充满,亦称大德。涅槃无染因故称为无依涅槃,谓无一切染污之所依。断弃全污故无贪对象故称无爱,谓情欲脱离。
Vassasataparinibbute bhagavatīti vassasataṃ parinibbutassa assāti vassasataparinibbuto, bhagavā, tasmiṃ parinibbānato vassasate atikkanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Vesālikāti vesālīnivāsino. Vajjiputtakāti vajjiraṭṭhe vesāliyaṃ kulānaṃ puttā. Kappati siṅgīloṇakappoti siṅgena loṇaṃ pariharitvā pariharitvā aloṇakapiṇḍapātena saddhiṃ bhuñjituṃ kappati, na sannidhiṃ karotīti adhippāyo. Kappati dvaṅgulakappoti dvaṅgulaṃ atikkantāya chāyāya vikāle bhojanaṃ bhuñjituṃ kappatīti attho. Kappati gāmantarakappoti ‘‘gāmantaraṃ gamissāmī’’ti pavāritena anatirittabhojanaṃ bhuñjituṃ kappatīti attho. Kappati āvāsakappoti ekasīmāyaṃ nānāsenāsanesu visuṃ visuṃ uposathādīni saṅghakammāni kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho. Kappati anumatikappoti ‘‘anāgatānaṃ āgatakāle anumatiṃ gahessāmī’’ti tesu anāgatesuyeva vaggena saṅghena kammaṃ katvā pacchā anumatiṃ gahetuṃ kappati, vaggakammaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo. Kappati āciṇṇakappoti ācariyupajjhāyehi āciṇṇo kappatīti attho. So pana ekacco kappati dhammiko, ekacco na kappati adhammikoti veditabbo. Kappati amathitakappoti yaṃ khīraṃ khīrabhāvaṃ vijahitaṃ dadhibhāvaṃ asampattaṃ, taṃ bhuttāvinā pavāritena anatirittaṃ bhuñjituṃ kappatīti attho. Kappati jalogiṃ pātunti ettha jalogīti taruṇasurā. Yaṃ majjasambhāraṃ ekato kataṃ majjabhāvamasampattaṃ, taṃ pātuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Jātarūparajatanti sarasato vikāraṃ anāpajjitvā sabbadā jātaṃ rūpameva hotīti jātaṃ rūpametassāti jātarūpaṃ, suvaṇṇaṃ. Dhavalasabhāvatāya rājatīti rajataṃ, rūpiyaṃ. Susunāgaputtoti susunāgassa putto.
“百年涅槃尊者”意指尊者涅槃历百年,“涅槃百年”谓跨越此百岁。韦萨利是韦萨利居民称谓。“瓦吉部族子”,意即瓦吉国族之子。‘卡帕提’指避盐行动,即以无盐饭代替盐饭而非相会。‘卡帕提’如双肘长饭、跨村饭、宿务饭、与先辈约许可饭、已学经理、师长委托等多种含义。须区分者:有些含义属佛法,有些非佛法。“阿马提塔卡”意为不能食用之乳制品,即未熟成或已坏败乳品不可食用。‘水酒’指青酒。中含骨髓鲜血成分也不可食用。‘出生之色’,即水华变化,永远生起色彩,亦称为金银之色,银色亦作贵白银‘银会’。轻云滋养之子称为素云亚迦。
Kākaṇḍakaputtoti kākaṇḍakabrāhmaṇassa putto. Vajjīsūti janapadavacanattā bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ. Ekopi hi janapado ruḷhīsaddattā bahuvacanena vuccati. Yena vesālī, tadavasarīti yena disābhāgena vesālī avasaritabbā, yasmiṃ vā padese vesālī, tadavasari, taṃ pattoti attho. Mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyanti ettha mahāvanaṃ nāma sayaṃjātamaropimaṃ saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vanaṃ. Kapilavatthusāmantā pana mahāvanaṃ himavantena saha ekābaddhaṃ aparicchedaṃ hutvā mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitaṃ, idaṃ tādisaṃ na hotīti saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vananti mahāvanaṃ. Kūṭāgārasālā pana mahāvanaṃ nissāya kate ārāme kūṭāgāraṃ anto katvā haṃsavaṭṭakacchannena haṃsamaṇḍalākārena katā.
迦干陀婆罗门之子称迦干陀子。瓦吉指多地之复数称谓。有一国名亦可以复数呼之。‘属韦萨利’谓居于韦萨利及其邻近之地。‘大林’即大林区,名自一大树林。由喜马拉雅连结,广大无边故称为大林。林中建有庙舍,依林成坐处,内部设有天鹅圆座形建筑。
Tadahuposatheti ettha tadahūti tasmiṃ ahani, tasmiṃ divaseti attho. Upavasanti etthāti uposatho, upavasitabbadivaso. Upavasantīti ca sīlena vā sabbaso āhārassa ca abhuñjanasaṅkhātena anasanena vā khīrapānamadhupānādimattena vā upetā hutvā vasantīti attho. So panesa divaso aṭṭhamīcātuddasīpannarasībhedena tividho. Katthaci pana pātimokkhepi sīlepi upavāsepi paññattiyampi uposathasaddo āgato. Tathā hesa ‘‘āyāmāvuso kappina, uposathaṃ gamissāmā’’tiādīsu pātimokkhuddese āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato kho visākhe uposatho upavuttho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.43) sīle. ‘‘Suddhassa ve sadā pheggu, suddhassuposatho sadā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.79) upavāse. ‘‘Uposatho nāma nāgarājā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.246; ma. ni. 3.258) paññattiyañca āgato. Tattha upecca vasitabbato uposatho pātimokkhuddeso. Upetena samannāgatena hutvā vasitabbato santāne vāsetabbato uposatho sīlaṃ. Asanādisaṃyamādiṃ vā upecca vasantīti uposatho upavāso. Tathārūpe hatthiassavisese uposathoti samaññāmattato uposatho paññatti. Idha pana ‘‘na, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe sabhikkhukā āvāsā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 181) viya uposathadivaso adhippeto, tasmā tadahuposatheti tasmiṃ uposathadivaseti attho. Kaṃsapātinti suvaṇṇapātiṃ. Kahāpaṇampītiādīsu kahāpaṇassa samabhāgo aḍḍho. Pādo catutthabhāgo. Māsakoyeva māsakarūpaṃ. Sabbaṃ tāva vattabbanti iminā sattasatikakkhandhake (cūḷava. 446 ādayo) āgatā sabbāpi pāḷi idha ānetvā vattabbāti dasseti. Sā kuto vattabbāti āha ‘‘yāva imāya pana vinayasaṅgītiyā’’tiādi. Saṅgāyitasadisameva saṅgāyiṃsūti sambandho.
所谓“彼时斋日”,此处“彼时”指当天,“斋日”指该日。依此,斋日意谓须守的斋戒日。斋戒日即持戒清净、不饮食或虽食而止,且不饮牛乳、酒等之时。此日分为八类,依第八天至第十四天的月相划分,三种类别。有时佛律文献中亦见“斋戒”、“戒律”及“斋日”之用语。比如律藏中有“诸贤友啊,我们将赴斋戒”等语。斋戒作为修持清净戒律之日,乃八支法具足者视之为三僧共浴之日。另外中部律藏中云“纯净者恒持戒,斋戒即纯净”,亦说明斋戒即是持戒净行;又如长部律藏云“斋戒者谓诸天主”,这是修定的正式称谓。此处所说斋戒之义,乃指应当守持依律戒法之日;而依此斋戒清净且守戒的人,常居分别于法之间。就持斋戒而言,舍断坐卧饮食等,依止节制而生活。虽不食但保持适当服用牛乳酒类少量者亦包含其中,此为斋戒之义。特别有某特定手结行仪者,名曰斋戒,乃相当规模之僧团遵循名号。这里如“大比库团律”记有“不,那时斋日无比库集住”等,表明斋戒日是受严格约束之日,所以称为当天斋日。铜币称为“金铢”,其中含“卡币”即半,四分作一脚,月十五称某月之象。此诸说源自七百经藏中的短部律蔵,为典型巴利文所记述,一切古籍皆以巴利文为本,于此皆应予引述讲解。问其缘起何以为此日,当加以“遵守律藏内载经文”,以保持律法传统无误。律律者,乃彼所藏戒律。「守持」二字谓身心戒行不失也。
Pubbe kataṃ upādāyāti pubbe kataṃ paṭhamasaṅgītimupādāya. Sā panāyaṃ saṅgītīti sambandho. Tesūti tesu saṅgītikārakesu theresu. Vissutāti gaṇapāmokkhatāya vissutā sabbattha pākaṭā. Tasmiñhi sannipāte aṭṭheva gaṇapāmokkhā mahātherā ahesuṃ, tesu ca vāsabhagāmī sumanoti dve therā anuruddhattherassa saddhivihārikā, avasesā cha ānandattherassa. Ete pana sabbepi aṭṭha mahātherā bhagavantaṃ diṭṭhapubbā. Idāni te there sarūpato dassento āha ‘‘sabbakāmī cā’’tiādi. Sāṇasambhūtoti sāṇadesavāsī sambhūtatthero . Dutiyo saṅgahoti sambandho. Pannabhārāti patitakkhandhabhārā. ‘‘Bhārā have pañcakkhandhā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.22) hi vuttaṃ. Katakiccāti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi kattabbassa pariññāpahānasaachakiriyābhāvanāsaṅkhātassa soḷasavidhassapi kiccassa pariniṭṭhitattā katakiccā.
所谓“先成之取”,是指之前所作之首次结集。此取名为“先成”,意即先前成就之取。所谓“聚”,指结集。言“诸聚者”,乃众结集者。所指戒律理事结集者名曰“长老”,八位大德为代表,这中有“象归”和“善心”两长老为阿努儒达长老事信者,其余为阿难长老等人。此八位皆为世尊昔日亲历见证。现今长老以此典范现身演讲,言曰“诸有求者皆在”,又云“有钱沙粒生”,此为出生于沙地之象。第二,称“集”,意为关系。名“智慧负担”,即承载五蕴之重。佛律中云“五蕴为负担”,意指烦恼诸蕴如重担。所谓“该业”,即四圣谛、四念处、四正勤等十六种根本行业已成就圆满,名曰该业。如实完成,智慧得以培养,业与根本皆成就。
Abbudanti upaddavaṃ vadanti corakammampi bhagavato vacanaṃ thenetvā attano vacanassa dīpanato . Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘abbudaṃ gaṇḍo’’ti vuttaṃ. Imanti vakkhamānanidassanaṃ. Sandissamānā mukhā sammukhā. Uparibrahmalokūpapattiyā bhāvitamagganti uparibrahmaloke upapattiyā uppāditajjhānaṃ. Jhānañhi tatrūpapattiyā upāyabhāvato idha ‘‘maggo’’ti vuttaṃ. Upāyo hi ‘‘maggo’’ti vuccati. Vacanattho panettha – taṃ taṃ upapattiṃ maggati gavesati janeti nipphādetīti maggoti evaṃ veditabbo. Atthato cāyaṃ maggo nāma cetanāpi hoti cetanāsampayuttadhammāpi tadubhayampi. ‘‘Nirayañcāhaṃ, sāriputta, jānāmi nirayagāmiñca magga’’nti (ma. ni. 1.153) hi ettha cetanā maggo nāma.
“畸形”者谓烦恼障碍,所谓“盗贼业”,意指世尊之言揭示烦恼行者,亦揭示其自身之言光明正大。于“节制”处,谓“畸形”,谓面如疙瘩而非美貌。此乃言出或文字之显现。所谓“对头”,即面向互相相对。于上梵天,指归于上梵天界之入世法门,作禅定者则成就其境界之相应禅定。此处以“道”指此法门。所谓“法门”,即“道”也。此义亦谓由此法门探寻、生起并圆满成证因缘。此“道”即是一切行为之门,涉及心意之生起及其结合。于此意义,“道”为意也,为涵盖意与其相应之性。譬如大念处经云“我知地狱路,我知往地狱之道”,所谓是地狱道义,即是此意。
‘‘Saddhā hiriyaṃ kusalañca dānaṃ,
信心、羞耻心、善法与施
Dhammā ete sappurisānuyātā;
诸法随顺善人;
Etañhi maggaṃ diviyaṃ vadanti,
此即示现天道;
Etena hi gacchati devaloka’’nti. (a. ni. 8.32; kathā. 479) –
「由此而得生天界。」
Ettha cetanāsampayuttadhammā maggo nāma. ‘‘Ayaṃ bhikkhave maggo ayaṃ paṭipadā’’ti saṅkhārūpapattisuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.161) cetanāpi cetanāsampayuttadhammāpi maggo nāma. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne jhānassa adhippetattā cetanāsampayuttadhammā gahetabbā.
这里所说的“愿行相应之行”即被称为“道”。“这条道,诸比库,是行,是修习”,这在《行为成就经》等中有所论述。愿心及与愿心相应之法均称为“道”。在此处,由于禅定的主导地位,应当把愿心及愿行相应之法视为取持之法。
Moggalibrāhmaṇassāti lokasammatassa aputtakassa moggalināmabrāhmaṇassa. Nanu ca kathametaṃ nāma vuttaṃ ‘‘moggalibrāhmaṇassa gehe paṭisandhiṃ gahessatī’’ti. Kiṃ uparūpapattiyā paṭiladdhasamāpattīnampi kāmāvacare uppatti hotīti? Hoti. Sā ca katādhikārānaṃ mahāpuññānaṃ cetopaṇidhivasena hoti, na sabbesanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha mahaggatassa garukakammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā parittakammaṃ kathamattano vipākassa okāsaṃ karotīti? Ettha ca tāva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘nikantibaleneva jhānā parihāyati, tato parihīnajjhānā nibbattantī’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘anīvaraṇāvatthāya nikantiyā jhānassa parihāni vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbā’’ti vatvā evamettha kāraṇaṃ vadanti ‘‘satipi mahaggatakammuno vipākapaṭibāhanasamatthassa parittakammassapi abhāve ‘ijjhati, bhikkhave, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’ti (dī. ni. 3.337; a. ni. 8.35; saṃ. ni. 4.352) vacanato kāmabhave cetopaṇidhi mahaggatakammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā parittakammuno vipākassa okāsaṃ karotī’’ti.
“魔迦婆罗门者”指世间公认的非亲魔迦婆者,名为魔迦婆罗门。然何以说“魔迦婆罗门必将在家续弦”呢?难道因其获得上层果位,也会产生淫欲行为吗?确有其事。此乃因阿阇世诸大善人以愿心坚定,非凡人皆可见。又大果位者因严重业报阻挡而转业,于转业时为何还会寻找转业机缘?此处如三结缘经中所说:“因强力禅定,禅定被破,破禅定即转生。”亦有说法:“因无障碍之由,因强力而破禅定,当考量。”又言:“有戒德清净及大果业者,因感淫欲业报而寻找转业时机。”(参《中部》3.337、《增支部》8.35、《相应部》4.352)此说指出:淫欲之业感应对大果无碍之戒定清净者,亦会促使转业机缘的产生。
Sādhusappurisāti ettha sādhūti āyācanatthe nipāto, taṃ yācāmāti attho. Haṭṭhapahaṭṭhoti cittapīṇanavasena punappunaṃ santuṭṭho. Udaggudaggoti sarīravikāruppādanapītivasena udaggudaggo. Pītimā hi puggalo kāyacittānaṃ uggatattā abbhuggatattā ‘‘udaggo’’ti vuccati. Sādhūti paṭissuṇitvāti ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭivacanaṃ datvā. Tīretvāti niṭṭhapetvā. Puna paccāgamiṃsūti puna āgamiṃsu. Tena kho pana samayenāti yasmiṃ samaye dutiyasaṅgītiṃ akaṃsu, tasmiṃ samayeti attho. Navakāti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘daharabhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ na sampāpuṇiṃsūti taṃ vajjiputtakehi uppāditaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vinicchinituṃ na sampāpuṇiṃsu nāgamiṃsu. No ahuvatthāti sambandho. Idaṃ daṇḍakammanti idāni vattabbaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā parinibbutāti sambandho, yāva attano attano āyuparimāṇaṃ, tāva ṭhatvā parinibbutāti attho.
“贤善人”此处以“贤”作为请求的敬辞,即“请求”之意。“爽然畅快”意谓心神清扬、心满意足。“举扬不退”形容身体疾病消除、神志清明而称为“举扬”。“贤”用来表示同意或认可。“涤清”表示肃清洁净。“复来复往”含重新来往之意。此时正当第二次聚会,故称“当时”。“新者”是为阐释“幼年比库”之语。处理事项未成者,学徒们发难未成,未归来不能说明。非“不成元旨”,但与此有关。今谓“刀杖业”,乃为戒律所说。以寿命长短为限,“于寿命终止时舍弃(身命)”,是其意。
Kiṃ pana katvā te therā parinibbutāti āha ‘‘dutiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Anāgatepi saddhammavuḍḍhiyā hetuṃ katvā parinibbutāti sambandho. Idāni ‘‘tepi nāma evaṃ mahānubhāvā therā aniccatāya vasaṃ gatā, kimaṅgaṃ pana aññe’’ti saṃvejetvā ovadanto āha ‘‘khīṇāsavā’’tiādi. Aniccatāvasanti aniccatāvasattaṃ, aniccatāyattabhāvaṃ aniccatādhīnabhāvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Jammiṃ lāmakaṃ durabhisambhavaṃ anabhibhavanīyaṃ atikkamituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ aniccataṃ evaṃ ñatvāti sambandho. Keci pana ‘‘durabhisambhava’’nti ettha ‘‘pāpuṇituṃ asakkuṇeyya’’nti imamatthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘yaṃ durabhisambhavaṃ niccaṃ amataṃ padaṃ, taṃ pattuṃ vāyame dhīro’’ti sambandhaṃ vadanti. Sabbākārenāti sabbappakārena vattabbaṃ kiñcipi asesetvā dutiyasaṅgīti saṃvaṇṇitāti adhippāyo.
对此比长老们结论说:“做了第二次汇整。”又谓,“即使未来,因圣法增长,亦成尽头。”现在劝诫说:“正如诸尊大德长老已入无常之境界,其他呢?”称为“已断伏藏者”。无常说即无常真如;无常的依止即无常;无常的资具为无常的从属。假使长久存在,却难以克服;若明了无常即是此义。有人谓“难以克服”是指“难于抵达不死无生之境”,故称“坚忍者应努力”。“全面而言”是指应全面考量,勿遗留片段,第二次汇整由此得名。
Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ · 如是《一切善见》律注释中《心义灯》
Dutiyasaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā samattā. · 第二结集故事解释完毕。
Tatiyasaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā第三结集故事解释
Imissā pana saṅgītiyā dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi nikkaḍḍhitā te dasasahassā vajjiputtakā bhikkhū pakkhaṃ pariyesamānā attano attano anurūpaṃ dubbalapakkhaṃ labhitvā visuṃ mahāsaṅghikaṃ ācariyakulaṃ nāma akaṃsu, tato bhijjitvā aparāni dve ācariyakulāni jātāni gokulikā ca ekabyohārikā ca. Gokulikanikāyato bhijjitvā aparāni dve ācariyakulāni jātāni paṇṇattivādā ca bāhuliyā ca. Bahussutikātipi tesaṃyeva nāmaṃ, tesaṃyeva antarā cetiyavādā nāma apare ācariyavādā uppannā. Evaṃ mahāsaṅghikācariyakulato dutiye vassasate pañcācariyakulāni uppannāni, tāni mahāsaṅghikehi saddhiṃ cha honti.
这第二次汇整由诸多法汇总长老们拆分辑录,约一万名比库分别依其能力和弱点寻找各自合适的宗派,遂形成名为“大众分支”的宗派。该派分隔后生出两教派:古库利派和单子支派。古库利派因分裂,产生其他两派,论学亦多丰富。广闻派亦如此得名,其派内甚至产生诸多间派称为「刹坛论派」和其他教师派别。大大众分支自此,至第二个百年,生出五个宗派,此五派与大众分支相和合。
Tasmiṃyeva dutiye vassasate theravādato bhijjitvā dve ācariyavādā uppannā mahisāsakā ca vajjiputtakā ca. Tattha vajjiputtakavādato bhijjitvā apare cattāro ācariyavādā uppannā dhammuttarikā bhaddayānikā channāgārikā samitikāti. Puna tasmiṃyeva dutiye vassasate mahisāsakavādato bhijjitvā sabbatthivādā dhammaguttikāti dve ācariyavādā uppannā. Puna sabbatthivādakulato bhijjitvā kassapikā nāma jātā, kassapikesupi bhinnesu apare saṅkantikā nāma jātā, saṅkantikesu bhinnesu suttavādā nāma jātāti theravādato bhijjitvā ime ekādasa ācariyavādā uppannā, te theravādena saddhiṃ dvādasa honti. Iti ime ca dvādasa mahāsaṅghikānañca cha ācariyavādāti sabbe aṭṭhārasa ācariyavādā dutiye vassasate uppannā. Aṭṭhārasa nikāyātipi aṭṭhārasācariyakulānītipi etesaṃyeva nāmaṃ. Etesu pana sattarasa vādā bhinnakā, theravādoveko asambhinnakoti veditabbo. Vuttampi cetaṃ dīpavaṃse –
在同一第二年雨季,依照长老派的说法,分别产生了两个戒师系派——摩诃萨迦派和钵笈多派。在钵笈多派的戒师传统基础上,又产生另外四个戒师派别,分别名为法护派、善见派、藏外护法派和界派。再者,在同一第二年雨季,依摩诃萨迦派戒师派系又产生两个派别,通称为方言护持派,其中又生出两种戒师派。再依方言护持派演变出名为迦叶派的戒师派,迦叶派又分出名为散迦尼迦派,散迦尼迦中又分出名为经藏派的戒师派。这些皆是依长老派说法产生的,以上共计十一戒师派,这些戒师派与长老派同属十二派。由此,十二个戒师派中还有十八大僧团戒师派,即共有十八个戒师派,在第二年雨季生起。十八大部派名称由十八戒师派组成。然而,在这十八戒师派中有七个是分裂的,长老派则保持不分裂,这是需要认识的。此义亦见于《岛史》云——
‘‘Nikkaḍḍhitā pāpabhikkhū, therehi vajjiputtakā;
“遭受排斥的恶比库,钵笈多派的长老们,
Aññaṃ pakkhaṃ labhitvāna, adhammavādī bahū janā.
结集另一派系,很多人主张非法教义。
‘‘Dasasahassā samāgantvā, akaṃsu dhammasaṅgahaṃ;
“聚集了十万各方的众比库,共同组成法的集会;
Tasmāyaṃ dhammasaṅgīti, mahāsaṅgīti vuccati.
因此此法集会称之为摩诃萨迦派。
‘‘Mahāsaṅgītikā bhikkhū, vilomaṃ akaṃsu sāsane;
“摩诃萨迦的比库们,在教法中背道而驰。”
Bhinditvā mūlasaṅgahaṃ, aññaṃ akaṃsu saṅgahaṃ.
斩断了根本的总集合,另立了不同的集合。
‘‘Aññatra saṅgahitaṃ suttaṃ, aññatra akariṃsu te;
『他们分别成就了不同的经文,也分别未成就;
Atthaṃ dhammañca bhindiṃsu, vinaye nikāyesu ca pañcasu.
他们破分了义理及法义,又于五种律部中分立;
‘‘Pariyāyadesitañcāpi , atho nippariyāyadesitaṃ;
也有解释圆通义者,或表述不圆通义者;
Nītatthañceva neyyatthaṃ, ajānitvāna bhikkhavo.
明确义理者亦有,应舍义理者,均为比库不知之事;
‘‘Aññaṃ sandhāya bhaṇitaṃ, aññaṃ atthaṃ ṭhapayiṃsu te;
以不同根本为基所说,以不同义理为依所立。』
Byañjanacchāyāya te bhikkhū, bahuṃ atthaṃ vināsayuṃ.
比库们因妄语影子,辜负了极大利益。
‘‘Chaḍḍetvāna ekadesaṃ, suttaṃ vinayagambhiraṃ;
「放弃了(原本的)唯一正理,连庄严之经律都弃舍;
Patirūpaṃ suttaṃ vinayaṃ, tañca aññaṃ kariṃsu te.
对正法正律之经,反而另作他说。」
‘‘Parivāraṃ atthuddhāraṃ, abhidhammaṃ chappakaraṇaṃ;
「对祛除疑惑、阐扬义理的从论,及阿毗达摩简要著作;
Paṭisambhidañca niddesaṃ, ekadesañca jātakaṃ;
还有分解讲述义理的讲解文,以及某一篇出生故事;
Ettakaṃ vissajjetvāna, aññāni akariṃsu te.
舍弃这些层级清晰的善法之后,他们不再为他人制作(义理阐释)。
‘‘Nāmaṃ liṅgaṃ parikkhāraṃ, ākappakaraṇāni ca;
『名称』者,是标记与辅助之物,亦为念处之所依。
Pakatibhāvaṃ vijahitvā, tañca aññaṃ akaṃsu te.
诸种相状已被断灭,彼等不复有他杂染之故。
‘‘Pubbaṅgamā bhinnavādā, mahāsaṅgītikārakā;
先时差别见解者,多为大合唱之因,
Tesañca anukārena, bhinnavādā bahū ahu.
依彼对应者亦多,乃众多差别见解之故。
‘‘Tato aparakālamhi, tasmiṃ bhedo ajāyatha;
其后异时,彼中差别又生起,
Gokulikā ekabyohāri, dvidhā bhijjittha bhikkhavo.
众比库如同牛乳之分裂,二者分裂而离散。
‘‘Gokulikānaṃ dve bhedā, aparakālamhi jāyatha;
『于牛奶供应者中,有两种差别,于不同的时段出现;』
Bahussutikā ca paññatti, dvidhā bhijjittha bhikkhavo.
『因多产而称呼的者,两种分别生起,比库们分开了。』
‘‘Cetiyā ca punavādī, mahāsaṅgītibhedakā;
『又有关于圣所(供养所)的说法,断除集会的大分;』
Pañca vādā ime sabbe, mahāsaṅgītimūlakā.
『这五种争论皆是以大分集会为根基。』
‘‘Atthaṃ dhammañca bhindiṃsu, ekadesañca saṅgahaṃ;
『他们分解了义理与法,集合为一的只是十一;』
Ganthañca ekadesañhi, chaḍḍetvā aññaṃ akaṃsu te.
『又割舍了其中一个编纂,余者唯有一个合成。』
‘‘Nāmaṃ liṅgaṃ parikkhāraṃ, ākappakaraṇāni ca;
『名称』『标志』『附属物』『起因条件』等诸义,皆为所说内容的差别因素,彼等相互异别而不相混合。
Pakatibhāvaṃ vijahitvā, tañca aññaṃ akaṃsu te.
若除去明显的本质特征,这些差别便无他别异,皆非另起新种。
‘‘Visuddhattheravādamhi, puna bhedo ajāyatha;
在清净长老说部中,再起分歧,
Mahisāsakā vajjiputtakā, dvidhā bhijjittha bhikkhavo.
如犍陀罗王族及摩揭陀国犍连子出,长老比库们产生二种分派。
‘‘Vajjiputtakavādamhi, catudhā bhedo ajāyatha;
在犍连子说部中,又起四种分歧,
Dhammatturikā bhaddayānikā, channāgārikā ca samiti.
彼等互为贵族派、有品德派、隐世派众多组织相互区别。
‘‘Mahisāsakānaṃ dve bhedā, aparakālamhi ajāyatha;
『犍萨迦族』中有两种派别,在后代时期产生。
Sabbatthivādā dhammaguttā, dvidhā bhijjittha bhikkhavo.
他们全然对立,法理交织,但比库们却分成两派。
‘‘Sabbatthivādānaṃ kassapikā, saṅkanti kassapikena ca;
二派中有称咖萨巴派的聚集,也有反对咖萨巴派的聚集;
Saṅkantikānaṃ suttavādī, anupubbena bhijjatha.
主张反对派者多遵循经论教说,渐次使之分裂。
‘‘Ime ekādasa vādā, pabhinnā theravādato;
这些派别总共有十一种教义,各自不同,但皆源自长老派。
Atthaṃ dhammañca bhindiṃsu, ekadesañca saṅgahaṃ;
这些教义法义彼此有破坏纠纷,同时亦有十一种综合归纳。
Ganthañca ekadesañhi, chaḍḍetvā aññaṃ akaṃsu te.
他们舍弃了一种或十种经卷,选择了另一部。
‘‘Nāmaṃ liṅgaṃ parikkhāraṃ, ākappakaraṇāni ca;
所谓名称、标志、辅助及配属的器具,
Pakatibhāvaṃ vijahitvā, tañca aññaṃ akaṃsu te.
他们剔除了明显的本质差别,只选择了另一种。
‘‘Sattarasa bhinnavādā, ekavādo abhinnako;
七种不同说法,主张一种不异说;
Sabbevaṭṭhārasa honti, bhinnavādena te saha;
所有传承派别与分裂学说伴存;
Nigrodhova mahārukkho, theravādānamuttamo.
长老派如同大榕树,最为至尊。
‘‘Anūnaṃ anadhikañca, kevalaṃ jinasāsanaṃ;
『不多也不少,只专注于如来教法;』
Kaṇṭakā viya rukkhamhi, nibbattā vādasesakā.
『如同荆棘在树中生起,扰乱语言的纷争。』
‘‘Paṭhame vassasate natthi, dutiye vassasatantare;
『初百年中无此纷争,第二百年间亦复如此;』
Bhinnā sattarasa vādā, uppannā jinasāsane’’ti.
『而是在如来教法中产生了七种不同的异说。』
Aparāparaṃ pana hemavatā rājagirikā siddhatthikā pubbaseliyā aparaseliyā vājiriyāti aññepi cha ācariyavādā uppannā. Purimakānaṃ pana aṭṭhārasannaṃ ācariyavādānaṃ vasena pavattamāne sāsane asoko dhammarājā paṭiladdhasaddho divase divase buddhapūjāya satasahassaṃ, dhammapūjāya satasahassaṃ, saṅghapūjāya satasahassaṃ, attano ācariyassa nigrodhattherassa satasahassaṃ, catūsu dvāresu bhesajjatthāya satasahassanti pañca satasahassāni pariccajanto sāsane uḷāraṃ lābhasakkāraṃ pavattesi. Tadā hatalābhasakkārehi titthiyehi uppāditaṃ anekappakāraṃ sāsanamalaṃ visodhetvā moggaliputtatissatthero tipiṭakapariyattidharānaṃ pabhinnapaṭisambhidānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sahassamekaṃ gahetvā yathā mahākassapatthero ca yasatthero ca dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyiṃsu, evameva saṅgāyanto tatiyasaṅgītiṃ akāsi. Idāni taṃ tatiyasaṅgītiṃ mūlato pabhuti vitthāretvā dassento āha ‘‘tissopi kho mahābrahmā brahmalokato cavitvā moggalibrāhmaṇassa gehe paṭisandhiṃ aggahesī’’tiādi.
「而自后之后,赫玛瓦塔的王舍城、悉达底城、前舍利城、后舍利城、瓦吉理国,有六种不同的老师说法各自出现。但在古时十八位老师说法一并兴盛时,当时名为阿育王的法王日复一日,于佛陀供养诵持法诵、法供养、僧供养,各有十万;于自己之老师尼格罗达长老亦供养十万;更在四城为医药供养十万,共计五十万,悉心供养,故于教法中获得显著的利益。彼时因获利丰厚,渡船产生诸多恶业,令法污浊者得以净除。此时摩诃利菩提长老及其弟子一同携带三藏经文并熟练解说之比库千人,依照大咖萨巴长老与雅萨长老整顿了戒律及教法,同样地,他们也整顿了第三次经藏。今由此第三次经藏之根基广泛展开而示现,说:『大梵天亦于三界之外,离世间而投生摩诃利菩提长老家中,重新受具足戒律。』」
Tattha gehe paṭisandhiṃ aggahesīti moggalibrāhmaṇassa gehe brāhmaṇiyā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ aggahesīti attho. Gehassa pana tannissayattā nissite nissayavohāravasena ‘‘gehe paṭisandhiṃ aggahesī’’ti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karonti, sabbo gāmo āgato’’ti. Sattavassānīti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Aticchathāti atikkamitvā icchatha, idha bhikkhā na labbhati, ito aññattha gantvā bhikkhaṃ pariyesathāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Bho pabbajitā’’tiādi brāhmaṇo attano gehe bhikkhālābhaṃ anicchanto āha. Paṭiyāditabhattatoti sampādetvā ṭhapitabhattato. Tadupiyanti tadanurūpaṃ. Upasamaṃ disvāti therassa kāyacittavūpasamaṃ punappunaṃ disvā, ñatvāti attho. Iriyāpathavūpasamasandassanena hi tannibandhino cittassa yoniso pavattiupasamopi viññāyati. Bhiyyoso mattāya pasīditvāti punappunaṃ visesato adhikataraṃ pasīditvā. Bhattavissaggakaraṇatthāyāti bhattakiccakaraṇatthāya. Adhivāsetvāti sampaṭicchitvā.
「这里说『重新受具足戒律』,意指摩诃利菩提在梵天家中,因其妻出家而再受持戒。『居家重新受戒』是依赖居家人及其交往关系而言,如同俗语『他们制造了桥梁,整个村庄都来了』之义。『七年』为指长时间紧密的场合用语。『意欲超越』指超越限制之意,此处指乞食不得,转往他处寻求乞食的策略。『尊者,你已出家了』等语乃婆罗门自己不愿得乞食而告言。『既被供养』即已拥有供养的意思。『因饮食』意指适合饮食之事。『见平静』指出长老身心平静,经常观察而知晓之。『通晓』即有所了解。因观身心平静,执着心渐减,故此智慧得以正确发生。『愈加专心致志』是指一再特别修习使精神更加安定清净。『为投弃供养作准备』意为为供养工作做准备。『安住』即身心安住于此。
Soḷasavassuddesikoti soḷasavassoti uddisitabbo voharitabboti soḷasavassuddeso, soyeva soḷasavassuddesiko. Soḷasavassoti vā uddisitabbataṃ arahatīti soḷasavassuddesiko, soḷasavassāni vā uddisitabbāni assāti soḷasavassuddesiko, soḷasavassoti uddeso vā assa atthīti soḷasavassuddesiko, atthato pana soḷasavassikoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragūti iruvedayajuvedasāmavedasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ paguṇakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gatoti pāragū. Pāragūti cettha niccasāpekkhatāya samāsādikaṃ veditabbaṃ. Laggetvāti olambetvā. Na ca kācīti ettha ca-saddo avadhāraṇe, kāci kathā neva uppajjatīti attho. Pallaṅkanti nisīditabbāsanaṃ. Uppajjissatīti etthāpi ‘‘kathā’’ti idaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Kupito anattamanoti kopena kupito, anattamano domanassena. Domanassasamaṅgī hi puggalo pītisukhehi na attamano na attacittoti anattamanoti vuccati. Na sakamanoti vā anattamano attano vase aṭṭhitacittattā.
“十六年净戒”之说,应称为“十六年净戒”,意指应知应行的“十六年净戒”,即就是“十六年净戒者”。“十六年”或指“应知应行阿拉汉”,亦即“十六年净戒者”;又或指应知应行的净戒有十六条,因此称“十六年净戒者”。“十六年”若为教义,则称“十六年净戒者”,实质上则称“十六年净戒”。三种受者即“觉者”之意,将三种医术以其区分命名为“越医”,此“越医”于此应理解为常住依缘而成之总名。湿着谓依附缠绕。此处“无何”一词无特定涵义,表示无所发生之意。“床榻”指应坐处所。此处“发生之说”亦即“言语”应相关而解。“忿怒”谓以忿怒心,非自身心;与忧愁心同类者,虽有人于喜乐境中,非自心智,故谓非自身心。非自我者,谓非自我之依止心态。
Caṇḍikkabhāveti caṇḍiko vuccati caṇḍo thaddhapuggalo, tassa bhāvo caṇḍikkaṃ, thaddhabhāvoti attho. Idha pana ‘‘caṇḍikkabhāve’’ti vuttattā caṇḍikoyeva caṇḍikkanti gahetabbaṃ, tena ‘‘caṇḍikkabhāve’’ti ettha thaddhabhāveti attho veditabbo. Kiñci mantanti kiñci vedaṃ. Aññe ke jānissantīti na keci jānissantīti adhippāyo. Pucchitvā sakkā jānitunti attano padesañāṇe ṭhitattā thero evamāha. Sabbaññubuddhā eva hi ‘‘puccha, māṇava, yadākaṅkhasī’’tiādinā paccekabuddhādīhi asādhāraṇaṃ sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārenti. Sāvakā pana padesañāṇe ṭhitattā ‘‘sutvā vedissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘pucchitvā sakkā jānitu’’nti vā vadanti.
“凶恶性状”谓以凶恶相而显现之人,其性状即为凶恶恶劣之意。此处“凶恶性状”既言性状也应理解为滞重性状。此处“凶恶性状”应理解为滞重状态乃本义。有人议论各异,有人虽知者少或无知,故有“无人知晓”之意。经问答时能了知则高僧如是说。诸大觉者之所,皆以“问道,童子,欲何”诸语及诸私佛以非常智慧,展示无上智慧之种种。弟子住于本处则言“闻得则知”,或言“问答即能知”。
Tīsu vedesūtiādīsu tayo vedā pubbe vuttanayā eva. Nighaṇḍūti nāmanighaṇḍurukkhādīnaṃ vevacanappakāsakaṃ satthaṃ, vevacanappakāsakanti ca pariyāyasaddadīpakanti attho, ekekassa atthassa anekapariyāyavacanavibhāvakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ anekesaṃ atthānaṃ ekasaddassa vacanīyatāvibhāvanavasenapi tassa ganthassa pavattattā. Vacanīyavācakabhāvena atthaṃ saddañca nikhaṇḍeti bhindati vibhajja dassetīti nikhaṇḍu, so eva idha kha-kārassa gha-kāraṃ katvā nighaṇḍūti vutto. Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo kavīnaṃ upakārasatthaṃ. Ettha ca kiriyākappavikappoti vacībhedādilakkhaṇā kiriyā kappīyati vikappīyati etenāti kiriyākappo, so pana vaṇṇapadabandhapadatthādivibhāgato bahuvikappoti kiriyākappavikappoti vuccati. Idañca mūlakiriyākappaganthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. So hi satasahassaparimāṇo nayādicariyādikaṃ pakaraṇaṃ. Vacanatthato pana kiṭati gameti kiriyādivibhāgaṃ, taṃ vā anavasesapariyādānato gamento pūretīti keṭubhanti vuccati, saha nighaṇḍunā keṭubhena ca sanighaṇḍukeṭubhā, tayo vedā. Tesu sanighaṇḍukeṭubhesu. Ṭhānakaraṇādivibhāgato nibbacanavibhāgato ca akkharā pabhedīyanti etenāti akkharappabhedo, sikkhā ca nirutti ca. Saha akkharappabhedenāti sākkharappabhedā, tesu sākkharappabhedesu. Itihāsapañcamesūti athabbanavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā ‘‘itiha āsa itiha āsā’’ti īdisavacanapaṭisaṃyutto purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā, tayo vedā. Tesu itihāsapañcamesu. Neva attanā passatīti neva sayaṃ passati, neva jānātīti attho. Puccha, byākarissāmīti ‘‘sabbāpi pucchā vedesuyeva antogadhā’’ti sallakkhento evamāha.
“三受者”等语,依此前说而成立。词汇书谓“词汇注释书”以及启示释义者,即为注释、释义书。注释书即注解多义词;此谓此书以词义多义解析呈现。仅以示例演示诸多义项之一辞书法,称之为辞书。此处将第一音节kha与第二音节gha分解,称为辞书。诗人称为创作与变换之道具。所谓创作与变换,指语义及语汇之变异。此述乃名词、形容词及动词等多义分解。此释出词根创作变异辞书。此书共有数十万字,首部包含意根及行动等。词义上则分为含义种类,故称辞书。有人谓此文相当于“旧史记第五”,意即通过附词述及古史已作成的第四种智慧谓“旧史记第五学”,简称三受者。此处亦含“旧史记第五”等学。前者谓无自见,即无自识;无自知,意同。以“问答,语法书说”“皆为问答所求”故作此说。
Yassa cittantiādipañhadvayaṃ cuticittasamaṅgino khīṇāsavassa cuticittassa uppādakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭhamapañhe uppajjatīti uppādakkhaṇasamaṅgitāya uppajjati. Na nirujjhatīti nirodhakkhaṇaṃ appattatāya na nirujjhati. Tassa cittanti tassa puggalassa tato paṭṭhāya cittaṃ nirujjhissati nuppajjissatīti pucchati. Yassa vā panātiādike pana dutiyapañhe nirujjhissatīti yassa cittaṃ bhaṅgakkhaṇaṃ patvā nirujjhissati. Nuppajjissatīti bhaṅgato parabhāge sayaṃ vā aññaṃ vā nuppajjissati, tassa puggalassa cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhatīti pucchati. Imesaṃ pana pañhānaṃ paṭhamo pañho vibhajjabyākaraṇīyo, tasmā ‘‘yassa cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhati, tassa cittaṃ nirujjhissati nuppajjissatī’’ti (yama. 2.cittayamaka.63) evaṃ puṭṭhena satā evamayaṃ pañho ca vissajjetabbo ‘‘pacchimacittassa uppādakkhaṇe tesaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhati nirujjhissati na uppajjissati, itaresaṃ cittassa uppādakkhaṇe tesaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhati, nirujjhissati ceva uppajjissati cā’’ti (yama. 2.cittayamaka.63). Yesañhi paricchinnavaṭṭadukkhānaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ sabbapacchimassa cuticittassa uppādakkhaṇe vattati, tesaṃ tadeva cuticittaṃ nirujjhissati nuppajjissatīti. Uppādappattatāya uppajjati nāma, bhaṅgaṃ appattatāya na nirujjhati. Bhaṅgaṃ pana patvā taṃ tesaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhissati, tato appaṭisandhikattā aññaṃ na uppajjissati. Ṭhapetvā pana pacchimacittasamaṅgikhīṇāsavaṃ itaresaṃ sekkhāsekkhaputhujjanānaṃ uppādakkhaṇasamaṅgicittaṃ uppādappattatāya uppajjati nāma, bhaṅgaṃ appattatāya na nirujjhati. Bhaṅgaṃ pana patvā nirujjhissateva, aññaṃ pana tasmiṃ vā aññasmiṃ vā attabhāve uppajjissati ceva nirujjhissati ca. Dutiyo pana pañho arahato cuticittassa uppādakkhaṇe niyamitattā ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyo, tasmā ‘‘yassa vā pana cittaṃ nirujjhissati na uppajjissati, tassa cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhatī’’ti puṭṭhena ‘‘āmantā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Khīṇāsavassa hi uppādakkhaṇasamaṅgicuticittaṃ bhaṅgaṃ patvā nirujjhissati nāma, tato paraṃ nuppajjissati. Uppādakkhaṇasamaṅgitāya pana uppajjati ceva bhaṅgaṃ appattatāya na nirujjhati cāti vuccati.
所谓心及先心二疑难,及灭余漏之臨終心生时,应作如是说。初疑者生起,即生起之时相应者生起。无断灭者,即灭之时刻未至,不断灭。谓诸心及彼人之由,是心当灭生疑云。又谓彼第二问,即当灭之时,彼心断灭。未生者,谓断灭后其余部分自身或他心再生,彼人心即发生非灭也。诸此问首疑分解不可,故说“心生无断灭,则彼心将灭不再生”。据此而言,所谓“后心生时,他们之心无断灭、无灭生;其他心灭生皆有不定”。其于灭余余漏者,谓余漏灭尽后,后心生起。此时生者即灭心,故云此后心断灭,后生者即断灭。若有生尽则不得复生。故于种种问答,皆作如是止息。
Ayaṃ pana māṇavo evamime pañhe vissajjetumasakkonto vighātaṃ pāpuṇi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘māṇavo uddhaṃ vā adho vā harituṃ asakkonto’’tiādi. Tattha uddhaṃ vā adho vā harituṃ asakkontoti uparimapade vā heṭṭhimapadaṃ, heṭṭhimapade vā uparimapadaṃ atthato samannāharituṃ asakkontoti attho, pubbenāparaṃ yojetvā pañhassa atthaṃ paricchindituṃ asakkontoti vuttaṃ hoti. Dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ tāva ācikkhīti ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye’’tiādikaṃ dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘mantassa upacāro aya’’nti paṭhamaṃ ācikkhi. Sotāpannānaṃ sīlesu paripūrakāritāya samādinnasīlato natthi parihānīti āha ‘‘abhabbo dāni sāsanato nivattitu’’nti. Vaḍḍhetvāti uparimaggatthāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhetvā. Appossukko bhaveyya buddhavacanaṃ gahetunti arahattappattiyā katakiccabhāvatoti adhippāyo. Vohāravidhimhi chekabhāvatthaṃ ‘‘upajjhāyo maṃ bhante tumhākaṃ santikaṃ pahiṇī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
此处童子于此问答不解而发生阻碍,故谓“童子不能上举或下引”等。此处上下言语本指上下两端,意谓无法上提或下引,乃前后连贯之意。二十二种修行境处因此开示“身中存在”等事,首示“心之对治是此”,为初说。于斯叶之行为处修行不可缺失,故言“今不能退还教法”。“增上”即向上增长,以上方意指修行所依赖之境上增上。不可粗率,即不可轻慢佛言,此以阿拉汉所成法事为由。修习之法中有违反法义者,“请长老今将万缘依止等交付我”等语,乃言传法事。
Udakadantaponaṃ upaṭṭhāpesīti paribhogatthāya udakañca dantakaṭṭhañca paṭiyādetvā ṭhapesi. Dante punanti visodhenti etenāti dantaponaṃ vuccati dantakaṭṭhaṃ. Guṇavantānaṃ saṅgahetabbabhāvato thero sāmaṇerassa ca khantivīriyaupaṭṭhānādiguṇe paccakkhakaraṇatthaṃ vināva abhiññāya pakatiyā vīmaṃsamāno puna sammajjanādiṃ akāsi. ‘‘Sāmaṇerassa cittadamanatthaṃ akāsī’’tipi vadanti. Buddhavacanaṃ paṭṭhapesīti buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhāpetuṃ ārabhi. Ṭhapetvā vinayapiṭakanti ettha ‘‘sāmaṇerānaṃ vinayapariyāpuṇanaṃ cārittaṃ na hotīti ṭhapetvā vinayapiṭakaṃ avasesaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhāpesī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Avassikova samānoti upasampadato paṭṭhāya aparipuṇṇaekavassoti adhippāyo. Moggaliputtatissattherassa hadaye patiṭṭhāpitampi buddhavacanaṃ vohāravasena tassa hatthe patiṭṭhāpitaṃ nāma hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘hatthe sakalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā’’ti. Yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā parinibbāyiṃsūti moggaliputtatissattherassa hatthe sakalasāsanapatiṭṭhāpanena dutiyasaṅgītikārakāropitadaṇḍakammato muttā hutvā yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā parinibbāyiṃsu.
“水牙刷”的侍奉,谓以水与牙刷供养,置放之意。牙刷用于洁净牙齿,故称牙刷。高德者以修习忍辱、精进诸功德,为教内证明,审察比库智慧并再三防护,复以深定等力作种种净化,如此称之。谓以“刷心”等语意即为心之调伏。谓传说佛言,整理戒律等为使戒律净备,如此整理后释出戒律藏,与此三经附属书三部连说。历经初传戒律后,成就戒律净备,继由长老所立戒律序言,谓以戒律传承之正法业故记载诸戒。谓长老摩诃利多所著论师受佛教正法传承,将全集佛说教法置于手中为戒律传持。盖其后受戒者,经由长老摩诃利多作完备集录而成,至佛灭度前其教法得以保持。
Bindusārassa rañño ekasataputtāti ettha bindusāro nāma sakyakulappasuto candaguttassa nāma rañño putto. Tathā hi viṭaṭūbhasaṅgāme kapilavatthuto nikkhantasakyaputtehi māpite moriyanagare khattiyakulasambhavo candaguttakumāro pāṭaliputte rājā ahosi. Tassa putto bindusāro nāma rājakumāro pitu accayena rājā hutvā ekasataputtakānaṃ janako ahosi. Ekasatanti ekañca satañca ekasataṃ, ekenādhikaṃ satanti attho. Ekāva mātā assāti ekamātikaṃ, attanā sahodaranti vuttaṃ hoti. Na tāva ekarajjaṃ katanti āha ‘‘anabhisittova rajjaṃ kāretvā’’ti. Ekarajjābhisekanti sakalajambudīpe ekādhipaccavasena kariyamānaṃ abhisekaṃ. Puññappabhāvena pāpuṇitabbāpi rājiddhiyo arahattamaggena āgatā paṭisambhidādayo avasesavisesā viya payogasampattibhūtā abhisekānubhāveneva āgatāti āha ‘‘abhisekānubhāvena cassa imā rājiddhiyo āgatā’’ti.
绳王宾度萨罗者,为绳王独子。此处所云宾度萨罗者,名为绳族子孙,父曰岑陀拘达,乃绳王之子。正如维陀图布战争中,从迦毗罗卫出世之绳族子,蒙母亲之恩而诞生于摩利城,为武士家族出身者岑陀拘麽罗君,曾为巴多利国王。其子名宾度萨罗为王子,父薨后乃继承王位,成为绳王,亦为百子之父。百子,即一百及一百之意,亦即超过一百之数。唯有母亲者谓独母,且称为亲兄弟。然世未统一成一国,故言“不经受立国而治国”。所谓一国之典礼,乃整个杰巴陀洲中,一统政权以政教相资之正式加冕。此加冕应由功德光辉而成,王权显现及慧命境界同临,诸种秘密已现,妙用充满,此所谓以加冕受用之功德光辉,谓此诸王权之到来。
Tattha rājiddhiyoti rājabhāvānugatappabhāvā. Yatoti yato soḷasaghaṭato. Sāsane uppannasaddhoti buddhasāsane paṭiladdhasaddho. Asandhimittāti tassāva nāmaṃ. Tassā kira sarīre sandhayo na paññāyanti, tasmā evaṃnāmikā jātātipi vadanti. Devatā eva divase divase āharantīti sambandho. Devasikanti divase divase. Agadāmalakanti appakeneva sarīrasodhanādisamatthaṃ sabbadosaharaṇaṃ osadhāmalakaṃ. Agadaharītakampi tādisameva harītakaṃ. Tesu kira dvīsu yathākāmamekaṃ paribhuñjati. Chaddantadahatoti chaddantadahasamīpe ṭhitadevavimānato kapparukkhato vā. ‘‘Chaddantadahe tādisā rukkhavisesā santi, tato āharantī’’tipi vadanti. Dibbañca pānakanti dibbaphalarasapānakañca. Asuttamayikanti kapparukkhato nibbattadibbadussattā suttehi na katanti asuttamayikaṃ. Sumanapupphapaṭanti sabbattha sukhumaṃ hutvā uggatapupphānaṃ atthitāya sumanapupphapaṭaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Uṭṭhitassa sālinoti sayaṃjātasālino. Samudāyāpekkhañcettha ekavacanaṃ, sālīnanti attho. Nava vāhasahassānīti ettha ‘‘catasso muṭṭhiyo eko kuḍuvo, cattāro kuḍuvā eko pattho, cattāro patthā eko āḷhako, cattāro āḷhakā ekaṃ doṇaṃ, cattāro doṇā ekamānikā, catasso mānikā ekakhārī, vīsati khāriyo eko vāho, tadeva ekaṃ sakaṭa’’nti suttanipātaṭṭhakathādīsu (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.kokālikasuttavaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.181; a. ni. 3.10; 89) vuttaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘dve sakaṭāni eko vāho’’ti vadanti. Nitthusakaṇe karontīti thusakuṇḍakarahite karonti. Madhuṃ karontīti āgantvā samīpaṭṭhāne madhuṃ karonti. Balikammaṃ karontīti sabbattha balikammakārakā raṭṭhavāsino viya madhurasaraṃ vikūjantā baliṃ karonti. ‘‘Āgantvā ākāseyeva saddaṃ katvā attānaṃ ajānāpetvā gacchantī’’ti vadanti.
此处所言王权者,指国王之统治及其显现之势。并以十六阶层说。佛法中所谓具足信心,谓由佛法生起真实信心。所谓“阿散迪密多”,即其名,意为在身体中结缔组织不显现,故以此命名,亦称出生种类。天神每日带来之意,谓其关联在此。所谓“天使”,即日复一日也。“阿伽达摩拉迦”,意为在体内净化的诸用药草,遍含药性,所有药草之总称。“阿伽达哈里塔”,同样意为净化之草。其中两种任选一者供养。所谓“折断树火”,指神宫附近棕榈树等之烧毁。谓有此类树木,故天神采摘其枝叶以供养。所谓天上饮品,指天界水果及饮料。所谓“非离离陀”,指棕榈树上产生之天界恶灵,非凡俗所做,故称“非离离陀”。“苏摩那蒲伽帕”,到处细微之花,形状轻柔,开于高处,亦名欢喜花。所谓“乌提塔萨利诺”,为自然生长之萨莉树。依缘起,此处为单数,言为“萨莉树”之义。所谓九万车,依经释、诸论著中云:「十四指为一轮子,四轮为一轴,四轴为一轮车,四轮车为一车」如经释中言。又云“双车一匹骡”,谓于两车之间。所谓“尼吐苏迦耽”,意为用车厢者,造车者也。所谓“采蜜”,谓到附近采蜜者。所谓“搏力”,谓各处之造力者,犹如国民中勤劳者采集蜜汁。谓“来则空中声响,作声不显自己”之意。
Suvaṇṇasaṅkhalikāyeva bandhanaṃ suvaṇṇasaṅkhalikabandhanaṃ. Catunnaṃ buddhānanti kakusandhādīnaṃ catunnaṃ buddhānaṃ. Adhigatarūpadassananti paṭiladdharūpadassanaṃ. Ayaṃ kira kappāyukattā catunnampi buddhānaṃ rūpasampattiṃ paccakkhato addakkhi. Kāḷaṃ nāmanāgarājānaṃ ānayitvāti ettha so pana nāgarājā gaṅgāyaṃ nikkhittasuvaṇṇasaṅkhalikāya gantvā attano pādesu patitasaññāya āgatoti veditabbo. Nanu ca asokassa rañño āṇā heṭṭhā yojanato upari pavattati, imassa ca vimānaṃ yojanaparicchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitaṃ, tasmā kathaṃ ayaṃ nāgarājā rañño āṇāya āgatoti? Kiñcāpi attano vimānaṃ yojanaparicchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitaṃ, tathāpi rañño āṇāpavattiṭṭhānena saha ekābaddhatāya tassa āṇaṃ akāsi. Yathā hi rajjasīmantaravāsino manussā tehi tehi rājūhi nippīḷiyamānā tesaṃ tesaṃ āṇāya pavattanti, evaṃsampadamidanti vadanti.
“金链结”者,如金链之束缚,即金链结之意。四佛者,指迦拘那迦佛等四佛。所谓“所得之色现象”,即所获得之形色显现。此义乃世时维持之,也现四佛所得之身色。所谓“阔勒罗名,龙王”,此处指一龙王,见于江中金链,自觉足下有金链,故谓其来临。然无忧王离此别一八十余由旬外,龙宫亦建有金链所系住处,故安问此龙王如何至无忧王处。又其龙宫虽建於由旬之外,然因龙王与无忧王官府一体相连,故龙王得以来临。譬若国界内人众在各王府之间受压迫,诸王巡行,亦因王府连通而均能行至各处,故如此说。
Āpāthaṃ karohīti sammukhaṃ karohi, gocaraṃ karohīti attho. Tena nimmitaṃ buddharūpaṃ passantoti sambandho. Kīdisaṃ taṃ buddharūpanti āha ‘‘sakalasarīravippakiṇṇā’’tiādi. Tattha puññappabhāvanibbattaggahaṇaṃ tena nimmitānampi asītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitānaṃ dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇānaṃ bhagavato puññappabhāvanibbattaasītianubyañjanādīhi sadisattā katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi tena tadā nimmitaṃ anekākāraparipuṇṇaṃ buddharūpaṃ bhagavato puññappabhāvena nibbattanti sakkā vattuṃ. Asītianubyañjanaṃ tambanakhatuṅganāsādi. Dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādatādi. Vikasita…pe… salilatalanti sūriyarasmisamphassena vikasitehi vikāsamupagatehi kaṃ alaṅkarotīti ‘‘kamala’’nti laddhanāmehi rattapadumehi nīluppalādibhedehi uppalehi ceva setapadumasaṅkhātehi puṇḍarīkehi ca paṭimaṇḍitaṃ samantato sajjitaṃ jalatalamiva. Tārāgaṇa…pe… gaganatalanti sabbattha vippakiṇṇatārakagaṇassa rasmijālavisadehi vipphuritāya bhāsamānāya sobhāya kantiyā samujjalaṃ sammā bhāsamānaṃ gaganatalamiva ākāsatalamiva. Sañjhāppabhā…pe… kanakagirisikharanti sañjhākālasañjātappabhānurāgehi indacāpehi vijjulatāhi ca parikkhittaṃ samantato parivāritaṃ kanakagirisikharamiva suvaṇṇapabbatakūṭamiva. Vimalaketumālāti ettha ‘‘ketumālā nāma sīsato nikkhamitvā upari muddhani puñjo hutvā dissamānarasmirāsī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Muddhani majjhe paññāyamāno unnatappadesotipi vadantī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana asoko dhammarājā sañjātapītisomanasso sattāhaṃ nirāhāro hutvā yathāṭhitova avikkhittacitto pasādasommehi cakkhūhi nirantaraṃ buddharūpameva olokesi, tasmā akkhīhi pūjā katā nāma hotīti āha ‘‘akkhipūjaṃ nāma akāsī’’ti. Atha vā cakkhūnaṃ tādisassa iṭṭhārammaṇassa upaṭṭhāpanena akkhīnaṃ pūjā katā nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘akkhipūjaṃ nāma akāsī’’ti.
“前行”者,谓在面前也。“行境”者,谓其所现之现境。佛形迹之缘起,称“关系”。所言佛形迹者谓“一切身相所遍布”。佛形迹乃因其功德光辉而生,譬如三十二大人相及八十八随行相,世尊功德光辉及所生形迹悉皆类同。非是单靠其功德光辉而成佛形,亦非能仅凭神通变现。所言形迹中含“铜、铁、骨等色”,谓铜质、铁制、骨骼等之纹理。谓三十二大人相之足端亦同。所谓“绽放生长”者,谓如日光照射,所成花叶绽开之相。何谓“荷花”?谓由红莲、白莲、青莲等莲花所成,周围布满,状如水面。所谓“星河”,谓遍布于天空之星光辉映,光彩照耀,熠熠生辉,如天空一般。所谓“夕光”,谓由晚霞形成,金山峰顶被映照,周围环绕。如洁净金峰之顶。所谓“净旗”,谓自额头伸出,形如花环,辉煌显现。谓其上中所示,举足以上之部分。三处语亦有说法。无忧王一心欢喜,七日长无饮食困乏,常以明净慈目观佛形迹,称为“目敬礼”之义。又言谓以眼对佛形迹所生之喜乐,是谓“目敬礼”也。
Iddhivibhāvanādhikārappasaṅgena cetaṃ vatthu vuttaṃ, nānukkamena. Ayañhettha anukkamo – asoko kira mahārājā upari vakkhamānānukkamena sīhapañjarena olokento nigrodhasāmaṇeraṃ iriyāpathasampannaṃ nāgarajananayanāni ākaḍḍhantaṃ yugamattaṃ pekkhamānaṃ disvā pasīditvā sañjātapemo sabahumāno āmantāpetvā setacchattassa heṭṭhā sīhāsane nisīdāpetvā bhojetvā sāmaṇerassa vacanādāse dissamānaṃ dasabalassa dhammakāyaṃ disvā ratanattaye pasīditvā sapariso saraṇasīlesu patiṭṭhāya tato paṭṭhāya abhivaḍḍhamānasaddho pubbe bhojiyamānāni titthiyasaṭṭhisahassāni nīharitvā bhikkhūnaṃ saṭṭhisahassānaṃ suvakāhatasālisampāditabhattaṃ paṭṭhapetvā devatopanītaṃ anotattasalilaṃ nāgalatādantakaṭṭhañca upanāmetvā niccasaṅghupaṭṭhānaṃ karonto ekadivasaṃ suvaṇṇasaṅkhalikabandhanaṃ vissajjetvā kāḷaṃ nāgarājānaṃ ānayitvā tena nimmitaṃ vuttappakāraṃ sirīsobhaggasampannaṃ buddharūpaṃ passanto dīghaputhulaniccalanayanappabhāhi sattāhaṃ akkhipūjamakāsi.
因神通修习之力,有关此心境所说,如此多端之由。所谓此缘,指无忧大王谈及诸因缘时,坐于狮笼内观看被称为苦藤沙玛内拉,者具备欲行四威仪。龙子公主注视龙王眼目并目视,心喜超然,呼其入狮座下,为其饮食,施予指令。观佛陀法身之大威力,如宝光辉映而欢喜。安住在沙门僧众中,威神所摄,施食供养,建造僧舍,将六十多座寺院中六十余千众僧施舍茶饭,设立祭祀神灵供养灵水、降魔结契等,维持僧团常住。断开金链桎梏后送出金链结,带至龙王处,以此缘起观看显现庄严的佛形迹,七日不断作目敬礼。
Idāni pana yathānusandhiṃ ghaṭetvā anukkamena tassa sāsanāvatāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘rājā kira abhisekaṃ pāpuṇitvā’’tiādi. Bāhirakapāsaṇḍanti bāhirakappaveditaṃ samayavādaṃ. Bāhirakappaveditā hi samayavādā sattānaṃ taṇhāpāsaṃ diṭṭhipāsañca ḍenti oḍḍentīti ‘‘pāsaṇḍā’’ti vuccanti. Pariggaṇhīti vīmaṃsamāno pariggahesi. Bindusāro brāhmaṇabhatto ahosīti attano pitu candaguttassa kālato paṭṭhāya brāhmaṇesu sambhatto ahosi. Candakena nāma kira brāhmaṇena samussāhito candaguttakumāro tena dinnanaye ṭhatvā sakalajambudīpe ekarajjamakāsi, tasmā tasmiṃ brāhmaṇe sañjātabahumānavasena candaguttakālato paṭṭhāya saṭṭhisahassamattā brāhmaṇajātikā tasmiṃ rājakule niccabhattikā ahesuṃ. Brāhmaṇānanti paṇḍaraṅgaparibbājakādibhāvamanupagate dasseti. Paṇḍaraṅgaparibbājakādayo ca brāhmaṇajātivantoti āha ‘‘brāhmaṇajātiyapāsaṇḍāna’’nti. Ettha pana diṭṭhipāsādīnaṃ oḍḍanato paṇḍaraṅgādayova ‘‘pāsaṇḍā’’ti vuttā. Sīhapañjareti mahāvātapāne. Upasamaparibāhirenāti upasamato paribāhirena, upasamarahitenāti attho. Antepuraṃ atiharathāti antepuraṃ pavesetha, ānethāti vuttaṃ hoti.
此时依次第发生之因缘说,示现佛法进入,语曰“王确得加冕”等。所谓外境伪说,是指外道所传之时间说教。外道者,谓妄天调戏众生之痴见及执著心,故称“伪教”。谓审察分析,称为“受纳”。宾度萨罗为婆罗门家人,因其父岑陀拘遭时间之故,而在婆罗门众中显赫。岑陀拘之父为婆罗门,令岑陀拘君充任掌官,统领诸邦全国,成为独尊之一国君。因婆罗门众之地位高贵,自岑陀拘时起,约有六十千婆罗门子孙,终久为该王族供养饮食。婆罗门义指“持白衣游方者”等含义。婆罗门子孙中有持白衣游方行者等。又言“婆罗门派诸宗派外道”,如见白衣宗者谓之“伪教师”。此处亦因迷断执着等故称“伪教”。“狮笼”,指大风吹袭之处。意即平息以后之外境。入宫指进入内殿,谓进入王宫。
Amā saha bhavanti kiccesūti amaccā, rajjakiccavosāpanakā. Devāti rājānaṃ ālapanti. Rājāno hi dibbanti kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti, tesu vā viharanti vijayasamatthatāyogena paccatthike vijetuṃ icchanti, issariyaṭhānādisakkāradānagahaṇaṃ taṃ taṃ atthānusāsanaṃ vā karonti voharanti, puññānubhāvappattāya jutiyā jotantīti vā ‘‘devā’’ti vuccanti . Tathā hi te catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi janaṃ rañjentā sayaṃ yathāvuttehi visesehi rājanti dippanti sobhantīti ‘‘rājāno’’ti ca vuccanti. Nigaṇṭhādayoti ettha nigaṇṭho nāma ‘‘amhākaṃ gaṇṭhanakileso saṃsāre palibuddhanakicco rāgādikileso khettavatthuputtadārādivisayo natthi, kilesagaṇṭhirahitā maya’’nti evaṃ vāditāya ‘‘nigaṇṭhā’’ti laddhanāmā titthiyā.
“不与者”意谓未参与种种事务者,称为不是亲近侍者,是执掌国事的侍从干事。称“天人”是指他们呼唤王者。王者确实因欲乐而显现,于各种欢娱中逗留,因具备胜利之助欲望,愿意在对敌者之前取胜,因此他们集结力量,调动从属,以及供养以权势场所等,进行利害众生的治理与指挥,因其具有福报的显现之能,故称为“天人”。实际上,这些王者因具备四种聚合条件,能够令民众服从,他们依照上述各项特殊条件,治理并统治,故称“王者”。“尼干陀等”意谓这里的尼干陀非指“吾等烦恼缠结解脱之事”,而是指世间如爱欲等烦恼缠结不在其内的种种事项,此称“尼干陀”,是外道以此为号称而得名。
Uccāvacānīti uccāni ca avacāni ca, mahantāni ceva khuddakāni ca, atha vā visiṭṭhāni ceva lāmakāni cāti attho. Bhaddapīṭhakesūti vettamayapīṭhesu. Sāroti sīlādiguṇasāro. Rājaṅgaṇenāti rājanivesanadvāre vivaṭena bhūmippadesena. Aṅgaṇanti hi katthaci kilesā vuccanti ‘‘rāgo aṅgaṇa’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 924). Rāgādayo hi aṅganti etehi taṃsamaṅgīpuggalā nihīnabhāvaṃ gacchantīti aṅgaṇānīti vuccanti. Katthaci malaṃ vā paṅko vā ‘‘tasseva rajassa vā aṅgaṇassa vā pahānāya vāyamatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.184). Añjati sammakkhetīti hi aṅgaṇaṃ, malādi. Katthaci tathārūpo vivaṭappadeso ‘‘cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ bodhiyaṅgaṇa’’ntiādīsu. Añjati tattha ṭhitaṃ atisundaratāya abhibyañjetīti hi aṅgaṇaṃ, vivaṭo bhūmippadeso. Idhāpi soyeva adhippeto. Dantantiādīsu kilesavipphandarahitacittatāya dantaṃ, niccaṃ paccupaṭṭhitasatārakkhatāya guttaṃ, cakkhādiindriyānaṃ santatāya santindriyaṃ, pāsādikena iriyāpathena samannāgatattā sampannairiyāpathaṃ. Idāni nigrodhasāmaṇeraṃ sarūpato vibhāvetukāmo āha ‘‘ko panāyaṃ nigrodho nāmā’’tiādi.
“高低声”指高声与低声,也含大与小、显著与微细等义。此指贵座,即王座之座垫。意谓为道德品德的精华。所谓“王庭”者,是指宫门口、院落出入口及其区域。所谓“庭院”等,有时乃指烦恼,称为“爱欲庭院”等。这类由烦恼所构成的聚合,就是使这些人间诸根始终丧失纯洁无染的状态,所以称为“庭院”。有时以泥污解释,谓其乃“污秽王庭或庭院”,意在毁坏该王国之庭院。有时指类似的空旷场所,称为“佛塔庭院”“菩提树庭院”等。此指优美庄严之所在地,乃该庭院境域。此处王者亦居于此所。所谓“驯服”等,指心无烦恼而清净易治理,专注不离之状态;所谓“守护”,指常守护此心;如视觉等诸根连贯常住,所具威仪庄重且行路姿态完备,即称为“驯服者”。现在尼格罗陀沙门童子欲明白其具体形象,问曰:“此所谓尼格罗陀者为何?”
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathāti ettha bindusārassa kira ekasataputtesu moriyavaṃsajāya dhammadeviyā asokatissanāmānaṃ dvinnaṃ puttānaṃ majjhe jeṭṭho asokakumāro avantiraṭṭhaṃ bhuñjati. Pitarā pesito pāṭaliputtato paññāsayojanamatthake viṭaṭūbhabhayāgatānaṃ sākiyānamāvāsaṃ veṭisaṃ nāma nagaraṃ patvā tattha veṭisaṃ nāma seṭṭhidhītaraṃ ādāya ujjenīrājadhāniyaṃ rajjaṃ karonto mahindaṃ nāma kumāraṃ saṅghamittañca kumārikaṃ labhitvā tehi saddhiṃ rajjasukhamanubhavanto pituno gilānabhāvaṃ sutvā ujjeniṃ pahāya sīghaṃ pāṭaliputtaṃ upagantvā pitu upaṭṭhānaṃ katvā tassa accayena rajjaṃ aggahesi. Taṃ sutvā yuvarājā sumanābhidhāno kujjhitvā ‘‘ajja me maraṇaṃ vā hotu rajjaṃ vā’’ti aṭṭhanavutibhātikaparivuto saṃvaṭṭasāgare jalataraṅgasaṅghāto viya ajjhottharanto upagacchati. Tato asoko ujjenīrājā saṅgāmaṃ pakkhanditvā sattumaddanaṃ karonto sumanaṃ nāma rājakumāraṃ gahetvā ghātesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bindusārarañño kira dubbalakāleyeva asokakumāro attanā laddhaṃ ujjenīrajjaṃ pahāya āgantvā sabbanagaraṃ attano hatthagataṃ katvā sumanaṃ nāma rājakumāraṃ aggahesī’’ti.
此谓渐次述说。此处因Bindusāra王共育一百多个儿子,为摩利支氏支派。达摩提女神名叫阿索加提萨,生二子,中长子阿索卡王子经营阿毗王国。父亲派遣他使者去巴塔利普塔一带,去拜访那时流传三十五里远之萨迦族所居住的维蒂森城。其时,名为苏陀那的王子与公主在城中,二人同享国家欢愉。后来听闻父王病重消息,于是抛弃乌金尼城,迅速往巴塔利普塔去侍奉父亲,为父亲料理丰盛的服侍事宜。年方二十八岁的太子苏摩那悲切地想:“愿死愿亡国皆听从我意”。于是乘风驾浪般越过海洋水波前往。阿索卡王放弃战斗,驾驭坐骑,逮捕了名为苏摩那的太子并将其斩杀。故传曰:“Bindusāra王在其衰败之时,由阿索卡王子舍弃乌金尼王国,侵占全部城市,拥立苏摩那太子为王。”
Paripuṇṇagabbhāti paripakkagabbhā. Ekaṃ sālanti sabbaparicchannaṃ ekaṃ pāsādaṃ. ‘‘Devatāya pana ānubhāvena tasmiṃ pāsāde mahājanena adissamānā hutvā vāsaṃ kappesī’’ti vadanti. Nibaddhavattanti ‘‘ekassa divasassa ettaka’’nti niyāmetvā ṭhapitavattaṃ. Hetusampadanti arahattūpanissayapuññasampadaṃ. Khuraggeyevāti khurakammapariyosāneyeva, tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā taṃ pariggaṇhanto antimāya kesavaṭṭiyā voropanāya samakālameva ca arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sarīraṃ jaggitvāti dantakaṭṭhakhādanamukhadhovanādīhi sarīraparikammaṃ katvā.
“圆满孕胎”意为成熟完整的胎儿。破坏所有遮盖,犹如宫殿。谓说:“众神借借助神力,凭其大威力,显现于宫殿中,居住其中。”所谓“约束结缚”,是指“在一天之内完成如此诸般成就”的结合,用以限制时间,定为施行。谓因缘具备,得成阿拉汉之境界。所谓“犁犁加耶”,即期限或期限结束之义,依“五法功德修行所治业”,持之以终,将头发全部剃净时,也同时成就阿拉汉果位。所谓“使身体活跃”,是指以牙棒咀嚼,食物入口,口腔作业等身体现用之行为。
Sīhapañjare caṅkamatīti sīhapañjarasamīpe aparāparaṃ caṅkamati. Taṅkhaṇaññevāti tasmiṃ khaṇeyeva. Ayaṃ janoti rājaṅgaṇe caramānaṃ janaṃ disvā vadati. Bhantamigappaṭibhāgoti anavaṭṭhitattā kāyacāpallena samannāgatattā bhantamigasadiso. Ativiya sobhatīti sambandho. Ālokitavilokitanti ettha ālokitaṃ nāma puratopekkhanaṃ. Abhimukholokanañhi ‘‘ālokita’’nti vuccati. Vilokitanti anudisāpekkhanaṃ, yaṃ disābhimukhaṃ oloketi, tadanugatadisāpekkhananti attho. Samiñjanaṃ pabbasaṅkocanaṃ. Pasāraṇañca tesaṃyeva pasāraṇaṃ. Lokuttaradhammoti sesajanesu avijjamāno visiṭṭhadhammo. Pemaṃ saṇṭhahīti pemaṃ patiṭṭhāsi, uppajjīti attho. Vāṇijako ahosīti madhuvāṇijako ahosi.
“狮笼周行”意为在狮笼附近来回行走。所谓“狭窄处”是指狭小空间。他见王宫内流动聚集群众而发言说:“呵,尊敬的众人,看这里。”所谓“庞大野兽群”,因其无倾覆且身心俱具稳固,故似庞大野兽群。所谓“异常辉煌”,谓事物彼此关系密切。所谓“观察视察”,此处“观察”指正视前方。所谓“正对观看”,是朝向观察该视线的方向。所谓“收缩聚拢”,是指物体收紧聚集。所谓“扩展展开”,是其广阔延伸。所谓“出世间法”,即能让凡人无法觉知之最高妙法。谓“爱心聚集”即“爱心持久”,谓“生起”。谓“商人”即“蜜商”。
Atīte kira tayo bhātaro madhuvāṇijakā ahesuṃ. Tesu kaniṭṭho madhuṃ vikkiṇāti, itare araññato āharanti. Tadā eko paccekabuddho paṇḍukarogāturo ahosi. Aparo pana paccekabuddho tadatthaṃ madhubhikkhāya caramāno nagaraṃ pāvisi. Paviṭṭhañca taṃ ekā kumbhadāsī udakaharaṇatthaṃ titthaṃ gacchamānā addasa. Disvā ca pucchitvā āgatakāraṇañca ñatvā ‘‘ettha, bhante, madhuvāṇijakā vasanti, tattha gacchathā’’ti hatthaṃ pasāretvā madhuāpaṇaṃ dassesi. So ca tattha agamāsi. Taṃ disvā kaniṭṭho madhuvāṇijo sañjātapītisomanasso ‘‘kenāgatāttha, bhante’’ti pucchitvā tamatthaṃ viditvā pattaṃ gahetvā madhuno pūretvā dadamāno pattapuṇṇaṃ madhuṃ uggantvā mukhato vissanditvā bhūmiyaṃ patamānaṃ disvā pasannamānaso ‘‘imināhaṃ, bhante, puññakammena jambudīpe ekarajjaṃ kareyyaṃ, āṇā ca me ākāse pathaviyañca yojanappamāṇe ṭhāne pharatū’’ti patthanamakāsi. Paccekabuddho ca ‘‘evaṃ hotu upāsakā’’ti vatvā gandhamādanaṃ gantvā paccekabuddhassa bhesajjamakāsi.
据说曾有三位兄弟为蜜商,其中弟弟售卖蜂蜜,其他兄弟则从荒野采集蜂蜜。彼时有一位独觉者患青疽疾病。另一独觉者亦为乞食蜂蜜而游行入城。入城后,有一妇女手持蜜杯,见他后问明来意,邀请他说:“尊者,有蜜商居此,往彼处去。”并将手中的蜜水示现。独觉者遂前往。弟弟蜜商因闻此事,心生喜悦,问为何事。独觉者答明情况,便接受邀请,取来蜜蜂蜜,用莲叶盛装,呈赠蜜蜂蜜。独觉者睁开翅膀口中喷洒蜜汁,展翅倒落地上,欢喜说道:“愿我以此善业,能统辖整个珍宝之岛,且号令天空与大地相距千里之广域。”独觉者说:“愿如此,诸在家居士。”言毕,采集香料而往访独觉者处治疗。
Kaniṭṭho pana madhuvāṇijo madhuṃ datvā gehe nisinno itare araññato āgate disvā evamāha ‘‘tumhākaṃ bhātaro cittaṃ pasādetha, mamañca tumhākañca madhuṃ gahetvā īdisassa nāma paccekabuddhassa pattaṃ pūretvā adāsi’’nti. Tesu jeṭṭho kujjhitvā evamāha ‘‘caṇḍālāpi kāsāvanivāsino honti, nanu tava hatthato madhuṃ paṭiggahetvā gato caṇḍālo bhavissatī’’ti. Majjhimo pana kujjhitvā ‘‘tava paccekabuddhaṃ gahetvā parasamudde nikkhipāhī’’ti āha. Pacchā pana tepi dve bhātaro kaniṭṭhena vuccamānaṃ dānānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttakathaṃ sutvā anumodiṃsuyeva. Sāpi ca kumbhadāsī ‘‘tassa madhudāyakassa aggamahesī bhaveyya’’nti patthanamakāsi. Tesu kaniṭṭho asoko dhammarājā ahosi, sā ca kumbhadāsī ativiya rūpasobhaggappattā asandhimittā nāma tassa aggamahesī ahosi. Parasamuddavādī pana majjhimo imasmiṃyeva tambapaṇṇidīpe devānaṃpiyatisso nāma mahānubhāvo rājā ahosi. Jeṭṭho pana caṇḍālavāditāya caṇḍālagāme jāto nigrodho nāma sāmaṇero ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbe hi kira puññakaraṇakāle esa rañño jeṭṭhabhātā vāṇijako ahosī’’ti.
最幼者是一位卖蜂蜜的小商人,他将蜂蜜赠予人后,坐在家中,看到其他兄弟从森林归来,便对他们说:“你们兄弟的心应当安稳,我带着你们的蜂蜜,补满并赠与那位名为伊迪萨的独觉圣者。” 其中长兄愤怒地说:“贱民和秽染之人同住,不会因为你亲手接过蜂蜜而使去,那接过蜂蜜的贱民便成了贱民。” 中间兄弟则怒言:“你应当把你的独觉圣者带去远海遗弃。” 之后,两位兄弟听幼者讲述与施舍所相应的故事,都赞同他的说法。那女仆名曰坤伐达悉,祈愿“成为送蜂蜜的第一女首领”。幼者便是有德法王阿育,坤伐达悉因极美貌得此女首领名号。那中间兄弟为称霸印度红土岛上的天人通达者。长兄则出生于贱民辩论之村,名叫尼拘陀,是童子。传言“过去曾有位王者的长兄是商人。”
Pubbe va sannivāsenāti ettha (jā. aṭṭha. 2.2.174) gāthābandhavasena vā-saddassa rassattaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, pubbe sannivāsena vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha pubbeti atītajātiyaṃ. Sannivāsenāti sahavāsena. Sahasaddattho hi ayaṃ saṃsaddo. Paccuppannahitena vāti paccuppanne vattamānabhave hitacaraṇena vā. Evaṃ imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi sinehasaṅkhātaṃ pemaṃ jāyate uppajjati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pemaṃ nāmetaṃ dvīhipi kāraṇehi jāyati, purimabhave mātā vā pitā vā dhītā vā putto vā bhātā vā bhaginī vā pati vā bhariyā vā sahāyo vā mitto vā hutvā yo yena saddhiṃ ekaṭṭhāne nivutthapubbo, tassa iminā pubbe vā sannivāsena bhavantarepi anubandhanto so sineho na vijahati, imasmiṃ attabhāve katena paccuppannena hitena vāti evaṃ imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi taṃ pemaṃ nāma jāyatīti. Kiṃ viyāti āha ‘‘uppalaṃ va yathodake’’ti. Etthāpi vā-saddassa vuttanayeneva rassattaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avuttasampiṇḍanattho cettha vāsaddo. Tena padumādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Yathā-saddo upamāyaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā uppalañca sesañca padumādi udake jāyamānaṃ dve kāraṇāni nissāya jāyati udakañceva kalalañca, tathā etehi dvīhi kāraṇehi pemaṃ jāyatīti.
关于“过去同住”的解释,见《经集》,此语由八句诗及词句组成,表示过去曾同住。‘过去’指前世,‘同住’即共同居住,意即当时同住、共同生活。因这二种缘故,故生出亲爱之情。此说意为,亲爱之情是由过去的同住和现世的相互利益所生。又说,亲爱由双因生起:一为以前同住之因,二为现在相互利益之因。譬如曾一同生活,或是父母、子女、兄弟姐妹、丈夫、妻子、侍者、朋友等,曾共同聚集,因先世同住,现世互利亲密,故此称为爱。在《经集》中又以“莲花如于水中”等譬喻,说亲爱因二缘而生。
Rañño hattheti santikaṃ upagatassa rañño hatthe. Rañño anurūpanti ekūnasatabhātukānaṃ ghātitattā caṇḍapakatitāya rajje ṭhitattā ca ‘‘pamādavihārī aya’’nti maññamāno tadanurūpaṃ dhammapade appamādavaggaṃ desetuṃ ārabhi. Tattha (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.23) appamādoti satiyā avippavāso, niccaṃ upaṭṭhitāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Amatapadanti amataṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ. Tañhi ajātattā na jīyati na mīyati, tasmā ‘‘amata’’nti vuccati. Amatassa padaṃ amatapadaṃ, amatassa adhigamupāyoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pamādoti pamajjanabhāvo, muṭṭhassaccasaṅkhātassa satiyā vossaggassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Maccunoti maraṇassa. Padanti upāyo maggo. Pamatto hi jātiṃ nātivattati, jāto pana jīyati ceva mīyati cāti pamādo maccuno padaṃ nāma hoti, maraṇaṃ upanetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“王之手”即指已至王近处的王权。王之相应者,指拥有九十九众臣,掌权镇压叛逆,实王位而立于天下者,谓曰“逸乐之人”。以此自许,开始讲述与此相符的法句,名曰“不怠者”,即应不忘念,常住关护之念。所谓“不死者”,是指涅槃,因其不生不灭,故称为“不死”。“不死之处”即涅槃处;获得不死之法,谓之得法之道。“怠惰”即无念之相,因舍念而失其正业。死为生命终结。此“处”为道路途径。怠惰者不胜生死,生而复死,故怠惰如赴死路。
Aññātaṃ tāta, pariyosāpehīti iminā ‘‘sadā appamādena hutvā vattitabbanti ettakeneva mayā ñātaṃ, tumhe dhammadesanaṃ niṭṭhapethā’’ti tasmiṃ dhamme attano paṭipajjitukāmataṃ dīpento dhammadesanāya pariyosānaṃ pāpetvā kathane ussāhaṃ janeti. Keci pana ‘‘abhāsīti ettha ‘bhāsissāmi vitakkemī’ti atthaṃ gahetvā ‘sabbaṃ appamādavaggaṃ bhāsissāmī’ti sallakkhitattā abhāsīti vuttaṃ, raññā pana aḍḍhagāthaṃ sutvāva ‘aññātaṃ tāta, pariyosāpehī’ti vuttattā ‘upari na kathesī’’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Taṃ pana yuttaṃ na hotī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Dhuvabhattānīti niccabhattāni. Vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatīti upajjhāyoti āha ‘‘vajjāvajjaṃ disvā codetā sāretā cā’’ti. Tattha vajjāvajjanti khuddakaṃ mahantañca vajjaṃ. Codetāti ‘‘idaṃ tayā dukkaṭaṃ, idaṃ dubbhāsita’’ntiādīni vatvā codetā. Sāretāti attano vajjaṃ assarantassa satiṃ uppādetā, sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ vā sāretā, pavattetāti attho.
“吾友,此为所知,因当常住不怠,应如是行,令我所知,尔等应终止法讲”。他为了自身修行而明了法义,因故励精图治。有人说“『我将讲话,现正思虑』,此意即是‘我将讲述诸不怠章’”,听国王半偈,称“吾友,此事未知,宜终止讲述”。又说“此理不合”,并于三译文中有此说。讥刺不本站重者为不能定者。Vajjāvajja 意为“责难”,Upanijjhāyati 即责难、促使。谓“见责难者,谴责戒其行为”。责难者为大小过失之事,责难意即指责恶业。责难之意为因其过恶劝其改行,促使修正,令其施行正道。
‘‘Evaṃ tayā buddhavacanaṃ sajjhāyitabbaṃ, evaṃ abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādinā ācārassa sikkhāpanato ācariyo nāmāti āha ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane sikkhitabbakadhammesu patiṭṭhāpetā’’ti. Tattha sikkhitabbakadhammo nāma sakalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ sīlādayo ca dhammā. ‘‘Pabbajjā ca upasampadā cā’’ti idaṃ labbhamānavasena vuttaṃ . Ācariyupajjhāyānanti iminā pabbajjā upasampadā ca yojetabbā, mama cāti iminā pana pabbajjāva. Tadā sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitattā nigrodhassa bhāviniṃ vā upasampadaṃ sandhāya ubhayampi yojetabbaṃ. Saraṇagamanavasena pabbajjāsiddhito bhikkhusaṅghassapi pabbajjāya nissayabhāvo veditabbo. Bhaṇḍukammavasenapi nissayabhāvo labbhatevāti gahetabbaṃ. Divase divase vaḍḍhāpentoti vuttanayeneva divase divase tato tato diguṇaṃ katvā vaḍḍhāpento. Pothujjanikenāti puthujjanabhāvānurūpena. Nigrodhattherassa ānubhāvakittanādhikārattā pubbe vuttampi pacchā vattabbampi sampiṇḍetvā āha ‘‘puna rājā asokārāmaṃ nāma mahāvihāraṃ kāretvā’’tiādi . Cetiyapaṭimaṇḍitānīti ettha cayitabbaṃ pūjetabbanti cetiyaṃ, iṭṭhakādīhi citattā vā cetiyaṃ, cetiyehi paṭimaṇḍitāni vibhūsitānīti cetiyapaṭimaṇḍitāni. Dhammenāti dhammato anapetena.
“如是,汝当诵念佛语,如是开始,如是结束。” 等言语,于教法戒律中,教诲为修行应行法。师长曰“于此教中所应学习之戒律已建立。”此戒律谓悉佛语及戒等法。又曰“出家受具足戒”,得此法则。在师父及方丈者令其联结出家戒,亦曰“我所”。彼时持沙门尼地位坐于尼拘陀树下,冀求具足戒,二者皆得联结。受皈依法者仍当知依,依止声闻僧亦依于受戒。物质工作方面亦成依止。谓“日渐增益”,意即如所传言每日渐增,倍数增长。凡夫者即依凡夫之法。因尼拘陀长老之授意,今复续述谓“王曾建阿育园大寺”等。有关佛塔与基坛,谓应供养,佛塔由愿佛指意筑成。称“依法”即具无违愿。
Vuttamevatthaṃ vitthārato vibhāvento āha ‘‘ekadivasaṃ kirā’’tiādi. Asokārāme mahādānaṃ datvāti ettha kate ārāme pacchā kārāpakassa rañño nāmavasena niruḷhaṃ nāmapaṇṇattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘asokārāme’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘tasmiṃ divase rājā attano ghareyeva sabbaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nisīdāpetvā bhojetvā imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchī’’ti vadanti. Mahādānaṃ datvāti bhojetvā sabbaparikkhāradānavasena mahādānaṃ datvā. Vuttañhetaṃ dīpavaṃse –
以上所述已详尽诠释,余言“某日也”之类。如阿育园大施捐赠,于园林中曾用王名记述“阿育园”字样。有者言“当日王设宴请沙门比库集于宫中,问此疑。” 此大施乃因宴请僧团及供养诸物而称为大施。以此缘故载于《光之年代记》中。
‘‘Nivesanaṃ pavesetvā, nisīdāpetvāna āsane;
入居于住所,安坐于坐具上;
Yāguṃ nānāvidhaṃ khajjaṃ, bhojanañca mahārahaṃ;
供养各类珍馐佳果,及丰盛的饮食;
Adāsi payatapāṇi, yāvadatthaṃ yadicchakaṃ.
以慈悲之手奉献,随其所能、随心所愿。
‘‘Bhuttāvibhikkhusaṅghassa, onītapattapāṇino;
这一切皆献于贫苦比库僧团,手持布印者;
Ekamekassa bhikkhuno, adāsi yugasāṭakaṃ.
曾向每一比库施予一百四十对;
‘‘Pādaabbhañjanaṃ telaṃ, chattañcāpi upāhanaṃ;
赠与足部涂膏油及遮盖用的伞盖。
Sabbaṃ samaṇaparikkhāraṃ, adāsi phāṇitaṃ madhuṃ.
于一切沙门用具中,赐予了甘甜美妙的蜂蜜。
‘‘Abhivādetvā nisīdi, asokadhammo mahīpati;
『敬礼毕,君王端坐,其心无忧;
Nisajja rājā pavāresi, bhikkhusaṅghassa paccayaṃ.
君王安坐,为比库僧团予以资助;
‘‘Yāvatā bhikkhū icchanti, tāva demi yadicchakaṃ;
凡比库所欲,皆由我赐予;
Santappetvā parikkhārena, pavāretvāna paccaye;
以使满足其供养,资助其用;
Tato apucchi gambhīraṃ, dhammakkhandhaṃ sudesita’’nti.
尔后深询讲说,充分明白的法蕴。』
Aṅgato, mahārāja, nava aṅgānītiādi moggaliputtatissattherena vuttanti vadanti. Navakammādhiṭṭhāyakaṃ adāsīti caturāsītivihārasahassesu kattabbassa navakammassa adhiṭṭhāyakaṃ vidhāyakaṃ katvā adāsi. Ekadivasameva sabbanagarehi paṇṇāni āgamiṃsūti sabbavihāresu kira rāhunā candassa gahaṇadivase navakammaṃ ārabhitvā puna rāhunā candassa gahaṇadivaseyeva niṭṭhāpesuṃ, tasmā ekadivasameva paṇṇāni āgamiṃsūti vadanti. Aṭṭha sīlaṅgānīti aṭṭha uposathaṅgasīlāni. ‘‘Sabbālaṅkāravibhūsitāyā’’ti idaṃ asamādinnuposathaṅgānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Amaravatiyā rājadhāniyāti tāvatiṃsadevanagare. Alaṅkatapaṭiyattanti alaṅkatakaraṇavasena sabbasajjitaṃ.
大王,所谓九支,乃由长老摩迦利菩达所说所称。其意谓九种行为的主宰者已被设立,见于四十八万余个僧伽中当立的九种行为主宰。传说说:“于某一日,各城镇居民共聚一处,诸住处中似乎是在日蚀之时,行起九种行为,复于日蚀止歇之时,亦于同一日终止。故曰当日所有居民共会。”所谓八守净戒支,是指八项守斋门的戒律。称为“诸供具齐备施用”的,是指此地不持有者的守斋支戒。阿摩罗瓦提王城,即三十三天的天城。所谓准备华饰,即以饰品装饰,诸供具悉备之义。
Adhikaṃ kāraṃ adhikāraṃ, adhikaṃ kiriyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma pāṭihāriyaṃ akaṃsūti ettha anekasahassasaṅkhyassa okāsalokassa tannivāsīsattalokassa ca vivaṭabhāvakaraṇapāṭihāriyaṃ lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma. Taṃ pana karonto iddhimā andhakāraṃ vā ālokaṃ karoti, paṭicchannaṃ vā vivaṭaṃ, anāpāthaṃ vā āpāthaṃ karoti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi yathā paṭicchannopi dūre ṭhitopi attā vā paro vā dissati, evaṃ attānaṃ vā paraṃ vā pākaṭaṃ kātukāmo pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘idaṃ andhakāraṭṭhānaṃ ālokajātaṃ hotū’’ti vā ‘‘idaṃ paṭicchannaṃ vivaṭaṃ hotū’’ti vā ‘‘idaṃ anāpāthaṃ āpāthaṃ hotū’’ti vā āvajjetvā puna pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya adhiṭṭhāti. Saha adhiṭṭhānena yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Apare dūre ṭhitāpi passanti, sayampi passitukāmo passati bhagavā viya devorohaṇe. Bhagavā hi devaloke abhidhammadesanaṃ niṭṭhapetvā saṅkassanagaraṃ otaranto sinerumuddhani ṭhatvā puratthimaṃ lokadhātuṃ olokesi, anekāni cakkavāḷasahassāni vivaṭāni viya hutvā ekaṅgaṇaṃ viya hutvā pakāsiṃsu. Yathā ca puratthimena, evaṃ pacchimenapi uttarenapi dakkhiṇenapi sabbaṃ vivaṭamaddasa. Heṭṭhāpi yāva avīci upari ca yāva akaniṭṭhabhavanaṃ, tāva addasa. Manussāpi deve passanti, devāpi manusse. Tattha neva manussā uddhaṃ ullokenti, na devā adho olokenti, sabbe sammukhasammukhāva aññamaññaṃ passanti, taṃ divasaṃ lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma ahosi.
“多所作,多权能”者,是指多种加持的能力。所谓世界显现,是指在亿万广大世界中,显现或展现天空透彻可观的奇迹。具足此神通者,能将黑暗变明亮,遮蔽处变显露,无法通达处化通达。如何?虽远且隐,自己或他人皆可见,依脚指审视生起“此处黑暗已变光明”“此处遮蔽已变显露”等念,复入脚指观而起誓,随观即现。与此观同彼观,显现确然不虚。有者虽远亦能见,我也渴见如世尊般飞升天。佛于天上圆满说法后,临近佛舍卫城之舍利树下,向前视察天下,见千千星空如透彻明亮,东、西、北、南诸方界皆可观见,下至地狱上至最高梵天,凡人天互相可见,却无上下错视,相对相望,故名为世界显现。
Apica tambapaṇṇidīpe taḷaṅgaravāsī dhammadinnattheropi imaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ akāsi. So kira ekadivasaṃ tissamahāvihāre cetiyaṅgaṇamhi nisīditvā ‘‘tīhi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu apaṇṇakapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno hotī’’ti apaṇṇakasuttaṃ (a. ni. 3.16) kathento heṭṭhāmukhaṃ bījaniṃ akāsi, yāva avīcito ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosi, tato uparimukhaṃ akāsi, yāva brahmalokā ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosi. Thero nirayabhayena tajjetvā saggasukhena ca palobhetvā dhammaṃ desesi. Keci sotāpannā ahesuṃ, keci sakadāgāmī anāgāmī arahantoti evaṃ tasmiṃ divasepi lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma ahosi. Ime pana bhikkhū yathā asoko dhammarājā asokārāme ṭhito catuddisā anuvilokento samantato samuddapariyantaṃ jambudīpaṃ passati, caturāsīti ca vihārasahassāni uḷārāya vihāramahapūjāya virocamānāni, evaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma pāṭihāriyaṃ akaṃsu.
又有译法,称锡兰岛塔朗迦居民长老法定亦现此奇迹。彼于当日坐于大寺废墟中说曰:“比库,以三法成道者即为不堕不退法行”,诵经脚写,直至无明灭尽的境地显现。长老舍心离苦,欲天福而说法。有人为初果入圣,有人为二果,三果,阿拉汉果,故当日亦有世界显现。比库如同无人佛法者阿索迦法王,在阿索迦道场四方巡观,看遍整个锡兰岛,发现四十八万余个寺院庄严大供,并依此守护,现此世界显现神奇。
Vihāramahapūjāyāti vihāramahasaṅkhātāya pūjāya. Vibhūtinti sampattiṃ. Evarūpaṃ pītipāmojjanti īdisaṃ pariccāgamūlakaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ. Moggaliputtatissattherassa bhāramakāsīti therassa mahānubhāvattā ‘‘uttaripi ce kathetabbaṃ atthi, tampi soyeva kathessatī’’ti maññamāno bhikkhusaṅgho raññā pucchitapañhassa visajjanaṃ therassa bhāramakāsi. Sāsanassa dāyādo homi, na homīti sāsanassa ñātako abbhantaro homi, na homīti attho. Yesaṃ sāsane pabbajitā puttadhītaro na santi, na te sāsane kattabbakiccaṃ attano bhāraṃ katvā vahantīti imamatthaṃ sandhāya thero evamāha ‘‘na kho, mahārāja, ettāvatā sāsanassa dāyādo hotī’’ti. Kathañcarahi, bhante, sāsanassa dāyādo hotīti ettha carahīti nipāto akkhantiṃ dīpeti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadi evarūpaṃ pariccāgaṃ katvāpi sāsanassa dāyādo na hoti, aññaṃ kiṃ nāma katvā hotīti.
“寺院庄严供养”者,谓众多寺院以供养闻名。所谓“所具功德”,是指此类欢喜快悦乃依舍身奉献而生。摩迦利菩达长老谓:“尚有更当说者,此我自会说”,比库众因此询问长老表示释疑。由此得知“世尊法义的承继者”不可随意存废。为何称为承继者?此处“行”表示行为,说明法义应被具体实行持守。若有人舍弃这种奉献不做承继者,谁还能做到?
Tissakumārassa pabbajitakālato pabhutīti yadā ca tissakumāro pabbajito, yena ca kāraṇena pabbajito, taṃ sabbaṃ vitthārato uttari āvi bhavissati. Sakkhasīti sakkhissasi. Pāmojjajātoti sañjātapāmojjo. Puttānaṃ manaṃ labhitvāti ettha puttīpi sāmaññato puttasaddena vuttāti veditabbā, putto ca dhītā ca puttāti evaṃ ekasesanayena vā evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dhītusaddena saha payujjamāno hi puttasaddo ekova avasissati, dhītusaddo nivattatīti saddasatthavidū vadanti. Sikkhāya patiṭṭhāpesunti tasmiṃyeva sīmamaṇḍale sikkhāsammutiṃ datvā pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīsu vikālabhojanāveramaṇipariyosānāsu chasu sikkhāsu samādapanavasena sikkhāya patiṭṭhāpesuṃ. Saṭṭhivassāyapi hi sāmaṇeriyā ‘‘pāṇātipātāveramaṇiṃ dve vassāni avītikkamma samādānaṃ samādiyāmī’’tiādinā (pāci. 1078-1079) cha sikkhāyo samādiyitvā sikkhitabbāyeva. Na hi etāsu chasu sikkhāpadesu dve vassāni asikkhitasikkhaṃ sāmaṇeriṃ upasampādetuṃ vaṭṭati. Cha vassāni abhisekassa assāti chabbassābhiseko, abhisekato paṭṭhāya atikkantachavassoti vuttaṃ hoti.
论及提迦摩那未出家时诸事详述。所谓“已发愿”,指依正道已生发欢喜。所谓“子”,男女皆是子女通称。言“子与女”者,男女称呼有差,若共用则听者当心。入学比库依规建立六项课业约束,防止杀生、食坏物等六种恶业。此六业课程,须守两年方可被允准出家为正比库。传说二六年出家受戒是规定。
Sabbaṃ theravādanti dve saṅgītiyo āruḷhā pāḷiyevettha ‘‘theravādo’’ti veditabbā. Sā hi mahākassapapabhutīnaṃ mahātherānaṃ vādattā ‘‘theravādo’’ti vuccati. Kontaputtatissattheroti ettha kontasakuṇiyo nāma kinnarajātiyo. ‘‘Tāsu ekissā kucchiyaṃ sayito manussajātiko raññā posito kontaputtatissatthero nāmā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Mahāvaṃsepi cetaṃ vuttaṃ –
“长老时代”意即有两种说法叫“长老部”。因古大咖萨巴等长老集体说法,被称为“长老部”。所谓“控陀菩达长老”,即控陀萨昆尼约之精灵族王子,有少女和人类生而卧病者,以其名字为称,三处古碑铭文有载。大史记亦载此事。
‘‘Pure pāṭaliputtamhā, vane vanacaro caraṃ;
「纯洁的巴塔利城内,游行于林野之间;
Kontakinnariyā saddhiṃ, saṃvāsaṃ kira kappayi.
与甘蔗之人同住,据说同住一处。
‘‘Tena saṃvāsamanvāya, sā putte janayī duve;
因共处而生育此女二人;
Tisso jeṭṭho kaniṭṭho tu, sumitto nāma nāmato.
年长、年幼各一,名曰苏密多。
‘‘Mahāvaruṇattherassa , kāle pabbaji santike;
尊大的婆噜那长老时期,近于出家之时;
Arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, chaḷabhiññāguṇaṃ ubho’’ti.
两人皆已得阿拉汉果,具六通六德。」
Keci pana evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kontā nāma kaṭṭhavāhanarañño vaṃse jātā ekā rājadhītā. Taṃ garuḷayantena araññagataṃ eko vanacarako ānetvā tāya saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappesi. Sā tassa ubho putte vijāyi. Tatrāyaṃ jeṭṭhako mātunāmena kontaputto nāma jāto’’ti. Kaṭṭhavāhanarañño kira nagare sabbepi vibhavasampannā nadīpabbatakīḷādīsu garuḷasakuṇasadisaṃ yantaṃ kāretvā kaṭṭhavāhanarājā viya garuḷavāhanena vicaranti.
有人这样说:『在名为迦多瓦罕那森林中的竹林里,出生了一位名叫孔塔的王族女儿。她被一只大鹫衔走后,送入森林。一位独居的森林游牧者带她回来,与其同居生活。她因此生下两子。长子以母亲名命名,名为孔塔子。』迦多瓦罕那森林据说是一个城镇,五谷丰登,水流、山岳、田地等皆富饶盛产,且因常有鹫鸟飞翔而得名,犹如迦多瓦罕那国王乘鹫鸟巡游一般。
Byādhipaṭikammatthaṃ bhikkhācāravattena āhiṇḍanto pasatamattaṃ sappiṃ alabhitvāti tadā kira jeṭṭhassa kontaputtatissattherassa kucchivāto samuṭṭhāsi. Taṃ bāḷhāya dukkhavedanāya pīḷitaṃ kaniṭṭho sumitto nāma thero disvā ‘‘kimettha, bhante, laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti pucchi. Tissatthero, ‘‘āvuso, pasatamattaṃ sappiṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vatvā rañño nivedanaṃ tassa gilānapaccayaṃ pacchābhattaṃ sappiatthāya caraṇañca paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘bhikkhācāravelāyameva piṇḍāya carantena tayā yadi sakkā laddhuṃ, evaṃ vicaritvā yaṃ laddhaṃ, taṃ āharā’’ti āha. Kaniṭṭhopi vuttanayeneva bhikkhācāravattena caranto pasatamattampi sappiṃ nālattha. So pana kucchivāto balavataro sappighaṭasatenapi vūpasametuṃ asakkuṇeyyo ahosi. Thero teneva byādhibalena kālamakāsi. Keci pana ‘‘vicchikanāmakena kīṭavisena ḍaṭṭho thero tassa visavegena adhimattāya dukkhavedanāya samannāgato taṃ vūpasametuṃ vuttanayeneva pasatamattaṃ sappiṃ alabhitvā parinibbuto’’ti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
因病情恶化,因不遵守比库戒律而受责备,暂时得不到食物。当时,长者孔塔子坎特长老从疾病中因肚子疼痛而烦乱之中苏醒。小者、同修胜聪长老见状,问道:“尊者,这里可获得食物吗?”长老回答:“朋友,暂时还没有食物得到。”他说:“既然如此,既要外出托钵乞食,若能获得食物,便将其取来。”小者也依此法出外托钵,暂时依然得不到食物。然而,因肚子疼痛严重,即使使用沙布与百药,也未能止痛。长老因此病重临终。有人说,这长老死于名为蛆虫毒的虫咬,被剧毒疼痛折磨后,因暂时未得食物而远离俗世,最终涅槃。所引为大史诗曰——
‘‘Pāde kīṭavisenāsi, ḍaṭṭho jeṭṭho savedano;
‘脚中被虫咬毒,长者觉剧痛难忍;’
Āha puṭṭho kaniṭṭhena, bhesajjaṃ pasataṃ ghataṃ.
‘幼者为他熬药疗,细心掣除疼痛罐。’
‘‘Rañño nivedanaṃ thero, gilānapaccayepi ca;
‘长老接受国王的送给和医药施助;’
Sappiatthañca caraṇaṃ, pacchābhattaṃ paṭikkhipi.
‘为获取食物,放弃晚饭后,出外乞食走。’
‘‘Piṇḍāya ce caraṃ sappiṃ, labhase tvaṃ tamāhara;
「若于施食时行脚,从他处得黑衣;
Iccāha tissatthero so, sumittaṃ theramuttamaṃ.
则此三师尊言,是最显著长老。」
‘‘Piṇḍāya caratā tena, na laddhaṃ pasataṃ ghataṃ;
「此行施食期间,未得破碗服器;
Sappikumbhasatenāpi, byādhi jāto asādhiyo.
虽有病困难治,非难以治之疾。」
‘‘Teneva byādhinā thero, patto āyukkhayantikaṃ;
「以此疾病长老,得过寿命极限;
Ovaditvappamādena, nibbātuṃ mānasaṃ akā.
彼以劝戒无懈,心无欲灭涅槃。」
‘‘Ākāsamhi nisīditvā, tejodhātuvasena so;
他说:『坐在空中,以光明元素为具;
Yathāruci adhiṭṭhāya, sarīraṃ parinibbuto.
如同依止光明,身体已涅槃灭尽。』
‘‘Jālā sarīrā nikkhamma, nimaṃsachārikaṃ ḍahi;
『网状的身体从外而出,将燃烧残渣焚烧;
Therassa sakalaṃ kāyaṃ, aṭṭhikāni tu no ḍahī’’ti.
长老的整个身躯,骨头却不被焚毁。』
Appamādena ovaditvāti ‘‘amhādisānampi evaṃ paccayā dullabhā, tumhe labhamānesu paccayesu appamajjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karothā’’ti evaṃ appamādena ovaditvā. Pallaṅkenāti samantato ūrubaddhāsanena. Itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvāti tejodhātukasiṇārammaṇaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā. Therassa sakkāraṃ katvāti therassa dhātusakkāraṃ katvā. Catūsu dvāresu pokkharaṇiyo kārāpetvā bhesajjassa pūrāpetvāti ekasmiṃ dvāre catasso pokkharaṇiyo kārāpetvā tattha ekaṃ pokkharaṇiṃ sappissa pūrāpetvā ekaṃ madhuno, ekaṃ phāṇitassa, ekaṃ sakkarāya pūrāpesi. Sesadvāresupi evameva kārāpesīti vadanti.
以不懈怠而劝诫者,即言『和我们诸人相同的这种条件甚为难得,汝等在得遇此等条件时不应懈怠,应行沙门行法』。床榻者,以四面粗布绑缚的座位。木本体之标记,是指这用途。已入光明元素者,即已入光明元素气相观的禅定。为长老加敬者,是为对长老之元素加敬。将四门置莲花座以备药材,是指在一门设四莲花座,其中一莲花盛香薰,一为蜜,一为乳酪,一为糖。其余门亦同此设置,谓之如此。
Sabhāyaṃ satasahassanti nagaramajjhe vinicchayasālāyaṃ satasahassaṃ. Iminā sakalanagarato samuṭṭhitaṃ āyaṃ nidasseti. Pañcasatasahassāni rañño uppajjantīti ca raṭṭhato uppajjanakaṃ āyaṃ ṭhapetvā vuttaṃ. Tatoti yathāvuttapañcasatasahassato. Nigrodhattherassa devasikaṃ satasahassaṃ visajjesīti kathaṃ pana therassa satasahassaṃ visajjesi? Rājā kira divasassa tikkhattuṃ sāṭake parivattento ‘‘therassa cīvaraṃ nīta’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘āma nīta’’nti sutvāva parivatteti. Theropi divasassa tikkhattuṃ ticīvaraṃ parivatteti. Tassa hi ticīvaraṃ hatthikkhandhe ṭhapetvā pañcahi ca gandhasamuggasatehi pañcahi ca mālāsamuggasatehi saddhiṃ pātova āharīyittha, tathā divā ceva sāyañca. Theropi na bhaṇḍikaṃ bandhitvā ṭhapesi, sampattasabrahmacārīnaṃ adāsi. Tadā kira jambudīpe bhikkhusaṅghassa yebhuyyena nigrodhattherasseva santakaṃ cīvaraṃ ahosi. Evaṃ therassa divase divase satasahassaṃ visajjesi. Uḷāro lābhasakkāroti ettha labbhati pāpuṇīyatīti lābho, catunnaṃ paccayānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sakkaccaṃ kātabbo dātabboti sakkāro, cattāro paccayāyeva. Paccayā eva hi paṇītapaṇītā sundarasundarā abhisaṅkharitvā katā ‘‘sakkāro’’ti vuccanti. Atha vā parehi kātabbagāravakiriyā pupphādīhi pūjā vā sakkāro.
于城中集会处藏经楼有一百万。此数示现由全城众起。谓曰王生五十万,则为国家增生之数,是设立此数之由。是故五十万之数也。犹如所言五十万也。针对尼拘陀长老所供天人一百万,如何供养长老一百万?王每日行三时约三十架步,问曰『长老衣服可否携带?』闻答『是,携带』便行三时步。长老亦三时穿三件衣,放于手臂,携同五种香和五种花环,昼夜不断。如是,长老不将钵藏置,施与有功德的优婆塞。当地犹如尼拘陀长老所拥有的纱笼衣。长老日日供应一百万。『利润、尊敬』即此处称谓,意为得到和所获得者,此为四因缘之俗语。必须当做,施与者即尊敬,四因缘下。因缘者,即依因缘严整美好条件而作,谓之尊敬。或他人行施敬礼,以花等供养者,亦谓尊敬。
Diṭṭhigatānīti ettha diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ muttagataṃ (ma. ni. 2.119), saṅkhāragata’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 41) viya. Gantabbābhāvato vā diṭṭhiyā gatamattaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ, diṭṭhiyā gahaṇamattanti attho. Diṭṭhippakāro vā diṭṭhigataṃ, diṭṭhibhedoti vuttaṃ hoti. Lokiyā hi vidhayuttagatappakārasadde samānatthe icchanti. Na kho panetaṃ sakkā imesaṃ majjhe vasantena vūpasametunti tesañhi majjhe vasanto tesuyeva antogadhattā ādeyyavacano na hoti, tasmā evaṃ cintesi. Tadā tasmiṃ ṭhāne vasantassa sukhavihārābhāvato taṃ pahāya icchitabbasukhavihāramattaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘attanā phāsukavihārena viharitukāmo’’ti. Ahogaṅgapabbatanti evaṃnāmakaṃ pabbataṃ. Dhammena vinayena satthusāsanenāti ettha dhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthu. Vinayoti codanā sāraṇā ca. Satthusāsananti ñattisampadā anusāvanasampadā ca, tasmā bhūtena vatthunā codetvā sāretvā ñattisampadāya anusāvanasampadāya ca ukkhepanīyādikammavasena niggayhamānāpīti vuttaṃ hoti. Abbudaṃ thenanaṭṭhena, malaṃ kiliṭṭhabhāvakaraṇaṭṭhena, kaṇṭakaṃ vijjhanaṭṭhena. Aggiṃ paricarantīti aggihuttakā viya aggiṃ pūjenti . Pañcātape tappantīti catūsu ṭhānesu aggiṃ katvā majjhe ṭhatvā sūriyātapena tappanti. Ādiccaṃ anuparivattantīti udayakālato pabhuti sūriyaṃ olokayamānā yāvatthaṅgamanā sūriyābhimukhāva parivattanti. Vobhindissāmāti paggaṇhiṃsūti vināsessāmāti ussāhamakaṃsu. Avisahantoti asakkonto.
所谓见解所属者,在此意指见解本身确实归属于见解类别,犹如所谓隐藏其中、断灭其中、因所造行蕴而所属等相似说法。因缺乏可至之处,或见解本身即为见解的归属,且以见解的深浅为其义。又见解之造成者即为见解所属,即谓见解之差别。世间间对于有分别的境界及行为,也依同样名义而欲求之。然而此间由于无法以居于其中之人调伏他们,故此思量曰:彼时处于该地者,因无快乐安住,故舍弃之欲求取快乐安住处,遂表言曰「欲以自身安乐安住」。所谓“无屋岗山”,即为该山之名。所谓法、律、世尊教法者,此处「法」指实有之对象;律者为戒律规章;世尊教法为教戒传授及遵奉。故以实有之对象为标示,令戒律规章与教法传承得以确立遵守,免其废弛,此为教法传授之义。泥泞肮脏为浊污之所在,荆棘亦为妨碍之物。若如供奉火者,火若燃烧,五火炽热,置中央以太阳热能加持,日轮东升西落而环转不息。誓言毁灭乃为彻底消除之意。无能忍受者谓无所能持。
Sattadivasenarajjaṃ sampaṭicchāti sattadivase rajjasukhaṃ tāva anubhava. Tamatthaṃ saññāpesīti kukkuccāyitamatthaṃ bodhesi. Kathaṃ saññāpesīti āha ‘‘so kirā’’tiādi. Cittarūpanti cittānurūpaṃ, yathākāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kissāti kena kāraṇena. Are tvaṃ nāma paricchinnamaraṇanti sattahi divasehi paricchinnamaraṇaṃ. Vissatthoti nirāsaṅkacitto, maraṇasaṅkārahito nibbhayoti vuttaṃ hoti. Assāsapassāsanibaddhaṃ maraṇaṃ pekkhamānāti ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ assasitvā passasāmi passasitvā vā assasāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasi kareyyaṃ, bahu vata me kataṃ assā’’ti evaṃ maraṇassatiyā anuyuñjanato assāsapassāsappavattikālapaṭibaddhaṃ maraṇaṃ pekkhamānā. Tattha assāsoti bahinikkhamananāsavāto. Passāsoti antopavisanavāto. Vuttavipariyāyenapi vadanti.
七日间无怨恨,即于七日内体验君王之安乐。对此作出谏诤,意在断除其怨恨不悦之意。如何谏诤?语曰「是乎」等。心之形态即对应心之所向,谓随心所欲。何以致此?谓汝遭遇七日断命,七日内遭断命。无疑无畏者曰无畏,谓无惧死亡之忧。观察生死息息吸呼联结者,谓“嗟乎!吾将于此期间生存,期间吸气呼气,受持世尊教法,吾曾多时行吸气法”,如此以思维勤修呼吸流转之际观察死。吸气者为由腹部出入气;呼气者为由胸膛进出气。亦有人说法相反。
Migavaṃ nikkhamitvāti migamāraṇatthāya ‘‘araññe migapariyesanaṃ carissāmī’’ti nikkhamitvā. Tattha migavanti migānaṃ vānanato hesanato bādhanato ‘‘migava’’nti laddhasamaññaṃ migavaṃ. Yonakamahādhammarakkhitattheranti yonakavisaye jātaṃ idhāgantvā pabbajitaṃ dhammarakkhitanāmadheyyaṃ mahātheraṃ. Hatthināgenāti mahāhatthinā. Mahantapariyāyopi hi nāgasaddoti vadanti. Ahināgādito vā visesanatthaṃ ‘‘hatthināgenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassāsayaṃ tassa ajjhāsayaṃ. Tassa passantassevāti anādare sāmivacanaṃ, tasmiṃ passanteyevāti attho. Ākāse uppatitvāti ettha ayaṃ vikubbaniddhi na hotīti gihissapi imaṃ iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ dassesi. Sā hi ‘‘pakativaṇṇaṃ vijahitvā kumārakavaṇṇaṃ vā dasseti nāgavaṇṇaṃ vā, vividhampi senābyūhaṃ dassetī’’ti evaṃ āgatā iddhi pakativaṇṇavijahanavikāravasena pavattattā vikubbaniddhi nāma. Adhiṭṭhāniddhiyā pana paṭikkhepo natthi. Tathā ca vakkhati khuddakavatthukkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 252) ‘‘iddhipāṭihāriyanti ettha vikubbaniddhipāṭihāriyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, adhiṭṭhāniddhi pana appaṭikkhittāti veditabbā’’ti. Laggetvāti ākāse kāyabandhanaṃ pasāretvā tattha cīvaraṃ laggetvā.
起身出行猎取野兽者,谓为“出猎”,意即于林中搜寻猎物。野兽谓为诸兽,因其森林、脚伤、苦恼而称“野兽”。“䴉鸟大法护持长老”是指于䴉鸟地区出家,被尊称为法护持之大长老。“象龙”意为大象龙。即使为大范围环绕,龙之名仍称之为象龙。始自无毒蛇等,称“象龙”乃区别用语。其意识、心志及目光清晰观察,谓之“注视”。天空中显现、变化不定之神通,不为鬼宅所成,为凡夫亦能显现之神通。所谓神通,乃破除假相,显露童子色或蛇色,示各种军队排列变化,称为神通。借坚固定力,神通不会衰减。本文稍后《小杂集品》云:“神通说中此地破除神通,坚固定力却未曾破除”,当识其义。谓伸展身绑,披披衣,常被衣
Chaṇavesanti tuṭṭhijananavesaṃ, ussavavesanti attho. Paṭiyādesunti ‘‘āgatakāle cīvarādīnaṃ pariyesanaṃ bhāriya’’nti paṭhamameva pattacīvarāni sampādesuṃ. Padhānagharanti bhāvanānuyogavasena vīriyārambhassa anurūpaṃ vivittasenāsanaṃ. Sopīti rañño bhāgineyyaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Anupabbajitoti uḷāravibhavena khattiyajanena anugantvā pabbajito. Gantvāti iddhiyā gantvā. Kusalādhippāyoti manāpajjhāsayo. Dveḷhakajātoti ‘‘ime bhikkhū na ekamaggena kathentī’’ti saṃsayamāpanno. Ekekaṃ bhikkhusahassaparivāranti ekekassa ekekasahassaparicchinnaṃ bhikkhuparivārañca. Gaṇhitvā āgacchathāti vuttepi ‘‘sāsanaṃ paggaṇhituṃ samattho’’ti vuttattā therā bhikkhū ‘‘dhammakamma’’nti maññamānā gatā. Īdisesu hi ṭhānesu kukkuccaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Kappiyasāsanañhetaṃ na gihikammapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ. Thero nāgacchīti kiñcāpi ‘‘rājā pakkosatī’’ti vuttepi dhammakammatthāya āgantuṃ vaṭṭati, dvikkhattuṃ pana pesitepi na āgato kira. Thero hi sabbattha vikhyātavasena sambhāvanuppattito sambhāvitassa ca uddhaṃ kattabbakiccasiddhito asāruppavacanalesena na āgacchīti. Mahallako nu kho bhante theroti kiñcāpi rājā theraṃ diṭṭhapubbo, nāmaṃ pana sallakkhetuṃ asakkonto evaṃ pucchīti vadanti. Vayhanti upari maṇḍapasadisaṃ padaracchannaṃ, sabbapaliguṇṭhimaṃ vā chādetvā kataṃ sakaṭavisesaṃ vayhanti vadanti. Nāvāsaṅghāṭaṃ bandhitvāti ettha nāvāti poto. So hi orato pāraṃ patati gacchatīti poto, satte netīti nāvāti ca vuccati. Ekato saṅghaṭitā nāvā nāvāsaṅghāṭaṃ, tathā taṃ bandhitvāti attho.
乐音称嬉笑乐趣为狂喜,而怒颇为愤怒。彼此责备曰:“来时寻找衣服等,妻子为重。”译曰:“乐屋”乃意指振奋精进,故而被称为乐屋。国王之弟布达求出家者,谓随其尊贵而出家。谓凭神通而去者。称其善法支配之心意。谓“二族人”意为“诸比库各自集群”,即一个比库有一个由千人组成的团体。语“聚集来往”谓“能摄持教法”。尊者比库认“法与业”意义,前往之时有忧虑死伤不得入宗。谓尊者为遍及著名者,担任修持教法职责,非败坏之言。谓有人问尊者“王者长老否”,尊者不能指出其名,不得不问答。谓覆以榻屋顶或帷帐遮盖,有时覆以特制马车。谓“舟中捆绑”,舟意即船;谓船从河岸出发,到对岸,即所谓船。一个聚集的舟,又绑成舟之意义。
Sāsanapaccatthikānaṃ bahubhāvato āha ‘‘ārakkhaṃ saṃvidhāyā’’ti. Yanti yasmā, yena kāraṇenāti attho. ‘‘Āguṃ na karotīti nāgo’’ti (cūḷava. mettagūmāṇavapūcchāniddesa 27) vacanato pāpakaraṇābhāvato samaṇo idha nāgo nāmāti maññamānā ‘‘eko taṃ mahārāja samaṇanāgo dakkhiṇahatthe gaṇhissatī’’ti byākariṃsu. Abbāhiṃsūti ākaḍḍhiṃsu. ‘‘Rañño hatthaggahaṇaṃ līḷāvasena kataṃ viya hotīti kasmātiādicodanaṃ kata’’nti vadanti. Bāhiratoti uyyānassa bāhirato. Passantānaṃ atidukkaraṃ hutvā paññāyatīti āha ‘‘padesapathavīkampanaṃ dukkara’’nti. Adhiṭṭhāne panettha visuṃ dukkaratā nāma natthi. Sīmaṃ akkamitvāti antosīmaṃ sīmāya abbhantaraṃ akkamitvā. Abhiññāpādakanti abhiññāya patiṭṭhābhūtaṃ. Vikubbaniddhiyā eva paṭikkhittattā pathavīcalanaṃ adhiṭṭhahi. Rathassa antosīmāya ṭhito pādova calīti ettha pādoti rathacakkaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tañhi rathassa gamanakiccasādhanato pādasadisattā idha ‘‘pādo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sakkhatīti sakkhissati. Etamatthanti vinā cetanāya pāpassa asambhavasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ. Cetanāhanti ettha ‘‘cetanaṃ aha’’nti padacchedo kātabbo. Cetayitvāti cetanaṃ pavattayitvā. Dīpakatittiroti attano nisinnabhāvassa dīpanato evaṃladdhanāmo tittiro. Yaṃ araññaṃ netvā sākuṇiko tassa saddena āgatāgate tittire gaṇhāti.
谓依照教法各别部分多次说“护持安置”。谓去处,谓原因。谓“毒蛇不咬”语,指世尊为非恶之说;此处懷疑谓毒蛇即为世尊弟子,言“为此大王弟子毒蛇将执金箍”。口头攻击言语具争执。谓“拉王持象杖玩弄”等语根由说法者。谓“外面”即花园周围。谓观看时外部极其困难叫做“地面震动,困难”。谓“限界被清除”,指内部限界被清除。谓“显现足”指车轮之意。谓“在场谕示”,谓执意之意。此理即谓明知但无意造恶,故不能归咎于其恶意。谓意为“意念”,谓意念发动。谓“照明猫头鹰”,意指自己坐着状光明源,其名为“猫头鹰”。谓由“林中行者”发出之声,称为“猫头鹰”。
Tāpasaṃ pucchīti atīte kira ekasmiṃ paccantagāme eko sākuṇiko ekaṃ dīpakatittiraṃ gahetvā suṭṭhu sikkhāpetvā pañjare pakkhipitvā paṭijaggati. So taṃ araññaṃ netvā tassa saddena āgatāgate tittire gaṇhāti. Tittiro ‘‘maṃ nissāya bahū mama ñātakā nassanti, mayhetaṃ pāpa’’nti nissaddo ahosi. So tassa nissaddabhāvaṃ ñatvā veḷupesikāya taṃ sīse paharati. Tittiro dukkhāturatāya saddaṃ karoti. Evaṃ so sākuṇiko taṃ nissāya tittire gahetvā jīvikaṃ kappesi. Atha so tittiro cintesi ‘‘ime marantūti mayhaṃ cetanā natthi, paṭicca kammaṃ pana maṃ phusati. Mayi saddaṃ akaronte hi ete nāgacchanti, karonteyevāgacchanti, āgatāgate ayaṃ gahetvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpeti, atthi nu kho ettha mayhaṃ pāpaṃ, natthī’’ti. So tato paṭṭhāya ‘‘ko nu kho me imaṃ kaṅkhaṃ chindeyyā’’ti tathārūpaṃ paṇḍitaṃ upadhārento carati. Athekadivasaṃ so sākuṇiko bahuke tittire gahetvā pacchiṃ pūretvā ‘‘pānīyaṃ pivissāmī’’ti bodhisattassa tāpasapabbajjāya pabbajitvā jhānābhiññāyo nibbattetvā araññe vasantassa assamaṃ gantvā taṃ pañjaraṃ bodhisattassa santike ṭhapetvā pānīyaṃ pivitvā vālikātale nipanno niddaṃ okkami. Tittiro tassa niddamokkantabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘mama kaṅkhaṃ imaṃ tāpasaṃ pucchissāmi, jānanto me kathessatī’’ti pañjare nisinnoyeva –
谓苦行者之问。昔日在一村有一林中猫头鹰,曾携带一盏灯经过一缸训练后被关笼中。猫头鹰引导进入林中,用其声街知巷闻,称为猫头鹰。猫头鹰言:“因我寄托处多亲属灭亡,则为罪业。”无言默许者,知此默许发怒敲门。猫头鹰因痛苦而鸣叫。如此猫头鹰凭依其处生活。接着猫头鹰思维:“这些死者于我无计,无意,唯因业果感触我。未发声者,死者来去皆随我,觅食招致我亡,是否我有恶?无。”于是决心“谁能断绝我此疑虑”,带智慧修习行走。数日,猫头鹰带众多猫头鹰捕食,随后满载,曰“温饮一水”,以发起苦行而出家,禅定及禅那智慧得成,偷偷归林,在苦行者附近置笼,饮水后卧于草下眠。猫头鹰知其眠则思:“我当为苦行者之问解答,知我者当告。”囚笼内遂安坐。
‘‘Ñātako no nisinnoti, bahu āgacchate jano;
‘亲戚难道不坐着吗,许多人来往;
Paṭicca kammaṃ phusati, tasmiṃ me saṅkate mano’’ti. (jā. 1.4.75) –
因为业力感召,我的心存疑惑’。”(生经一·第四十七节)——
Tāpasaṃ pucchi. Tassattho (jā. aṭṭha. 3.75) – bhante, sacāhaṃ saddaṃ na kareyyaṃ, ayaṃ tittirajano na āgaccheyya, mayi pana saddaṃ karonte ‘‘ñātako no nisinno’’ti ayaṃ bahujano āgacchati, taṃ āgatāgataṃ luddo gahetvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpento maṃ paṭicca maṃ nissāya etaṃ pāṇātipātakammaṃ phusati paṭilabhati vindati, tasmiṃ maṃ paṭicca kate pāpe ‘‘mama nu kho etaṃ pāpa’’nti evaṃ me mano saṅkati parisaṅkati kukkuccaṃ āpajjatīti.
塔巴萨问:尊者,(生经八·第三十五节)——尊者,若有人不发声,这贫嘴之人不来,我虽然发声说‘亲戚们没有坐下’,这许多人到来。来来往往间,乞丐抓住我害我性命,因缘我成为福杀业的对象,遭受其报应。我心存疑惑,思忖‘莫非这真是恶业吗?’由此产生怀疑和忧虑。
Na paṭicca kammaṃ phusatītiādikāya pana tāpasena vuttagāthāya ayamattho – yadi tava pāpakiriyāya mano na padussati, tanninno tappoṇo na hoti, evaṃ sante luddena taṃ paṭicca katampi pāpakammaṃ taṃ na phusati na allīyati. Pāpakiriyāya hi appossukkassa nirālayassa bhadrassa parisuddhassa sato tava pāṇātipātacetanāya abhāvā taṃ pāpaṃ na upalimpati, tava cittaṃ na allīyatīti.
“没有业力感召”如开头塔巴萨所述之诗句,此意为:若因你行恶心不生,那个乞丐不会成为处死者,既然如此,乞丐对此恶业不会感召染污心境,内心不被玷污。恶业投缘若无纯洁之心,业果不附染,心不受染污。
Samayaṃ uggaṇhāpesīti attano sammāsambuddhassa laddhiṃ uggaṇhāpesi. Sāṇipākāraṃ parikkhipāpetvāti ettha sāṇipākāranti karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ, attānañca therañca yathā te bhikkhū na passanti, evaṃ sāṇipākārena samantato parikkhipāpetvāti attho, sāṇipākāraṃ vā samantato parikkhipāpetvāti evamettha attho gahetabbo. Sāṇipākārantareti sāṇipākārassa abbhantare. Ekaladdhiketi samānaladdhike. Kiṃ vadati sīlenāti kiṃvādī. Atha vā ko katamo vādo kiṃvādo, so etassa atthīti kiṃvādī. Sassataṃ attānañca lokañca vadanti paññapenti sīlenāti sassatavādino. Atha vā vadanti etenāti vādo, diṭṭhiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sassato vādo sassatavādo, so etesaṃ atthīti sassatavādino, sassatadiṭṭhinoti attho. Atha sassato vādo etesamatthīti kasmā vuttaṃ, tesañhi attā loko ca sassatoti adhippeto, na vādoti? Saccametaṃ. Sassatasahacaritatāya pana vādopi sassatoti vutto yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti. Sassatoti vādo etesanti vā itisaddalopo daṭṭhabbo. Ye rūpādīsu aññataraṃ attāti ca lokoti ca gahetvā taṃ sassataṃ amataṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ paññapenti, te sassatavādinoti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ niddese paṭisambhidāyañca –
“时机护持”者,谓自身取得正觉者成就后之护持。这里“护持工具”是指目的上的用语,如自己与长老比库若不察觉,于是用护持工具全面布置护持。护持工具间之中。统一益贤。何谓戒?如是言论。或是什么论?或何意?是尔之义。“执谈自己与世界”为恒常,有戒论者。“或谓此言论、见解”为执此名称。恒常论者,即执此恒常见解,世俗中自己与世界皆恒常。有些恒常论者的所说,即“笨妇煮粥”之喻。恒常论,此名可见为其词义。取形色等为他者,所谓世界,谓认为恒常、不死、永恒、确实非变者,此为恒常论者。如此所述,辨析如下——
‘‘Rūpaṃ attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapenti. Vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapentī’’ti.
“形色既是我亦是世界且恒存”,感觉……认知……行……识亦我亦世俗且恒存,谓自己及世界皆依此说法恒存。”
Ayañca attho ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti imissā pañcavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena vutto. ‘‘Rūpavantaṃ attāna’’ntiādikāya pana pañcadasavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena cattāro cattāro khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadañño lokoti paññapentīti ayañca attho labbhati. Tathā ekaṃ khandhaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā añño attano upabhogabhūto lokoti, sasantatipatite vā khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadañño lokoti paññapentīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Sattesu saṅkhāresu vā ekaccaṃ sassataṃ etassāti ekaccasassato, ekaccasassatavādo. So etesamatthīti ekaccasassatikā, ekaccasassatavādino. Te duvidhā honti sattekaccasassatikā saṅkhārekaccasassatikāti . Tattha ‘‘issaro nicco, aññe sattā aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā sattekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi issaravādā. ‘‘Nicco brahmā, aññe sattā aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādāpi sattekaccasassatikāti veditabbā. ‘‘Paramāṇavo niccā, dviaṇukādayo aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā saṅkhārekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi kaṇādavādādayo. ‘‘Cakkhādayo aniccā, viññāṇaṃ nicca’’nti evaṃvādinopi saṅkhārekaccasassatikāti veditabbā.
此处的义理谓“色由自性观照,感受……分别……行……识亦由自性观照”,此乃以五种身见为依凭而言。对于“有色之我”等十五种及其他五种身见,四蕴各别被视作“我”,而其中他者亦被认定为外境世俗;此义亦应如此理解。譬如执一蕴为“我”,则他者即为他我的世间;同样执常住蕴为“我”,非常住蕴即它者,亦作他我的世间,理应了知。五蕴或行者中有少部分恒常成立,此即一部分恒常说。对此持此说者有两种,一为恒常行者中的一部分,另一为恒常行者中的少部分。其间所谓恒常行者中的一部分,即认为有主宰、恒常存在,别的众生无常,正如主宰论所述。所谓恒常梵天存在,别的众生无常,亦是此一说。主张“最小元素恒常,二元等诸法无常”的说者,亦为恒常行者中的一派。又有言“眼根等无常,识恒常”等者,亦归入恒常行者中的少部分,应当了知。
Nanu ‘‘ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti etasmiṃ vāde cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodho eva, tayidaṃ kathaṃ micchādassananti? Ko vā evamāha – ‘‘cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ micchādassana’’nti, asassatesuyeva pana kesañci dhammānaṃ sassatabhāvābhiniveso idha micchādassanaṃ. Tena pana ekavāre pavattamānena cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvāvabodho vidūsito saṃsaṭṭhabhāvato, visasaṃsaṭṭho viya sabbo sappimaṇḍo sakiccakaraṇāsamatthatāya sammādassanapakkhe ṭhapetabbataṃ nārahatīti. Asassatabhāvena nicchitāpi vā cakkhuādayo samāropitajīvasabhāvā eva diṭṭhigatikehi gayhantīti tadavabodhassa micchādassanabhāvo na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Evañca katvā asaṅkhatāya ca saṅkhatāya ca dhātuyā vasena yathākkamaṃ ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatāti evaṃ pavatto vibhajjavādopi ekaccasassatavādo āpajjatīti evaṃpakārā codanā anavakāsā hoti aviparītadhammasabhāvasampaṭipattibhāvato. Kāmañcettha purimasassatavādepi asassatānaṃ dhammānaṃ sassatāti gahaṇaṃ visesato micchādassanaṃ, sassatānaṃ pana sassatāti gāho na micchādassanaṃ yathāsabhāvaggahaṇabhāvato. Asassatesuyeva pana kecideva dhammā sassatāti gahetabbadhammesu vibhāgappavattiyā imassa vādassa vādantaratā vuttā. Na cettha samudāyantogadhattā ekadesassa sappadesasassataggāho nippadesasassataggāhe samodhānaṃ gacchatīti sakkā vattuṃ vāditabbisayavisesavasena vādadvayassa pavattattā. Aññe eva hi diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘sabbe dhammā sassatā’’ti abhiniviṭṭhā, aññe ekaccasassatāti saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ ekadesapariggaho ca vādadvayassa paribyattoyevāti.
然而,“一切法有常有无常”中,于此辩论而言,眼根等诸根无常之存在乃契合实性之显现,如此为何谓之邪见?谁言“眼根等无常之存在乃邪见”,实乃无明愚痴中对某些法恒常性的执着为邪见。由此而论,于一时流转中对眼根等无常存在的了解,乃因愚痴堕落,犹如宝珠披灰,虽有实性,然实修正见之路乃应立之,无阿拉汉。即便眼根等以无常为性,但支相安置活体,亦为诸见所系,故邪见不可斩断。复如是说,依无量无测有为与无为法而分辨,一部分法为常,一部分法为无常,持此见者便为部分恒常说,因果详核使不容置疑。这种辩论生恶趣谬见,破除实相之见难也。乃至对于过去恒常见,视无常为常亦乃重大邪见;对于“恒常即恒常”则为受持依据,尚非邪见。如实以无常性属部分恒常法而观,则其辩说中见理自杂。若非从因缘聚合而生者,恒常内无共作,谓不可断故,乃二派辩论相诣也。又有人执一切法恒常,或执部分法恒常,因五蕴行无余终止备受论议,故见殊异也。
Antānantikāti ettha amati gacchati ettha sabhāvo osānanti anto, mariyādā. Tappaṭisedhena ananto. Kassa panāyaṃ antānantoti? Lokīyati saṃsāranissaraṇatthikehi diṭṭhigatikehi, lokīyati vā ettha tehi puññāpuññaṃ tabbipāko cāti lokoti saṅkhyaṃ gatassa paṭibhāganimittādisabhāvassa attano. Anto ca ananto ca antānanto ca nevantanānanto cāti antānanto sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesena vā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādīsu viya. Antānantasahacarito vādo antānanto yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti. Antānantasannissayo vā yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. So etesamatthīti antānantikā, antānantavādino. ‘‘Antavā ayaṃ loko, ananto ayaṃ loko, antavā ca ayaṃ loko ananto ca, nevāyaṃ loko antavā na panānanto’’ti evaṃ antaṃ vā anantaṃ vā antānantaṃ vā nevantanānantaṃ vā ārabbha pavattavādāti attho. Catubbidhā hi antānantavādino antavādī anantavādī antānantavādī nevantanānantavādīti. Tathā hi koci paṭibhāganimittaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ avaḍḍhetvā taṃ ‘‘loko’’ti gahetvā antasaññī lokasmiṃ hoti. Cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ katvā vaḍḍhitakasiṇe pana anantasaññī hoti. Uddhamadho avaḍḍhetvā pana tiriyaṃ vaḍḍhetvā uddhamadho antasaññī tiriyaṃ anantasaññī hoti. Koci pana yasmā lokasaññito attā adhigatavisesehi mahesīhi kadāci ananto sakkhidiṭṭho anusuyyati, tasmā nevantavā. Yasmā pana tehiyeva kadāci antavā sakkhidiṭṭho anusuyyati, tasmā na pana anantoti evaṃ nevantanānantasaññī lokasmiṃ hoti. Keci pana yadi panāyaṃ attā antavāsiyā, dūradese upapajjamānānussaraṇādikiccanipphatti na siyā. Atha ananto idha ṭhitassa devalokanirayādīsu sukhadukkhānubhavanampi siyā. Sace pana antavā ca ananto ca, tadubhayapaṭisedhadosasamāyogo, tasmā antavā anantoti ca abyākaraṇīyo attāti evaṃ takkanavasena nevantanānantasaññī hotīti vaṇṇayanti.
关于终与无终,此处谓“终”指其界限剥除,“无终”谓其本性连绵不绝。如是,何谓终无终耶?世间以轮回苦乐果证为观点,谓世间乃因缘及果报集合故有终无终;终与无终参馀无终相,例如“名色依止六处”等。所谓终无终者,谓“此界有终,彼界无终;此界终也彼界无终,此界终彼界无终此二界皆非终亦非无终”之说。终无终者四种,即主张终说者、无终说者、同时主张终无终者、非终非无终者。譬如缘及轮回然以大小圈界为界,以扩大视之谓“界”;向上向下增长观察,向上视为终界,向下视为无终界。有人因领域所摄而有终界相观察,偶尔对诸有界能力者生无终观,以致非终观相有。因彼此怨嫉,有无终观相,即复是非终无终即难明觉等。又若有某处认自我为终界者,则远方出现时难于追随。反之无终者则于诸天界享受苦乐。若主终与无终并存则二相会合,故称终无终观者。意味为此而论终无终者。
Ettha ca yuttaṃ tāva purimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vādīnaṃ antañca anantañca antānantañca ārabbha pavattavādattā antānantikattaṃ, pacchimassa pana tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā kathaṃ antānantikattanti? Tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā eva. Yasmā antānantapaasedhavādopi antānantavisayo eva taṃ ārabbha pavattattā. Etadatthameva hi ārabbha ‘‘pavattavādā’’ti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ, evaṃ santepi yuttaṃ tāva pacchimavādadvayassa antānantikattaṃ, antānantānaṃ vasena ubhayavisayattā etesaṃ vādassa, purimavādadvayassa pana kathaṃ visuṃ antānantikattanti? Upacāravuttiyā. Samuditesu hi antānantavādesu pavattamāno antānantikasaddo tattha niruḷhatāya paccekampi antānantavādīsu pavattati yathā arūpajjhānesu paccekaṃ aṭṭhavimokkhapariyāyo, yathā ca loke sattisayoti.
此处又有先前三派论者往昔所起终无终论,后来因两派互相驳斥,如何谓终无终者?谓实因两派争论引发而起。因彼终说无终说从缘起涵摄此议而生,故今论彼争论亦属终无终议题。此乃由彼各自流派引起,故终无终谓之。譬如无形禅等特殊禅中,个别释迦牟尼弟子亦起疑虑妄想。此即终无终普遍破坏之表现,可作为此理据。
Amarāvikkhepikāti ettha na marati na upacchijjatīti amarā. Kā sā? ‘‘Evantipi me no, tathātipi me no, aññathātipi me no, notipi me no, no notipi me no’’ti (dī. ni. 1.62) evaṃ pavattavādavasena pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā ca. ‘‘Evantipi me no’’tiādinā vividho nānappakāro khepo paravādīnaṃ khipanaṃ vikkhepo, amarāya diṭṭhiyā vācāya vā vikkhepo amarāvikkhepo, so etesamatthīti amarāvikkhepikā. Atha vā amarāya diṭṭhiyā vācāya vikkhipantīti amarāvikkhepino, amarāvikkhepino eva amarāvikkhepikā. Atha vā amarā nāma macchajāti, sā ummujjananimujjanādivasena udake sandhāvamānā gahetuṃ na sakkā, evameva ayampi vādo ekasmiṃ sabhāve anavaṭṭhānato ito cito ca sandhāvati, gāhaṃ na upagacchatīti amarāya vikkhepo viyāti amarāvikkhepoti vuccati. Ayañhi amarāvikkhepiko ‘‘idaṃ kusala’’nti vā ‘‘akusala’’nti vā puṭṭho na kiñci byākaroti. ‘‘Idaṃ kusala’’nti vā puṭṭho ‘‘evantipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘kiṃ akusala’’nti vutte ‘‘tathātipi me no’’ti vadati. ‘‘Kiṃ ubhayato aññathā’’tipi vutte ‘‘aññathātipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘tividhenapi na hoti, kiṃ te laddhī’’ti vutte ‘‘notipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘kiṃ no no te laddhī’’ti vutte ‘‘no notipi me no’’ti vadati. Evaṃ vikkhepameva āpajjati, ekamekasmimpi pakkhe na tiṭṭhati. Tato ‘‘atthi paro loko’’tiādinā puṭṭhopi evameva vikkhipati, na ekasmiṃ pakkhe tiṭṭhati. So vuttappakāro amarāvikkhepo etesamatthīti amarāvikkhepikā.
不死恒转者,此谓不死,即无生灭也。如何说?“如是我无如是,如彼我无彼我,无他无非,无起无灭”为此见解及言语。多有各种奇异谬妄之见,因而造作迅速动摇,故名为不死恒转者。或因此见或彼语招致快速起伏,如问“此项善法否”,答“如是”;问“不善法否”,答“如是”;问“两者异否”,答“不异”;如是迅疾颠倒争辩,不立一方。不死恒转者又问“有他界否”,答“如是”,亦复起伏摇动,不立定论,故谓之不死恒转者。
Nanu cāyaṃ sabbopi amarāvikkhepiko kusalādayo dhamme paralokatthikādīni ca yathābhūtaṃ anavabujjhamāno tattha tattha pañhaṃ puṭṭho pucchāya vikkhepanamattaṃ āpajjati, tassa kathaṃ diṭṭhigatikabhāvo. Na hi avattukāmassa viya pucchitaṃ ajānantassa vikkhepakaraṇamattena diṭṭhigatikatā yuttāti? Vuccate – na heva kho pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇamattena tassa diṭṭhigatikatā, atha kho micchābhinivesavasena sassatābhinivesato. Micchābhiniviṭṭhoyeva hi puggalo mandabuddhitāya kusalādidhamme paralokatthikādīni ca yāthāvato asampaṭipajjamāno attanā aviññātassa atthassa paraṃ viññāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya musāvādādibhayena ca vikkhepaṃ āpajjatīti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti. Atha vā puññapāpānaṃ tabbipākānañca anavabodhena asaddahanena ca tabbisayāya pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇaṃyeva sundaranti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā abhinivisantassa uppannā visuṃyeva cesā ekā diṭṭhi sattabhaṅgadiṭṭhi viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tatoyeva ca vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā cā’’ti.
然此等一切不死恒转者,于善法异法及他世存在诸端,未得务解,且多以问答扰乱心意,于此理路如何说见解?答曰,非以问答扰乱即为见解,实乃因无明及执着恒常不灭所致。无明执着令愚笨之人对善异法及他世存在诸法未能明证,亦不能以真理告知他法,故生谬妄言语扰乱。复有言说世间不过灭尽见,余者恒常见;又有言善恶果报无明执着,因而妄问导致迷惑烦恼生出喜悦之见是美好或喜欢,并黩怀难堪而生惑乱。正如所言“惑乱生起则生见妄语”等。此说即谓恒常迷见因果并行而成。
Adhiccasamuppannikāti ettha adhicca yadicchakaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ vinā samuppanno attā ca loko cāti dassanaṃ adhiccasamuppannaṃ. Attalokasaññitānañhi khandhānaṃ adhiccuppattiākārārammaṇaṃ dassanaṃ tadākārasannissayavasena pavattito tadākārasahacaritatāya ca adhiccasamuppannanti vuccati yathā ‘‘mañcā ghosanti, kuntā pacarantī’’ti ca. Taṃ etesamatthīti adhiccasamuppannikā.
所谓「此有条件生起」,是指在此处分,任何因缘未具足而不能生起的事物,或我与世间,称为「条件生起」的现象。此处谓识色蕴中(名色五蕴)由条件生起的形态和境界的显现,因依赖此形态的相伴而发生,因其形式所伴随的存在,故称为条件生起。正如言「晕帐崩落,瓦片掉落」等。如是,此理即称为条件生起。
Saññīvādāti saññī vādo etesamatthīti saññīvādā ‘‘buddhaṃ assa atthīti buddho’’ti yathā. Atha vā saññīti pavatto vādo saññīsahacaraṇanayena. Saññī vādo yesaṃ te saññīvādā. ‘‘Rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, saññīti naṃ paññapenti, arūpī attā hoti, rūpī ca arūpī ca attā hoti, neva rūpī nārūpī ca attā hoti. Antavā attā hoti, anantavā attā hoti, antavā ca anantavā ca attā hoti, nevantavā nānantavā attā hoti. Ekattasaññī attā hoti, nānattasaññī attā hoti. Parittasaññī attā hoti, appamāṇasaññī attā hoti. Ekantasukhī attā hoti, ekantadukkhī attā hoti. Sukhadukkhī attā hoti, adukkhamasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, saññīti naṃ paññapentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.76) evaṃ soḷasavidhena vibhattavādānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
所谓有识说,即是以识为根本论断的见解。比如说“世尊觉悟了佛”,其含义就是以识为根据。或谓的「识」含义,是由识所伴随的同类相续。识论即指这般识的说法。有识说是指其包含各种识的辩析如:有色的我,健康者,死后重生;或无色的我,有形与无形的我,既非有形也非无形的我;有限的我,无限的我;有限与无限合体之我,既无有限亦无无限之我;单一识的我,多识的我;少识的我,无量识的我;单纯快乐的我,单纯痛苦的我;喜乐与苦痛相杂的我,无苦无乐的我,健康与死亡者识不见其色等。此等十六种识的类别便称为有识说。
Asaññīvādā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā ca saññīvāde vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Kevalañhi ‘‘saññī attā’’ti gaṇhantānaṃ vasena saññīvādā vuttā, ‘‘asaññī’’ti ca ‘‘nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti ca gaṇhantānaṃ vasena asaññīvādā ca nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā ca vuttāti veditabbā. Tattha asaññīvādā ‘‘rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, asaññīti naṃ paññapenti, arūpī attā hoti, rūpī ca arūpī ca attā hoti, neva rūpī nārūpī attā hoti. Antavā attā hoti, anantavā attā hoti, antavā ca anantavā ca attā hoti, nevantavā nānantavā attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, asaññīti naṃ paññapentī’’ti evaṃ aṭṭhavidhena vibhattā. Nevasaññīnāsaññīvādāpi evameva ‘‘rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, nevasaññīnāsaññīti naṃ paññapentī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.82) aṭṭhavidhena vibhattāti veditabbā.
无识说是指无识者与无识共同行者的说法,依识论所述而理解。凡是仅以「有识者即是我」而论群体者,为有识说;凡以「无识」及「无识共行者」而称者,即为无识说及无识共行说。其无识说例如:“我为有色、健康、终极死亡,无识不见其色;我为无色,亦复有色无色;既非有色亦非无色。有限的我,无限的我;有限与无限合体之我,既无有限亦无无限。我健康又终极死亡,无识不见其色”等八类,并细分类别。无识共行说类似以“我为有色、健康、终极死亡,无识与共同行者不见其色”等表述,有八种分类。所以应当知无识说与无识共论说的含义。
Ucchedavādāti ‘‘ayaṃ attā rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.85) evamādinā nayena pavattaṃ ucchedadassanaṃ ucchedo sahacaraṇanayena. Ucchedo vādo yesaṃ te ucchedavādā, ucchedavādo vā etesamatthīti ucchedavādā, ucchedaṃ vadantīti vā ucchedavādā.
断灭论者谓“此我由四大物质组成,生起于父母,身体分解时消灭毁灭,不复有后世复生之说”,此类说法称为断灭见。断灭说即依此义理提出,凡持此观点者称为断灭论者。断灭论即是断灭见之论者,断灭即指断灭见者。
Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti ettha diṭṭhadhammo nāma dassanabhūtena ñāṇena upaladdhadhammo, paccakkhadhammoti attho. Tattha tattha paṭiladdhattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Diṭṭhadhamme nibbānaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ, imasmiṃyeva attabhāve dukkhavūpasamanti attho. Taṃ vadantīti diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā. Te pana ‘‘yato kho bho ayaṃ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti, ettāvatā kho bho ayaṃ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.94) evamādinā nayena diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānaṃ paññapenti. Te hi mandhātukāmaguṇasadise mānusake kāmaguṇe, paranimmitavasavattidevarājassa kāmaguṇasadise dibbe ca kāmaguṇe upagatānaṃ diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānappattiṃ vadanti.
所谓现法涅槃说,是指对所谓现法涅槃,即依现见所起的觉知所获得的现法涅槃,以及随缘生起的现象的义理。其词义应依情境、缘起而解释。现法涅槃即是指在此生命体中,由五欲浊染所染污,从而苦难消退之涅槃。因而谓之现法涅槃说。那些认为“此我因五种欲乐浊染,达到平衡和谐,故可称其为现法涅槃”者(如《中部尼》1.94经所说),以此为理据,谓现法涅槃为现法涅槃。此等人多是缓慢求乐的世俗人,或当时因继世天王之欲乐染着,也称此为现法涅槃。
Vibhajjavādīti verañjakaṇḍe āgatanayeneva venayikādibhāvaṃ vibhajja vadatīti vibhajjavādī. · 「分别说者」者,如韦兰阇篇所来之理,分别而说应遣除等之状态,故为分别说者。
Tattha hi bhagavatā ‘‘ahañhi, brāhmaṇa, vinayāya dhammaṃ desemi rāgassā’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘no ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesī’’tiādinā verañjabrāhmaṇassa attano venayikādibhāvo vibhajja vuttoti. Apica somanassādīnaṃ cīvarādīnañca sevitabbāsevitabbabhāvaṃ vibhajja vadatīti vibhajjavādī, sassatucchedavāde vā vibhajja vadatīti vibhajjavādī, ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’tiādīnaṃ ṭhapanīyānaṃ pañhānaṃ ṭhapanato rāgādikhayasaṅkhātassa sassatassa rāgādikāyaduccaritādiucchedassa vacanato vibhajjavādī, sassatucchedabhūte ubho ante anupaggamma majjhimapaṭipadābhūtassa paṭiccasamuppādassa desanato vibhajjavādī, bhagavā. Parappavādaṃ maddantoti tasmiṃ tatiyasaṅgītikāle uppannaṃ vādaṃ, tato paṭṭhāya yāva saddhammantaradhānā āyatiṃ uppajjanakavādañca sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tasmiñhi samāgame ayaṃ thero yāni ca tadā uppannāni vatthūni, yāni ca āyatiṃ uppajjissanti, sabbesampi tesaṃ paṭibāhanatthaṃ satthārā dinnanayavaseneva tathāgatena ṭhapitamātikaṃ vibhajanto sakavāde pañca suttasatāni, paravāde pañcāti suttasahassaṃ āharitvā tadā uppannavādassa maddanato parappavādamaddanaṃ āyatiṃ uppajjanakavādānaṃ paṭisedhanalakkhaṇabhāvato āyatiṃ paṭisedhalakkhaṇaṃ kathāvatthuppakaraṇaṃ akāsi.
此中世尊谓曰:“我以胜义律法宣说戒律等法,非出于欲。”说毕又告斥婆罗门勿曲解其所说之律法性质。此外又分别说明起心快意诸衣饰等,分明指出何为可取、何为不可取,遂称分别论者。又分别论者斥难断灭论者,认为“有我和世界长存”,于是根据欲的灭尽、贪欲之害、欲及恶行导致灭亡言论,斥难断灭论者。又称二边(常断)论者。乃分别阐述有欲爱常断及无欲无断两极两端,以中道缘起法正道为教示之理。世尊又斥责他宗邪说,于第三集会时起争论,后至正法灭尽时,针对此争论所产生的执著不服,师长们和诸长老集五百经论及五千论述,纠正他宗邪说、辩驳断灭说,广泛浓缩成集,做为今后断邪分辨的根本道理经文名录,成为纠治未来邪说之教理论。
Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ · 如是《善见律注》之《心义灯》
Tatiyasaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā samattā. · 第三结集说之解释已毕。
Ācariyaparamparakathāvaṇṇanā师承次第说之解释
‘‘Kenābhata’’nti imaṃ pañhaṃ visajjentena jambudīpe tāva ācariyaparamparā yāva tatiyasaṅgīti, tāva dassetvā idāni sīhaḷadīpe ācariyaparamparaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatiyasaṅgahato pana uddha’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Imaṃ dīpanti imaṃ tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ. Kañci kālanti kismiñci kāle. Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Bhaddanāmoti bhaddasālatthero. Nāmassa ekadesenapi hi vohāro dissati ‘‘devadatto datto’’ti yathā. Āguṃ na karontīti nāgā. Vinayapiṭakaṃ vācayiṃsūti sambandho. Tambapaṇṇiyāti bhummavacanaṃ. Nikāye pañca vācesunti vinayābhidhammavajje dīghanikāyādike pañca nikāye ca vācesuṃ. Satta ceva pakaraṇeti dhammasaṅgaṇīvibhaṅgādike satta abhidhammappakaraṇe ca vācesunti attho. Asani viya siluccaye kilese medhati hiṃsatīti medhā, khippaṃ gahaṇadhāraṇaṭṭhena vā medhā, paññā, sā etassa atthīti medhāvī. Tipeṭakoti tīṇi piṭakāni etassa atthīti tipeṭako, tepiṭakoti vuttaṃ hoti, tipiṭakapariyattidharoti attho. Tārakānaṃ rājāti tārakarājā, candimā. Atirocathāti ativiya virocittha. Pupphanāmoti mahāpadumatthero. Saddhammavaṃsakovidoti saddhammatantiyā kovido. Pupphanāmoti sumanatthero. Jambudīpe patiṭṭhitoti sumanatthero kira ekasmiṃ samaye sīhaḷadīpamhi sāsane osakkamāne jambudīpaṃ gantvā uggaṇhitvā sāsanaṃ anurakkhanto tattheva patiṭṭhāsi. Maggakovidāti saggamaggamokkhamaggesu kovidā.
『何因故?』此问既止,在此南瞻部洲历经多少师承,至第三次听闻之时,乃显现。今于锡兰岛亦当示现师承,自言『第三次聚集方宣扬』之起始。此洲即此铜叶洲。『何时乎?』问谓『何期?』亦即旧注所言。『博达那长老』者,名号也。一方言中见『提婆达多达多』,如是。『不自作故』,谓为龙类。是与律藏教读相应。铜叶谓本土名。经部中五部名,律与毗舍离品俱称五部。七者乃篇集,是法集、分断、律集及七种毗昙篇。『闪电』如灯槅燃起波斯菱,乃智慧,速持慧,乃彼义也。智者称此智慧。三藏者,即三藏也,如传承所说。因此三藏者,即三藏也,三藏名称由此而起。星即星王,月即明月。『光辉极盛』谓光大极盛。『浦法名』乃大波陀长老。『正法传承巧者』谓法义甚辨之人。『浦法名』亦是肃那长老。昔时于锡兰时,正法衰退,肃那长老往铜叶洲兴教护法,乃此庄严。『道巧者』专精于天上道、出离道及圣道者也。
Bhāraṃkatvāti tesaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sāsanaṃ bhāraṃ katvā, paṭibaddhaṃ katvāti attho. ‘‘Te te bhikkhū tattha tattha pesesī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamevatthaṃ vitthāretvā dassento āha ‘‘majjhantikattheraṃ kasmīragandhāraraṭṭhaṃ pesesī’’tiādi. Mahiṃsakamaṇḍalanti andhakaraṭṭhaṃ vadanti. Vanavāsinti vanavāsiraṭṭhaṃ. Attā pañcamo etesanti attapañcamā, taṃ taṃ disābhāgaṃ pañca pañceva bhikkhū agamaṃsūti vuttaṃ hoti.
承接前文,谓诸比库负担诸自戒法重,已成约束之意。复有『彼比库相互遣送处处行』简言释义,且引『中部长老遣送迦湿弥罗和竺甘达国』等示例。『犀牛国』即黑暗之地。『森林住处』即名为林地之域。『自己即第五』者,谓五方皆有比库来往,称其各自为第五,谓分别居于各方向相应地区,彼此往来之意。
Idāni tattha tattha gatānaṃ therānaṃ kiccānubhāvaṃ dassetukāmo majjhantikattherassa gataṭṭhāne kiccaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘tena kho pana samayena kasmīragandhāraraṭṭhe’’tiādimāha. Karakavassanti himapātanakavassaṃ. Harāpetvāti udakoghena harāpetvā. Aravāḷadahapiṭṭhiyanti aravāḷadahassa udakapiṭṭhiyaṃ. Chinnabhinnapaṭadharoti satthakena chinnaṃ raṅgena bhinnaṃ vaṇṇavikāramāpannaṃ paṭaṃ dhāretīti chinnabhinnapaṭadharo. Atha vā satthakena chinnānaṃ gihivatthavisabhāgānaṃ kāsāvānaṃ dhāraṇato chinnabhinnapaṭadharo. Bhaṇḍūti muṇḍako. Kāsāvavasanoti kāsāvavatthanivattho. Makkhaṃ asahamānoti theraṃ paṭicca attano santāne uppannaṃ paresaṃ guṇamakkhanalakkhaṇaṃ makkhaṃ asahamāno sandhāretuṃ adhisahituṃ vūpasametuṃ asakkonto. Bhiṃsanakānīti bheravārammaṇāni. Tāni dassetuṃ ‘‘tato tato bhusā vātā vāyantī’’tiādimāha. Bhusā vātāti rukkhabhedanapabbatakūṭanipātanasamatthā balavavātā. Asaniyo phalantīti asaniyo bhijjanti, patantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Paharaṇavuṭṭhiyoti anekappakārā āvudhavuṭṭhiyo. Niddhamathāti gahetvā apanetha. Bhiṃsanakanti nāgarājassa kāyikavācasikapayogajanitabhayanimittaṃ vippakāraṃ.
今欲示现各地相续长老活动之事,以中部长老所在处事为例示说,谓当时于迦湿弥罗和竺甘达国之情况。『加刺瓦萨』谓喜马拉雅雪山地区。『投掷去』谓用水泼掷之意。『阿拉婆底水边』谓阿拉婆底河水岸。『断裂色损之缯帛持者』,谓师曾持有衣物因用染料而断裂色相错乱,故称断裂色缯帛持者。或指师着破坏之袈裟者也。『头陀』谓剃度者。袈裟着具,此时斩断衣物称持断裂色缯帛者。『持具』是剃度后旧有袈裟。『器械』谓剃头工器。『袈裟衣着』谓袈裟所披衣着。长老因障碍未忍受他比库施众特质乳脂,不得以忍,故称不能耐受乳脂故障难。『恐怖门卫』谓守护诸危害之兽门。示述诸处地上吹起风沙扰乱,如风破林山等。『闪电生果实』谓闪电击发生果实。『分力发武器』者,多种持兵器皆准备之意。『收取』谓拾取持取。『恐怖者』谓龙王所生之身心恐惧之事由,此即其作用不稳定。
Me bhayabheravaṃ janetuṃ paṭibalo na assa na bhaveyyāti sambandho. Tattha bhayabheravaṃ nāma khuddānukhuddakaṃ bhayaṃ. Atha vā bhayanti cittutrāsabhayaṃ, paṭighabhayassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bheravanti bhayajanakamārammaṇaṃ. Sacepi tvaṃ mahiṃ sabbanti sacepi tvaṃ mahānāga sabbaṃ mahiṃ samuddena saha sasamuddaṃ pabbatena saha sapabbataṃ ukkhipitvā mamūpari mayhaṃ sīsopari khipeyyāsīti attho. Me bhayabheravaṃ janetuṃ neva sakkuṇeyyāsīti sambandho. Aññadatthūti ekaṃsena. Tavevassa vighāto uragādhipāti uragānaṃ nāgānaṃ adhipati rāja tava eva vighāto dukkhaṃ vihiṃsā assa bhaveyyāti attho.
此恐怖威吓不能生起普遍意念,忿恨也不生,谓此义。所言恐怖指轻微之谛境恐怖。或言恐怖为心畏惧,制止之意。畏惧即生起怖惧根由之因缘。若言『如果汝毁灭此地』或『若汝毁灭大龙』,含意若破坏地及龙,则必致头颅断裂受伤害。意谓不可使恐怖因缘生起,此义也。此恐怖不令生者不可遭受之意。『他义』谓唯一。『尔之障碍』者,龙诸王中旅读之王,彼为主宰,尔之障碍者,生苦伤害之义。
Dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvātiādīsu taṅkhaṇānurūpāya dhammadesanāya diṭṭhadhammasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ sandassetvā kusale dhamme samādapetvā gaṇhāpetvā tattha ca naṃ samuttejetvā saussāhaṃ katvā tāya ca saussāhatāya aññehi ca vijjamānaguṇehi sampahaṃsetvā tosetvāti attho. Therena kataṃ nāgānusāsanaṃ dassento ‘‘athāyasmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ito uddhaṃ yathā pureti yathā tumhe ito pure saddhammasavanuppattivirahitakāle parassa kodhaṃ uppādayittha, idāni ito paṭṭhāya uddhaṃ anāgate kodhañca mā janayittha, vijātamātuyāpi putte sinehacchedanaṃ sabbavināsamūlakaṃ sassaghātakañca mā karitthāti attho. Sukhakāmā hi pāṇinoti ettha hi-saddo kāraṇopadese, yasmā sabbe sattā sukhakāmā, tasmā hitasukhaupacchedakaraṃ sassaghātañca mā karothāti vuttaṃ hoti.
以法语示现相应之教诲,以现法示现正见法,令诸善法相应而生起,摄受之意。时并不奋起恣意辱骂之心,乃断绝恶意,与众善德和谐相处,令人欢悦之义。长老示现龙王训谕曰:『长老诸位』意谓汝等。以往如汝等于昔无观善法时,曾起他人忿怒,今当断除后患,不使今后生怒,且不令兄弟亲友起分离之害,是自他共利之教诲。所谓『乐欲者执著』为此释义,因众生皆乐欲,故不应作断绝乐欲与所爱害其根本与灭绝亲友之暴戾行为,是故所戒。
Yathānusiṭṭhanti yaṃ yaṃ anusiṭṭhaṃ yathānusiṭṭhaṃ, anusiṭṭhaṃ anatikkamma vā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ, therena dinnovādaṃ anatikkammāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammābhisamayo ahosīti paṭhamamaggaphalādhigamo ahosīti vadanti. Kulasatasahassanti iminā purisānaṃ satasahassaṃ dasseti. Kasmīragandhārāti kasmīragandhāraraṭṭhavāsino. Kāsāvapajjotāti bhikkhūnaṃ nivatthapārutakāsāvavatthehi obhāsitā. Isivātapaṭivātāti bhikkhūnaṃ nivāsanapārupanavātena ceva hatthapādānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇādivātena ca samantato bījiyamānā ahesuṃ. Duṭṭhanti kupitaṃ. Bandhanāti saṃsārabandhanato.
谓诸所历行,任运依已历诸所发生,或未超越进步亦或依达既行,皆如是。对此长老明言指出,未超越故。谓以此得法实证,得第一道果也。所谓万人百千即指众人之多。迦湿弥罗和竺甘达国居民也。袈裟之光辉,谓比库之袈裟反复洗漱后倒悬布置之状。『狂风袭袈裟』谓宿于比库处所之风障袭击,连带手足水罗和散布之风势。『狂怒』谓怒恼。『缚缚』指生死缚也。
Dhammacakkhunti heṭṭhāmaggattaye ñāṇaṃ. Keci panettha ‘‘paṭhamamaggañāṇameva te paṭilabhiṃsū’’ti vadanti. Codetvā devadūtehīti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.263 ādayo) devadūtasuttantadesanāvasena (ma. ni. 3.261 ādayo) daharakumāro jarājiṇṇasatto gilānasatto kammakāraṇā kammakāraṇikā vā matasattoti imehi pañcahi devadūtehi codetvā ovaditvā, saṃvegaṃ uppādetvāti attho. Daharakumārādayo hi tattha ‘‘devadūtā’’ti vuccanti. Tathā hi daharakumāro atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha bho mayhampi tumhākaṃ viya hatthapādā atthi, sake panamhi muttakarīse palipanno, attano dhammatāya uṭṭhahitvā nahāyituṃ na sakkomi, ‘ahaṃ kiliṭṭho, nahāpetha ma’nti vattumpi na sakkomi, jātitomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto, na kho panāhameva, tumhepi jātito aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi jāti āgamissati, iti tassā pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
法轮者,成就断除地道之智。有些人说:“此处所谓‘第一地智’者,即是你们所获得者。”此处所说“激励天使”,即引喻天神使者法句(参见《中部》、释义第3卷第263页序言),又义指天神使者经典说法(参见《中部》第3卷第261页序言),即指童子、老人、病人及造业者或受业感者等五类众生。借由这五位天神使者的指引与教导,致使内心生起震动,故此义也。所谓童子天神使者,实由此而称。譬如童子本意如此言:“看啊,我与你们一样有手足,但我因恶业缠缚,身心不便,无法浴沐,我虽沾污,亦不能命人替我浴洗,我此生未曾得脱生死轮回之苦,你们亦同未脱。正因为我如此,你等亦将生入此界。望你们在生时善护己身。”由此而称天神使者生于世间。
Jarājiṇṇasattopi atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha bho ahampi tumhe viya taruṇo ahosiṃ ūrubalabāhubalajavasampanno, tassa me tā balajavasampattiyo antarahitā, hatthapādā hatthapādakiccañca na karonti, jarāyamhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto, na kho panāhameva, tumhepi jarāya aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi jarā āgamissati, iti tassā pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
老人天神使者亦如是语:“看啊,我也曾如你们一样年轻强健,腰腿膀胱俱具力量与活力,但此活力已离我而去,我的手足不能工作,老病困扰,无法离苦生死;我未曾得脱轮回,你们亦未曾得脱。这缘故,正如我如此情形,你等年老时亦将再入此生。望你们在生前作善事保护自己。”由此而称此天神使者生于世。
Gilānasattopi atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha bho ahampi tumhe viya nirogo ahosiṃ, somhi etarahi byādhinā abhihato sake muttakarīse palipanno, uṭṭhātumpi na sakkomi, vijjamānāpi me hatthapādā hatthapādakiccaṃ na karonti, byādhitomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto, na kho panāhameva, tumhepi byādhito aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi byādhi āgamissati, iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
病人天神使者亦复言:“看啊,我也曾如尔等无病康健,但今被疾病困扰,手足已不能活动,即使稍动亦感痛苦,未得脱离生死之苦,你们亦未脱如此病苦。正因我如此,将来也必如尔等将患此病,望尔时谨护自身善护己身。”由此而称此天神使者生于世。
Kammakāraṇā kammakāraṇikā vā catuttho devadūtoti veditabbā. Tattha kammakāraṇapakkhe dvattiṃsa tāva kammakāraṇā atthato evaṃ vadanti nāma ‘‘mayaṃ nibbattamānā na rukkhe vā pāsāṇe vā nibbattāma, tumhādisānaṃ sarīre nibbattāma, iti amhākaṃ pure nibbattitova kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenetā devadūtā nāma jātā. Kammakāraṇikāpi atthato evaṃ vadanti nāma ‘‘mayaṃ dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇā karontā na rukkhādīsu karoma, tumhādisesu sattesuyeva karoma, iti amhākaṃ tumhesu pure kammakāraṇākāraṇatova kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenetepi devadūtā nāma jātā.
造业者及受业感者为第四类天神使者。造业者有二十三人,此意云:“我等新造之业,不于树石,而于你等身体而成。望尔等善行早日成就昔昔之道。”由此者即为天神使者生。受业感者亦如是语:“我等二十三造业者,不在树石而作业于尔等如是众生。望我等前尔等中造业者获得善业,生生世世相续。”由此亦称为天神使者生。
Matakasattopi atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha bho maṃ āmakasusāne chaḍḍitaṃ uddhumātakādibhāvaṃ pattaṃ, maraṇatomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto, na kho panāhameva, tumhepi maraṇato aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi maraṇaṃ āgamissati, iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto. Tasmā daharakumārādayo ettha ‘‘devadūtā’’ti veditabbā.
母身众生亦有一位天神使者,如是语:“看啊,我曾因怀孕而被抛弃于呕吐病等苦,死境未脱也。尔等亦未免此死苦。正如我如此,尔时将来也必必死,望尔时善护己身。”由此以童子等五类众生称为“天神使者”者,法意即此。
Anamataggiyanti anamataggasaṃyuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.124). Dhammāmataṃ pāyesīti lokuttaradhammāmataṃ pānaṃ paṭilābhakaraṇavasena pāyesīti attho. Samadhikānīti sahādhikāni. Sahattho hettha saṃsaddo. Isīti sīlakkhandhādayo dhammakkhandhe esi gavesi pariyesīti isīti vuccati. Pañca raṭṭhānīti pañcavidhacīnaraṭṭhāni. Himavantaṃ gantvā dhammacakkappavattanaṃ pakāsento yakkhasenaṃ pasādayīti yojetabbaṃ.
所谓无始者,即无始际部(参《增支部》第二卷第124页)。“以法食其道”,意指以出世间法为食,以其为能令证果之因缘故名食。所谓“关系者”,是指诸关联因素;“共同群体”意指依护相互关联之具多样群体。所谓“礼敬”,即寻求在戒蕴等法蕴之中观察,探求真谛之意。五国是指五类中华诸国。行至喜马拉雅,宣说法轮,安抚天魔,使之令其心悦诚服,此为应行决定之法。
Tena ca samayenāti tasmiṃ samaye tesaṃ gamanato pubbabhāgakāle. Laddhaṃ bhavissatīti vessavaṇasantikā laddhaṃ bhavissati. Vegasāti vegena. Samantato ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesīti ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya mā pavisantū’’ti adhiṭṭhānavasena samantā ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesi. Aḍḍhuḍḍhāni sahassānīti aḍḍhena catutthāni aḍḍhuḍḍhāni, atirekapañcasatāni tīṇi sahassānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Diyaḍḍhasahassanti aḍḍhena dutiyaṃ diyaḍḍhaṃ, atirekapañcasataṃ ekaṃ sahassanti attho. Soṇuttarāti soṇo ca uttaro ca soṇuttarā. Niddhametvānāti palāpetvāna. Adesisunti adesayuṃ.
由此时代起者,于彼时分,即在他们前行之前的时间内,必得成就。谓于魔王附近当必成就。『迅疾』者谓以迅疾。『四面设护』谓以住处为基,告示“从此处后勿入”之意,以坚固防护为基,四周设护。『加起来千数』者谓四千之数,加以额外五百三千,乃言三千。『一千五百』者谓第二个一千五百,外加五百,合计八百。『追逐逐出』谓逐出于远。『随意示教』谓虽有命令而示意随宜。
Ajjhiṭṭhoti āṇatto. Puna dānīti ettha dānīti nipātamattaṃ, puna āgaccheyyāma vā na vāti attho. Rājagahanagaraparivattakenāti rājagahanagaraṃ parivajjetvā tato bahi taṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gatamaggena gamanena vā. Idāni theramātuyā veṭisanagare nivāsakāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ tassa nagarassa tassā jātibhūmibhāvaṃ therassa ca aṭṭhuppattiṃ dassento ‘‘asoko kira kumārakāle’’tiādimāha.
『断绝』谓束缚。『复施舍』此处仅指施舍之词,含“或将来归亦非归”之意。『绕行王舍城』谓绕行王舍城,旋转其城内,然后由外面环绕,或由南方路径而行。现在为长老母亲于灭度城居住之由,显示其出生地与长老成道事迹,云“据说为无忧太子之时”等说。
Ayaṃ panettha anupubbikathā – pubbe kira moriyavaṃse jātassa candaguttassa nāma rañño putto bindusāro nāma kumāro pitu accayena pāṭaliputtamhi nagare rājā ahosi. Tassa dve puttā saudariyā ahesuṃ, tesaṃ ekūnasatamattā vemātikabhātaro ahesuṃ. Rājā pana tesaṃ sabbajeṭṭhakassa asokakumārassa uparajjaṭṭhānañca avantiraṭṭhañca datvā athekadivasaṃ attano upaṭṭhānaṃ āgataṃ disvā ‘‘tāta, uparāja, tava raṭṭhaṃ gantvā tattha ujjenīnagare vasāhī’’ti āṇāpesi. So pitu vacanena taṃ ujjeniṃ gacchanto antarāmagge veṭisagirinagare veṭisanāmakassa seṭṭhissa ghare nivāsaṃ upagantvā tassa seṭṭhissa dhītaraṃ lakkhaṇasampannaṃ yobbanappattaṃ veṭisagiriṃ nāma kumāriṃ disvā tāya paṭibaddhacitto mātāpitūnaṃ kathāpetvā taṃ tehi dinnaṃ paṭilabhitvā tāya saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappesi. Sā tena saṃvāsena sañjātagabbhā hutvā tato ujjeniṃ nītā mahindakumāraṃ janayi. Tato vassadvaye atikkante saṅghamittañca dhītaraṃ upalabhitvā uparājena saddhiṃ tattha vasati. Uparājassa pana pitā bindusāro maraṇamañce nipanno puttaṃ asokakumāraṃ saritvā taṃ pakkosāpetuṃ ujjeniṃ manusse pesesi. Te tato ujjeniṃ gantvā asokassa taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesuṃ. Tesaṃ vacanena so pitu santikaṃ turitagamanenāgacchanto antarāmagge veṭisagirinagaramhi puttadāre ṭhapetvā pitu santakaṃ pāṭaliputtanagaraṃ gantvā gatasamanantarameva kālakatassa pituno sarīrakiccaṃ kārāpetvā tato ekūnasatamatte vemātikabhātaro ca ghātāpetvā vihatakaṇṭako hutvā tattha chattaṃ ussāpetvā abhisekaṃ gaṇhi. Tadāpi theramātā dārake rañño santikaṃ pesetvā sayaṃ tattheva veṭisagirinagare vasi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sā tassa mātā tena samayena ñātighare vasī’’ti.
此处为前序说法——前于摩里耶族生者,名灯光王之子,王子名宾度萨罗。其有二子及一女,儿名维摩提泥兄弟。王以长子阿阇斯陀为太子,赠与阿宛国摄政位及管理大臣,某日见其太子至,谕曰:“子为摄政,去王城往乌杰伊那(光明城)居住。”太子遵父意去乌杰伊那,转道到光明城名为维提萨城,与该城长老地主的贤慧女儿相遇,怀有慈心,听父母之言,与彼成婚,共处。由此怀孕,后被引往乌杰伊那生出摩兴达王子。二年后,婆罗门之子与摄政同居于此。摄政父宾度萨罗死于病床,将太子阿阇斯陀遣往乌杰伊那予以托付。太子抵达乌杰伊那后,向父亲请报阿阇斯陀状况。父知,急速回返,进到维提萨城,于王子出生处安置座位,立即返回王舍城,完成父亲遗体之事,去除维摩提泥兄弟,成为憎恨者,撑起保护伞尊位。此时长老之母送子至王近,自己仍住于维提萨城。因此有言“彼时其母住于亲族之家。”
Āropesīti paṭipādesi. Amhākaṃ idha kattabbakiccaṃ niṭṭhitanti mātu dassanassa katabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha. Anubhavatu tāva me pitarā pesitaṃ abhisekantiādīsu abhisekapesanādikathā vitthārena uttarato āvi bhavissati. Chaṇatthanti chaṇanimittaṃ, chaṇahetūti attho, sayaṃ chaṇakīḷaṃ akātukāmoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tadā kira devānaṃpiyatisso jeṭṭhamūlamāsapuṇṇamiyaṃ nakkhattaṃ ghosāpetvā ‘‘salilakīḷāchaṇaṃ karothā’’ti amacce āṇāpetvā sayaṃ migavaṃ kīḷitukāmo missakapabbataṃ agamāsi. Missakapabbatanti paṃsupāsāṇamissakattā evaṃladdhanāmaṃ pabbataṃ. Diṭṭhasaccoti anāgāmimaggena paṭividdhasacco, anāgāmiphalaṃ pattoti vuttaṃ hoti. So kira therena attano mātudeviyā desitaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphalaṃ sacchākāsi, so ca therassa bhāgineyyoti veditabbo. Tathā hi therassa mātudeviyā bhaginī tassā dhītā, tassā ayaṃ putto. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
『加上』者谓实践。令我知此事为职责已毕,恳求母亲示现其所作之加冕等。应当体验,因父曾派遣说法及加冕等事,故后必然续有。『契点』者谓契机之因缘,『契由』者义。同契玩耍故释义。传说诸天主神在年满之月圆星时宣布:“施行水中戏耍契点”,告父母,亲自欲与鹿戏。鹿山即石山,名由此得。『已见实相』者谓断后出之实证,已获入涅槃果报。长老听母所说法,证实此乃涅槃果实,称其为长老之侄子。因为长老母亲之妹有女,此女生此子。故大史书中记载——
‘‘Deviyā bhaginī dhītu, putto bhaṇḍukanāmako;
“女为母亲之妹,子名婆罗织迦”,
Therena deviyā dhammaṃ, sutvā desitameva tu;
“长老听母说法,所传即此。”
Anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā, vasi therassa santike’’ti.
得无来果后,住于长老面前。
Sammāsambuddhena ca tumhe byākatāti bodhimūle eva buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ voloketvā tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ disvā anāgate tassa dīpassa sampattiṃ diṭṭhena sammāsambuddhena ‘‘anāgate mahindo nāma bhikkhu tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ pasādessatī’’ti tumhe byākatā. Tattha tambapaṇṇidīpanti dīpavāsino vuttā. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ āsayānusayañāṇañca ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti vuccati. Tena pana indriyaparoparādiṃ vinā aññaṃ na sakkā daṭṭhunti ‘‘volokento’’ti avatvā ‘‘voloketvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etamatthanti ‘‘anāgate mahindo nāma bhikkhu tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ pasādessatī’’ti imamatthaṃ.
你们说这是正自觉者在成佛树下,用佛眼观察世间,看到了铜叶岛。正自觉者亲眼见到未来,称那未来之灯塔必由名为无来长老的比库守护。这里铜叶岛指该岛居民。所谓“佛眼”是超越六根的智慧,能识心之习气和烦恼。正因为有这种超越六根的觉智,没有依赖其他感官,故用“观察”表达。此意即是“未来名为无来的长老将守护铜叶岛”,你们是这样被明说的。
Veṭisagirimhi rājagaheti deviyā katavihāre. Kālova gamanassa, gacchāma dīpamuttamanti yojetabbaṃ. Idañca tesaṃ parivitakkanidassanaṃ. Paḷināti ākāsaṃ pakkhandiṃsu. Ambareti ākāse. Evamākāsaṃ pakkhanditvā kiṃ te akaṃsūti cetiyapabbate nipatiṃsūti dassento āha ‘‘evamuppatitā therā, nipatiṃsu naguttame’’ti. Idāni tassa pabbatassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ therānañca tattha nipatitaṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘purato puraseṭṭhassā’’tiādigāthamāha. Puratoti pācīnadisābhāge. Puraseṭṭhassāti anurādhapurasaṅkhātassa puravarassa. Meghasannibheti samantato nīlavaṇṇattā nīlamahāmeghasadise. Sīlakūṭamhīti evaṃnāmake pabbatakūṭe. Haṃsāva nagamuddhanīti pabbatamuddhani haṃsā viya.
在王舍城的韦提萨山上,是女神所居之处。时间恰逢出行,谓之“将要上岛”。这是对环境的描写。风吹天际,云朵遮掩天空。女神说道,既然如此,你们不要再彷徨,而应降临佛塔所在地。即韦提萨山顶之前述之处。山名“善行峰”,因其形似山峰之联结。此处又称为“天鹅峰”,因山头犹如天鹅飞翔之状。
Tattha pana patiṭṭhahanto kadā patiṭṭhahīti āha ‘‘evaṃ iṭṭiyādīhi saddhi’’ntiādi. Parinibbānatoti parinibbānavassato taṃ avadhibhūtaṃ muñcitvā tato uddhaṃ dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ upari chattiṃsatime vasseti attho gahetabbo. Kathaṃ veditabboti āha ‘‘ajātasattussa hī’’tiādi. Tasmiṃyeva vasseti ettha yasmiṃ saṃvacchare yasmiñca divase bhagavā parinibbuto, tasmiṃ saṃvacchare tasmiṃyeva ca divase vijayakumāro imaṃ dīpamāgatoti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
来到此地建立住处时,何时建立?女神告知“当时及诸弟子同心”;“涅槃”指佛教元年佛涅槃之际。离世后,上升至两百三十五个雨季,也就是二百三十五年之意。如何确定?女神道“未生怨年号第一”等语。在那个雨季,正值那年某日佛涅槃,亦是那年那日名为胜利童子的王子到达该岛。经中是这样说——
‘‘Laṅkāyaṃ vijayasanāmako kumāro,
“胜利童子,名为胜利,
Otiṇṇo thiramati tambapaṇṇidīpe;
从铜叶岛的永远海洋里渡过;
Sālānaṃ yamakaguṇānamantarasmiṃ,
在两舍利场双塔之中,
Nibbātuṃ sayitadine tathāgatassā’’ti.
应当知此处是如来于住地圆寂之日安卧灭尽。
Sīhakumārassa puttoti ettha kāliṅgarājadhītu kucchismiṃ sīhassa jāto kumāro sīhakumāroti veditabbo, pubbe amanussāvāsattā āha ‘‘manussāvāsaṃ akāsī’’ti. Cuddasame vasseti cuddasame vasse sampatte. Idha vijayo kālamakāsīti imasmiṃ tambapaṇṇidīpe vijayarājakumāro aṭṭhatiṃsa vassāni rajjaṃ kāretvā kālamakāsi. Tathā hi ajātasattu rājā dvattiṃsa vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi, udayabhaddo soḷasa vassāni, tasmā ajātasattussa aṭṭhamavassaṃ idha vijayassa paṭhamavassanti katvā tato uddhaṃ ajātasattussa catuvīsati vassāni udayabhaddassa cuddasa vassānīti vijayassa aṭṭhatiṃsa vassāni paripūriṃsu. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
此处所言“狮子子”者,乃迦陵国王后所生幼子,生于王宫围阁中,名为狮子子。此前有非人居住者,曾言“无有人为住”。十四年一转而再转十四年方成(此意指年岁循环)。此处的“胜利者迦摩罗”即斯坦波尼岛上的胜利王子,治国三十八年。正如未生怨王执政二十二年,乌达跋多为王十六年,故未生怨第八年为胜利第一年,之后未生怨治国二十四年,乌达跋多治国十五年,胜利者满三十八年。如是被记载——
‘‘Vijayo laṅkamāgamma, satthu nibbānavāsare;
“胜利者入斯兰卡,当佛涅槃之际;
Aṭṭhatiṃsa samākāsi, rajjaṃ yakkhavimaddako’’ti.
三十八年遂兴盛,王国主宰天魔境。”
‘‘Udayabhaddassa pañcadasame vasse paṇḍuvāsudevo nāma imasmiṃ dīpe rajjaṃ pāpuṇī’’ti vuttattā udayabhaddassa cuddasamavassasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ vassaṃ imasmiṃ dīpe vijayassa paṇḍuvāsudevassa ca antare sīhaḷaṃ arājikaṃ hutvā ṭhitanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmiñhi vasse vijayarājassa amaccā upatissaṃ nāma amaccaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā tassa nāmena kate upatissagāme vasantā arājikaṃ rajjamanusāsiṃsu. Vuttañhetaṃ –
又言,乌达跋多第十五年,有名为梵陀笈多者王子至此岛称王。此时胜利者王第十三年(指胜利38年中的13年),该年梵陀笈多已成为僭主,应知该年有狮子子出家守戒。此年胜利王之兄上塔迦名阿摩差,年长者,故名为阿摩差乡。在该乡有僭主在位,依名同期民众同住。诵曰——
‘‘Tasmiṃ mate amaccā te, pekkhantā khattiyāgamaṃ;
『当时在我方,那些人目睹着,观察着一支贵族军队,』
Upatissagāme ṭhatvāna, raṭṭhaṃ samanusāsisuṃ.
『在乌帕提萨加村站立着,治理着一国。』
‘‘Mate vijayarājamhi, khattiyāgamanā purā;
『据说在胜利王统治时期,贵族军队早已出现;』
Ekaṃ vassaṃ ayaṃ laṅkā-dīpo āsi arājiko’’ti.
『这一年,此兰卡岛无王而治。』
Tatthāti jambudīpe. Idha paṇḍuvāsudevo kālamakāsīti imasmiṃ sīhaḷadīpe paṇḍuvāsudevo tiṃsa vassāni rajjamanusāsitvā kālamakāsi. Tathā hi udayabhaddassa anantaraṃ anuruddho ca muṇḍo ca aṭṭha vassāni rajjamanusāsiṃsu, tadanantaraṃ nāgadāsako catuvīsati vassāni, tasmā udayabhaddassa pañcadasamasoḷasamavassehi saddhiṃ anuruddhassa ca muṇḍassa ca aṭṭha vassāni, nāgadāsakassa ca catuvīsativassesu vīsati vassānīti paṇḍuvāsudevassa rañño tiṃsa vassāni paripūriṃsu. Teneva vuttaṃ –
『此地指的是占婆洲。在此锡兰岛,有人名贤波跋悉多被称为贪欲恶劣者;他治理锡兰三十年。实际上,在优耶波怛时期稍后,阿努鲁达与穆陀各统治八年,继而是龙达萨共统治二十四年。故优耶波怛第十五、十六年与阿努鲁达和穆陀各八年,龙达萨二十四年,共三十年充满。此即贤波跋悉多国王三十年皆在位。譬如所说:』
‘‘Tato paṇḍuvāsudevo, rajjaṃ tiṃsa samā akā’’ti;
『从此贤波跋悉多明确统治了三十年国土。』
Tatthāti jambudīpe. Sattarasame vasseti sattarasame vasse sampatte. Tathā hi nāgadāsakassa anantarā susunāgo aṭṭhārasa vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi, tasmā nāgadāsakassa catuvīsativassesu vīsati vassāni ṭhapetvā sesehi catūhi vassehi saddhiṃ susunāgassa aṭṭhārasasu vassesu soḷasa vassānīti idha abhayarañño vīsati vassāni paripūriṃsu. Vuttañhetaṃ –
此中所云者,在珍宝洲。珍宝洲中七十年为一期,凡七十期完毕。诸如那迦达萨王,继其之后,贤那迦王治理国土十八年,故那迦达萨王在廿四期中治国二十年,遂于其余四期中,与贤那迦于十八年中共治十六年。说此乃指阿毕耆罗王治国二十年满。
‘‘Abhayo vīsati vassāni, laṅkārajjamakārayī’’ti;
言曰:『阿毕耆罗治国二十年,统治兰卡国。』
Dāmarikoti yuddhakārako coro. Paṇḍukābhayo pana abhayassa bhāgineyyo rājāyeva, na coro, balakkārena pana rajjassa gahitattā ‘‘dāmariko’’ti vuttaṃ. Rajjaṃ aggahesīti ekadesassa gahitattā vuttaṃ. Abhayassa hi vīsatime vasse na tāva sabbaṃ rajjamaggahesīti. Tathā hi vīsatimavassato paṭṭhāya abhayassa nava bhātike attano mātule tattha tattha yuddhaṃ katvā ghātentassa anabhisittasseva sattarasa vassāni atikkamiṃsu, tatoyeva ca tāni rājasuññāni nāma ahesuṃ. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
所谓“大盗”,即战争制造者盗贼。斑毒阿毕耆罗实乃阿毕耆罗的兄弟,实质为王子非盗贼,然因以武力夺取王权,故号为“大盗”。“夺国”言该年份为夺取国权之时。然阿毕耆罗统治二十年间,并非完全统一国权。阿毕耆罗统治二十年后,其九位兄弟及其母亲曾于各处发动战争,相互攻杀,持续超出七十年,此期间被称为无人治理国土之时。故有言曰——
‘‘Paṇḍukābhayarañño ca, abhayassa ca antare;
『斑毒阿毕耆罗与阿毕耆罗期间,诸无人治理国土之时,长达十七年。』
Rājasuññāni vassāni, ahesuṃ dasa satta cā’’ti.
『王位虚悬年,共历十七载。』
Tatthāti jambudīpe. Paṇḍukassāti paṇḍukābhayassa. Bhavati hi ekadesenapi vohāro ‘‘devadatto datto’’ti yathā. Sattarasa vassāni paripūriṃsūti anabhisittasseva paripūriṃsu. Ettha ca kāḷāsokassa soḷasamavassaṃ ṭhapetvā pannarasa vassāni heṭṭhā susunāgassa sattarasamaaṭṭhārasamavassāni ca dve gahetvā sattarasa vassāni gaṇitabbāni. Tāni heṭṭhā ekena vassena saha aṭṭhārasa hontīti tāni rājasuññāni sattarasa vassāni heṭṭhā vijayapaṇḍuvāsudevarājūnamantare arājikena ekena vassena saddhiṃ aṭṭhārasa rājasuññavassāni nāma honti.
此亦指珍宝洲。其中“斑毒”指斑毒阿毕耆罗。有一国曰“Devadatto Datto”,亦有七十年被称无人治理之象。于此又有卡拉索卡时代,设有十六年作为基数,十五年以下为贤那迦,七十年计入十八年为治国年数,此二合计即七十年。若与斑毒、贤那迦及瓦苏德瓦王共计,则无人治理国土期与治国期并存,并称为十八年的无人治理之年。
Candaguttassacuddasame vasse idha paṇḍukābhayo kālamakāsīti candaguttassa cuddasame vasse imasmiṃ tambapaṇṇidīpe paṇḍukābhayo nāma rājā sattati vassāni rajjamanusāsitvā kālamakāsi. Tathā hi susunāgassa putto kāḷāsoko aṭṭhavīsati vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi. Tato tassa puttā dasa bhātukā dvevīsati vassāni rajjaṃ kāresuṃ, tesaṃ pacchā nava nandā dvevīsati, candagutto catuvīsati vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi. Tattha kāḷāsokassa aṭṭhavīsativassesu pannarasa vassāni heṭṭhā gahitānīti tāni ṭhapetvā sesāni terasa vassāni, dasabhātukānaṃ dvevīsati, tathā navanandānaṃ dvevīsati, candaguttassa cuddasamavassaṃ ṭhapetvā terasa vassānīti paṇḍukābhayassa sattati vassāni paripūriṃsu. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
于坎陀古多(Candagutta)王统治第十三周年时,此处称称潘度迦畏(Paṇḍukābhayo)王。潘度迦畏于此辰巴楞尼岛(tambapaṇṇidīpa)执政七十载,统治而且推行严明法令。的确,须苏那迦(Susunāga)之子咖拉索拘王(Kāḷāsoko)治理王国二十八年,随后其子十位兄弟统治了二十二年,之后九位南达(Nava Nandā)连治二十二年,坎陀古多执政四十二年。关于咖拉索王,有言于执政二十八年间有十五年处于降服状态,这些年数分别复数列出:兄弟十人二十二载,九位南达二十二年,坎陀古多第十三区执政十五年,潘度迦畏七十年圆满。如此记述。
‘‘Paṇḍukābhayanāmassa, rañño vassāni sattatī’’ti;
有言曰:「名为潘度迦畏王,其执政七十年。」
Tattha asokadhammarājassa sattarasame vasse idha muṭasivarājā kālamakāsīti tasmiṃ jambudīpe asokadhammarājassa sattarasame vasse idha muṭasivo nāma rājā saṭṭhi vassāni rajjamanusāsitvā kālamakāsi . Tathā hi candaguttassa putto bindusāro aṭṭhavīsati vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi, tato tassa putto asokadhammarājā rajjaṃ pāpuṇi, tasmā candaguttassa heṭṭhā vuttesu catuvīsativassesu terasa vassāni gahitānīti tāni ṭhapetvā sesāni ekādasa vassāni, bindusārassa aṭṭhavīsati vassāni, asokassa anabhisittassa cattāri vassāni, abhisittassa sattarasa vassānīti evaṃ saṭṭhi vassāni idha muṭasivassa paripūriṃsu. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
在阿育法王(Asokadhammarāja)执政第七十三年,也就是此处称穆他悉婆王(Muṭasivaro),在朱罗提婆岛(Jambudīpa)上执政六十年,治理王国而推行严法。的确,坎陀古多之子宾度萨罗(Bindusāro)统治二十八年,其后继位为阿育法王。故而在坎陀古多执政以下四十二年时,称余十五年,宾度萨罗执政二十八年,阿育法未正式执政四年,正式执政七十七年,如此六十年圆满。故有云:
‘‘Muṭasivo saṭṭhi vassāni, laṅkārajjamakārayī’’ti;
「穆他悉婆王执政六十年,为兰卡王国之主。」
Devānaṃpiyatisso rajjaṃ pāpuṇīti asokadhammarājassa aṭṭhārasame vasse pāpuṇi. Idāni parinibbute bhagavati ajātasattuādīnaṃ vassagaṇanāvasena parinibbānato dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ upari chattiṃsati vassāni ekato gaṇetvā dassento āha ‘‘parinibbute ca sammāsambuddhe’’tiādi. Tattha ajātasattussa catuvīsatīti parinibbānavassasaṅkhātaṃ aṭṭhamavassaṃ muñcitvā vuttaṃ. Asokassa puttakā dasa bhātukarājānoti kāḷāsokassa puttā bhaddaseno koraṇḍavaṇṇo maṅkuro sabbañjaho jāliko ubhako sañcayo korabyo nandivaḍḍhano pañcamakoti ime dasa bhātukarājānoti veditabbā. Uggasenanando paṇḍukanando paṇḍugatinando bhūtapālanando raṭṭhapālanando govisāṇakanando saviddhakanando kevaṭṭakanando dhananandoti ime nava nandāti veditabbā. Etena rājavaṃsānusārenāti etena jambudīpavāsirājūnaṃ vaṃsānusārena veditabbametanti attho.
德瓦那比雅提苏(Devānaṃpiyatisso)继位后在阿育法王第十八年即位。现今,世尊涅槃后,以阿阇世等王朝执政年数为准,合计涅槃后两百余年,达三十三十多年年头,记录时说「涅槃后的正觉者」等句。其中关于阿阇世执政二十四年,即涅槃后第八年释出。咖拉索王十位兄弟名为:婆达森、拘阇吒般多瓦、曼库罗、萨般囊阇、吠罗、三加也、拘囊比、南迪沃达、第五名义为。在这十位兄弟王名中应当了了。纳多囊多、潘都迦纳多、潘都迦提纳多、布达波罗纳多、罗叉波罗纳多、瞿婆牟萨纳多、萨菩提卡纳多、拘吠术特纳多、财拿南多,第九名为南达,亦当认识。此即所谓遵循王室世系,指明朱罗提婆岛诸王族系之义。
Tambapaṇṇidīpavāsīnampi puna rājūnaṃ vasena evaṃ gaṇanā veditabbā – sammāsambuddhassa parinibbānavassaṃ idha vijayassa paṭhamaṃ vassanti katvā taṃ apanetvā parinibbānavassato uddhaṃ vijayassa sattatiṃsa vassāni, tato arājikamekavassaṃ, paṇḍuvāsudevassa tiṃsa vassāni, abhayassa vīsati vassāni, paṇḍukābhayassa abhisekato pubbe sattarasa vassāni, abhisittassa sattati vassāni, muṭasivassa saṭṭhi vassāni, devānaṃpiyatissassa paṭhamaṃ vassanti evaṃ parinibbānato dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ upari chattiṃsa vassāni veditabbāni.
对于辰巴楞尼岛居民亦遵循同样依序记载君王:从正觉者涅槃时算起,为胜利元年,继之一直记为胜利王朝历法,迄涅槃后七十三年。然后为无王之年(一年无王),接着为潘都瓦苏德瓦王执政三十年,阿巴耶王执政二十年,潘度迦畏王封王前七十年,封王后七十年,穆他悉婆王六十年,德瓦那比雅提苏第一年,如此类推,合计超过涅槃后两百年头,此为应当知晓之王年数记录。
Jeṭṭhamāsassa puṇṇamiyaṃ jeṭṭhanakkhattaṃ mūlanakkhattaṃ vā hotīti āha ‘‘jeṭṭhamūlanakkhattaṃ nāma hotī’’ti. Tasmiṃ pana nakkhatte kattabbachaṇampi tannissayattā tameva nāmaṃ labhatīti veditabbaṃ. Migavanti migānaṃ vānanato hesanato bādhanato migavanti laddhasamaññaṃ migavaṃ. Rohitamigarūpanti gokaṇṇamigavesaṃ. Jiyanti dhanujiyaṃ. Anubandhantoti padasā anudhāvanto. Mamaṃyeva rājā passatūti ettha ‘‘amhesu bahūsu diṭṭhesu rājā ativiya bhāyissatī’’ti iminā kāraṇena attānameva dassetuṃ ‘‘mamaṃyeva passatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Cintesī’’ti vatvā tassa cintanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘imasmiṃ dīpe jāto’’tiādi. Thero tassa parivitakkaṃ jānitvā attano sabhāvaṃ kathetvā taṃ assāsetukāmo ‘‘samaṇā mayaṃ mahārājā’’tiādimāha. Mahārāja mayaṃ samaṇā nāma, tvaṃ parivitakkaṃ mā akāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taveva anukampāyāti tava anukampatthāya eva āgatā, na vimukhabhāvatthāyāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Ime samaṇā nāmā’’ti ajānantassa ‘‘samaṇā mayaṃ, mahārājā’’ti kasmā thero āhāti ce? Asokadhammarājena pesitasāsaneneva pubbe gahitasamaṇasaññaṃ sāretuṃ evamāhāti. Imamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tena ca samayenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“长月的月满日、长星或根星”之名,谓曰“名为长根星”。然则于此星当作之言,乃因缘得此名称,应明知之。‘鹿王’者,谓森林中以鹿为众者;亦称‘鹿王’,比喻如鹿群一般广大无边。‘红鹿形者’比喻如牛耳之鹿所聚之地。‘生活于弓猎间者’。‘随行’者,谓步履相随。‘视我为王’者,此处意指“我们众中诸多见者,王必大生恐惧”,因此为示现自身,谓“正视的是我”。“思虑中”者,示现其思惟状态,于是谓“于此岛屿中生”。长老已了知其内观,述说自身本性,欲令其见,“我们是沙门大王”等是语。称“我们是大王之沙门”者,谓汝莫思虑。此法乃“恻隐之故、非解脱之故”,乃劝导。若彼无知者诘问:“何故长老称‘我们是沙门,大王’?”乃以昔阿育法王遣使,传教提携沙门的姓名。应以此理开示,“当时亦是如此”等言。
Adiṭṭhā hutvā sahāyakāti adiṭṭhasahāyakā, aññamaññaṃ adisvāva sahāyakabhāvaṃ upagatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Chātapabbatapādeti chātavāhassa nāma pabbatassa pāde. Taṃ kira pabbataṃ anurādhapurā pubbadakkhiṇadisābhāge atirekayojanadvayamatthake tiṭṭhati. Tamhi ṭhāne pacchā saddhātisso nāma mahārājā vihāraṃ kārāpesi, taṃ ‘‘chātavihāra’’nti vohariṃsu. ‘‘Rathayaṭṭhippamāṇāti āyāmato ca āvaṭṭato ca rathapatodena samappamāṇā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Mahāvaṃsepi vuttaṃ –
“共立者”者,经立定即可,谓助共之者,互赖互为助伴,称为“共立助共者”。“遮山脚”即名为遮车之山脚。此山据传在阿努拉德哈普拉之南方偏东附近,宽约两由旬。该处曾有王名戒坛居士筑起祈愿,名为“遮山祈愿”。三辐车宽与径并列,故有“三再辐之辐”说。大史书亦载曰:
‘‘Chātapabbatapādamhi , tisso ca veḷuyaṭṭhiyo;
“遮山脚处,有三宽辐之轮辐;
Jātā rathapatodena, samānā parimāṇato’’ti.
出生于车轮主轴之处,大小皆相等。”
Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘rathayaṭṭhippamāṇāti rathassa dhajayaṭṭhippamāṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppajjiṃsūti tassa abhisekasamakālameva uppajjiṃsu. Evamuttaripi vakkhamānānaṃ acchariyānaṃ pātubhāvo veditabbo. Tathā ca vuttaṃ mahāvaṃse –
轮辐一词,在此意谓“车轮之轮毂宽度”。“生起时即立时”者,意谓加冕瞬即起始。由此可知,之前述诸奇迹是可鉴之物。大史亦言曰:
‘‘Devānaṃpiyatisso so, rājāsi pituaccaye;
“诸天所爱之王,亡父之子继位;
Tassābhisekena samaṃ, bahūnacchariyānahū’’ti.
借此涂油仪式同等,众多离奇之物消失了。
Ekā latā yaṭṭhi nāmāti kañcanalatāya paṭimaṇḍitattā evaṃladdhanāmā ekā yaṭṭhi ahosi. Taṃ alaṅkaritvā uppannalatāti taṃ rajatavaṇṇaṃ yaṭṭhiṃ alaṅkaritvā tattheva cittakammakatā viya uppannalatā. Khāyatīti dissati. Kiñjakkhānīti kesarāni. Etāni ca pupphayaṭṭhiyaṃ nīlapupphādīni sakuṇayaṭṭhiyañca nānappakārā migapakkhino tattheva cittakammakatā viya paññāyantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Setā rajatayaṭṭhīvāti rajatamayayaṭṭhi viya ekā yaṭṭhi setavaṇṇāti attho. Latāti tattheva cittakammakatā viya dissamānalatā. Nīlādi yādisaṃ pupphanti yādisaṃ loke nīlādipupphaṃ atthi, tādisaṃ pupphayaṭṭhimhi khāyatīti attho.
有一条藤蔓,名为金藤,因此被称为金制装饰之物;它本是一枝藤蔓。被装饰之后称为金制装饰藤蔓;又装饰为银灰色藤蔓,似乎心意所创造而生银灰色。这里称之为『显现』。所谓『Kiñjakkhāni』即为莲花,这些包括蓝花等花朵形成花藤,也如鸟制的藤蔓、各种类型的兽翼藤蔓,显现为心意创造物,这是应当被观察的。所谓『setā rajatayaṭṭhī』即指银色藤蔓,相当于银色的藤蔓。『Latā』指藤蔓,也似乎是心意所作的雅致藤蔓。『nīlādi yādisaṃ pupphanti』指蓝色等各种花朵,世间有蓝绿等花,因此所谓花藤即是这些花造的藤蔓。
Anekavihitaṃ ratanaṃ uppajjīti anekappakāraṃ ratanaṃ samuddato sayameva tīraṃ āruhitvā velante ūmivegābhijātamariyādavaṭṭi viya uppajji, uṭṭhahitvā aṭṭhāsīti attho. Tambapaṇṇiyaṃ pana aṭṭha muttā uppajjiṃsūti etthāpi tambapaṇṇiyaṃ samuddato sayameva uṭṭhahitvā jātito aṭṭha muttā samuddatīre vuttanayeneva ṭhitāti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
产生各种形状的宝石,即宝石众多形态自海中升起,爬上海岸,如同轻波涌起环绕而生,又升起盘绕八瓣的意思。所谓『Tambapaṇṇiyaṃ aṭṭha muttā uppajjiṃsūti』是指锡兰海中升起八颗珍珠;这里也是锡兰的珍珠从海中升起,沿岸出现八颗珍珠,正如所说,需要明了。对此记载于《大史》云:
‘‘Laṅkādīpamhi sakale, nidhayo ratanāni ca;
「在整个锡兰岛,珍宝聚集异常丰盛;
Antoṭhitāni uggantvā, pathavītalamāruhuṃ.
上下推涌,攀越地脉高山。
‘‘Laṅkādīpasamīpamhi, bhinnanāvāgatāni ca;
在锡兰岛附近,这些珍宝并非溶散消逝,……」
Tatra jātāni ca thalaṃ, ratanāni samāruhuṃ.
彼时所生之处,宝珠悉皆升起。
‘‘Hayagajā rathāmalakā, valayaṅguliveṭhakā;
马、象、车、果实,均[形若]环绕指间;
Kakudhaphalā pākatikā, iccetā aṭṭha jātito.
有如角果成熟者,欲示八种出生。
‘‘Muttā samuddā uggantvā, tīre vaṭṭi viya ṭhitā;
珍珠自海中升起,立于岸畔若圆轮;
Devānaṃpiyatissassa, sabbapuññavijambhita’’nti.
为天人所喜爱,皆披覆诸多功德光辉。」
Hayamuttāti assarūpasaṇṭhānamuttā. Gajamuttāti hatthirūpasaṇṭhānā. Evaṃ sabbattha taṃtaṃsaṇṭhānavasena muttābhedo veditabbo. Aṅguliveṭhakamuttāti aṅgulīyakasaṇṭhānā, muddikāsaṇṭhānāti attho. Kakudhaphalamuttāti kakudharukkhaphalākārā bahū asāmuddikā muttā. Rājakakudhabhaṇḍānīti rājārahauttamabhaṇḍāni. Tāni sarūpena dassento āha ‘‘chattaṃ cāmara’’ntiādi. Aññañca bahuvidhaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pahiṇīti sambandho. Saṅkhanti abhisekāsiñcanakaṃ sāmuddikaṃ dakkhiṇāvaṭṭaṃ saṅkhaṃ. Anotattodakameva ‘‘gaṅgodaka’’nti vuttaṃ. Vaḍḍhamānanti alaṅkāracuṇṇaṃ. ‘‘Nahānacuṇṇa’’nti keci. Vaṭaṃsakanti kaṇṇapiḷandhanavaṭaṃsakanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Vaṭaṃsakaṃ kaṇṇacūḷikaṭṭhāne olambaka’’ntipi vadanti. Bhiṅgāranti suvaṇṇamayaṃ mahābhiṅgāraṃ. ‘‘Makaramukhasaṇṭhānā balikammādikaraṇatthaṃ katā bhājanavikatī’’tipi vadanti. Nandiyāvaṭṭanti kākapadasaṇṭhānā maṅgalatthaṃ katā suvaṇṇabhājanavikati. Kaññanti khattiyakumāriṃ. Adhovimaṃ dussayuganti kiliṭṭhe jāte aggimhi pakkhittamatte parisuddhabhāvamupagacchantaṃ adhovimaṃ dussayugaṃ. Hatthapuñchananti pītavaṇṇaṃ mahagghaṃ hatthapuñchanapaṭaṃ. Haricandananti harivaṇṇacandanaṃ, suvaṇṇavaṇṇacandananti attho. Lohitacandanaṃ vā, gositacandananti attho. Taṃ kira uddhane kuthitatelamhi pakkhittamattaṃ sakalampi telaṃ aggiñca nibbāpanasamatthaṃ candanaṃ. Teneva ‘‘gositacandana’’nti vuccati. Gosaddena hi jalaṃ vuccati, taṃ viya sitaṃ candanaṃ gositacandanaṃ. Nāgabhavanasambhavaṃ aruṇavaṇṇamattikaṃ. Harītakaṃ āmalakanti agadaharītakaṃ agadāmalakaṃ. Taṃ khippameva sarīramalasodhanādikaraṇasamatthaṃ hoti.
“Hayamuttā”者,指马形之宝珠;“Gajamuttā”者,指象形之宝珠。由此可知,宝珠处处皆以形状相异加以区分。所谓「指间宝珠」,即指手指关节处之珠;「小圆珠」之义即在此。所谓「角果珠」,则如角树果实之形状,众多非圆珠属异形宝珠。所谓王室角果器具,即最上品王者器皿。以形状示之,故称之为「伞盖、扇盖」等。又其他种种叶片形宝珠,俱为供养之物。以贝壳作成之宝珠,乃加冕、灌顶、供洒之海螺形旋涡器皿;安置于南方圆形者谓之「海中水」宝珠。所谓「涂饰宝珠」者,指涂敷装饰彩颜的宝珠。有称为「沐浴粉」者。所谓「轮宝珠」者,谓耳垂所挂之轮状装饰。据说「轮宝珠」系耳端挂饰。所谓华饰金宝,称为「巨华饰金宝」。所谓「龙口宝珠」,为龙口处宝珠,用作供养之物。所谓「仙鸟宝珠」,指鸟类嘴部所着金饰,用于祈求吉祥之用。所谓“Khattiyā”指贵族女子。所谓「下方阴浊」者,指现世污秽烦恼,如烈火焚烧,对治者有净化性质者即为“下方阴浊”。所谓象掌指环,为黄色大宝指环及其饰物。所谓「青檀」即青色檀木;又称「金色檀香」等义。所谓红檀香、麝香檀香等义。总之,此宝珠挂置于园林之中,涂布有特定惠泽净化诸恶业之油脂。故称之“麝香檀香珠”。“Gosita”以声名指水者,云此“青檀珠”为冷香檀香。所谓“Nāga”即龙住之地所生,色呈赤色的泥土。所谓“Harītaka、Āmalaka”即非善喻名之青蘋果,简称青蘋果。其能速为身体去除污秽,功德广大。
Uṇhīsanti uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ. Veṭhananti sīsaveṭhanaṃ. Sārapāmaṅganti uttamaṃ ratanapāmaṅgasuttaṃ. Vatthakoṭikanti vatthayugameva. Nāgamāhaṭanti nāgehi āhaṭaṃ. Ma-kāro padasandhikaro. Amatosadhanti evaṃnāmikā guḷikajāti, amatasadisakiccattā evaṃ vuccati. Taṃ kira paripanthaṃ vidhametvā sabbattha sādhentehi agadosadhasambhārehi yojetvā vaṭṭetvā kataṃ guḷikaṃ. Taṃ pana rājūnaṃ mukhasodhananahānapariyosāne mahatā parihārena upanenti. Tena te aṅgarāgaṃ nāma karonti, karontā ca yathārahaṃ dvīhi tīhi agadosadharaṅgatilakāhi nalāṭakaaṃsakūṭauramajjhasaṅkhātaṃ aṅgaṃ sajjetvā aṅgarāgaṃ karontīti veditabbaṃ. Sā pana guḷikā ahivicchikādīnampi visaṃ hanati, tenapi taṃ vuccati ‘‘amatosadha’’nti.
热药膏称为热药膏布。青盐称为盐膏。上品珍宝膏称为珍宝膏。布匹束称为布束。蛇药称为用蛇制成的药丸。马形脚连药为用药足膏。无量药丸即此名之丸剂种类,因其具有无量药的作用功能故如此称。此丸乃调剂经络,施用各处正药的集合,制成投入治疗的丸剂。此丸用于王侯面部清洁疮痂清理等大用,故称为此丸。因之人用此丸涂抹于两臂、二或三处形成药痂点饰,围绕额头、鼻梁、头顶形成标记,称为「药痂点」,形成后即为此。该丸同样能毒杀诸如虫蛇一类的毒物,因而被称为『无量药丸』。
Ahaṃ buddhañcātiādīsu sabbadhamme yāthāvato abujjhi paṭibujjhīti buddhoti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ sammāsambuddhañca, adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne ca apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammoti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ pariyattiyā saddhiṃ nava lokuttaradhammañca, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatattā saṅghoti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ ariyasāvakasaṅghañca ahaṃ saraṇaṃ gato parāyaṇanti upagato, bhajiṃ sevinti attho. Atha vā hiṃsati tappasādataggarukatāhi vihatakilesena tapparāyaṇatākārappavattena cittuppādena saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiṃ parikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti saraṇaṃ, ratanattayassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Apica sammāsambuddho hite pavattanena ahitā ca nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti saraṇanti vuccati. Dhammopi bhavakantārā uttāraṇena assāsadānena ca sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti saraṇanti vuccati. Saṅghopi appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti saraṇanti vuccati. Iminā atthena saraṇabhūtaṃ ratanattayaṃ teneva kāraṇena saraṇanti gato avagato, jāninti attho. Upāsakattaṃ desesinti ratanattayaṃ upāsatīti upāsakoti evaṃ dassitaṃ upāsakabhāvaṃ mayi abhiniviṭṭhaṃ vācāya pakāsesinti attho, ‘‘upāsakohaṃ ajjatagge pāṇupetaṃ saraṇaṃ gato’’ti evaṃ upāsakattaṃ paṭivedesinti vuttaṃ hoti. Sakyaputtassa sāsaneti sakyassa suddhodanassa putto so bhagavā sakyaputto, tassa sakyaputtassa sāsaneti attho. Saddhāti saddhāya, ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā’’tiādīsu viya yakāralopo daṭṭhabbo. Upehīti upagaccha.
我对“佛及诸师”等诸事理具足实解乃至理解,谓其为智慧圆满者,正觉者,以及依止圣道达到觉悟者,谨守不退,以上皆是法义之和合所称为法。因同一法义,诸世间至胜圣法、僧团及贤圣弟子团体,皆纳入所依止者中,故谓法、僧等皆为依止。若以羞愧精进断害、调伏妄念、断怖恐、灭苦难之秽,者为依止。阿耨多罗三藐三菩提佛正法,为利乐众生而发起,亦能断除恶害,故亦谓之依止。法之胜利引导渡越困境而定向,使众生无所惧,断害,则亦名依止。僧团以戒律之利益及广大利益成就,使众生断害亦谓依止。依这些缘故称所谓的三宝为依止者,依止者知其义理。释义中“居士”为三宝之敬称,谓已归依且出家之义。释义中“佛”称谓乃代表正觉,证悟及不败之义。释义中“信”者应以信心为本,无秽无染者可知。乞请谓为归依。
Asokaraññā pesitena abhisekenāti asokaraññā pesitena abhisekupakaraṇena. Yadā hi devānaṃpiyatisso mahārājā attano sahāyassa dhammāsokarañño ito veḷuyaṭṭhiyādayo mahārahe paṇṇākāre pesesi. Tadā sopi te disvā pasīditvā ativiya tuṭṭho ‘‘imehi atirekataraṃ kiṃ nāma mahagghaṃ paṭipaṇṇākāraṃ sahāyassa me pesessāmī’’ti amaccehi saddhiṃ mantetvā laṅkādīpe abhisekaparihāraṃ pucchitvā ‘‘na tattha īdiso abhisekaparihāro atthī’’ti sutvā ‘‘sādhu vata me sahāyassa abhisekaparihāraṃ pesessāmī’’ti vatvā sāmuddikasaṅkhādīni tīṇi saṅkhāni ca gaṅgodakañca aruṇavaṇṇamattikañca aṭṭhaṭṭha khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatikaññāyo ca suvaṇṇarajatalohamattikāmayaghaṭe ca aṭṭhahi seṭṭhikulehi saddhiṃ aṭṭha amaccakulāni cāti evaṃ sabbaṭṭhakaṃ nāma idha pesesi ‘‘imehi me sahāyassa puna abhisekaṃ karothā’’ti, aññañca abhisekatthāya bahuṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pesesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘asokaraññā pesitena abhisekenā’’ti. Eko māso abhisittassa assāti ekamāsābhisitto. Kathaṃ pana tassa tadā ekamāsābhisittatā viññāyatīti āha ‘‘visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ hissa abhisekamakaṃsū’’ti, pubbe katābhisekassapi asokaraññā pesitena anagghena parihārena visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ puna abhisekamakaṃsūti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
「阿索迦林弟子加冕」者,谓由阿索迦林弟子为其加冕用具。因彼乃诸天所爱护之大王,及其诸附属故由阿索迦林弟子于维鲁耶及诸处为其佩赠加冕。其时彼天人见王受加冕甚感欢喜,尔后即议曰:「我等以何等许多珍宝作此大加冕之用以赠我天王?」遂询问诸大臣有关加冕之事,于是得知此处无此种加冕之礼,乃曰:「善哉!我将赋予吾侍从以加冕法事。」遂施用海盐盐块诸种用料,金银珠玉器皿诸多贫富贵族诸家族集会,共计八个贵族家族及八大臣属,一同为其辅佐加冕。此即所谓「阿索迦林弟子为加冕」之由来。一月加冕期谓「一月已加冕」。又问何以彼时称为一月加冕者,答曰:「此乃于维萨克满月时加冕,此前虽有加冕传承,但因阿索迦林弟子的无上祛秽之恩,得于维萨克满月重加加冕。」此义。《摩诃婆罗多》言及此事曰——
‘‘Te migasiramāsassa, ādicandodayaṃ dine;
「彼者,狮头王于摩诃沙罗芒那日初升之时;
Abhisittañca laṅkindaṃ, amaccā sāmibhattino.
加冕于岛屿之上,诸大臣侧侍王身。
‘‘Dhammāsokassa vacanaṃ, sutvā sāmihite ratā;
听闻法言,诸大臣皆喜悦;
Punāpi abhiseciṃsu, laṅkāhitasukhe rata’’nti.
又说他们施浴,为兰卡国的安乐而喜悦。
Dīpavaṃsepi cetaṃ vuttaṃ –
又在岛屿世系中作如是说——
‘‘Visākhamāse dvādasiyaṃ, jambudīpā idhāgatā;
「于维萨迦月的第十二日,印度大陆诸国皆至于此;
Abhisekaṃ saparivāraṃ, asokadhammena pesitaṃ.
施浴仪式伴随完整一众,是以无忧教义被宣扬。
‘‘Dutiyaṃ abhisiñcittha, rājānaṃ devānaṃpiyaṃ;
第二次施浴完成,为众王所敬爱;
Abhisitto dutiyābhisekena, visākhamāse uposathe.
以第二次施浴礼而沐浴,于维萨迦月的戒律守持日进行。」
‘‘Tato māse atikkamma, jeṭṭhamāse uposathe;
“越过该月,至最长月之伍波萨他日;
Mahindo sattamo hutvā, jambudīpā idhāgato’’ti.
大王为第七世王时,降临此占婆洲。”
Tadā pana tassa rañño visākhapuṇṇamāya abhisekassa katattā tato pabhuti yāvajjatanā visākhapuṇṇamāyameva abhisekakaraṇamāciṇṇaṃ. Abhisekavidhānañcettha evaṃ veditabbaṃ – abhisekamaṅgalatthaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattassa maṇḍapassa anto katassa udumbarasākhamaṇḍapassa majjhe suppatiṭṭhite udumbarabhaddapīṭhamhi abhisekārahaṃ abhijaccaṃ khattiyaṃ nisīdāpetvā paṭhamaṃ tāva maṅgalābharaṇabhūsitā jātisampannā khattiyakaññā gaṅgodakapuṇṇaṃ sāmuddikaṃ dakkhiṇāvaṭṭasaṅkhaṃ ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetvā sīsopari ussāpetvā tena tassa muddhani abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcati, evañca vadeti ‘‘deva, taṃ sabbepi khattiyagaṇā attānamārakkhaṇatthaṃ iminā abhisekena abhisekikaṃ mahārājaṃ karonti, tvaṃ rājadhammesu ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi, etesu khattiyagaṇesu tvaṃ puttasinehānukampāya sahitacitto hitasamamettacitto ca bhava, rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā tesaṃ rakkhito ca bhavāhī’’ti.
当时乃由国王于维萨哈满月日举行加冕仪式后,自此直到未来所有维萨哈满月,皆于加冕场所——为加冕吉祥之目的而装饰完备的殿堂——其内部的榕树枝搭建的屋架中央,安置着榕树叶垫子;他亲自端坐于其上,命一位富有族姓、装饰华美的贵族少女,将盛满恒河圣水的海水坛,依次置于两手之间,用心恭敬地双手托起,举至头顶并高扬;之后将此加冕圣水洒于头顶上。他如此说道:『天神,诸族姓战士们为护卫自身,借由此加冕祈请加冕成伟大国王。汝当守护政教,秉持正法治理国家。对于这些战士,出于慈爱父子般情谊,愿汝怀着协同共益之心成为护卫庇护之助。』
Tato puna purohitopi purohiccaṭṭhānānurūpālaṅkārehi alaṅkatappaṭiyatto gaṅgodakapuṇṇaṃ rajatamayasaṅkhaṃ ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetvā tassa sīsopari ussāpetvā tena tassa muddhani abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcati, evañca vadeti ‘‘deva, taṃ sabbepi brāhmaṇagaṇā attānamārakkhaṇatthaṃ iminā abhisekena abhisekikaṃ mahārājaṃ karonti, tvaṃ rājadhammesu ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi, etesu brāhmaṇesu tvaṃ puttasinehānukampāya sahitacitto hitasamamettacitto ca bhava, rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā tesaṃ rakkhito ca bhavāhī’’ti.
继而先前祭司也持依其职责装饰的盛满恒河圣水的银制海水坛,双手虔敬托举举过头顶并高扬,又以此圣水洒洒于王者头顶,且如此告诫:『天神,诸婆罗门族群皆为护卫自身,借由此加冕使国王加冕成伟大国王。汝当守持政教秩序,以正法安治天下。对于这些婆罗门,出于慈爱父子般情谊,愿汝怀着协同共益之心成为护卫庇护之助。』
Tato puna seṭṭhipi seṭṭhiṭṭhānānurūpabhūsanabhūsito gaṅgodakapuṇṇaṃ ratanamayasaṅkhaṃ ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetvā tassa sīsopari ussāpetvā tena tassa muddhani abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcati, evañca vadeti ‘‘deva taṃ sabbepi gahapatigaṇā attānamārakkhaṇatthaṃ iminā abhisekena abhisekikaṃ mahārājaṃ karonti, tvaṃ rājadhammesu ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi, etesu gahapatigaṇesu tvaṃ puttasinehānukampāya sahitacitto hitasamamettacitto ca bhava, rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā tesaṃ rakkhito ca bhavāhī’’ti.
继而富商亦持其职责装饰的盛满恒河圣水的宝石制海水坛,双手虔敬托举举过头顶并高扬,又以此圣水洒洒于王者头顶,且如此告诫:『天神,诸居士家众皆为护卫自身,借由此加冕使国王加冕成伟大国王。汝当守持政教秩序,以正法安治天下。对于这些居士,出于慈爱父子般情谊,愿汝怀着协同共益之心成为护卫庇护之助。』
Te pana tassa evaṃ vadantā ‘‘sace tvaṃ amhākaṃ vacanānurūpena rajjaṃ kāressasi, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce kāressasi, tava muddhā sattadhā phalatū’’ti evaṃ rañño abhisapanti viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana dīpe devānaṃpiyatissassa muddhani dhammāsokeneva idha pesitā khattiyakaññāyeva anotattodakapuṇṇena sāmuddikadakkhiṇāvaṭṭasaṅkhena abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcīti vadanti. Idañca yathāvuttaṃ abhisekavidhānaṃ majjhimanikāye cūḷasīhanādasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘paṭhamaṃ tāva abhisekaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ rājūnaṃ suvaṇṇamayādīni tīṇi saṅkhāni ca gaṅgodakañca khattiyakaññañca laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tiādinā vuttanti vadanti.
他们如此说曰:“若汝依吾等言辞守护国家,则此归于吉利。若不守护,则以汝愚昧无知之故,必遭七倍恶果。”国王遭此责难,应予察明。此国中天神忠诚护卫者,借由圣水坛所盛净水,洒洒于贵族少女头顶上之加冕圣水,尔时如此称说。此等加冕仪式之详述,亦见于中部经藏中《小狮子吼经注》锡兰注疏,谓:“取初次加冕,国王则获三只黄金器皿及恒河圣水坛与贵族少女陪伴。”
Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ kathayamānoti pītipāmojjasaṅkhātasammodajananato sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato ca sammodanīyaṃ ‘‘kacci bhante khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci vo appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāro’’ti evamādikathaṃ kathayamāno. Cha jane dassesīti raññā saddhiṃ āgatānaṃ ‘‘na ime yakkhā, manussā ime’’ti sañjānanatthaṃ bhaṇḍukassa upāsakassa ānītattā tena saddhiṃ cha jane dassesi. Tevijjāti pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuāsavakkhayasaṅkhātāhi tīhi vijjāhi samannāgatā. Iddhippattāti iddhividhañāṇaṃ pattā. Cetopariyakovidāti paresaṃ cittācāre kusalā. Evamettha pañca abhiññā sarūpena vuttā, dibbasotaṃ pana tāsaṃ vasena āgatameva hoti. Bahūti evarūpā chaḷabhiññā buddhasāvakā bahū gaṇanapathaṃ atikkantā sakalajambudīpaṃ kāsāvapajjotaṃ katvā vicarantīti. Keci pana ‘‘tevijjā iddhippattā ca khīṇāsavā cetopariyakovidā keci khīṇāsavāti visuṃ yojetvā ‘arahanto’ti iminā sukkhavipassakā vuttā’’ti vadanti.
关于如何称赞,意为由喜悦欢喜而产生的称赞,且因适于称赞之故而称赞。称赞的内容为『尊者啊,或应当宽恕,或应当抚养,或无所过失,无恐惧,轻安不起躁,具有力量,及安住纯净之处』,依此等说法而表述。国王带领六人前来示现,对持弓者与其同伴说『这些非是夜叉,乃是人类』,以示认知。此六人具足三明,即前世记忆眼、烦恼断除、三种智慧,称为三明具足者。所谓神通得成,即获得五种神通知识。善于心意观察者,即他人心意行为纯熟者。五种神通以此形式表述,而天耳通则随其住处而现。多位阿拉汉弟子具足这六种神通,遍足众多不同类别,行遍整个娑婆世界,披着袈裟,照耀如光明。有人说,这些三明、神通获得者及善于心意观察的,有的是烦恼断除者,有的尚未断除者,并依此区分称之为『阿拉汉』和『净修慧者』。
Paññāveyyattiyanti paññāpāṭavaṃ, paññāya tikkhavisadabhāvanti attho. Āsannanti āsanne ṭhitaṃ. Sādhu mahārāja paṇḍitosīti rājānaṃ pasaṃsati. Puna vīmaṃsanto ‘‘atthi pana te mahārājā’’tiādimāha. Cūḷahatthipadopamasuttantaṃ kathesīti ‘‘ayaṃ rājā ‘ime samaṇā nāma īdisā, sīlādipaṭipatti ca tesaṃ īdisī’ti ca na jānāti, handa naṃ imāya cūḷahatthipadopamasuttantadesanāya samaṇabhāvūpagamanaṃ samaṇapaṭipattiñca viññāpessāmī’’ti cintetvā paṭhamaṃ cūḷahatthipadopamasuttantaṃ kathesi. Tattha hi –
智慧熟练者者,谓智慧通达清晰之理。『近在眼前』者,谓近处恒住。善哉大王贤达者,此为对王之赞叹。复审视曰:『那位大王岂有此等乎?』等如此言辞。讲说小象蹄比喻的内容,谓『此王不知这等沙门之名称、戒律及修持也。让我们以此小象蹄比喻所说明的教义,宣说出沙门的来由与修行作法吧』,思惟后讲述了小象蹄比喻之内容。于是讲说:
‘‘Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, idha tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno…pe… sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāseti, taṃ dhammaṃ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṃ vā kule paccājāto, so taṃ dhammaṃ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhati, so tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā, nayidaṃ sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ ekantaparisuddhaṃ saṅkhalikhitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carituṃ, yannūnāhaṃ kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyya’nti. So aparena samayena appaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya mahantaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya appaṃ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ pahāya mahantaṃ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ pahāya kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati.
『如是,婆罗门,如来于世间现起,为阿拉汉,正觉,具足智慧行为,示现清净完满出世间教法。听闻此法者,或是住家人,或其子嗣,或世家某一族人。此人闻法而生信,随信而具足功德,自心反省曰:“约束亲朋之家室,舍弃家财豪宅田舍,出家修行清净生活,摒弃味欲,披袈裟衣,离开房舍入出家行道,此事难行。”于是舍弃或小或大发展的财产,舍弃或小或广大亲族,剃除发须,披袈裟衣,从房舍出家入无家道人也。』
‘‘So evaṃ pabbajito samāno bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati.
『此人刚出家时,具备与比库相当之戒律生活,弃杀生,断杀生罪,心忍辱,慈悲怜悯,常行于众生利益中而住』。
‘‘Adinnādānaṃ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī, athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.291-292) –
『弃不取物,断不取物罪,持守不取物戒,乐于布施干净纯洁,谨守己身』(据大毗尼1.291-292经文)。
Evamādinā sāsane saddhāpaṭilābhaṃ paṭiladdhasaddhehi ca pabbajjupagamanaṃ pabbajitehi ca paṭipajjitabbā sīlakkhandhādayo dhammā pakāsitā.
由此教法,随顺信心获得,凭信心者出家修行者,应当修持戒律诸法而明其义理。
Rājā suttantaṃ suṇantoyeva aññāsīti ‘‘so bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti, ekabhattiko hoti rattuparato virato vikālabhojanā’’ti evaṃ tasmiṃ suttante (ma. ni. 1.293) āgatattā taṃ suṇantoyeva aññāsi. Idheva vasissāmāti na tāva rattiyā upaṭṭhitattā anāgatavacanamakāsi. Āgataphaloti anāgāmiphalaṃ sandhāyāha, sampattaanāgāmiphaloti attho. Tatoyeva ca visesato aviparītaviditasatthusāsanattā viññātasāsano. Idāni pabbajissatīti gihiliṅgena ānītakiccassa niṭṭhitattā evamāha. Acirapakkantassa raññoti raññe acirapakkanteti attho. Adhiṭṭhahitvāti antotambapaṇṇidīpe samāgatā suṇantūti adhiṭṭhahitvā.
王听闻此经之后,立刻了知其中义理:“此人远离乡村城市的劳作,持守禁戒,单食一餐,夜间禁食,不接受晚间食物。”他对该经的内容即刻了悟。这里有言“我们将暂居此地”,但那时夜晚尚未来临,不存在将来的言说。所谓“未来果”,是指未来的未至果报;“现前未至果”,则指当前已近未来的果报。此语专指对教法的准确、相应领悟,而非相反误解之义。如今有言“将要出家”,因是从俗人视角看其出家事已完成,故称“将要出家”。“迅速前往王宫”,谓迅速至王宫灯火辉煌的门内,进如内殿。
Bhūmattharaṇasaṅkhepenāti bhūmattharaṇākārena. Uppātapāṭhakāti nimittapāṭhakā, nemittakāti attho. Gahitā dāni imehi pathavīti āsanānaṃ pathaviyaṃ atthatattā evamāhaṃsu. Patiṭṭhahissatīti cintentoti ettha tena kāraṇena sāsanapatiṭṭhānassa abhāvato avassaṃ patiṭṭhahantassa sāsanassa pubbanimittamidanti evaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena sallakkhesīti veditabbaṃ. Paṇītenāti uttamena. Sahatthāti sahatthena santappetvāti suṭṭhu tappetvā, paripuṇṇaṃ suhitaṃ yāvadatthaṃ katvāti attho. Petavatthuṃ vimānavatthuṃ saccasaṃyuttañca kathesīti desanāvidhikusalo thero janassa saṃvegaṃ janetuṃ paṭhamaṃ petavatthuṃ kathetvā tadanantaraṃ saṃvegajātaṃ janaṃ assāsetuṃ saggakathāvasena vimānavatthuñca kathetvā tadanantaraṃ paṭiladdhassāsānaṃ ‘‘mā ettha assādaṃ karotha nibbānaṃ vinā na aññaṃ kiñci saṅkhāragataṃ dhuvaṃ nāma atthi, tasmā paramassāsakaṃ nibbānamadhigantuṃ vāyamathā’’ti saccapaṭivedhatthāya ussāhaṃ janento ante saccasaṃyuttaṃ kathesīti veditabbaṃ.
“地上蜻蜓”是地面昆虫之谓。“出现的飞鸟”意指种类的飞鸟。“紧握”的含义是以这些昆虫作为所在之地。众僧修学法理,思虑其因缘,因教法未能稳固,故依前因缘观察教法的缘起,此为前因缘之知迹,应当如此认识。“贤良”谓优越。“协调”,谓恰当协调、圆满完善,作至好义。先讲死者及天道事,随后以天主教义劝戒众人激发修行欲念。讲述死者时,先令心起敬畏,继以天国故事劝导,使闻者生坚决志趣,进而劝促众人懈怠勿起,努力修讨究竟涅槃因。
Tesaṃ sutvāti tesaṃ santikā therānaṃ guṇakathaṃ sutvā. Rañño saṃviditaṃ katvāti rañño nivedanaṃ katvā, rājānaṃ paṭivedayitvāti attho. Alaṃ gacchāmāti purassa accāsannattā sāruppaṃ na hotīti paṭipakkhipanto āha. Meghavanaṃ nāma uyyānanti mahāmeghavanuyyānaṃ. Tassa kira uyyānassa bhūmiggahaṇadivase akālamahāmegho uṭṭhahitvā sabbataḷākapokkharaṇiyo pūrento gimhābhihatarukkhalatādīnaṃ anuggaṇhantova pāvassi, tena kāraṇena taṃ mahāmeghavanaṃ nāma uyyānaṃ jātaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
“闻者”谓听闻长老们赞叹之辞。“向国王通报”即向王呈报之义。“去往农舍”,则是表意前方尚无可比拟之处,长老反说如此。“云林”名曰大云林园。彼园本有传说曰:大云阴[即大雨云]忽然升起,覆盖所有田畴池塘树林,如卫士护持其边,故名大云林园。古书记载此缘曰:"园地所在地上,因大雨云无时不降临,即成云林园也。"
‘‘Uyyānaṭṭhānaggahaṇe, mahāmegho akālajo;
"守护园地时,有大雨云无时降临;
Pāvassi tena uyyānaṃ, mahāmeghavanaṃ ahū’’ti.
覆盖此园故名大云林园。"
Sukhasayitabhāvaṃ pucchitvāti ‘‘kacci, bhante, idha sukhaṃ sayittha, tumhākaṃ idha nivāso sukha’’nti evaṃ sukhasayitabhāvaṃ pucchitvā tato therena ‘‘sukhasayitamhi, mahārāja, bhikkhūnaṃ phāsukamidaṃ uyyāna’’nti vutte ‘‘evaṃ sati idaṃ no uyyānaṃ dassāmī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘kappati, bhante, bhikkhusaṅghassa ārāmo’’ti pucchi. Imaṃ suttanti veḷuvanārāmapaṭiggahaṇe vuttamimaṃ suttaṃ. Udakanti dakkhiṇodakaṃ. Mahāmeghavanuyyānaṃ adāsīti ‘‘imaṃ mahāmeghavanuyyānaṃ saṅghassa dammī’’ti vatvā jeṭṭhamāsassa kāḷapakkhe dutiyadivase adāsi. Mahāvihārassa dakkhiṇodakapāteneva saddhiṃ patiṭṭhitabhāvepi na tāva tattha vihārakammaṃ niṭṭhitanti āha ‘‘idañca paṭhamaṃ vihāraṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti. Punadivasepīti kāḷapakkhassa dutiyadivaseyeva. Aḍḍhanavamānaṃ pāṇasahassānanti aḍḍhena navamānaṃ pāṇasahassānaṃ, pañcasatādhikānaṃ aṭṭhasahassānanti attho. Jotipātubhāvaṭṭhānanti ñāṇālokassa pātubhāvaṭṭhānaṃ. Appamādasuttanti aṅguttaranikāye mahāappamādasuttaṃ, rājovādasuttanti vuttaṃ hoti.
问及“舒适静卧之处”,即问:“尊者,此地有安适卧处否?你们出家众此处居环境安逸否?”长老答曰:“尊大王,此园为比库清凉安乐之处。”继而思忖:“如此处即如是园地。”又问:“此处将成比库僧团常住之所否?”此经说出于竹林精舍的开设述事中。其中“水”指南水池。所谓“大云林园”,谓“此为大云林园僧团之住处”。传言于季夏之末黑月之第二日该园被示予众僧。南水池畔依然存在着,由此明言那时尚未开始修建僧舍,故有言“此地将为首个僧舍处”。第二天即季夏黑月之第二日中,与五千九百五十余人俱集。所谓“曜现之处”,意谓智慧之光发显处。经典《中部》有《大勤精进经》,《王语经》亦有相应说法。
Mahaccanti karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ, mahatā rājānubhāvenāti attho. Tumhe jānanatthanti sambandho. Ariṭṭho nāma amaccoti rañño bhāgineyyo ariṭṭho nāma amacco. Pañcapaṇṇāsāyāti ettha ‘‘catupaṇṇāsāyā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evañhi sati upari vuccamānaṃ ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhi arahanto’’ti vacanaṃ sameti. Teneva ca sīhaḷabhāsāya likhite mahāvaṃse ‘‘catupaṇṇāsāya saddhi’’nti vuttaṃ. Dasabhātikasamākulaṃ rājakulanti muṭasivassa puttehi abhayo devānaṃpiyatisso mahānāgo uttiyo mattābhayo sūratissoti evamādīhi dasahi bhātikehi samākiṇṇaṃ rājakulaṃ. Cetiyagirimhi vassaṃ vasiṃsūti āsāḷhīpuṇṇamadivase raññā dinnavihāreyeva paṭiggahetvā pāṭipadadivase vassaṃ vasiṃsu. Pavāretvāti mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā. Kattikapuṇṇamāyanti aparakattikapuṇṇamāyaṃ. Mahāmahindatthero hi purimikāyaṃ upagantvā vutthavasso mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā tato ekamāsaṃ atikkamma cātumāsiniyaṃ puṇṇamadivase ariyagaṇaparivuto rājakulaṃ gantvā bhojanāvasāne ‘‘mahārāja, amhehi ciradiṭṭho sammāsambuddho’’tiādivacanamabrvi. Evañca katvā vakkhati ‘‘puṇṇamāyaṃ mahāvīro, cātumāsiniyā idhā’’ti. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘vutthavasso pavāretvāti cātumāsiniyā pavāraṇāyāti attho, paṭhamapavāraṇāya vā pavāretvā ekamāsaṃ tattheva vasitvā kattikapuṇṇamiyaṃ avoca, aññathā ‘puṇṇamāyaṃ mahāvīro’ti vuttattā na sakkā gahetu’’nti, tattha cātumāsiniyā pavāraṇāyāti ayamatthavikappo na yujjati. Na hi purimikāya vassūpagatā cātumāsiniyaṃ pavārenti. Ciradiṭṭho sammāsambuddhoti satthussa sarīrāvayavo ca sammāsambuddhoyevāti katvā avayave samudāyavohāravasena evamāhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ yathā ‘‘samuddo diṭṭho’’ti.
“Mahaccanti karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ,mahatā rājānubhāvenāti attho。”此句意为“大者对于行为的断句,意指其具有广大如国王般的威严。”接着说:“Tumhe jānanatthanti sambandho。”意谓“你们当知此处有联系”。“Ariṭṭho nāma amaccoti rañño bhāgineyyo,ariṭṭho nāma amacco。”此处解释‘阿里多’名为‘安摩叉’,乃指王族贵族之人。关于“五十五岁”,此处应读作“四十五岁”,正如其中所论。正因如此,上文所述“六十二阿拉汉”之语得以成就。锡兰语译本《大史》中称“四十五人一同”。又论及十位兄弟为王族成员,分别为牟多、无畏、天子爱子、大龙、上首、醉无畏、勇猛无畏、绅士天龙、等十兄弟组成王族。此家族曾在舍卫城的祭祀山中居住,并于七月月圆之日,在王后所赐住所中,确认所住时间作为一次年结。所谓“pavāretvā”意为“大召集”,即召开大召集议会的意思。八月月圆至九月月圆,此为时节。大摩诃毗阇多长老专程前来,在召开大召集后,经过一个月至八月月圆、再至四个月月圆日,圣众聚集王族,共进晚餐,向王宣说“一位正见久远的释迦牟尼佛”等语。又云“在这个月圆月是伟大勇士,这是四个月月圆期间。”有人解释“召开大召集”为召开四个月月圆的议会,或称首次召开大召集,召开后继续停留一月,于八月月圆日发表演说,若不如此说,则“这是伟大勇士的月圆”之说难以成立。因为正如佛陀的身体构成即代表正觉佛自身,故此乃说如“眼见大海”之义。
Therena vuttampi gamanakāraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā idha vāse payojanameva dassetvā gamanaṃ paṭisedhetukāmo āha ‘‘ahaṃ bhante tumhe’’tiādi. Abhivādanādīsu ācariyaṃ disvā abhivādanakaraṇaṃ abhivādanaṃ nāma. Yasmiṃ vā disābhāge ācariyo vasati iriyāpathe kappento, tato abhimukhova vanditvā gacchati, vanditvā tiṭṭhati, vanditvā nisīdati, vanditvā nipajjati, idaṃ abhivādanaṃ nāma. Ācariyaṃ pana dūratova disvā paccuṭṭhāya paccuggamanakaraṇaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ācariyaṃ pana disvā añjaliṃ paggayha sīse ṭhapetvā ācariyaṃ namassati, yasmiṃ disābhāge so vasati, tadabhimukhopi tatheva namassati, gacchantopi ṭhitopi nisinnopi añjaliṃ paggayha namassatiyevāti idaṃ añjalikammaṃ nāma. Anucchavikakammassa pana karaṇaṃ sāmīcikaraṇaṃ nāma. Cīvarādīsu hi cīvaraṃ dento na yaṃ vā taṃ vā deti, mahagghaṃ satamūlagghampi pañcasatamūlagghampi satasahassamūlagghampi detiyeva. Piṇḍapātādīsupi eseva nayo. Idaṃ sāmīcikaraṇaṃ nāma. Sarīradhātuyoti sarīrāvayavā. Aññātanti aññātaṃ, viditaṃ mayāti attho. Kuto lacchāmāti kuto labhissāma. Sumanena saddhiṃ mantehīti paṭhamameva sāmaṇerassa kathitattā vā ‘‘jānāti esa amhākamadhippāya’’nti ñatvā vā evamāhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
此中记载长老论述聚会往返的缘由,强调此次停留仅为方便之故,阻止往返出行者,言道:“我,尊者们。”论及礼敬等事。礼敬是指诸尊者见面时之问候仪式。若老师在左侧而行人亦从左侧迎接,则必先转向老师,行跪拜礼、立立礼、坐礼及俯伏礼,此即所谓礼敬。若老师距离较远,则先转身走向老师,此为迎接行为。若老师尚在远方,见后双掌合十,俯首礼敬,坐立行走皆合十礼,此即“合掌礼”。而精神专注的行为则称“正确之仪式”。例如施舍衣钵等必以庄严仪轨执行方为正道,诸多米饭食物亦同。此类礼敬,连带身躯及境界积分之解释,意即“已识已知”。所谓“未知”意为不明所获处所,对前行心念恭敬坚固者,乃知教法主导之由,说明初学者已深明此义。
Appossukko tvaṃ mahārājāti mahārāja tvaṃ dhātūnaṃ paṭilābhe mā ussukkaṃ karohi, mā tvaṃ tattha vāvaṭo bhava, aññaṃ tayā kattabbaṃ karohīti adhippāyo. Idāni tadeva raññā kattabbakiccaṃ dassento ‘‘vīthiyo sodhāpetvā’’tiādimāha. Sabbatāḷāvacare upaṭṭhāpetvāti kaṃsatāḷāditāḷaṃ avacarati etthāti tāḷāvacaraṃ vuccati ātatavitatādi sabbaṃ tūriyabhaṇḍaṃ. Teneva parinibbānasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sabbañca tāḷāvacaraṃ sannipātethāti ettha sabbañca tāḷāvacaranti sabbaṃ tūriyabhaṇḍa’’nti vuttaṃ. Ettha pana sahacaraṇanayena sabbatūriyabhaṇḍānaṃ vādakāpi gahetuṃ vaṭṭantīti te sabbe upaṭṭhāpetvā sannipātetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Lacchasīti labhissasi. Therā cetiyagirimeva agamaṃsūti rājanivesanato nikkhamitvā puna cetiyagirimeva agamaṃsu.
“Appossukko tvaṃ mahārājāti”即警告大王莫因获得身躯诸界而躁动,不可躁急,亦不可在此地有侥幸与依赖,应当完满履行其王职责。此时则告知国王须彻底清扫道路。“All covering of tiles”乃指瓦与所有覆盖材料,此类为屋顶之称。经文于《佛灭经注》中称“一切覆盖瓦顶即全部屋瓦”。此处乃卫士护卫众屋顶物品,集合妥善安置之义。云“可取者必得”,称“取”就是“得”。长老们就居舍山市进退,离开又回来,再返居舍山,此即实际行动。
Tāvadevāti taṃ khaṇaṃyeva. Pāṭaliputtadvāreti pāṭaliputtanagaradvāre. Kiṃ bhante sumana āhiṇḍasīti sumana tvaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ akatvā kasmā vicarasīti pucchati. Cetiyagirimhiyeva patiṭṭhāpetvāti pacchā tattha vihāratthāya ākaṅkhitabbabhāvato cetiyagirimhiyeva patiṭṭhāpetvā. Vaḍḍhamānakacchāyāyāti pacchābhattanti attho. Pacchābhattameva hi chāyā vaḍḍhati. Athassa etadahosīti dhātucaṅkoṭakaṃ disvā evaṃ cintesi. Chattaṃ apanamatūti idaṃ setacchattaṃ sayameva me sīsoparito dhātucaṅkoṭakābhimukhaṃ hutvā namatūti attho. Mayhaṃ matthake patiṭṭhātūti idaṃ dhātucaṅkoṭakaṃ therassa hatthato dhātuyā saha āgantvā sirasmiṃ me patiṭṭhātūti attho. Pokkharavassaṃ nāma pokkharapattappamāṇaṃ valāhakamajjhe uṭṭhahitvā kamena pharitvā temetukāmeyeva temayamānaṃ mahantaṃ hutvā vassati. Mahāvīroti mahāparakkamo. Mahāvīrāvayavattā cettha satthuvohārena dhātuyo eva niddiṭṭhā. Dhātusarīrenāgamanañhi sandhāya ayaṃ gāthā vuttā.
“Tāvadevāti”即“此刻”。“Pāṭaliputtadvāreti”是指“由巴达厘子城门”。有问世尊:“苏摩那为何迟到?为何在城市游行?”答:“佛陀舍卫城安置出家处所,且环境稳定。”所谓“Pacchābhattāyāti”为“在后来出现的阴影”。此处所说“影”即后方投射之义。于是思量,望着佛陀侧面的遮阳伞时自内心作此想“虽非意欲取伞,但对伞表示敬意”,故在头顶附近敬礼,以伞为佛体所持。又说池塘之水升腾温度保持不冷。称“Mahāvīro”为“伟大英勇者”,此意佛之威严,以佛躯体为明示者,故有此偈。
Pacchimadisābhimukhova hutvā apasakkantoti piṭṭhito piṭṭhitoyeva pacchimadisābhimukho hutvā osakkanto, gacchantoti attho. Kiñcāpi esa pacchimadisaṃ na oloketi, tathāpi pacchimadisaṃ sandhāya gacchatīti ‘‘pacchimadisābhimukho’’ti vuttaṃ. Puratthimena dvārena nagaraṃ pavisitvāti ettha piṭṭhito piṭṭhitoyeva āgantvā dvāre sampatte parivattetvā ujukeneva nagaraṃ pāvisīti veditabbaṃ. Mahejavatthu nāmāti mahejanāmakena yakkhena pariggahitaṃ ekaṃ devaṭṭhānanti veditabbaṃ . Paribhogacetiyaṭṭhānanti ettha paribhuttūpakaraṇāni nidahitvā kataṃ cetiyaṃ paribhogacetiyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tividhañhi cetiyaṃ vadanti paribhogacetiyaṃ dhātucetiyaṃ dhammacetiyanti. Tattha paribhogacetiyaṃ vuttanayameva. Dhātucetiyaṃ pana dhātuyo nidahitvā kataṃ. Paṭiccasamuppādādilikhitapotthakaṃ nidahitvā kataṃ pana dhammacetiyaṃ nāma. Sārīrikaṃ paribhogikaṃ uddissakanti evampi tippabhedaṃ cetiyaṃ vadanti. Ayaṃ pana pabhedo paṭimārūpassapi uddissakacetiyeneva saṅgahitattā suṭṭhutaraṃ yujjati.
“Pacchimadisābhimukho hutvā apasakkantoti”,此意为“面对西方,转身向后”,即背对着西方而逆转,意为往西。虽未回望西方,却是向西行走,故称之为“面向西方”。入城时由东门进入时,其实背对门口抵达,转身进入城门,在城门正中直线进入城中。文中称“Mahejavatthu”为由一名为马赫者夜叉守护的天界所属地。此地建有殿堂,内焚香设供养之佛塔,即所谓“享用塔”。佛塔依内涵分为三种,即“供养塔”,“骨舍利塔”,“法藏塔”。其中,供养塔专供日常祭祀使用;骨舍利塔由骨舍利构成;法藏塔则置放缘起经典文献。此即寺塔的三种类型。
Kathaṃ pana idaṃ ṭhānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ paribhogacetiyaṭṭhānaṃ ahosīti āha ‘‘atīte kirā’’tiādi. Pajjarakenāti ettha pajjarako nāma rogo vuccati. So ca yakkhānubhāvena samuppannoti veditabbo. Tadā kira puṇṇakāḷo nāma yakkho attano ānubhāvena manussānampi sarīre pajjarakaṃ nāma rogaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
询问“此地是三位佛的供养塔地吗?”答说“过去确是”。“Pajjarakenāti”谓“Pajjaraka”意为疾病,此病由夜叉之力所致。传说“充满会”夜叉曾以其力量使人类患上此病,故名“疱疹病”。《大史》中如此记载:
‘‘Rakkhasehi janassettha, rogo pajjarako ahū’’ti;
『保护人民吧,疾病是热毒』,是说此意;
Dīpavaṃsepi cetaṃ vuttaṃ –
在群岛之国也曾说过这一点——
‘‘Rakkhasā ca bahū tattha, pajjarā ca samuṭṭhitā;
『妖魔众多,各种热病一齐兴起;
Pajjarena bahū sattā, nassanti dīpamuttame’’ti.
许多众生由于热病,在岛屿上灭亡了』,这是说法。
Anayabyasananti ettha anayoti avaḍḍhi. Kāyikaṃ cetasikañca sukhaṃ byasati vikkhipati vināsetīti byasananti dukkhaṃ vuccati. Kiñcāpi ‘‘buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ olokento’’ti vuttaṃ, tathāpi ‘‘te satte anayabyasanamāpajjante disvā’’ti vacanato paṭhamaṃ buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ oloketvā pacchā sabbaññutaññāṇena lokaṃ olokento te satte anayabyasanamāpajjante disvāti gahetabbaṃ. Na hi āsayānusayādibuddhacakkhussa te sattā anayabyasanaṃ āpajjantā dissanti. Dubbuṭṭhikāti visamavassādivasena duṭṭhā asobhanā vuṭṭhiyeva dubbuṭṭhikā, sassuppattihetubhūtā kāyasukhuppattisappāyā sattupakārā sammā vuṭṭhi tattha na hotīti adhippāyo. Tatoyeva ca ‘‘dubbhikkhaṃ dussassa’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhikkhāya abhāvo , dullabhabhāvo vā dubbhikkhaṃ, sulabhā tattha bhikkhā na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sassānaṃ abhāvo, asampannatā vā dussassaṃ. Devoti meghassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sammādhāramanupavecchīti udakadhāraṃ sammā vimuñci, sammā anupavassīti vuttaṃ hoti.
此处所说的‘未灭’是‘未增长’之意。身体与心意所感之乐,分别流散、消灭者谓之‘灭’;‘堕灭’称为苦。还有‘佛眼观察世间’的说法,但紧接着说‘见彼众生遭遇未灭’,当以第一次用佛眼观察世间,再以至高知识观察世间来看待。因未必因习气浸染等佛眼,众生皆显现遭遇未灭。‘恶意’是指因恶劣气候等原因导致恶劣、不美好现象发生的恶意;因身体健康、寿命、幸福等条件不足,众生无利益、无正当兴盛,即无‘正兴盛’,谓之‘恶意’。同样说‘饥荒恶劣’,因乏食物称饥荒,乏食物之地状况恶劣称恶劣。因缺乏布施、难获得布施称饥荒;易得布施则不为饥荒。亦因沙门众缺乏、不圆满,称恶劣。‘天’意谓云雨。‘正如法滴水注入,至正不失’谓为正确降雨。
Mahāvivādo hotīti tasmiṃ kira kāle jayantamahārājena ca tassa rañño kaniṭṭhabhātukena samiddhakumāranāmakena uparājena ca saddhiṃ imasmiṃ dīpe mahāyuddhaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayena maṇḍadīpe mahāvivādo hotī’’ti. Hotīti kiriyā kālamapekkhitvā vattamānapayogo, vivādassa pana atītakālikattaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’ti imināva viññāyati. Saddantarasannidhānena hettha atītakālāvagamo yathā ‘‘bhāsate vaḍḍhate tadā’’ti. Evaṃ sabbattha īdisesu ṭhānesu vattamānapayogo daṭṭhabbo. Kalahaviggahajātāti ettha kalaho nāma matthakappatto kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi. Tattha hatthaparāmāsādivasena kāyena kātabbo kalaho kāyakalaho. Mammaghaṭṭanādivasena vācāya kātabbo kalaho vācākalaho. Vipaccanīkagahaṇaṃ viggaho. Kalahassa pubbabhāge uppanno aññamaññaviruddhagāho. Atha vā kalaho nāma vācākalaho. Aññamaññaṃ hatthaparāmāsādivasena virūpaṃ viruddhaṃ vā gahaṇaṃ viggaho kāyakalaho. Yathāvutto kalaho ca viggaho ca jāto sañjāto etesanti kalahaviggahajātā, sañjātakalahaviggahāti attho.
所谓大纷争,是指某时期由在位大王以及他的王子—名为熠耀太子的太子—曾共同进行过一场大规模战争。所以说:‘彼时在曼陀岛发生大纷争。’‘发生’乃根据时间状况而言,而纠纷是属过去时,故以‘彼时’作先行词。因句间相连,如‘说时即是增长之前’,处处体现现在时间之使用。纷争与矛盾皆因争执产生,包括身体纷争与言语纷争。以手打骂等为身体上的纷争;以责骂等为言语上的纷争。纷争是激烈争斗。先前纷争起于相互敌对。或说纷争乃言语之争斗。彼此因手打骂等行为,不协调、敌对、争执相斗争,谓为身体纷争。以口舌的彼此反对、敌意的发生谓为言语纷争。如说纷争和交锋相生相伴,彼此构成、产生、出现者,称之为‘纷争交锋产生’,谓其生起纷争。
Tāni sāsanantaradhānena nassantīti pariyattipaṭivedhapaṭipattisaṅkhātassa tividhassapi sāsanassa antaradhānena dhātuparinibbāne sati tāni cetiyāni vinassanti. Tīṇi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.161; vibha. aṭṭha. 809) hi parinibbānāni kilesaparinibbānaṃ khandhaparinibbānaṃ dhātuparinibbānanti, tāni pana amhākaṃ bhagavato vasena evaṃ veditabbāni. Tassa hi kilesaparinibbānaṃ bodhipallaṅke ahosi, khandhaparinibbānaṃ kusinārāyaṃ. Dhātuparinibbānaṃ anāgate bhavissati. Sāsanassa kira osakkanakāle imasmiṃ tambapaṇṇidīpe dhātuyo sannipatitvā mahācetiyaṃ gamissanti, mahācetiyato nāgadīpe rājāyatanacetiyaṃ, tato mahābodhipallaṅkaṃ gamissanti, nāgabhavanatopi devalokatopi brahmalokatopi dhātuyo mahābodhipallaṅkameva gamissanti, sāsapamattāpi dhātu na antarā nassissati. Sabbā dhātuyo mahābodhipallaṅke rāsibhūtā suvaṇṇakkhandho viya ekagghanā hutvā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo vissajjessanti, tā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharissanti. Tato dasasahassacakkavāḷe devatā sannipatitvā ‘‘ajja satthā parinibbāti, ajja sāsanaṃ osakkati, pacchimadassanaṃ dāni idaṃ amhāka’’nti dasabalassa parinibbutadivasato mahantataraṃ kāruññaṃ karissanti, ṭhapetvā anāgāmikhīṇāsave avasesā sakabhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkhissanti. Dhātūsu tejodhātu uṭṭhahitvā yāva brahmalokā uggacchissati, sāsapamattiyāpi dhātuyā sati ekajālāva bhavissati, dhātūsu pariyādānaṃ gatāsu paricchijjissati. Evaṃ mahantaṃ ānubhāvaṃ dassetvā dhātūsu antarahitāsu sāsanaṃ antarahitaṃ nāma hoti.
这诸法因教法期间灭失,称为传说中所言三种教法的消失。三者乃是烦恼的消灭、蕴的消灭及色界的消灭。但于我等应依佛陀示现的方式认识此事。烦恼的消灭发生于觉悟之座,蕴的消灭发生于拘尸那罗,色界的消灭将在未来出现。教法在衰退时期,于此铜叶岛上诸种色界汇聚而成大舍利塔,继之于大舍利塔中至龙岛建造王舍利塔,由此向大觉座转去,诸舍利自龙宫、天界、梵天界亦同赴大觉座。即便教法微弱,舍利亦不曾断灭。诸舍利如金块合成一体,散发六种颜色的光辉,共守护十万世界之舍利轮。继由十万世界内诸天集合,知当日佛陀涅槃、教法衰尽、今乃保护之时,出于大悲,将设立护持教法之力,余余不退转者将不能持守三宝。舍利光辉兴盛,将上升至梵天界,即使教法微弱,亦有一网维护舍利,舍利所被环绕者,将被剥落消散。如是彰显之大影响中,虽教法隐藏其中,仍不得谓教法隐藏者。
Divā bodhirukkhaṭṭhāne hatthisālāyaṃ tiṭṭhatīti divā vatthuvicinanāya okāsaṃ kurumāno tato dhātuṃ gahetvā kumbhe ṭhapetvā sadhātukova hutvā tiṭṭhatīti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
云曰:白日菩提树下,象厅住处,乃日间整理木材之时。尔时持舍利,置于器中,如同顶柱般屹立,即是云迹所云之意。大史书中有云:
‘‘Rattiṃ nāgonupariyāti, taṃ ṭhānaṃ so sadhātukaṃ;
夜间诸龙来绕此处,此处即为顶柱;
Bodhiṭṭhānamhi sālāyaṃ, divā ṭhāti sadhātuko’’ti.
菩提树下之厅,白日有顶柱屹立。
Thūpapatiṭṭhānabhūmiṃ pariyāyatīti matthakato dhātuṃ tattha patiṭṭhāpetvā sadhātukaṃ thūpapatiṭṭhānabhūmiṃ rattibhāge pariyāyati, samantato vicaratīti attho. Jaṅghappamāṇanti pupphaṭṭhānappamāṇaṃ. Thūpakucchito heṭṭhābhāgañhi thūpassa jaṅghāti vadanti. Dhātuoropanatthāyāti hatthikumbhato dhātukaraṇḍakassa oropanatthāya. Sakalanagarañca janapado cāti nagaravāsino janapadavāsino ca abhedato nagarajanapadasaddehi vuttā ‘‘sabbo gāmo āgato, mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’tiādīsu viya. Mahājanakāyeti mahājanasamūhe. Samūhapariyāyo hettha kāyasaddo. Ekekadhātuppadesato tejodakanikkhamanādivasena yamakayamakaṃ hutvā pavattaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ. Channaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ rasmiyo cāti sambandho kātabbo. Channaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ udakadhārā cāti evampettha sambandhaṃ vadanti. Parinibbutepi bhagavati tassānubhāvena evarūpaṃ pāṭihāriyamahosiyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ acintiyā’’tiādigāthamāha. Buddhadhammāti ettha buddhaguṇā.
围绕舍利塔地之意,即是日日夜将舍利安置于此,昼夜巡行遍在。腿肚之量乃是以花塔之量而言。花顶下方部位亦称为腿肚。舍利降落即以象瓮容器承载舍利。全城与诸邦盈溢不分,如同乡村居民与乡邦居民无异,俗语所谓「村落聚集,升高之梁柱」等。庄严群众乃圣众聚合之意。因一个个舍利分出光与水之相,成为交互辉映之奇迹。收敛多彩光芒亦如流水般覆盖。有佛涅槃后,以其神力成此特别奇迹,故称「不可思议」。此处佛法包含佛陀功德之意。
Dharamānakālepi tikkhattuṃ āgamāsīti bhagavā kira abhisambodhito navame māse phussapuṇṇamadivase yakkhādhivāsaṃ laṅkādīpamupagantvā laṅkāmajjhe tiyojanāyate yojanavitthate mahānāgavanuyyāne mahāyakkhasamāgame upariākāse ṭhatvā kappuṭṭhānasamaye samuṭṭhitavuṭṭhivātanibbisesavassavāyunā ca lokantarikanirayandhakārasadisaghorandhakāranikāyena ca sītanarakanibbisesabahalasītena ca saṃvaṭṭakālasañjātavātasaṅkhubhitehi meghanabhagajjitasadisena gaganamedanīninnādena ca yakkhānaṃ bhayaṃ santāsaṃ janetvā tehi yācitābhayo ‘‘detha me samaggā nisīdanaṭṭhāna’’nti vatvā ‘‘dema te sakaladīpaṃ, dehi no, mārisa, abhaya’’nti vutte sabbaṃ taṃ upaddavaṃ antaradhāpetvā yakkhadattabhūmiyā cammakhaṇḍaṃ pattharitvā tattha nisinno samantato jalamānaṃ cammakhaṇḍaṃ pasāretvā kappuṭṭhānaggisadisadahanābhibhūtānaṃ jaladhisalilabhītānaṃ samantā velante bhamantānaṃ yakkhānaṃ giridīpaṃ dassetvā tesu tattha patiṭṭhitesu taṃ yathāṭhāne patiṭṭhāpetvā cammakhaṇḍaṃ saṅkhipitvā nisinno tadā samāgate anekadevatāsannipāte dhammaṃ desetvā anekapāṇakoṭīnaṃ dhammābhisamayaṃ katvā sumanakūṭavāsinā mahāsumanadevarājena samadhigatasotāpattiphalena yācitapūjanīyo sīsaṃ parāmasitvā muṭṭhimattā nīlāmalakesadhātuyo tassa datvā jambudīpamagamāsi.
护法时,三月来到。佛陀成道后于第九个月满月日,降临夜叉之属所居之兰伽岛。岛中三由旬地,大蟒林园中,夜叉众集会之所在。佛在高空,以疾风及暴风扰乱天界,以寒狱酷寒严寒痛苦之风暴,令诸夜叉惊怖,恐惧生起,遂恳求无畏座位。佛言:「我予尔等同体安坐处。」又曰:「予尔整个岛屿。勿惧,魔王。」佛即隐去一切灾难,驾驭夜叉承袭之地恰玛圈,坐于彼处,四周伸展水面,镇压迦婆陀那火焰及水患波浪,展示诸夜叉、山岛等,众多神祇聚集时,宣说法义,成就无数众生受法之功德。历经无数十亿众,受法而证入初果圣果者,最终在妙华王所领导下,执礼尊敬,施舍带青宝石装饰之舍利,离开了须弥洲。
Dutiyaṃ abhisambodhito pañcame saṃvacchare cūḷodaramahodarānaṃ jalathalanivāsīnaṃ mātulabhāgineyyānaṃ nāgarājūnaṃ maṇipallaṅkaṃ nissāya upaṭṭhitamahāsaṅgāme nāgānaṃ mahāvināsaṃ disvā cittamāsakāḷapakkhassa uposathadivase pātova samiddhasumanena nāma rukkhadevaputtena chattaṃ katvā dhāritarājāyatano nāgadīpaṃ samāgantvā saṅgāmamajjhe ākāse pallaṅkena nisinno ghorandhakārena nāge santāsetvā assāsento ālokaṃ dassetvā sañjātapītisomanassānaṃ upagatanāgānaṃ sāmaggikaraṇīyaṃ dhammaṃ desetvā mātulabhāgineyyehi dvīhi nāgarājūhi pūjite pathavītalagate maṇipallaṅke nisinno nāgehi dibbannapānehi santappito jalathalanivāsino asītikoṭināge saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpetvā tehi namassituṃ pallaṅkañca rājāyatanapādapañca tattha patiṭṭhāpetvā jambudīpamagamāsi.
第二次成道,是在第五个岁次,于小海大海相连之地水洼居住的舅舅族的诸国王中,倚靠宝座而立,在大规模战斗中。见到众龙的巨大毁灭,于观想月圆之夜的雨安日,又以名为游云的树神子撑伞。守护王宫,飞往龙岛,坐于空中宝座上,因乌云黑暗而使龙群心生恐惧,呼气绽放光明。对前来之龙们宣示,道出当令团结之义,使受舅舅族两位龙王礼敬,坐于已布满宝水的宝座上。这水洼居住着八千万龙,乃依止于守戒与皈依他者,宝座及王宫所立之地皆建置妥当,随即前往人间大陆。
Tatiyampi abhisambodhito aṭṭhame saṃvacchare mahodaramātulena maṇiakkhikanāgarājenābhiyācito visākhapuṇṇamadivase pañcabhikkhusataparivuto kalyāṇīpadese maṇiakkhikassa bhavanamupagantvā tattha māpitaruciraratanamaṇḍape manoharavarapallaṅke nisinno nāgarājena dibbannapānehi santappetvā nāgamāṇavikagaṇaparivutena dibbamālāgandhādīhi pūjito tattha dhammaṃ desetvā vuṭṭhāyāsanā sumanakūṭe padaṃ dassetvā pabbatapāde divāvihāraṃ katvā dīghavāpicetiyaṭṭhāne ca mubhiyaṅgaṇacetiyaṭṭhāne ca kalyāṇīcetiyaṭṭhāne ca mahābodhiṭṭhāne ca thūpārāmaṭṭhāne ca mahācetiyaṭṭhāne ca sasāvako nisīditvā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā silācetiyaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhatvā devanāge samanusāsitvā jambudīpamagamāsi. Evaṃ bhagavā dharamānakālepi imaṃ dīpaṃ tikkhattuṃ āgamāsīti veditabbaṃ.
第三次成道,是在第八个岁次,受舅舅族的宝石铁匠龙王邀请,于满月的维沙迦日,在护卫五比库围绕的吉祥之地,前往宝石铁匠的宅第。坐于其宝塔宝座,受诸龙人众以神香华饰供养,宣说法义。随后起身,示现美足,于山脚游行,至池塘精舍、古德精舍、宽贤精舍、大觉精舍、塔林精舍、大塔精舍等处,都有沙门比库端坐,进入涅槃禅定,立于石塔旁,由众神龙召唤,随后进入人界大陆。据此可知,世尊在世时,亦三次降临此岛。
Idāni tadeva tikkhattumāgamanaṃ saṅkhepato vibhāvento āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ yakkhadamanattha’’ntiādi. Rakkhaṃ karontoti yakkhānaṃ puna apavisanatthāya rakkhaṃ karonto. Āvijjīti samantato vicari. Mātulabhāgineyyānanti cūḷodaramahodarānaṃ. Ettha pana kiñcāpi bhagavā samiddhasumanena nāma devaputtena saddhiṃ āgato, tathāpi pacchāsamaṇena ekenapi bhikkhunā saddhiṃ anāgatattā ‘‘ekakova āgantvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadanurūpassa paripanthassa vihatattā ‘‘pariḷāhaṃ vūpasametvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Rañño bhātāti rañño kaniṭṭhabhātā. Abhayoti mattābhayo.
现将这三次降临简略分解说明,开头即说「首次镇魔之意」。所谓守护,是为了防止恶鬼侵犯,而加以防卫。所谓「游云之舅舅族」,指小海大海相连之地。虽然世尊与游云名树神子同来,后续则唯有单独比库随从同行,故称「仅一人来」。因应前序章节,云「能平息内心激烈冲突」。此处「王之弟」指王之幼弟,「阿巴耶」则指仅有的无畏护持。
Anuḷā devīti rañño jeṭṭhabhātujāyā anuḷā devī. Purimakānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ bodhi patiṭṭhāsīti yadā hi so kakusandho nāma bhagavā imasmiṃ dīpe manusse pajjarakābhibhūte anayabyasanamāpajjante disvā karuṇāya sañcoditahadayo imaṃ dīpamāgato, tadā taṃ rogabhayaṃ vūpasametvā sannipatitānaṃ dhammaṃ desento caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayaṃ katvā sāyanhasamaye bodhipatiṭṭhānārahaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tattha samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘mama sirīsamahābodhito dakkhiṇamahāsākhamādāya rucanandā bhikkhunī idhāgacchatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi . Sā satthu cittaṃ ñatvā taṅkhaṇaññeva khemavatīrājadhāniyā khemarājānamādāya mahābodhimupagantvā dakkhiṇamahāsākhāya manosilālekhaṃ khemarājena dāpetvā taṃ sayaṃ chijjitvā suvaṇṇakaṭāhe ṭhitaṃ bodhisākhamādāya pañcasatabhikkhunīhi ceva devatāhi ca parivāritā iddhiyā idhānetvā tathāgatena pasārite dakkhiṇahatthe sasuvaṇṇakaṭāhaṃ mahābodhiṃ ṭhapesi. Taṃ tathāgato abhayassa nāma rañño datvā tena tasmiṃ samaye ‘‘mahātitthavana’’nti paññāte mahāmeghavanuyyāne patiṭṭhāpesi.
所谓阿奴拉神后,是王长兄的女儿。三位古代正觉者,当时记载其觉果建立之事:过去有一位名为迦拘萨多的世尊,见此岛上人间正遭瘟疫之苦,发大悲心而来。平复其恐怖,相会众人宣说法义,四万八千弟子听法得道,傍晚时分前往觉地禅林,止观入定,起身时说:「我大觉成就,南方大树菩提树下宝贝尼比库来此。」尼比库心会世尊意,带领其前往安全之地国王所置觉林,用心刻写铭文,切断旧树,立于金屋,五百名比库及天神环绕,以神通力移植该宝菩提树。世尊亲自将其赠予无畏王,彼时称为「大圣林」,安置于大云游苑。
Koṇāgamano ca bhagavā dubbuṭṭhipīḷite dīpavāsino disvā imaṃ dīpamāgato taṃ bhayaṃ vūpasametvā dhammaṃ desento caturāsīti pāṇasahassāni maggaphalesu patiṭṭhāpetvā pubbabodhiṭṭhānaṃ gantvā samāpattipariyosāne ‘‘mama udumbaramahābodhito dakkhiṇamahāsākhamādāya karakanattā bhikkhunī idhāgacchatū’’ti cintesi. Sā bhagavato adhippāyaṃ viditvā taṅkhaṇaññeva sobharājadhāniyā sobharājānamādāya mahābodhimupagantvā dakkhiṇamahāsākhāya manosilālekhaṃ sobharājena dāpetvā taṃ sayaṃ chijjitvā hemakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitaṃ bodhisākhamādāya pañcasatabhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ suragaṇaparivutā iddhiyā idhāharitvā satthārā pasāritadakkhiṇapāṇitale sahemakaṭāhaṃ mahābodhiṃ ṭhapesi. Taṃ tathāgato samiddhassa rañño datvā tena tasmiṃ samaye ‘‘mahānāgavana’’nti saṅkhyaṃ gate mahāmeghavanuyyāne mahābodhiṃ patiṭṭhāpesi.
迦邻使者见世尊至此岛,岛上人多心中烦恼,闻此安定心灵,宣讲法义。建立四万八千弟子修道场所,完成禅定,心念起「我的乌德摩摩觉,南方大树菩提树下宝贝尼比库来此」。世尊知道此心志,引导其至安全之地国王所置觉林,刻铭文赠与国王,切断旧树,置于金屋。五百比库及天众环绕,用神通力移植该觉树,世尊以已证成果授予甘露王,时代称为「大龙林」,安置于大云游苑中。
Kassapopi ca bhagavā upaṭṭhitarājūparājayuddhena pāṇino vināsaṃ disvā karuṇāya codito imaṃ dīpamāgantvā taṃ kalahaṃ vūpasametvā dhammaṃ desento caturāsīti pāṇasahassāni maggaphalaṃ pāpetvā mahābodhiṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tattha samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘mama nigrodhamahābodhito dakkhiṇamahāsākhamādāya sudhammā bhikkhunī idhāgacchatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Sā bhagavato cittaṃ viditvā taṅkhaṇaññeva bārāṇasīrājadhāniyā brahmadattarājānamādāya mahābodhimupagantvā dakkhiṇamahāsākhāya manosilālekhaṃ brahmadattena dāpetvā taṃ sayaṃ chijjitvā kanakakaṭāhe ṭhitaṃ bodhisākhamādāya pañcasatabhikkhunīparivārā devagaṇaparivutā iddhiyā ettha ānetvā munindena pasārite dakkhiṇakaratale sasuvaṇṇakaṭāhaṃ mahābodhiṃ ṭhapesi. Taṃ bhagavā jayantarañño datvā tena tasmiṃ samaye ‘‘mahāsālavana’’nti saṅkhyaṃ gate mahāmeghavanuyyāne mahābodhiṃ patiṭṭhāpesi. Evaṃ imasmiṃ dīpe purimakānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ bodhiṃ patiṭṭhāpesi. Taṃ sandhāya evamāha ‘‘imasmiñca mahārāja dīpe purimakānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ bodhi patiṭṭhāsī’’ti.
迦萨巴也因国王争战而见大毁灭,生起悲悯心来此安定争端,宣讲正法,建立四万八千弟子修道场所,入禅定,起身说「我那娑罗大觉,南方大树菩提树下清净比库来此」。其知国王心志,连同国王妃以铭文,切断旧树,置身金屋。五百比库众及天神环绕,以神通力移植宝觉树。世尊赐予胜利王,彼时称之为「大娑罗林」,安置于大云游苑。由此可知,此岛先后由三位古代正觉者所证成觉树,略称「此大王国岛三位正觉者之觉树建立」亦当知。
Sarasaraṃsijālavissajjanakenāti siniddhatāya rasavantaṃ ojavantaṃ abhinavaraṃsijālaṃ vissajjentena. Atha vā ito cito ca saṃsaraṇato sarasaṃ sajīvaṃ jīvamānaṃ viya raṃsijālaṃ vissajjentena. Atha vā sarasakāle dharamānakāle buddhena viya raṃsijālaṃ muñcantenāti evamettha atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Ekadivaseneva agamāsīti sambandho. Pañcahi kaññāsatehīti attano paricārikehi pañcahi kaññāsatehi. Upassayaṃ kārāpetvāti bhikkhunupassayaṃ kārāpetvā. Appesīti lekhasāsanaṃ patiṭṭhāpesi. Evañca avocāti rājasandesaṃ appetvā therassa mukhasāsanaṃ viññāpento evaṃ avoca. Udikkhatīti apekkhati pattheti.
所谓细密且轻薄之纱网,因其流畅而柔软,富有弹力而新颖,由此纱网放开。或者,从这里至彼处往来穿梭,如流水般活泼鲜活的纱网放开。或者如在流水之时、支撑之时,如佛所做般放开纱网。此乃此处意思之说明。说及某日而来,是指关系。五个侍女即指他所侍奉的五位侍女。招集即为使得比库女招集法会。以简短文书创立训诂教令。如此宣说,受国王使者,告知长老的正式教令,即以此说明。观察、等待即是注视、期待之意。
Chinnahatthaṃ viyāti chinnahatthavantaṃ viya. Chinnā hatthā etassāti chinnahatthoti aññapadatthasamāso daṭṭhabbo. Pabbajjāpurekkhārāti pabbajjābhimukhā, pabbajjāya sañjātābhilāsā ‘‘kadā nu kho pabbajissāmī’’ti tattha ussukkamāpannāti vuttaṃ hoti. Maṃ paṭimānetīti maṃ udikkhati. Satthena ghātaṃ na arahatīti asatthaghātārahaṃ. Himavalāhakagabbhanti himapuṇṇavalāhakagabbhaṃ. Pāṭihāriyavasena jātaṃ himameva ‘‘valāhakagabbha’’ntipi vadanti. Doṇamattāti magadhanāḷiyā soḷasanāḷippamāṇā.
“折断之手”之意,如同拥有折断手一般。折断双手,意谓断手,如此是他义相等的术语。出家侍候者,即专为出家方向,怀有出家愿望,有‘何时能出家?’之渴望,故此引发期待,此谓言传。‘他怀忘我’意即他眷顾我。‘被导师所刺杀,非阿拉汉之属’,言非导师下之杀害。雪山积冰胎,谓冰雪覆满的山峰之胎。以奇怪之术出生,此即以神力形成之称呼。如同‘冰雪之胎’。船长16杆,谓大小相当于16根芦苇的长度。
Magganti sattayojanikaṃ maggaṃ. Paṭijaggāpetvāti sodhāpetvā, khāṇukaṇṭakādīni harāpetvā tattha bahalavipulavālukaṃ okirāpetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kammāravaṇṇanti rañño pakatisuvaṇṇakāravaṇṇaṃ. Navahatthaparikkhepanti navahatthappamāṇo parikkhepo assāti navahatthaparikkhepaṃ, parikkhepato navahatthappamāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pañcahatthubbedha’’ntiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Tihatthavikkhambhanti tihatthappamāṇavitthāraṃ. Samussitadhajapaṭākanti ussāpitanīlapītādivividhadhajapaṭākaṃ. Nānāratanavicittanti tattha tattha racitanānāratanehi suvicittaṃ. Anekālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitanti pasannajanapūjitehi hatthūpagādīhi nānālaṅkārehi sajjitaṃ. Nānāvidhakusumasamākiṇṇanti upahāravasena upanītehi nānappakārehi vaṇṇagandhasampannehi jalathalapupphehi ākiṇṇaṃ. Anekatūriyasaṅghuṭṭhanti ātabhavitatādipañcaṅgikatūriyasaṅghositaṃ. Avasesaṃ adassanaṃ agamāsīti ettha ‘‘handa, mahārāja, tayā gahetabbā ayaṃ sākhā, tassa upanissayabhūto ayaṃ khandho, na mayaṃ tayā gahetabbā’’ti vadantā viya avasesā sākhā satthu tejasā adassanamagamaṃsūti vadanti. Gavakkhajālasadisanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, jālakavāṭasadisaṃ katvāti attho. Celukkhepasatasahassāni pavattiṃsūti tesaṃ tesaṃ janānaṃ sīsopari bhamantānaṃ uttarāsaṅgacelānaṃ ukkhepasatasahassāni pavattiṃsūti attho. Mūlasatenāti dasasu lekhāsu ekekāya dasa dasa hutvā nikkhantamūlasatena. Dasa mahāmūlāti paṭhamalekhāya nikkhantadasamahāmūlāni.
路径为七由旬之路径。‘清扫’指清理路径,移除枯枝刺等杂物。传说将宽广沙地平整的作法。‘王的宝剑’意指王者所用之宝剑。‘投掷九肘’是指以九肘长远的投掷,肘为长度单位。‘五肘长’诸词亦如此,以此类比。‘三肘跨距’指三肘长之阔度。‘一排竖旗’是指悬挂着多色旌旗之物。‘各种宝石装饰’即是以多种宝石精美镶嵌。‘众多饰物'言由多种首饰美化装饰成。‘各种花朵簇拥’即是用多样花卉装饰,繁多并具香味。‘多个伞盖重叠’盖指有五个部分之重叠伞盖。‘余迹未见’即是当时未看到的遗存。比方说“看这枝条,这是靠着那树枝的,不是我拿着”。称为纱网之事,是指修行人所使用的护具。十千次舍利称为沙罗树叶上之舍利供养,而千次则是众生颅顶发之反复擦拭。十倍根基,是指十卷文书中各卷中有十个根基。十大神根,谓起始第一卷中所写的十大神根。
Devadundubhiyo phaliṃsūti devadundubhiyo thaniṃsu. Devadundubhīti ca na ettha kāci bherī adhippetā, atha kho uppātabhāvena ākāsagato nigghosasaddo. Devoti hi megho. Tassa hi acchabhāvena ākāsavaṇṇassa devassābhāvena sukkhagajjitasaññite sadde niccharante devadundubhīti samaññā, tasmā devadundubhiyo phaliṃsūti devo sukkhagajjitaṃ gajjīti vuttaṃ hoti. Pabbatānaṃ naccehīti pathavīkampena ito cito ca bhamantānaṃ pabbatānaṃ naccehi. Yakkhānaṃ hiṅkārehīti vimhayajātānaṃ yakkhānaṃ vimhayappakāsanavasena pavattehi hiṅkārasaddehi. Yakkhā hi vimhayajātā ‘‘hiṃ hi’’nti saddaṃ nicchārenti. Thutijappehīti pasaṃsāvacanehi. Brahmānaṃ apphoṭanehīti pītisomanassajātānaṃ brahmānaṃ bāhāyaṃ paharaṇasaṅkhātehi apphoṭanehi. Pītisomanassajātā hi brahmāno vāmahatthaṃ samiñjitvā dakkhiṇena hatthena bāhāyaṃ pahāraṃ denti. Ekakolāhalanti ekato pavattakolāhalaṃ . Ekaninnādanti ekato pavattanigghosaṃ. Phalato nikkhantā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo ujukaṃ uggantvā onamitvā cakkavāḷapabbatamukhavaṭṭiṃ āhacca tiṭṭhantīti āha ‘‘sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ratanagopānasīvinaddhaṃ viya kurumānā’’ti. Taṅkhaṇato ca pana pabhutīti vuttanayena suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitassa mahābodhissa chabbaṇṇarasmīnaṃ vissajjitakālato pabhuti. Himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā aṭṭhāsīti suvaṇṇakaṭāheneva saddhiṃ uggantvā himodakapuṇṇaṃ valāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā aṭṭhāsi. Paṭhamaṃ suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitoyeva hi bodhi pacchā vuttappakāraacchariyapaṭimaṇḍito hutvā himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā aṭṭhāsi. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘paṭhamaṃ suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhahi, tato himagabbhasattāhaṃ abhisekasattāhañca vītināmetvā’’tiādi. Tatoyeva ca mahāvaṃsepi vuttaṃ –
天鼓即有两位称作天鼓的。天鼓之称,并非指大鼓,而是由天响声浮现的声响。天即指乌云。因其罩着天空,天色如空色,且声音动听,故称为天鼓。以奇妙声响喻如天鼓之声。山峰震动,是指从这处到彼处,山峰随之震动摇摆。夜叉低吼,是指由生于恐怖之夜叉发出的恐怖声。夜叉吐息发出“嗡嗡”之声。推崇赞叹,是以颂扬之言。梵天拍打,如持欢喜之脏鼓,拍打于臂膀。快乐欢喜之梵天,左手持鼓,右手拍打其臂。单一混乱,即一处发出混乱声响。单一轰鸣,即一处传出雷鸣之声。由果实散落出六彩光辉,向天空飞升,环绕着方圆百里山脉。因其光辉璀璨,如守护宝石之精灵,共同缔结光辉之守卫。于金塔叶顶部时散发出彩虹色之光辉。进入雪山积雪之胎,过了八天。其于金塔顶部起立时引起庄严奇妙之光辉,进入了雪山寒冷积雪之胎八天。此处称‘初次在金塔顶部建立起奇异瑰丽光辉时,停留于雪山积雪之胎八日’。如是解释『在金塔顶部首次建立后,雪山般积雪胎初次融解八日』。同样《大纪事》亦有此传说。
‘‘Evaṃ satena mūlānaṃ, tatthesā gandhakaddame;
“如此根基既立,诸香果实齐备;
Patiṭṭhāsi mahābodhi, pasādentī mahājanaṃ.
建立了伟大菩提,令广大人民安乐。”
‘‘Tassā khandho dasahattho, pañca sākhā manoramā;
『其有树干十支,五根枝条美丽动人;』
Catuhatthā catuhatthā, dasaḍḍhaphalamaṇḍitā.
『四支枝杈分布相继,别具十种羽毛装饰之相。』
‘‘Sahassantu pasākhānaṃ, sākhānaṃ tāsamāsi ca;
『千数枝干分布整齐,这些枝干俱各均等;』
Evaṃ āsi mahābodhi, manoharasirindharā.
『如是构成大觉树,端庄艳丽如尊王冠。』
‘‘Kaṭāhamhi mahābodhi, patiṭṭhitakkhaṇe mahī;
『于大觉树之根基,当地土地稳固时;』
Akampi pāṭihīrāni, ahesuṃ vividhāni ca.
『坚实如铁柱众多,且现种种不同状貌。』
‘‘Sayaṃ nādehi tūriyānaṃ, devesu mānusesu ca;
『自身声音』者,为第四中音,在诸天、人间中皆有此声;
Sādhukāraninnādehi, devabrahmagaṇassa ca.
以清净庄严之声,响于诸天众及梵天群中;
‘‘Meghānaṃ migapakkhīnaṃ, yakkhādīnaṃ ravehi ca;
如云、如兽翼鸟、如天魔等,以及如雷声震响,
Ravehi ca mahīkampe, ekakolāhalaṃ ahu.
雷声震响震动大地,生起独一无二之喧嚣;
‘‘Bodhiyā phalapattehi, chabbaṇṇaraṃsiyo subhā;
如菩提树之果实成熟,其颜色六分艳丽光明,
Nikkhamitvā cakkavāḷaṃ, sakalaṃ sobhayiṃsu ca.
果实脱落,普照周围,令一切庄严光辉。
‘‘Sakaṭāhā mahābodhi, uggantvāna tato nabhaṃ;
「结夏安居后起身,飞入云天;
Aṭṭhāsi himagabbhamhi, sattāhāni adassanā’’ti.
于冰雪胎中安住八周不显现。」
Tasmā suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitoyeva bodhi kaṭāheneva saddhi uggantvā himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā aṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ.
因此,于黄金结夏安居期满之时,应知佛陀与结夏期同时起身,飞入积冰雪胎,安住八周。
Heṭṭhā pana bhagavato adhiṭṭhānakkamaṃ dassentena yaṃ vuttaṃ –
以下是世尊亲自示现加持的决定事实,如所说:
‘‘Bhagavā kira mahāparinibbānamañce nipanno laṅkādīpe mahābodhipatiṭṭhāpanatthāya asokamahārājā mahābodhiggahaṇatthaṃ gamissati, tadā mahābodhissa dakkhiṇasākhā sayameva chijjitvā suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhātūti adhiṭṭhāsi, idamekamadhiṭṭhānaṃ.
「世尊于大般涅槃时,将安住兰卡岛,为建大觉塔。阿育王为供养大觉塔而前往时,那时将自断大觉塔南枝,安置于黄金结夏地,这是第一个决定。
‘‘Tattha patiṭṭhānakāle ca ‘mahābodhi himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā tiṭṭhatū’ti adhiṭṭhāsi, idaṃ dutiyamadhiṭṭhānaṃ.
又于安置时,曾立誓曰:‘大觉塔已入冰雪胎中安住’,这是第二个决定。」
‘‘Sattame divase himavalāhakagabbhato oruyha suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhahanto pattehi ca phalehi ca chabbaṇṇarasmiyo muñcatūti adhiṭṭhāsi, idaṃ tatiyamadhiṭṭhāna’’nti.
『在第七日,从喜马拉雅雪山顶上下来,立于金峰之巅,放开了六色光辉的叶子和果实,这便是第三个立誓』如是说。
Taṃ iminā na sameti. Tattha hi paṭhamaṃ himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā pacchā sattame divase himavalāhakagabbhato oruyha chabbaṇṇaraṃsivissajjanaṃ suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhahanañca vuttaṃ, tasmā aṭṭhakathāya pubbenāparaṃ na sameti. Mahāvaṃse pana adhiṭṭhānepi paṭhamaṃ suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhahanaṃ pacchāyeva chabbaṇṇaraṃsivissajjanaṃ himavalāhakagabbhapavisanañca. Vuttañhetaṃ –
这一处不应理解为相同。因为最初是进入喜马拉雅雪山顶,随后在第七日从雪山顶上下来,放出六色光辉,并被说立于金峰,故此注疏不将前后混为一体。但《大史》中则在誓愿处先说立于金峰,紧接着放出六色光辉,继而进入喜马拉雅雪山顶。此处说法是——
‘‘Parinibbānamañcamhi, nipannena jinena hi;
『灭度之处,是由已故的胜者临命。』
Kataṃ mahāadhiṭṭhānaṃ, pañcakaṃ pañcacakkhunā.
『何等为伟大誓愿?为五重五明眼。』
‘‘Gayhamānā mahābodhi-sākhāsokena dakkhiṇā;
『当树立大菩提之枝时,苦痛自南面侵袭;』
Chijjitvāna sayaṃyeva, patiṭṭhātu kaṭāhake.
『斩断之后,独自立于峰顶。』
‘‘Patiṭṭhahitvā sā sākhā, chabbaṇṇarasmiyo subhā;
『安立着这一枝干,光彩绚丽,色彩斑斓;
Rājayantī disā sabbā, phalapattehi muñcatu.
周围诸方显现昌盛,果实丰饶应当放出。』
‘‘Sasuvaṇṇakaṭāhā sā, uggantvāna manoramā;
『这枝干犹如金洁瑰丽,拔起而立甚为妙观;
Adissamānā sattāhaṃ, himagabbhamhi tiṭṭhatū’’ti.
诸神观望,似立于极寒积雪之中。』
Bodhivaṃsepi ca ayameva adhiṭṭhānakkamo vutto, tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto adhiṭṭhānakkamo yathā pubbenāparaṃ na virujjhati, tathā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbo.
于觉传中亦言及此坚立之枝节,故此注疏中所说坚立之枝节与前后文本相连续不间断,然当细审加以采纳。
Himañca chabbaṇṇaraṃsiyo ca āvattitvā mahābodhimeva pavisiṃsūti mahābodhiṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ himañca bodhito nikkhantachabbaṇṇarasmiyo ca āvattitvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā bodhimeva pavisiṃsu, bodhipaviṭṭhā viya hutvā antarahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha pana ‘‘himañca raṃsiyo cā’’ti ayameva pāṭho satasodhitasammate porāṇapotthake sesesu ca sabbapotthakesu dissati. Mahāvaṃsepi cetaṃ vuttaṃ –
极寒及斑斓光彩环绕,遂入大觉处。遮掩大觉之处而立,极寒坚立着,众神环绕绕行入大觉处,如觉树覆蔽一般,内外无间,故言。此处『及极寒光彩』之句,为百部承认古本中所存,诸古本及全部本中皆可见。大觉传中亦如此记载——
‘‘Atīte tamhi sattāhe, sabbe himavalāhakā;
‘‘在过去的那七年中,所有的雪山之神,都进入了大菩提树,所有的光芒也随之到来’’。
Pavisiṃsu mahābodhiṃ, sabbā tā raṃsiyopi cā’’ti.
‘‘他们都进入了大菩提树,所有那些光芒也都来临了’’。
Kenaci pana ‘‘pañca raṃsiyo’’ti pāṭhaṃ parikappetvā yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbadisāhi pañca rasmiyo āvattitvāti pañcahi phalehi nikkhantattā pañca, tā pana chabbaṇṇāvā’’ti, taṃ tassa sammohavijambhitamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paripuṇṇakhandhasākhāpasākhapañcaphalapaṭimaṇḍitoti paripuṇṇakhandhasākhāpasākhāhi ceva pañcahi ca phalehi paṭimaṇḍito, samantato vibhūsitoti attho. Abhisekaṃ datvāti anotattodakena abhisekaṃ datvā. Mahābodhiṭṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsīti bodhisamīpeyeva vasi.
但有一种经文读法中说“『五光辉』”,这里所说『遍及诸方皆现五光辉』,又因五果刚刚现出而称五,是指这五种果实,但此处是六色的,所谓“六色”之义,不可混淆,应视为误。如注中所述,所谓“充满树干及枝桠,围绕以五种果实”,即树干与枝条都覆满,围绕着五种果实,四面皆繁茂光彩。此处“赐下加持”是指用净水灌顶加持。在大菩提树所在之处,住舍安稳。
Pubbakattikapavāraṇādivaseti assayujamāsassa juṇhapakkhapuṇṇamiyaṃ. Cātuddasīuposathattā dvisattāhe jāte uposatho sampattoti āha ‘‘kāḷapakkhassa uposathadivase’’ti, assayujamāsakāḷapakkhassa cātuddasīuposatheti attho. Pācīnamahāsālamūle ṭhapesīti nagarassa pācīnadisābhāge jātassa mahāsālarukkhassa heṭṭhā maṇḍapaṃ kāretvā tattha ṭhapesi. Sattarasame divaseti pāṭipadadivasato dutiyadivase. Kattikachaṇapūjaṃ addasāti kattikachaṇavasena bodhissa kariyamānaṃ pūjaṃ sumanasāmaṇero addasa, disvā ca āgato sabbaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Taṃ sandhāyeva ca thero bodhiāharaṇatthaṃ pesesi.
前期的开示等,是指约定的一个月满日,这是雨季半月的圆满日。十四日的守八关斋戒日若出现两次,即称为“黑月的守八斋戒日”,即雨季半月的十四日守八日的意思。树根南侧村中,筑有一大槐树下的宝阁安置在那里。是第十七天,意指修行日的第二天。“见到咖提那供养”,意即见到咖提那供养大菩提的敬礼,光明小沙门见到了,就前来汇报一切进展。为此,长老便派遣使者去请柬取菩提叶。
Aṭṭhārasa devatākulānīti mahābodhiṃ parivāretvā ṭhitanāgayakkhādidevatākulāni datvāti sambandho. Amaccakulāni bodhissa kattabbavicāraṇatthāya adāsi, brāhmaṇakulāni lokasammatattā udakāsiñcanatthāya adāsi, kuṭumbiyakulāni bodhissa kattabbapūjopakaraṇagopanatthāya adāsi. ‘‘Gopakā rājakammino tathā taracchā’’ti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘gopakakulāni bodhisiñcanatthaṃ khīradhenupālanatthāya taracchakulāni kāliṅgakulāni vissāsikāni padhānamanussakulānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāliṅgakulānīti ettha ‘‘udakādigāhakā kāliṅgā’’ti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kaliṅgesu janapade jātisampannakulaṃ kāliṅgakula’’nti keci. Iminā parivārenāti sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, iminā vuttappakāraparivārena saddhinti attho. Viñjhāṭaviṃ samatikkammāti rājā sayampi mahābodhissa paccuggamanaṃ karonto senaṅgaparivuto thalapathena gacchanto viñjhāṭaviṃ nāma aṭaviṃ atikkamitvā. Tāmalittiṃ anuppattoti tāmalittiṃ nāma titthaṃ sampatto. Idamassa tatiyanti suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitamahābodhissa rajjasampadānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tato pubbe panesa ekavāraṃ saddhāya sakalajambudīparajjena mahābodhiṃ pūjesiyeva, tasmā tena saddhiṃ catutthamidaṃ rajjasampadānaṃ. Mahābodhiṃ pana yasmiṃ yasmiṃ divase rajjena pūjesi, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ divase sakalajambudīparajjato uppannaṃ āyaṃ gahetvā mahābodhipūjaṃ kāresi.
十八群神众,是指大菩提树周围环绕的各类神祇与夜叉等群众。儿童群是赐付给菩提树穿衣用的;婆罗门群是为世界所公认的洒水仪式施行者;家族群是守护供养及装饰工作的施主。经中言“守护者属皇王职分,如同铁锁”,又说“守护者家族为洒水及奶牛牧养,铁锁家族为守护信徒所需”,铁锁即指加兰提群。在此所谓“铁锁人”,即世间称为“铁锁的家族”,有人言这是迦陵国出产富贵之家。大菩提树旁的林木丛林称为破林,国王也曾前来,大军护卫,开路越过破林。塔玛利蒂水为此处圣池水。此为第三个黄金时代定居于大菩提树处的国家繁盛之由来。此前其他国家曾用信仰全释迦土地敬礼大菩提树,因此这是第四个国家繁荣之因。国王于任何一天供养大菩提树时,都会从全释迦土地产生敬仰心,从而举行大菩提树的供养仪式。
Māgasiramāsassāti migasiramāsassa. Paṭhamapāṭipadadivaseti sukkapakkhapāṭipadadivase. Tañhi kaṇhapakkhapāṭipadadivasaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘paṭhamapāṭipadadivasa’’nti vuccati. Idañca imasmiṃ dīpe pavattamānavohāraṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Tattha pana puṇṇamito paṭṭhāya yāva aparā puṇṇamī, tāva eko māsoti vohārassa pavattattā tena vohārena ‘‘dutiyapāṭipadadivase’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Tattha hi kaṇhapakkhapāṭipadadivasaṃ ‘‘paṭhamapāṭipada’’nti vuccati. Ukkhipitvāti mahāsālamūle dinnehi soḷasahi jātisampannakulehi saddhiṃ ukkhipitvāti vadanti. Gacchati vatareti ettha areti khede. Tenevāha ‘‘kanditvā’’ti, bodhiyā adassanaṃ asahamāno roditvā paridevitvāti attho. Sarasaraṃsijālanti ettha pana heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Mahābodhisamāruḷhāti mahābodhinā samāruḷhā. Passato passatoti anādare sāmivacanaṃ, passantassevāti attho . Mahāsamuddatalaṃ pakkhantāti mahāsamuddassa udakatalaṃ pakkhandi. Samantā yojananti samantato ekekena passena yojanappamāṇe padese. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Vīciyo vūpasantāti vīciyo na uṭṭhahiṃsu, nāhesunti vuttaṃ hoti. Pavajjiṃsūti viraviṃsu, nādaṃ pavattayiṃsūti attho. Rukkhādisannissitāhīti ettha ādi-saddena pabbatādisannissitā devatā saṅgaṇhāti.
说‘‘犹如黑月之中’’,即指黑月半月。所谓初修道日,是指明月半月的修道日。借助此月黑半月修行日,称为“初修道日”。以上记载取自本岛当前的传说。满月之后至下一个满月这段期间,就称为一个月,当得到上述传说的根据后,这期间的次月修道日,亦可称为“次修道日”。“初修道日”为黑月半修道日。关于“安置”,是指安排在大槐树下,由十六个世代相传的家族共同参加。“前去”和“前往”二词,这里意指来到达之意。这里有“哭泣”的说法,是因见到菩提叶而感到难过且悲叹的意思。‘‘遍布荆棘’’是指下文所述的含义。大菩提树被称为“大菩提树”,意为大菩提下的树木。看见即为看见,是表示尊敬的说法,意谓只要看到即是看见。所谓大海底岸边,指大海之水面的海岸边。左右各一由十由旬地界,各地皆有连结。 ‘‘接连不断’’是用以表达严格衔接之意。‘‘静止不动’’意思是指没有移动,没有偏去,或者保持不动的状态。 ‘‘关闭声响’’是指关闭声音,没有发出声音的意思。 ‘‘树木等依附者’’乃指山及树木等所依附的诸神众聚集于此。
Supaṇṇarūpenāti supaṇṇasadisena rūpena. Nāgakulāni santāsesīti mahābodhiggahaṇatthaṃ āgatāni nāgakulāni santāsesi, tesaṃ bhayaṃ uppādetvā palāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tadā hi samuddavāsino nāgā mahābodhiṃ gahetuṃ vātavassandhakārādīhi mahantaṃ vikubbanaṃ akaṃsu. Tato saṅghamittattherī garuḷavaṇṇaṃ māpetvā tena garuḷarūpena ākāsaṃ pūrayamānā sikhāmarīcijālena gaganaṃ ekandhakāraṃ katvā pakkhappahāravātena mahāsamuddaṃ āloḷetvā saṃvaṭṭajaladhinādasadisena ravena nāgānaṃ hadayāni bhindantī viya tāsetvā nāge palāpesi. Te ca utrastarūpā nāgā āgantvāti te ca vuttanayena uttāsitā nāgā puna āgantvā. Taṃ vibhūtinti taṃ iddhipāṭihāriyasaṅkhātaṃ vibhūtiṃ, taṃ acchariyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Therī yācitvāti ‘‘ayye, amhākaṃ bhagavā mucalindanāgarājassa bhogāvaliṃ attano gandhakuṭiṃ katvā sattāhaṃ tassa saṅgahaṃ akāsi. Abhisambujjhanadivase nerañjarānadītīre attano ucchiṭṭhapattaṃ mahākāḷanāgassa vissajjesi. Uruvelanāgena māpitaṃ visadhūmadahanaṃ agaṇetvā tassa saraṇasīlābharaṇamadāsi. Mahāmoggallānattheraṃ pesetvā nandopanandanāgarājānaṃ dametvā nibbisaṃ akāsi. Evaṃ so lokanāyako amhākaṃ upakārako, tvampi no dosamassaritvā muhuttaṃ mahābodhiṃ vissajjetvā nāgalokassa saggamokkhamaggaṃ sampādehī’’ti evaṃ yācitvā. Mahābodhiviyogadukkhitoti mahābodhiviyogena dukkhito sañjātamānasikadukkho. Kanditvāti imassa pariyāyavacanamattaṃ roditvāti, guṇakittanavasena vā punappunaṃ roditvā, vilāpaṃ katvāti attho.
「Supaṇṇarūpenāti」谓以飞鸟形象相似之形。因大觉之缘,龙族来集而招之,使之害怕而逃逸,此为所说。彼时,居海中的龙因为风雨及风暴等,致使大觉树严重受损。于是,长老僧侣持尊严之鸟形,翱翔天际,布撒火光犹如星火网,令天空一片昏暗。风以翼振激起大海波涛,响声如龙吼,震碎龙心,因而驱散龙类。其后,那些具有云彩形状的龙再度来袭,如是反覆。此「vibhūti」即所谓神通威能之称,令人惊异,故称为奇迹。长老恳求说:「尊者,我们的世尊为斩断魔王王那拉那的威胁,建造了七日佛塔安置之处,并于出城时将自己脱下的衣物献给那大黑龙。大黑龙受乌鲁维拉龙赠清净烟供,继而给与庇护和衣物。且派遣大摩诃迦罗长老驯服了南多波难龙君,令其归顺。如此,世尊为我们护持者,我们当效法不怀恶念,稍后允许大觉树得安静,使龙界得以升天解脱。」如是长老恳求。因是离别大觉树而忧伤者,便因离别大觉树而生苦,悲哭不止。此悲哭只是言替,意为不断以悲泣表示哀伤,遂生啼哭之义。
Uttaradvāratoti anurādhapurassa uttaradvārato. Maggaṃ sodhāpetvāti khāṇukaṇṭakādīnaṃ uddharāpanavasena maggaṃ sodhāpetvā. Alaṅkārāpetvāti vālukādīnaṃ okirāpanādivasena sajjetvā. Samuddasālavatthusminti samuddāsannasālāya vatthubhūte padese. Tasmiṃ kira padese ṭhitehi samuddassa diṭṭhattā taṃ acchariyaṃ pakāsetuṃ tattha ekā sālā katā. Sā nāmena ‘‘samuddāsannasālā’’ti pākaṭā jātā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
「Uttaradvāratoti」即指自阿奴拉德普尔城北门。谓以拔除刺茅草等过程,清净道路为「vīthi」之意。谓用以搭设沙土等饰物,整饰道路之法。所谓「samuddasālavatthu」乃指海边之竹材和木材,建于海滨之处。彼处设有一堂舍,称为「临海堂舍」,此因目睹海境景象而得名。所言乃该堂舍建成后之显著异事。故堂舍以「临海堂舍」之名而著称。本处作如是说。
‘‘Samuddāsannasālāya, ṭhāne ṭhatvā mahaṇṇave;
『临海堂舍,立于广阔旷野之所,』
Āgacchantaṃ mahābodhiṃ, mahātheriddhiyāddasa.
『来世尊降临,圣者之威显现,』
‘‘Tasmiṃ ṭhāne katā sālā, pakāsetuṃ tamabbhutaṃ;
『于彼所建堂舍,显露殊奇之迹,』
‘Samuddāsannasālā’ti, nāmenāsidha pākaṭā’’ti.
『名曰‘临海堂舍’,此名广为流传显著。』
Tāya vibhūtiyāti tāya vuttappakārāya pūjāsakkārādisampattiyā. Therassāti mahāmahindattherassa. Maggassa kira ubhosu passesu antarantarā pupphehi kūṭāgārasadisasaṇṭhānāni pupphacetiyāni kārāpesi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘antarantare pupphaagghiyāni ṭhapento’’ti. Āgato vatareti ettha areti pasaṃsāyaṃ, sādhu vatāti attho. Soḷasahi jātisampannakulehīti aṭṭhahi amaccakulehi aṭṭhahi ca brāhmaṇakulehīti evaṃ soḷasahi jātisampannakulehi. Samuddatīre mahābodhiṃ ṭhapetvāti samuddavelātale alaṅkatappaṭiyatte ramaṇīye maṇḍape mahābodhiṃ ṭhapetvā. Evaṃ pana katvā sakalatambapaṇṇirajjena mahābodhiṃ pūjetvā soḷasannaṃ kulānaṃ rajjaṃ niyyātetvā sayaṃ dovārikaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā tayo divase anekappakāraṃ pūjaṃ kārāpesi. Taṃ dassento ‘‘tīṇi divasānī’’tiādimāha. Rajjaṃ vicāresīti rajjaṃ vicāretuṃ vissajjesi, soḷasahi vā jātisampannakulehi rajjaṃ vicārāpesīti attho. Catutthe divaseti migasiramāsassa sukkapakkhadasamiyaṃ. Anupubbena anurādhapuraṃ sampattoti dasamiyaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattarathe mahābodhiṃ ṭhapetvā uḷārapūjaṃ kurumāno pācīnapassavihārassa patiṭṭhātabbaṭṭhānamānetvā tattha saṅghassa pātarāsaṃ pavattetvā mahindattherena bhāsitaṃ nāgadīpe dasabalena kataṃ nāgadamanaṃ sutvā ‘‘sammāsambuddhena nisajjādinā paribhuttaṭṭhānesu thūpādīhi sakkāraṃ karissāmī’’ti saññāṇaṃ kāretvā tato āharitvā tavakkabrāhmaṇassa gāmadvāre ṭhapetvā pūjetvā evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne pūjaṃ katvā iminā anukkamena anurādhapuraṃ sampatto. Cātuddasīdivaseti migasiramāsasseva sukkapakkhacātuddase. Vaḍḍhamānakacchāyāyāti chāyāya vaḍḍhamānasamaye, sāyanhasamayeti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāpattinti phalasamāpattiṃ. Tilakabhūteti alaṅkārabhūte. Rājavatthudvārakoṭṭhakaṭṭhāneti rājuyyānassa dvārakoṭṭhakaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Sakalarajjaṃ mahābodhissa dinnapubbattā upacāratthaṃ rājā dovārikavesaṃ gaṇhī’’ti vadanti.
“那种殊胜”者,是指依其所言的礼敬、恭敬等功德。『长老』者,谓大摩诃室利长老。关于道路之间,在两侧分别树立了花棚、屋舍等处所,安置了花塔。对此,有典故云:“在道路之间安置花灯。”此处所来意谓对此恭敬赞叹,称“善哉”。所谓十六族世家,即分为八贵族世家与八婆罗门世家,如此共计十六族世家。于海岸之滨,为装饰会场而安置大菩提树。如此用整个坦巴布尼花树冠装饰菩提树,朝贡十六诸族诸王朝奉,自己站于宫门处,于三日内进行了形式各异的礼敬。示现时云:“三昼夜”等言。所谓“朝贡诸王”,意谓十六族世家各有一王统治,共同参与管理。在第四日,即孟加拉月的十日,安置大菩提树于安娜若陀城,继而举行烛光礼拜,尊奉西方园林定址场地,建立僧团饮食处,听闻摩诃室利长老宣说。至于龙岛上,由阿难以龙王降伏法降伏龙王后,发心曰:“我们当以如来尊者早期所安置而被毁坏之处,尊重设置佛塔。”遂取回置于他洒婆罗门村口供奉,依次于各处礼拜,因之逐步到达安娜若陀城。至十六日,与孟加拉月十六日同日。所谓“长夏时分”,即太阳无际之时,也谓黄昏时。所谓“应得圣果者”,即得果成就者。所谓“装饰的”,即具备装饰性质。所谓“王宫门廊木构”,即王宫门之木构建筑。人们说:“诸王朝奉大菩提树,成为朝贡前,由王接受门廊装饰衣”。
Anupubbavipassananti udayabbayādianupubbavipassanaṃ. Paṭṭhapetvāti ārabhitvā. Atthaṅgamiteti atthaṅgate. ‘‘Saha bodhipatiṭṭhānenā’’ti vattabbe vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā ‘‘saha bodhipatiṭṭhānā’’ti nissakkavacanaṃ kataṃ. Sati hi sahayoge karaṇavacanena bhavitabbaṃ. Mahāpathavī akampīti ca idaṃ mukhamattanidassanaṃ, aññānipi anekāni acchariyāni ahesuṃyeva. Tathā hi saha bodhipatiṭṭhānena udakapariyantaṃ katvā mahāpathavī akampi, tāni mūlāni kaṭāhamukhavaṭṭito uggantvā taṃ kaṭāhaṃ vinandhantā pathavītalamotariṃsu, samantato dibbakusumāni vassiṃsu, ākāse dibbatūriyāni vajjiṃsu, mahāmegho uṭṭhahitvā vuṭṭhidhāramakāsi, ākāsapadesā viraviṃsu, vijjulatā nicchariṃsu. Devatā sādhukāramadaṃsu, samāgatā sakaladīpavāsino gandhamālādīhi pūjayiṃsu, gahitamakarandā mandamārutā vāyiṃsu, samantato ghanasītalahimavalāhakā mahābodhiṃ chādayiṃsu. Evaṃ bodhi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā himagabbhe sannisīditvā sattāhaṃ lokassa adassanaṃ agamāsi. Himagabbhe sannisīdīti himagabbhassa anto aṭṭhāsi. Vipphurantāti vipphurantā ito cito ca saṃsarantā. Nicchariṃsūti nikkhamiṃsu. Dassiṃsūti paññāyiṃsu. Sabbe dīpavāsinoti sabbe tambapaṇṇidīpavāsino. Uttarasākhato ekaṃ phalanti uttarasākhāya ṭhitaṃ ekaṃ phalaṃ. ‘‘Pācīnasākhāya ekaṃ phala’’ntipi keci. Mahāāsanaṭṭhāneti pubbapasse mahāsilāsanena patiṭṭhitaṭṭhāne. Issaranimmānavihāreti issaranimmānasaṅkhāte kassapagirivihāre. ‘‘Issaranimmānavihāre’’ti hi pubbasaṅketavasena vuttaṃ, idāni pana so vihāro ‘‘kassapagirī’’ti paññāto. ‘‘Issarasamaṇārāme’’tipi keci paṭhanti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
所谓“渐次内观”,即对生灭等事的渐次内视观照。所谓“立起”,即开始实施。《注疏》所说“与菩提所同行”,意对已有差别的改变,又说“与菩提所同行”乃无所依附之词。因依止而起,应使用动补语。所谓“大地稳固”,为仅此现象而说;其余诸种奇异现象亦随之而生。正如陪同菩提所行,以围水之形状包覆大地,令大地稳固,水中树根环绕扬起、托地,满布天上漂浮的花朵,诸天飞翔,云层高起,显现雷声,天象鸿盛。天众感悦此事,会聚诸岛,施礼献香花与果,采集蜜汁与微风滋润,四方凉爽雨水护罩大菩提树。如此在菩提树立地,常年坐禅七日,世间得未曾见之祥瑞。所谓七日,即在雪山洞内。所谓“凡流转者”,指流转生死之众。所谓“漏尽者”,谓已断绝烦恼者。所谓“诸岛住者”,即满布整个坦巴布尼岛诸天。北树有一果实,东树亦有一果实。所谓“大座所立”,谓先前所见大石座处已立。所谓“伊沙罗尼玛那佛寺”,即因佛名伊沙罗尼玛那而称的咖萨巴山寺。一说因先前所立称为“伊沙那寺”,今则称作“咖萨巴山寺”。亦有人朗诵称“伊沙罗沙摩那精舍”。亦有记载曰—
‘‘Tavakkabrāhmaṇagāme , thūpārāme tatheva ca;
“他洒婆罗门村,佛塔精舍亦同;
Issarasamaṇārāme, paṭhame cetiyaṅgaṇe’’ti.
伊沙罗沙摩那精舍,最初为佛塔所在。”
Yojaniyaārāmesūti anurādhapurassa samantā yojanassa anto kataārāmesu. Samantā patiṭṭhite mahābodhimhīti sambandho. Anurādhapurassa samantā evaṃ puttanattuparamparāya mahābodhimhi patiṭṭhiteti attho. Lohapāsādaṭṭhānaṃ pūjesīti lohapāsādassa kattabbaṭṭhānaṃ pūjesi. ‘‘Kiñcāpi lohapāsādaṃ devānaṃpiyatissoyeva mahārājā kāressati, tathāpi tasmiṃ samaye abhāvato ‘anāgate’ti vutta’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘duṭṭhagāmaṇiabhayeneva kārito lohapāsādo’’ti vadanti. Mūlāni panassa na tāva otarantīti iminā, mahārāja, imasmiṃ dīpe satthusāsanaṃ patiṭṭhitamattameva ahosi, na tāva supatiṭṭhitanti dasseti, assa satthusāsanassa mūlāni pana na tāva otiṇṇānīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Otarantīti hi atītatthe vattamānavacanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘kadā pana bhante mūlāni otiṇṇāni nāma bhavissantī’’ti. Yo amacco catupaṇṇāsāya jeṭṭhakakaniṭṭhabhātukehi saddhiṃ cetiyagirimhi pabbajito, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mahāariṭṭho bhikkhū’’ti. Meghavaṇṇābhayassa amaccassa pariveṇaṭṭhāneti meghavaṇṇābhayassa rañño amaccena kattabbassa pariveṇassa vatthubhūte ṭhāne. Maṇḍapappakāranti maṇḍapasadisaṃ. Sadisatthampi hi pakārasaddaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Sāsanassa mūlāni otarantāni passissāmīti iminā sāsanassa suṭṭhu patiṭṭhānākāraṃ passissāmīti dīpeti.
所谓“度量村庵”,指安娜若陀城境内至城外一由旬范围内所建村庵。环绕全城,即谓依族谱世代皆在菩提树立处立有祖先墓碑。所谓“铜塔庙宇奉祀”,谓对铜塔所在之处供养事。人言“铜塔乃天众所贵爱,犹如君主所兴建。但彼时因无未来故称‘未至’。”三次曰。有人说“盖因恶人犯境所致建铜塔。”但根本仍未越过,此处指陛下尊重佛法而置,非谓已稳固。应以此理解。所谓“不越”,指过去时与现在时之词。故有言“何时陛下根基将跨越?”言者问曰。对于四十五年老中年同在塔峰山中出家的者,乃言“众和尚甚多”。所谓“云宫护林者营地”,谓云宫护林由王城护林者所建立之处。所谓“亭台附属”,谓附属亭台。声响亦可见。谓可见引起声响。若根基跨越,则可见佛法根基稳固场面。以上理当显现佛法良好根基之意。
Meghavirahitassa nimmalasseva ākāsassa viravitattā ‘‘ākāsaṃ mahāviravaṃ ravī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paccekagaṇīhīti visuṃ visuṃ gaṇācariyehi. Paccekaṃ gaṇaṃ etesaṃ atthīti paccekagaṇino. Yathā vejjo gilānesu karuṇāya tikicchanameva purakkhatvā vigatacchandadoso jigucchanīyesu vaṇesu guyhaṭṭhānesu ca bhesajjalepanādinā tikicchanameva karoti, evaṃ bhagavāpi kilesabyādhipīḷitesu sattesu karuṇāya te satte kilesabyādhidukkhato mocetukāmo avattabbārahāni guyhaṭṭhānanissitānipi asappāyāni vadanto vinayapaññattiyā sattānaṃ kilesabyādhiṃ tikicchati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthu karuṇāguṇaparidīpaka’’nti. Anusiṭṭhikarānanti anusāsanīkarānaṃ, ye bhagavato anusāsaniṃ sammā paṭipajjanti, tesanti attho. Kāyakammavacīkammavipphanditavinayananti kāyavacīdvāresu ajjhācāravasena pavattassa kilesavipphanditassa vinayanakaraṃ.
“谓无云且清洁澄明之天空故称‘天空鸿净’。”所谓“独觉众”,即各部众长所领奉各自群部者。正如医师以慈心治疗病苦,除病无欲无恨,爱怜现于闺阁偏僻处,以药膏治疗疾病,佛亦以慈心救度烦恼病苦众生,欲令恶趣众生脱离苦难,降伏流转,犹如行医。故云‘师者慈悲德灯’。所谓“据行者”,谓遵行佛陀正法者。所谓“身语行被染乱律者”,谓身语之恶行于律法中出未净之例也。
Rājinoti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, rājānamanusāsiṃsūti attho. Ālokanti ñāṇālokaṃ. Nibbāyiṃsu mahesayoti ettha mahāmahindatthero dvādasavassiko hutvā tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ sampatto, tattha dve vassāni vasitvā vinayaṃ patiṭṭhapesi. Dvāsaṭṭhivassiko hutvā parinibbutoti vadanti.
『王称』者,为了利益,称呼为『王』,其义为顺从国王。『光明』者,为智慧之光。『涅槃』者,此处指大长老摩诃摩兴达尊者,年满十二载,抵达坦婆盘尼岛,于彼居住二年后,建立了律藏。传说其寿至六十二岁,故称『涅槃』。
Tesaṃtherānaṃ antevāsikāti tesaṃ mahāmahindattherappamukhānaṃ therānaṃ antevāsikā. Tissadattādayo pana mahāariṭṭhattherassa antevāsikā, tasmā tissadattakāḷasumanadīghasumanādayo mahāariṭṭhattherassa antevāsikā cāti yojetabbaṃ. Antevāsikānaṃ antevāsikāti ubhayathā vuttaantevāsikānaṃ antevāsikā. Pubbe vuttappakārāti –
『诸长老之末住者』者,指摩诃摩兴达尊者诸长老中的首领们的末住者。提莎达多等则是摩兴达尊者的『末住者』,因此应将提莎达多、迦洛苏摩那及迪迦苏摩那诸人统称为摩兴达尊者的末住者。『末住者』意即『双重言说之末住者』。前文所述为——
‘‘Tato mahindo iṭṭiyo, uttiyo sambalo tathā;
『于此,摩兴达为兄弟,乌提约为师傅,桑巴罗亦然;』
Bhaddanāmo ca paṇḍito.
『亦有贤哲名曰佛达那摩。』
‘‘Ete nāgā mahāpaññā, jambudīpā idhāgatā;
『此等乃龙族及大智者,已至此占婆岛;』
Vinayaṃ te vācayiṃsu, piṭakaṃ tambapaṇṇiyā.
『彼等宣说律藏,而此律藏乃坦婆盘尼所藏之藏。』
‘‘Nikāye pañca vācesuṃ, satta ceva pakaraṇe;
「部中分为五种语类,以及七种部类;
Tato ariṭṭho medhāvī, tissadatto ca paṇḍito.
随后出现了阿里多、妙慧和笃智三人。
‘‘Visārado kāḷasumano, thero ca dīghanāmako’’ti. –
还有通达时运长老,名曰长念。」——
Evamādinā pubbe vuttappakārā ācariyaparamparā.
由此以来,如前所述的教法传承,即诸师承。
Ācariyaparamparakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 师承次第说之解释已毕。
Vinayānisaṃsakathāvaṇṇanā律之功德说之解释
Ettāvatā ca ‘‘kenābhata’’nti imaṃ pañhaṃ vitthārato vibhajitvā idāni ‘‘kattha patiṭṭhita’’nti imaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjento āha ‘‘kattha patiṭṭhita’’ntiādi. Tattha telamivāti sīhatelamiva. Adhimattasatigatidhītimantesūti ettha satīti buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā dhāraṇakasati. Gatīti uggaṇhanakagati. Dhītīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā gaṇhanakañāṇaṃ. Gatīti vā paññāgati. Dhītīti buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhanavīriyaṃ sajjhāyanavīriyaṃ dhāraṇavīriyañca. Lajjīsūti pāpajigucchanakalakkhaṇāya lajjāya samannāgatesu. Kukkuccakesūti aṇumattesupi vajjesu dosadassāvitāya kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya kukkuccakārīsu. Sikkhākāmesūti adhisīlaaacittaadhipaññāvasena tisso sikkhā kāmayamānesu sampiyāyitvā sikkhantesu.
至此,「何因所致」——此问被详细展开分解;今又舍弃此问而说「何处建立」等。此处如油,如猛虎油。所谓极重念智见解等,即是「念」者,举佛言加持之念忆。所谓「见」者,抉择观照之行进。所谓「智」者,作现起及了知之智慧。所谓「念」亦是智的渐进。所谓「智」是承持佛言之精进、诵念与坚持的精进。所谓「羞」是指具有恶钩缠绕性质的羞恼者。所谓「恼」是指极微小过错者受恶见与该受与非法之间的怀疑。所谓「学欲」是指以品行、意心与智慧三学相互和睦而努力学习者。
Akattabbato nivāretvā kattabbesu patiṭṭhāpanato mātāpituṭṭhāniyoti vuttaṃ. Ācāragocarakusalatāti veḷudānādimicchājīvassa kāyapāgabbhiyādīnañca akaraṇena sabbaso anācāraṃ vajjetvā ‘‘kāyiko avītikkamo vācasiko avītikkamo’’ti (vibha. 511) evaṃ vuttabhikkhusāruppaācārasampattiyā vesiyādiagocaraṃ vajjetvā piṇḍapātādiatthaṃ upasaṅkamituṃ yuttaṭṭhānasaṅkhātagocarena ca sampannattā samaṇācāresu ceva samaṇagocaresu ca kusalatā. Apica yo bhikkhu satthari sagāravo sappatisso sabrahmacārīsu sagāravo sappatisso hirottappasampanno sunivattho supāruto pāsādikena abhikkantena paṭikkantena ālokitena vilokitena samiñjitena pasāritena okkhittacakkhu iriyāpathasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyamanuyutto satisampajaññena samannāgato appiccho santuṭṭho āraddhavīriyo pavivitto asaṃsaṭṭho ābhisamācārikesu sakkaccakārī garucittīkārabahulo viharati, ayaṃ vuccati ācāro.
不可作而制止之者,所当作而确立者,谓父母敬重等已说。行所应持之道者者,是指舍弃诸如欲布施等邪业身行,断绝恶业起意等,全面断除恶习,谓「身不犯戒,语不犯戒」等(律别511)。如是说如比库外护之规章完整,在寺及处所守护道场,乞食等事适于往住而情况周备,乃至比库尊敬师长、敬重师僧、尊敬具戒比库,具勇猛无嗔恚、无缠恼者,温和、庄严、觉察、开明、审虑、观察、深照、开阔其心,眼光远大,出入现行完备五根,饮食适度,觉醒追随正念正知,出离心坚固,知足,努力已发,清净不乱,行为端正,心重戒法,好护持戒法而能勤行有节,常在庄严专念胜解身,谓此即称为行止。」
Gocaro pana upanissayagocaro ārakkhagocaro upanibandhagocaroti tividho. Tattha dasakathāvatthuguṇasamannāgato kalyāṇamitto, yaṃ nissāya assutaṃ suṇāti, sutaṃ pariyodāpeti, kaṅkhaṃ vitarati , diṭṭhiṃ ujuṃ karoti, cittaṃ pasādeti, yassa vā pana anusikkhamāno saddhāya vaḍḍhati, sīlena, sutena, cāgena, paññāya vaḍḍhati, ayaṃ upanissayagocaro. Yo pana bhikkhu antaragharaṃ paviṭṭho vīthipaṭipanno okkhittacakkhu yugamattadassāvī saṃvuto gacchati, na hatthiṃ olokento, na assaṃ, na rathaṃ, na pattiṃ, na itthiṃ, na purisaṃ olokento, na uddhaṃ olokento, na adho olokento, na disāvidisampi pekkhamāno gacchati, ayaṃ ārakkhagocaro. Upanibandhagocaro pana cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, yattha bhikkhu attano cittaṃ upanibandhati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno gocaro sako pettiko visayo, yadidaṃ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti. Ayaṃ upanibandhagocaro. Iti iminā ca ācārena iminā ca gocarena samannāgatattā ācāragocarakusalatā. Evaṃ anācāraṃ agocarañca vajjetvā saddhāpabbajitānaṃ yathāvuttaācāragocaresu kusalabhāvo vinayadharāyattoti ayamānisaṃso vinayapariyattiyā dassitoti veditabbo.
所谓境界,分为依止境界、护念境界与隶缚境界,共三种。其中依止境界指具备十如实善友特质者,依止之,闻受法音;听闻后加以完备,消除疑惑,正正直直建立见解,令心欢喜安乐。于此若比库勤修信心,随着信心增长者,或由戒、闻、布施、智慧增长者,即为依止境界。护念境界者,谓比库入于室内,行于道路,不转头回视,不环顾大象、马车、器具、男、女,也不向上下南北各方加以观看,此乃护念境界。隶缚境界则有四念处,比库依此四念处约束其心。世尊有言:“比库们,此四念处即是比库境界、朋友、伴侣。”这是隶缚境界。由此师教与境界俱备,生起善巧行境界。摈弃不善及无境界者,令出家信众于正确所应守持的境界中具足善行,乃律藏学习所显现的殊胜功德,应当了知。
Vinayapariyattiṃ nissāyāti vinayapariyāpuṇanaṃ nissāya. Attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hotisurakkhitoti kathamassa attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hoti surakkhito? Āpattiñhi āpajjanto chahākārehi āpajjati alajjitā, aññāṇatā, kukkuccapakatatā, akappiye kappiyasaññitā, kappiye akappiyasaññitā, satisammosāti. Vinayadharo pana imehi chahākārehi āpattiṃ nāpajjati.
所谓依律学习者,是依止律藏学习。自守戒法的蕴藏,令其健全守护,如何为其健全守护呢?因犯戒行,有六种行为会染污:无耻行、不知智行、愤恚苦恼行、不当见解行、于当行不当见解、于不当行当见解,称为染污。守律之人则不犯此六种染污。
Kathaṃ alajjitāya nāpajjati? So hi ‘‘passatha bho, ayaṃ kappiyākappiyaṃ jānantoyeva paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ karotī’’ti imaṃ parūpavādaṃ rakkhantopi akappiyabhāvaṃ jānantoyeva madditvā vītikkamaṃ na karoti. Evaṃ alajjitāya nāpajjati. Sahasā āpannampi desanāgāminiṃ desetvā vuṭṭhānagāminiyā vuṭṭhahitvā suddhante patiṭṭhāti, tato –
如何不犯无耻染污呢?譬如有人做不当与当行事,却自觉察知,言:“看啊,他明知何为当行不当行,却逆犯戒禁。”虽心有此恶念,却能制止违犯。如是则无犯无耻染污。即便一时堕入过失,听闻教诲后能断恶向善,纯净稳固,此时则——
‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ nāpajjati, āpattiṃ na parigūhati;
“虽积犯过,不犯戒法;虽犯过失,不隐瞒过错;也不走失正道,故称为无耻人。”(律藏第359经)
Agatigamanañca na gacchati, ediso vuccati lajjipuggalo’’ti. (pari. 359) –
于此无耻心中稳固存在。
Imasmiṃ lajjibhāve patiṭṭhitova hoti.
此为有关无耻心坚定立足之义。
Kathaṃ aññāṇatāya nāpajjati? So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ jānāti, tasmā kappiyaṃyeva karoti, akappiyaṃ na karoti. Evaṃ aññāṇatāya nāpajjati.
何以不生无知?彼因知晓合法与不合法,故唯行合法,不行不合法。由此不生无知。
Kathaṃ kukkuccapakatatāya nāpajjati? Kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya kukkucce uppanne vatthuṃ oloketvā mātikaṃ padabhājanaṃ antarāpattiṃ anāpattiṃ oloketvā kappiyaṃ ce hoti, karoti, akappiyaṃ ce, na karoti. Uppannaṃ pana kukkuccaṃ avinicchinitvāva ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti madditvā na vītikkamati. Evaṃ kukkuccapakatatāya nāpajjati.
何以不生忧闷执着?依赖合法与不合法而观察忧闷所生之因,察觉根本、语言、饮食、介入、不介入之因。若是合法则行之,若不合法则不行。然已生忧闷者,执著于其忧闷,而以「陷于其中」为执念,不得超越。由此故不生忧闷执着。
Kathaṃ akappiye kappiyasaññitādīhi nāpajjati? So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ jānāti, tasmā akappiye kappiyasaññī na hoti, kappiye akappiyasaññī na hoti, supatiṭṭhitā cassa sati hoti, adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ adhiṭṭheti, vikappetabbaṃ vikappeti. Iti imehi chahākārehi āpattiṃ nāpajjati, āpattiṃ anāpajjanto akhaṇḍasīlo hoti parisuddhasīlo. Evamassa attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hoti surakkhito.
何以不为不合法之人被合法之人称罪?彼知晓合法与不合法,故对于不合法者,合法者不生称罪之意;对合法者,不合法者亦不生称罪之意。彼保持安住之念,所应持守者持守,所应断除者断除。以此六种方式,不生戒律之罪业。无犯戒律者为坚固清净僧伽,自己戒法根基坚固,守护良好。
Kukkuccapakatānanti kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya uppannena kukkuccena abhibhūtānaṃ. Kathaṃ pana kukkuccapakatānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti? Tiroraṭṭhesu tirojanapadesu ca uppannakukkuccā bhikkhū ‘‘asukasmiṃ kira vihāre vinayadharo vasatī’’ti dūratopi tassa santikaṃ āgantvā kukkuccaṃ pucchanti. So tehi katakammassa vatthuṃ oloketvā āpattānāpattiṃ garukalahukādibhedaṃ sallakkhetvā desanāgāminiṃ desāpetvā vuṭṭhānagāminiyā vuṭṭhāpetvā suddhante patiṭṭhāpeti. Evaṃ kukkuccapakatānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti.
所谓忧闷执着者,因合法与不合法及由忧闷而生之胜过心。忧闷执着者如何得以回避?在三国及偏远地区,受烦恼所逼,比库们远至其所,问之忧闷由何起。对其所问原因察看,明断违法与非违法,区别轻重,依诸说法行,循次说明,行为与语辞纯净庄重,重新确立清净戒律。由此忧闷执着者得以回避。
Visārado saṅghamajjhe voharatīti vigato sārado bhayaṃ etassāti visārado, abhītoti attho. Avinayadharassa hi saṅghamajjhe kathentassa bhayaṃ sārajjaṃ okkamati, vinayadharassa taṃ na hoti. Kasmā? ‘‘Evaṃ kathentassa doso hoti, evaṃ na doso’’ti ñatvā kathanato.
何谓善巧于僧伽中行为,是免于真正恐惧者?所谓善巧,意即无怖。行为守律者若在僧伽中诉说戒律之恶,愚人恐惧遂生;守律者则无此恐惧。何以有此分别?乃因“行恶者必受恶报,行善者无罪”,深知此理故由言语知所应为与所不应为。
Paccatthikesahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggaṇhātīti ettha dvidhā paccatthikā nāma attapaccatthikā ca sāsanapaccatthikā ca. Tattha mettiyabhummajakā ca bhikkhū vaḍḍho ca licchavī amūlakena antimavatthunā codesuṃ, ime attapaccatthikā nāma. Ye vā panaññepi dussīlā pāpadhammā, sabbe te attapaccatthikā. Viparītadassanā pana ariṭṭhabhikkhukaṇṭakasāmaṇeravesālikavajjiputtakā mahāsaṅghikādayo ca abuddhasāsanaṃ ‘‘buddhasāsana’’nti vatvā katapaggahā sāsanapaccatthikā nāma. Te sabbepi sahadhammena sahakāraṇena vacanena yathā taṃ asaddhammaṃ patiṭṭhāpetuṃ na sakkonti, evaṃ suniggahitaṃ katvā niggaṇhāti.
「依因缘善摄而遗忘」意指两种依缘:一者为自依缘,二者为教法依缘。其自依缘者,即如舍利迦及雨法师向官吏立誓,视为最终确证,为自依缘。若有人品行不善,犯恶法者,皆为自依缘。反观诸表相相反之异端、断续者、诸外道沙门弊法鞭打之士、群众大部派等误解不觉之教法,仍称为“佛法”,此乃教法依缘。彼等虽互相助缘,通力合作以使恶法成立,终不立于真法,故此谓之遗忘而善摄。
Saddhammaṭṭhitiyā paṭipanno hotīti ettha pana tividho saddhammo pariyattipaṭipattiadhigamavasena. Tattha tipiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ pariyattisaddhammo nāma. Terasa dhutaṅgaguṇā cuddasa khandhakavattāni dveasīti mahāvattānīti ayaṃ paṭipattisaddhammo nāma. Cattāro maggā ca cattāri phalāni ca, ayaṃ adhigamasaddhammo nāma. Tattha keci therā ‘‘yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.216) iminā suttena ‘‘sāsanassa pariyatti mūla’’nti vadanti. Keci therā ‘‘ime ca, subhadda, bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṃ, asuñño loko arahantehi assā’’ti iminā suttena (dī. ni. 2.214) ‘‘sāsanassa paṭipatti mūla’’nti vatvā ‘‘yāva pañca bhikkhū sammā paṭipannā saṃvijjanti, tāva sāsanaṃ ṭhitaṃ hotī’’ti āhaṃsu. Itare pana therā ‘‘pariyattiyā antarahitāya suppaṭipannassapi dhammābhisamayo natthī’’ti vatvā āhaṃsu. Sacepi pañca bhikkhū cattāri pārājikāni rakkhaṇakā honti, te saddhe kulaputte pabbājetvā paccantime janapade upasampādetvā dasavaggagaṇaṃ pūretvā majjhimajanapadepi upasampadaṃ karissanti. Etenupāyena vīsativaggasaṅghaṃ pūretvā attanopi abbhānakammaṃ katvā sāsanaṃ vuḍḍhiṃ viruḷhiṃ gamayissanti. Evamayaṃ vinayadharo tividhassapi saddhammassa ciraṭṭhitiyā paṭipanno hotīti. Evamayaṃ vinayadharo ime pañcānisaṃse paṭilabhatīti veditabbo.
因坚守正法而修行者称为由此三重正法的流传、修习和证得所构成。其间,三藏即佛陀所说之教法文字是被称为『正法文辞』。三藏包括三部分:一是三皈依戒、五戒等八戒瓤的戒律(称三藏戒律文辞);二是十三品律(集结之八纵揽)为修行正法(或实践正法);三是四圣谛的修证法,是证得正法。此为证得正法所依。长老中有些人称:“阿难,比库们,世尊所说的法与律皆已成就,世尊即你们的导师。”(如《长部·尼迦耶》2.216节经文所示),据此经文称之为“教法文字的根本”。又有长老证言:“须令比库们正确修行,方令阿拉汉非空寂现。”(据《长部·尼迦耶》2.214节经文),称此为“教法实践之根本”,并言:“只要有五名比库正确修行,教法即恒久安立。”另外有长老提出:“即使修习文字经文,若不去除内心障碍,若未修正法,亦无成就。”若五比库坚守四大犯戒,且护持戒律,得比库出家且受具足僧团戒,满十部集团,甚至在中国土得戒而持守。由此方法,满二十部集团,自己亦能成就无上功德,使教法增长昌盛。由此可知,戒律护持人即因三重正法得以长久坚固。此处五项因缘获得长老戒律护持者,应当认识。
Vinayo saṃvaratthāyātiādīsu (pari. aṭṭha. 366) vinayoti vinayassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ, vinayoti vā vinayapaññatti vuttā, tasmā sakalāpi vinayapaññatti vinayapariyāpuṇanaṃ vā kāyavacīdvārasaṃvaratthāyāti attho, ājīvapārisuddhipariyosānassa sīlassa upanissayapaccayo hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avippaṭisāroti pāpapuññānaṃ katākatānusocanavasena pavattacittavippaṭisārābhāvo. Pāmojjanti dubbalā taruṇapīti. Pītīti balavapīti. Passaddhīti kāyacittadarathapaṭippassaddhi. Sukhanti kāyikaṃ cetasikañca sukhaṃ. Tañhi duvidhampi samādhissa upanissayapaccayo hoti. Samādhīti cittekaggatā. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti sappaccayanāmarūpapariggaho. Nibbidāti vipassanā. Atha vā yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ taruṇavipassanā, udayabbayañāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cittekaggatā hi taruṇavipassanāya upanissayapaccayo hoti. Nibbidāti sikhāppattā vuṭṭhānagāminibalavavipassanā. Virāgoti ariyamaggo. Vimuttīti arahattaphalaṃ. Catubbidhopi hi ariyamaggo arahattassa upanissayapaccayo hoti. Vimuttiñāṇadassananti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Anupādāparinibbānatthāyāti kañci dhammaṃ aggahetvā anavasesetvā parinibbānatthāya, appaccayaparinibbānatthāyāti attho. Appaccayaparinibbānassa hi vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paccayo hoti tasmiṃ anuppatte avassaṃ parinibbāyitabbato, na ca paccavekkhaṇañāṇe anuppanne antarā parinibbānaṃ hoti.
关于戒律是为守护其自身(自持)之目的而言,在《部集·八》366节谓戒律即戒律的教诫完善,戒律即戒律的称述。因此,所有戒律的称述或戒律的教导都是身体与言语的守护之义,且因业净洁而达到身业清净之本赖条件。所谓“无损逆”者,谓因忧愁不作恶业使心意不生外逆障。所谓“欢喜”者是指能力不强之轻发喜乐;“欢悦”者是强大觉乐。所谓“安静”是身心安定宁静。身心俱乐者谓身心皆得安乐。于此安乐,有二因缘为定所依:定即心专一;“如实知见”是指依诸因缘观察名色的真如实相而得。所谓厌离者即内观禅定。又谓如实知见者为初生的内观禅定,和由初生内观而发之生灭知;心专一实为初生内观之依止;厌离则为证得内观定之果,是能断绝世间的生起;所谓离欲即圣道。所谓解脱即阿拉汉果。圣道分四,亦为阿拉汉果之因。解脱知见即是智慧审视。所谓无执涅槃是指为了涅槃目的去掉任何所执着而达到涅槃,谓无条件涅槃;且无条件涅槃有知见为因,若无知见即不能涅槃,不论涅槃知见是否显现,中间无涅槃状态。
Etadatthā kathāti ayaṃ vinayakathā nāma etadatthāya, anupādāparinibbānatthāyāti attho. Evaṃ sabbatthapi. Mantanāpi vinayamantanāeva, ‘‘evaṃ karissāma, na karissāmā’’ti vinayapaṭibaddhasaṃsandanā. Etadatthā upanisāti upanisīdati ettha phalaṃ tappaṭibaddhavuttitāyāti upanisā vuccati kāraṇaṃ paccayoti. ‘‘Vinayo saṃvaratthāyā’’tiādikā kāraṇaparamparā etadatthāti attho. Etadatthaṃ sotāvadhānanti imissā paramparapaccayakathāya sotāvadhānaṃ imaṃ kathaṃ sutvā yaṃ uppajjati ñāṇaṃ, tampi etadatthaṃ. Yadidaṃ anupādācittassa vimokkhoti yadidanti nipāto. Sabbaliṅgavibhattivacanesu tādisova tattha tattha atthato pariṇāmetabbo, tasmā evamettha attho veditabbo – yo ayaṃ catūhi upādānehi anupādiyitvā cittassa arahattaphalasaṅkhāto vimokkho, sopi etadatthāya anupādāparinibbānatthāyāti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Yo ayaṃ anupādācittassa vimokkhasaṅkhāto maggo, heṭṭhā vuttaṃ sabbampi etadatthamevāti. Evañca sati iminā mahussāhato sādhitabbaṃ niyatappayojanaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Heṭṭhā ‘‘virāgo…pe… nibbānatthāyā’’ti iminā pana labbhamānānisaṃsaphalaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Āyogoti uggahaṇacintanādivasena punappunaṃ abhiyogo.
此称“此戒律教诠”是为那无执无碍涅槃之意。诸处皆是。思惟亦为戒律思惟,即“如此行,则如是不行”之戒律之决定法则。此即“止、忍”中止法之因,即因果关系之理。闻此传统法义,贤圣弟子听闻后生起明智,此亦是正义。所谓无执心解脱是指去执著而心解脱,按词义应当如此理解。由此四大无执境断除心解脱而名为阿拉汉果实之解脱,亦与无执无碍涅槃相应。此无执心的解脱之道,正是前文所述。由此应认识此理,以妥当勤勉依正法修习。下文有“离欲...无余处涅槃”等正果因缘。复次“依缘联系”断除无漏之意,多次以恳切专注精进修习为因缘。
Vinayānisaṃsakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 律之利益论的注释结束。
Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ · 如是,于《善见律注》的《显明精义》中,
Bāhiranidānavaṇṇanā samattā. · 外因缘的注释圆满。